portrait of Sir John Pettus S. John Pettus of Suffolk Knt. 1641 One of the Deputy. Governors of the Mines Royal. 1651. Auratus Infletatus. 1679. AEt. 70. 1683 R. White sculp. Honestus at Pie. AGRM. FLETA MINOR. THE LAWS OF ART and NATURE, IN Knowing, Judging, Assaying, Fining, Refining and Enlarging the BODIES of confined METALS. In Two Parts. The First contains ASSAYS of Lazarus Erckern, Chief Prover (or Assay-Master General of the Empire of Germany) in V. Books: originally written by him in the Teutonick Language, and now translated into English. The Second contains ESSAYS on Metallick Words, as a DICTIONARY to many pleasing DISCOURSES. By Sir John Pettus, of Suffolk, K t. Of the Society for the MINES ROYAL. Illustrated with 44 Sculptures. Mal. 3. 3. Numb. 31. 31. Jehovah Chimista Supremus. Carolus D. G. Secundus. LONDON, Printed, for the Author, by Thomas Dawks, his Majesty's British Printer, at the West-end of Thames-street. 1683. Collegium Emmanuelis Cantabrigiae TO THE King's most Excellent MAJESTY. SIR, THE Materials of this Book are derived from your Majesty's undoubted Prerogative to the Mines (in your Dominions,) of which Metals are made; Of them Moneys: And then honoured with your Majesty's Superscription. And so by a Christian Circulation, the Possessors do, or aught to render to Caesar the things which are Caesar's. Thus Your Majesty hath a double Right to the Mines, and to the Products of the Chemical Art, by which Metals are fitted for their Journey to Public Commerce. Herein I humbly offer my Endeavours to assist their motions, and only to refresh your Majesty's Memory, not to inform Your Knowledge: for (as 'tis hinted in the Title Page) Your Majesty is (in the Science of Chemistry, as in all Sciences of Humanity) Nulli Secundus. These Perfections are evident in Your Majesty's public and private Elaboratories, from which pure Justice, and pleasing Arts and Sciences are communicated to Your Subjects. In these I have observed Your Majesty's particular respects to Chemistry (of an Universal Extent,) and thereupon I resolved to transplant this Germane Twig of L. Erckern (on that Subject) into Your Majesty's Nursery; and Humbly Dedicate it to Your Majesty, (with my Additionals) and also Humbly crave your Acceptance, as an encouragement to my further Progress in serving Your Majesty with more Fruits; but at present it is to show, That I am intent in promoting the Services I owe Your Majesty, as well with my sedentary Passive Pen, as before with my personal Active Duty, having (upon some significant occasions) had the Honour to be known to Your Majesty near Forty Years. Now, Great Sir, Wherein I am incapacitated to express my Duty, for want of Ability of Mind or Body, or secular Fortunes; they shall be supplied by my constant Prayers for Your Majesty's Health, Happiness, and Serenity in Your Government, being Feb. 26. 82/ 3 Your Majesty's most Obedient and Humble Subject, JOHN PETTUS. To the Right Honourable, George Marquis, Earl, Viscount Hallifax, and Baron of Eland, Lord Privy Seal, and one of His Majesty's most Honourable Privy Council; and Governor of the Society of the Mines Royal, and Battery Works. My Lord, YOur Lordship's free acceptance of the Government of the Mines Royal, hath encouraged me to add it to your Titles, and I hope without the least disparagement to your other Honours, deservedly conferred upon your Lordship by His Majesty. It is a Trust of great Concern (and I doubt not but it will be so managed by your Lordship) and of Honour too, (as it hath been always esteemed) for (not to trouble your Lordship with very Ancient Records,) I find that King Edward the Fourth did make Richard Earl of Warwick (who soon after was made one of the Governors of this Kingdom, during its Troubles) and John Earl of Northumberland, his Guardians and Governors jointly of all his Mines in England; and King Henry the Seventh made Jasper Duke of Bedford, and other Earls and Lords, his Guardians also of all the Mines in England (adding Wales.) And Queen Elisabeth, in the 10th. of her Reign, did form the Government thereof into Societies, by the Names of Governors, Deputy-Governors, and Assistants for the Mines Royal and Battery-Works, and then made Sir Nicholas Bacon, Lord Keeper, and other eminent persons, her Governors for England and Wales, (adding those within the English Pale in Ireland,) which Government did continue Successively to the Earl of Pembroke, and others for some Years: and after, his late Highness Prince Rupert was made a Governor; and your Lordship to our contentment, doth succeed him. Now, my Lord, As for myself, I have been one of the Deputy Governors for above 30 Years, and do think myself obliged in point of Gratitude to the late Governors, and present Members (who were pleased unanimously to order a Contribution to the Charge of this Book, and for some former Favours,) to endeavour the advancing of their Concerns (especially now we have the Honour to be under your Lordship's Regiment,) and therefore as an Introduction to my real Intents, I not only publish this, but by some Additionals, I shall study to make the Government more advantageous to the Society, and much more to His Majesty; and even to other Proprietors of Mines, wherein I have sat still some Years, because I found that I should be obstructed by some who studied the advance of themselves more than His Majestics Revenues, which I do not aim to do by any Oppressing Method, or projecting Humour (for I hate it) but by an honest just way, and I hope not displeasing to any, but such as nothing will please. And these I shall in due time communicate to your Lordship, being so confident of your Lordship's great Abilities, (joined with your perfect Loyalty to your King, and Love to your Country) that your Lordship will not approve of any thing that I shall offer, if it agrees not with your Lordship's sound Judgement and deep Wisdom, for which all who knows your Lordship have an high value, and particularly Your Lordship's most humble and obliged Servant, JOHN PETTUS. To the Noble and Honoured Subscribers and Contributers to this BOOK. My Lords and Gentlemen, I Did design to have published your Names in a way that should have more fully manifested your Favours, and my Acknowledgements; but this Book extending to above 50 sheets more than I designed, or at first proposed, took up my limited time, so as I must respite that intention, for I have not done with this Subject; intending not to trouble you or myself with Subscriptions, but such as have Subscribed to this, shall have notice when the next is ready▪ and if they approve of this so well as to take the next from me, it will be an additional Obligation to me, for I am prepared to go through the Body of this ART, upon these Reasons▪ First, That it contains the Grounds and Maxims of most admirable Speculations; and next, That I may divulge their chiefest and most curious Experiments and Practics: Now, that which incited me to this, was occasioned from hence, That having caused Erckern's Books to be Translated about Ten years since; some eminent persons did persuade me (like the Story in Bocalino,) not to publish it, lest the Common sort of People should make an ill use of its impartments, alleging, That it was not well Translated: whereupon I betook myself to the Germane Language, and in a short time I was so much Master of it, That with the help of a Germane here, I did indeed find many Errors, and Corrected them, which answers one Objection; and I have Printed such a convenient Number as may answer the other; And yet I am not altogether satisfied therein; for, what hath made Arts and Sciences flourish more in the time of King Charles the First, and now in His Majesty's Reign, than their Majesty's encouragements to the free communication of such things as had many Ages before lain secret? so that we hope that all Pancerollus his lost things may in a short time be found again. We punish ourselves by fixing and disputing on the Theorems of ancient Writers, and thereby making things to be Diabolical, which are only Divine Favours shown us by Natural Agents, so as for want of knowing the true Practics & Experiments, they are divulged either by umbraging Sophistications, or concealed under the Name of Philosophical Secrets, which, no doubt, but GOD intends for a public and common Good: and this ill Fortune befell the Vnguentum Armarium, as a piece of Witchcraft, till our Eyes were enlightened; and in many other things (which were they clearly communicated) such Superstructures would be raised from them, as might arrive us to a kind of Angelical Knowledge in this World, and make us more apprehensive of our Happiness in the next: and therefore it shall be my study to unfold the Metaphysical Notions of this SCIENCE: by Practics especially about the Philosopher's Stone, which Study I value only for its fine Pursuits and Products of Experiments, but more, because the Laborers for it are, by their own Affirmations, obliged to a strict and religious Life: I shall trouble you no further at this time, but with my humble and hearty Thanks: and so subscribe myself My Lords and Gentlemen Your most humble Servant JOHN PETTUS. To my Worthy Friend, Richard Manlove, Esq Warden of the Fleet. SIR, I Am here, a confined Person, for my being too kind to others, and too unjust to myself▪ and for not doing what was not in my Power to perform, by wanting the Justice of my Debtors, whereby I am rather a Prisoner to them than to my Creditors. Yet I can dispense with all these, because they have occasioned my happiness, in your Acquaintance, and my contenting Retirement in this place, which was once a Palace, after, a Staple of Commerce, and long since and still, a Repository of our Laws: And now, like Homer's Iliads in a Nutshell, here are all sorts of Degrees, from Prince to Peasant, all sorts of Professions, from the Doctor to the Novice; all sorts of Trades and Manufactures, and all sorts of Virtues; but your Prudence doth still suppress the Vices. And I ingeniously confess, that by yours, & your Ladies constant Kindness & Indulgence to my declining years, I have made it a College of Learning, and so may other Gentlemen do (if they please) it being so qualified, that in an hours time there is no Art or Science wherein one may not be punctually instructed. Now, Those that think themselves Prisoners to you are much mistaken, for they are Prisoners to the LAWS, and may make themselves Students of All-Souls in Le Fleet, of which you are Warden. A Guardian-ship very needful for the People, as a Completion of JUSTICE, in point of Restraints: For, (besides many other wise Considerations) they are good for Cooling the Animosities between Creditors and Debtors, and between the LAWS and Contemners of them, (and thereby prevents the Effusion of Blood, which hath often happened) and for Curing the sullen and contemptuous Disposition of others to their Superiors. For, I can truly say, That, by my patient Submission to them and my Misfortunes (being prepared with my 14 months' Imprisonment in Windsor Castle, under the late usurped Power) I do now with more Satisfaction to myself, undergo this under a Legal Power, and thereby I affirm, That no Gentleman hath received greater Respects from you than myself, and therefore I take this Occasion to make my public Acknowledgements, that it may be a Guide to other men's Contentments, for, as I have observed, That as you never were out- Hectored by Affronts or Resistances, so you were never outdone by Civilities or Compliableness to your Methods. As to the first▪ I never gave Occasion, and as to the other, my studious temper complying with your Love to Learning have so won on your good Disposition, that I must acknowledge to my honoured Subscribers, and others, that had it not been for your Encouragement and particular Assistance with your purse; (though with some Inconveniencies to your own Occasions) I could not have finished this Book, as now I have done, and therefore as one Memorial of your kindness, I have given it the name of FLETA, and in my Picture minted the word insletatus from this Place. I could with delight to myself and others, spend more time on this Subject; but I must end with this request, That as you have given Houseroom here to the whole Impression of my Books, so you will please (in respect my person is restrained in Execution of the Laws,) to encourage it in its Travels abroad; and so not doubting of your Favour, I shall conclude with Ovid (then, in my present Condition, but I will not punish myself with his Tristibus',) Parve nec invideo sine me Liber ibis in Aulam Vrbem Which I have thus Englisht, Go little Book, leave me, but make report, Who treats thee best, the City or the Court. However you shall have the continuing thanks of Your Obliged Friend and Servant▪ JOHN PETTUS. To the Courteous READER. I Think fit before you read this Book, to instruct you in the Method of it, so as you may read the whole, or part, as your leisure serves. 1. It is divided into two parts (as the Title mentions,) viz. Erckern's V. Books, and my Dictionary. 2. Whereas the Original of Erckern's 5 Books had no Numeral distinction of Chapters and Sections, I have divided them into Chapters and Sections, and Printed them before the Five Books, with numeral referrences to their chapters where they are contained. 3. Whereas the Sculptures had only Literal, and no Numeral Directions of their Contents, I have in the second part of the Contents before the Five Books, Printed the Contents of the Sculptures, with references to the Pages where they may be seen and read. 4. Whereas the Original of Erckern's 5 Books hath no Coma's, Colons, Periods, Parenthesis, or Interrogatory Points, pertinent to the distinction of Words or Sentences (which are also wanting in many Germane Books) I have complied them to our way of Orthography, (which was no little trouble,) and therefore if the Reader find some few Omissions, they may upon that account be the more kindly dispensed with. 5. I do retain many ancient and Saxon Words, upon the account of their affinity to the like Words which are still used among us, and these are hinted in the Dictionary. 6. In the Dictionary or second part, the first Words which I thought fit to explain, are in Capital Letters, and next, the Teutonick and Latin Words for those Capitals; (and other Languages, as occasion requires,) and these I collected from G. Agricola, Alstidius, Cowel, Minshaw, and Skinner's Dictionaries for the Teutonick, from Cooper and Holiock for the Latin; from Florio for the Italian, from Cotgrave for the French; and from Waltons' Lexicon for the Oriental Tongues, which, with a Germane was all the help I had for the use of above 600 Words; but the two chief Languages, of which I make the greatest use, are the Teutonick and Latin, this from the old Romans, (who continued among us above 500 years) the other from the Saxons (who were mixed with us as long,) from both of which Nations we gained a particular knowledge of Mines and Metals, as may be evident from many Roman and Saxon Works▪ which remain here under their Names to this day; and many of our Monarches, particularly Queen Elizabeth did think fit to desire the assisting SKILL of the Germans, to improve OURS; to prevent which trouble, I here publish part of their Art, and intent more. Lastly, I have given it the Title of FLETA, which is borrowed from an eminent Lawyer, who whilst he was Prisoner in the FLEET, writ his Learned Book of the Common Laws of England, and thereupon (as 'tis said,) he called his Book FLETA (Cowel) to which I add MINOR, in submission to his great Learning, and for its affinity to the word MINER, viz. one who Labours in the Mines, as I do in Learning the Metallick Art. To conclude, I have writ some things from Authentic Authors (too many to recite here,) and some from my own Conceptions and Observations; now as they pleased me in writing, so I hope they will not displease others in reading. JOHN PETTUS. THE PREFACE OF Lazarus Erckern, To his five following BOOKS. Of the Art of Assaying. TO learn and understand the way of Assaying, Proving and Refining of Metals, is an Excellent, Noble Science, and an Ancient and profitable Art, long since found out by the Art of Alchemy and Chemistry, as also all other Works of the Fire, by which not only the nature of Oars and Mines, and what Metals contained in them are known; but also how much there is in a Centner, or in greater or lesser Weights, and not only so, but this Art also teacheth how to Examine each Metal by itself, as whether there be any Adulterated or mixed Metal with it; what, and how much the same is, and then which way those Metals may be separated from such mixtures or adulterations, as also by several ways to cleanse and separate other incorporated Metals, so that they may be judged to be fine, clean and free from mixtures, therefore this Art is very profitable to Minerists and such as work in Mines and intent to have benefit by them, and such Artists must endeavour by all means to learn and exercise themselves in the same, that they may thereby reap a Profit to themselves and others, and preserve themselves from Inconveniencies and Dangers by their want of knowledge therein. By this Art of Refining and the Profit that acrews by it, many good and rich Mines have been discovered, which otherwise would have lain concealed: and by the Advantage of these Discoveries many Cities and Villages have been built, Lands have been improved in their Values, and People thereby increased and plentifully maintained: As also great and mighty Trades and dealings with Gold, Silver, Copper and other Metals here, and in other Country's exercised, and the Coiners of Coin and Minting Works have been multiplied by their Guardians and Masters; for from Gold and Silver, Money is made and much improved, so that the true Insight, Trial and Examination of this Art, cannot be in any wise omitted or neglected, as that which is highly necessary to be known. Rewarded by Princes. And such Artists as have exercised themselves in the Knowledge of Assaying, and fundamentally and diligently practised the same, are by Princes, Lords and Communities thought worthy not only of great Thanks, but been also promoted and recompensed by them. Mother of ARTS. For this ART of Assaying is the very Inlet and Mother of many other honourable and profitable Sciences as Experience teaches us, and the more a man finds out, the more he is stirred up to the contemplating and doing things of an higher Nature. To know Metals necessary. So that the Knowledge of Metallick Oars and Minerals are first to be enquired into, namely, How each one according to their Nature, Figure, Form and Colour are distinguishable from each other: Which without great diligence and daily Practice cannot be known, because God the Almighty Creator, in the beginning of the Creation of the World, hath placed Metals and Minerals in the Mountains, Valleys and Veins of the Earth, and causeth them to grow there: He hath also given to all and each of them an outward Form and Colour by which the one from the other may be distinctly known. How to use Fire in Metals. Secondly, The Knowledge of the Fire is a principal part of this Science, and very necessary to be inquired into, that he may the better know how to govern the same, so that he may give no Metal more Fire than its due, but to every one its proportion of Heat and Cold, as necessity requires to add or take from it, in its Operation. To make Instruments. After the Knowledge of Governing the Fire, the Artists must have the Knowledge also of making all the Instruments and Furnaces for this, either by his own handy Furnaces. work, skilfully to prepare them, or at least to direct that they may be well made, whereby he may not be hindered in his working, but by his own diligence accomplish them. Weights and Scales. In like manner he must be careful in procuring good and just Scales and Weights, and to know also how to make them (in case such Artificers should be wanting) and fit them to all Metals, and he must have great Care in preserving them from Dust, and that they be always pure and clean so that (as occasion serves) he may rely on the certainty of Proofs by them. To be skilled in Arithmetic. Next to the former Directions he must be well skilled experienced and exercised in the Art of Arithmetic, for the numbering and casting up Accounts (which to Assaying Coins and Refining Works are very necessary, and is one of the Master▪ pieces in this Metallick ART) And every Assayer must not only diligently learn this numeral Science (necessary to be known for the Proving of Metals or what belongs thereto) but also all such Arts and Sciences as may accomplish his full Designs therein. Now, though it would not have been unserviceable to have writ of all such things more largely in this Preface and Entrance to what follows, as also of the Rise and Springs of metallic Oars, and how they grow in the Mountains, Veins and Channels of the Earth, and how generated (of which the old and later Philosophers have had many different Opinions) as also of the Streams, Channels and their Entervals (and other Accidents which do discover and produce Oars, whereby the Miners do guide themselves in their Proceedings and Works.) Yet because it would have been too long and endless to recite the Opinions of Philosophers, and the various Operations of Miners (in respect they do not agree in all things, and miss very much of their Aims, and have written many Books to little purpose) therefore, for brevity sake, I have omitted them, and proposed only my own Practice, for the better advancing this Metallick ART. The first PART, Consisting of V. BOOKS. The CONTENTS of the Chapters and Sections of the first BOOK. CHAP. I. of Silver Oars. Sction 1. The I. SCULPTURE Deciphered. 2. The II. SCULPTURE Deciphered. 3. The purpose of this first Book. 4. Why Silver in the first place. CHAP. II. How Silver Oars are distinctly known. SEction 1. Of the difference in Assaying Oars, and of the several sorts of Silver Oars, as followeth. 2. Of Glassy Oars. 3. Of white Goldish Oars. 4. Of Horny Oars. 5. Of Red Goldish Oars. 6. Of Black Oars. 7. Of Ironish Oars. 8. Of Leadish Oars. 9 Of Glittering or Bismutick Oars 10. Of Float Oars. 11. Of Azure or Mountain-Green Oars. 12. Of Flinty Oars many sorts. 13. Of Blanch, Cobolt, mispeckle or speckle Oars. 14. Of Glimmer, Wolferan, Talk, Catsilver and sparkling Oars. 15. Of Spelter or Spizy Oars. 16. Of Spady Oars. 17. Of Slacks and Copper-Stone Oars. 18. Of the ways of Assaying them. CHAP. III. How the Assay-Ovens to prove Silver and other Metals are to be prepared and made. SEction 1. Of special Ovens, adorning them not profitable. 2. The Assay-Ovens variously used to make good Loam. 3. An Assay Oven made by Norimbergers. 4. An Assay Oven made of Tiles. 5. An Assay Oven in which the fire is best governed. 6. Assay Ovens of Armour Plates. 7. The III. SCUPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. IU. How Muffles, Bottom Plates, Tests, and other small Potter's Works are to be made for Assays. SEction 1. The Assayers are to be skilled in making them. 2. Of making the Loam for them. 3. The Frame for Assay Tests. 4. To make Muffles. 5. How the bottoms of them are to be framed. 6. Of drying and Calcining the Loam. 7. The IV. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. V. Of Copels, how they may be made firm and good. SEction 1. Of good Clay and Clar. 2. What Ashes to be used and how washed. 3. Of Vine-Wood and common Ashes. 4. Of Bone Ashes, which best. 5. Of Instruments for the Clar. 6. Of glue Water for Copels. CHAP. VI How good Copels may be made, wherein the Trials will not leap or sparkle. SEction 1. Bones for Copels, of Calves and Sheep. 2. Bones of Fishes the best. CHAP. VII. How good Clar is to be made for Copels. SEction 1. Clar of Calves-head Bones 2. Clar of Hartshorn. 3. Clar of Fish Bones. 4. How to be kept for Use. 5. The V. SCULPTURE Deciphered. 6. The VI SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. VIII. How Led Glass is to be made. SEction 1. To what Oars Led Glass is to be used. 2. To prepare the Fluss or Led Glass. 3. Another way to prepare it. 4. Another way to make it. 5. To cleanse the Lead Glass. CHAP. IX. Of the Weights that belong to the proving of Silver. SEction 1. Of the Centner Weight. 2. Of dividing the Centner Weight into Drams, Loathes, Ounces and Pounds. 3. Of the Penny-Weights. 4. Of dividing the Penny-weights into Hellers, Pence, Drams, Loathes and Marks. 5. Of dividing the Dutch Penny-Weights, into Grains, Pence and Marks. 6. Of dividing the Grain-Weights into Loathes, Ounces and Marks. CHAP. X. How all Silver Oars are to be Tried and Assayed. SEction 1. Of Assaying soft Oars. 2. Of Assaying hard Oars. 3. Of quick boiling Silver Oars. 4 A way to Assay Raw Oars. 5. To help raw Oars. 6. Of Assaying Coppery Flaky Oars. 7. Of cleansing gross sulphurous flinty Oars after boiling. 8. To Assay Cobolt Oars. 9 Of Roasting Oars in the Ovens. 10. How the full worth of proofs may be sound. 11. To Assay with Lead Glass. 12. How many Oars may be Tried in one Oven. 13. To Assay Oar to a Dram. 14. How to weigh the tried Grain. 15. To boil Rich Oars with Fluss or Led Glass. CHAP. XI. How poor Oars of Silver are to be Assayed. CHAP. XII. To Assay Muddy Water coming from Springs of Silver. CHAP. XIII. How a true Lead-Grain is to be drawn from the Assay. SEction 1. Care in the Assaying. 2. The poorest Led not without Silver. 3. Of Copper to be added to the Lead Grain. 4. Another way to make a Lead Grain. CHAP. XIV. How Slackstone and Copper-Stone are to be Tried for Silver. SEction 1. What Slackstone is. 2. How to separate it from Sulphur, etc. 3. How the Cakes of the Slacks are to be used. CHAP. XV. To Assay Hard Work and Copper-Laech for Silver. CHAP. XVI. To Assay melted Speize. SEction 1. What Speize is. 2. The difference between Spize and Slackstone▪ 3. To take the Silver out of the Spelter. CHAP. XVII. How black Copper is to be melted and cast into Ingots. SEction 1. The difference of black Coppers. 2. How to be cut in pieces or Ingots. 3. How to cast these Ingots. 4. Differences in Proof Ingots. 5. The Assaying an Ingot. 6. To govern the fire for it. 7. Of the Grains produced from the Assay. 8. Another way to try Copper for Silver. 9 Care of Instruments. 10. The proving of black and raw Copper. 11. The Weight of the Copels. CHAP. XVIII. To Assay Bell-Metal for Silver. CHAP. XIX. How old Silver-Plate or Coins are to be Granulated. SEction 1. The graining of Silver profitable 2. Why Crucibles break often in this Work. 3. To make Grains round, or hollow, and thin. 4. How to govern the Fire in this work of Granulation. CHAP. XX. How to Granulate Silver out of a Kiln. SEction 1. The manner of performing it, 2. A quick way of Granulation. 3. What to do if the Crucible break. 4. The VII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXI. How the Granulated Silver is to be Assayed for fine Silver. SEction 1. Of the different Contents of grained Silver. 2. The different quantities of Lead to be used. 3. Of the Assay Grains. 4. Of the rich Assayed Grains. 5. When the Proof hath too little Lead. 6. When the Proof goes too hot. 7. To Assay Grains with fine Silver. CHAP. XXII. How Coined Money of great or small sorts may be Assayed. SEction 1. To Assay Dollars and Rix Guilders. 2. To Assay with covered Ovens. 3. To Assay double Stivers. 4. The quantity of Lead to be used for them. 5. To Assay Pence. 6. To find the Proof of small Money. 7. To Assay Silver by the Centner Weight. 8. To Assay the Contents in Grains. CHAP. XXIII. How burned Silver pieces and Plates are to be cut out for Assays. SEction 1. Of burnt Silver. 2. Of Plates. 3. Of blink Silver or Silver not clean. CHAP XXIV. How Touch-Needles or Proof-Needles for Silver are to be made. SEction 1. Generally used by Refiners. 2. How to make them. 3. How to forge them. 4. Needles of the half Loth. 5. The VIII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXV. How Metals that are melted must be cut out and Assayed for Silver. SEction 1. Of clean Work. 2. Of unclean Work. 3. Some customs of Assayers about these Works. 4. Of the addition of Lead to them. 5. Harth-Works for Trials. CHAP. XXVI. How Tin is to be Assayed for Silver. SEction 1. Of the Trial of it. 2. Of the Lead-Grain to this Trial. 3. Another way to prove Tin. CHAP. XXVII. How to separate Iron and Steel from Silver. SEction. 1. Of Iron rich in Silver. 2. To Assay it with Brimstone. 3. To Assay it with Antimony. 4. To Assay it with gross Flints. 5. To separate them. 6. Of Coppery Iron, holding Silver to be made profitable. 7. Of Iron Stone containing Silver. CHAP. XXVIII. How blinck or unclean Silver is to be burnt clean, and how Tests for it are to be made. SEction 1. Of Deft or neat Silver. 2. To prepare the Tests. 3. The manner of Trying them. 4. The best Wood for burning Silver. 5. The Contents of burnt Silver. 6. How to cool the Silver. 7. Of Silver not burnt too high. 8. Of Coppery blink Silver. 9 How to know when well burnt. 10. The IX. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXIX. How to burn Silver under the Muffle. SEction 1. Of Tests with Iron Rings. 2. Of Muffles for the burning. 3. A clean way of burning Silver. 4. What to do with it after burning. 5. To keep the Tests. 6. The X. SCULPTURE Decipheted. CHAP. XXX. How Copper is to be Assayed for fine Silver. SEction 1. How much Lead is to be added. 2. To take the smoke of Lead from Silver. CHAP. XXXI. To separate Silver from Tin. SEction 1. The making a Test for it. 2. To make Tin thus separated profitable. 3. To precipitate the Silver from Tin. CHAP. XXXII. How to drive all sorts of Silver that they be deft smooth and fine. SEction 1. The Use of Lead for the same. 2. Brittle hard Silver made deft. 3. A Fluss for Brittle Silver. CHAP. XXXIII. How to boil Copper from the pagment or old Silver in Coin'd-Money, or from thin beaten Plates of Silver. CAAP. XXXIV. How good Proof-Ballances are to be made. SEction 1. An Assayer able to make Balances. 2. How to help their defects. 3. Of the Scales. 4. Of the Waretzs and Tong of the Balance. 5. The Fork of the Balance. 6. How to prove the Balance. 7. Of Gold-Solder to be used. 8. To make the Balance look blue. 10. The XI. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXXV. Of Filing and joining the Proof-Scales or Balances. SEction 1. To fit Scales. 2. The weight of the Balance and of the Scales. 3. The strings and knots. 4. The motion. 5. To make all parts move or stand true it Equilibrio. 6. Cases with oiled Paper to preserve them in. 7. The XII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXXVI. How the Proof-weights are to be made and divided into Grains, Pence and Carrat-weights. SEction 1. To be made of Silver or Brass. 2. Weights of a Mark. 3. Proof weights. 4. A reference to the ninth Chapter of this Book. CHAP XXXVII. Of dividing the Centner Weight. SEction 1. Of Carrats. 2. By unequal parts. 3. Whether the Proof Weights be true. 4. To number the Weights. 5. The XIII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. 5. The Author's Apology. The CONTENTS of the Chapters and Sections in the second BOOK. CHAP. I. Of Gold Oars and Gold Slicks. SEction 1. The purpose of the second Book. 2. Of the knowledge of Gold Oars. 3. Gold is intermixed with other Metals. 4. Gold in Horny Oar. 5. Gold in Wolferan, Tin and Iron Oar. 6. Rivers have Gold in them. 7. Of the River Nile having Gold. 8. Grains of Gold found in Germany. 9 Iron-Man Oar hath Gold in it. 10. Gold in Flints. 11. Gold in the Marchasite. CHAP. II. What Proofs and Washings are used by the Gold Washers. SEction 1. How much may be washed in a day. 2. Of Cricers, Gilders or Penny weight of Gold. 3. Of Gold Grains. 4. To prepare boards for washing it. 5. An especial Wash-work. 6. the proportion of a Ratar or Sieve to cleanse the Stuff. 7. The XIV. SCULPTURE Deciphered. 8. Of seircing the Gold Oars. 9 The sorts of Cloth that are to be used for scircing. 10. How to use the long Ratars. 11. The XV. SCULPTURE Deciphered. 12. To purify the Gold Slicks. 13. Of great grained Gold. 14. How mingled with digged Gold. 15. Of Flinty or Horny Oars, how to be used. 16. A Roasting Oven for it. 17. How to use the Roasting Oven, and to quench it. 18. The XVI. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. III. Of Gold Slicks. SEction 1. Of poor Gold slicks. 2. Of rich slicks called Gold ram. 3. To bring both to profit. CHAP. IU. How Gold slicks with digged Gold is to be prepared and quickened. SEction 1. To get Gold out of the slicks, by Quicksilver and Vinegar. 2. Of pressing the Quicksilver through a Leather. 3. When the Gold hath Silver in it, what to do. 4. Of melting the digged Gold. 5. The manner of quickening Gold by Gold-washers. CHAP. V. How clean Gold slicks are to be made to profit without Quicksilver. SEction 1. By Littarge, Lead-Glass, etc. 2. To make firm Tests for it. 3. How to boil it up. CHAP. VI To make Fluss for boiling up of Oars. CHAP. VII. How Gold may be separated very clean from Quicksilver. SEction 1. Of the use of Quicksilver in the work. 2. How an Iron Jugor Pot is to be made and covered with Loam. 3. To refresh Quicksilver. 4. An Earthen Jug for the use. 5. Of the use of a Limbeck herein. 6. To avoid the poisonous smoke of it. 7. The XVII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. VIII. How Gold Oars are to be proved. SEction 1. Of mild flowing Gold Oars. 2. Of Flinty Gold Oars. 3. Another way of proving them. 4. A Proof of fine Gold, with advice to the Assayers. CHAP. IX. How Gold in Lumps, Plates, Ingots, or Coined Gold is to be Assayed, how to be touched, and by Touch-Needles for Gold. SEction 1. Shows the deceits in Touch-Needles. 2. How to use both the Gold and Silver Touch-Needles called white and red. CHAP. X. Of white Touch-Needles, how to be made. CHAP. XI. How Touch-Needles are to be made and used for Crown Gold and Coined Gold. CHAP. XII. How to divide the Touch-Needles, when the Metals are half white, half red, or half Silver and half copper with Gold. CHAP. XIII. How Touch-Needles are to be made for Rhenish Gold, in which there is two parts white and one red. SEction 1. The Division of the Metals for Touch-Needles. 2. Needles, of Copper for Gold. 3. The Divisions cast together. 4. The Needles to be beaten into Lengths. 5. The common Goldsmith's Touch-Needles. 6. The XVIII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XIV. How Touch-Needles are to be used. SEction 1. Of Touchstone. 2. Concerning the touch of hard and brittle Gold. CHAP. XV. How Gold is to be Assayed by Aqua Fortis. SEction 1. To cut pieces for trial. 2. Of the Carrat-Weight, Grains or Marks. 3. The Assay Proof. 5. To make the Carrat. 5. The trial of it. 6. How to beat the Rolls. 7. How to dissolve them. 8. To dulcify them. 9 To Neal them. 10. Proving Coined Gold. 11. To make the true Carrat. 12. Another way to find out the red and white in Gold. CHAP. XVI. How to prove Aqua Fortis, and how much it doth leave in the Gold proof. SEction 1. Manner of trying it. 2, Another way. 3. The remainder. 4. Some Rules for it. 5. Of Glasses and Instruments for separating it. 6. An Instrument for the Glasses. CHAP. XVII. How Silver is to be proved for Gold. SEction 1. The first trial. 2. To Dulcify it. 3. To glow it. 4. A second trial. 5. A third trial. 6. Differences of proofs. 7. A singular way dissolving it. CHAP. XVIII. How to prove Goldish Silver by Water-weight. SEction 1. The first Experiment. 2. The second Experiment. 3. Known by Arithmetic. CHAP. XIX. To find without such proof, whether Silver contains Gold. SEction 1. The first way. 2. The second way. 3. The XIX. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XX. How to separate Gold and Silver, and how to burn and distil Aqua Fort. and to prepare Instruments and Clay for the Work. SEction 1. Of the Clay for Ovens. 2. Of Luting the parts of the Oven. 3. An other Clay for Bottles. 4. Of Venetian Glass. 5. To prepare Jugs and Retorts. 6. Of Iron Jugs or Pots. 7. Of Luting those Jugs. 8. To get the Caput. Mort. out of those Jugs or Pots. 9 The XX. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXI. How to make Ovens for distilling Aqua Fort. SEction 1. Ovens of several sorts. 2. Of the Athanor or great Furnace. 3. Earthen Pots better than Iron. 4. Covers for them. 5. The XXI. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXII. Of the Species or Compositions used for distilling and making Aqua Fort. SEction 1. Of Calcining Vitriol for it. 2. Of Nitre or Salt-Petre. CHAP. XXIII. How Aqua Fort. is to be distilled. SEction 1. In a Glass Bottle. 2. Copels for it. 3. Another way. 4. Water in the Receiver. 5. A trial of Vitriol. CHAP. XXIV. How Aqua Fort. is to be distilled in an Iron Jug. SEction 1. Jugs cast or Hammered. 2. How to place them in the Athanor. 3. Of governing the Athanor. 4. Of disposing the grosser Spirits. 5. To order the fire when too hot. 6. The drops to be counted. 7. To force the Spirits. 8. When the Glasses, Limbecks and Receiver are to be taken away. CHAP. XXV. How to Distil Aqua Fortis in 4 or 5 hours. CHAP. XXVI. Another good way to distil Aqua Fort. SEction 1. With uncalcined Vitriol. 2. Such Vitriol as is boiled out of Flints. 3. Another way. CHAP. XXVII. How to make an excellent strong Aqua Fort. SEction 1. Of the Ingredients. 2. More Gold produced by this way than any other. 3. A luting on which the Spirits do not operate. CHAP. XXVIII. How to distil Aqua Fortis (called Aqua Regis, which dissolveth Gold, Copper, Iron, Led and Tin) also Mercury Sublimate and Arsenic. SEction 1. Ingredients. 2. How to distil it by degrees. 3. The XXII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXIX. To Distil Aqua Fort. in Retorts, with the Advantages by it. SEction 1. No new Invention. 2. The use of Calx Viva. 3. For want of a Receiver, what is to be done. 4. Earthen Receivers. 5. To fit the Glasses to the Helm. 6. The placing By-Ovens to the Athanor. 7. A long Oven and the use of it. 8. Strong and weak Aqua Fort. 9 The XXIII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXX. How Aqua Fort. is to be separated and cleansed from its Feces. SEction. 1. The manner of doing it. 2. The Feces useful. CHAP. XXXI. How weak Aqua Fort. is to be made stronger. SEction 1. The preparation. 2. Second Proceeding. 3. To draw off the Phlegm. CHAP. XXXII. How Gold and Silver in Aqua Fort. is to be separated. SEction 1. The preparation. 2. The second proceeding. 3. To Dulcify the Gold Calx. 4. To glow out the Gold Calx. 5. To Cast the Gold. 6. What to do if much is to be cast. 7. To separate the Silver for granulating. 8. Aqua Fort. for the granulated Silver. 9 When a glass breaks what to do. 10. To Dulcify the Silver. 11. The Contents of the parted Gold. 12. That it may not shoot into Crystals. 13. When the Aqua Fort. remains Silvery, what to do. 14. The XXIV. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXXIII. When the Gold is abstracted, how to bring the Silver out of the Aqua Fort. SEction 1. The manner of doing it. 2. Why the Silver Calx is dulcified. 3. Of the Content of this precipitated Silver. 4. To make profit of the blue water. 5. To precipitate Silver in an Earthen Vessel. 6. Iron Lamins to be used in the precipitation. CHAP. XXXIV. How Aqua Fort. drawn from Silver may be used again. CHAP. XXXV. How to separate Gold and Silver by Fusion. SEction 1. How to understand separation by Fusion. 2, 3, 4, 5. What precipitation or casting down is. 6. When the Scorias contains Gold what to do. 7. When the Regulus is poor of Gold what to do. 8. How much may be set at once in the Oven. 9 How the Gold may be precipitated at once. 10. Another way. CHAP. XXXVI. How the Scorias or Dross is to be made to profit. SEction 1. The first way. 2. The second way. 3. To make the Scorias malleable. 4. The Uses of it. CHAP. XXXVII. The Fluss for Precipitation. SEction 1. How to make it. 2. Separation in the Fluss requires diligence. 3. The uses of the used Tests. 4. The XXV. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXXVIII. How to make good and sound Crucibles for separating the Fluss. SEction 1. To prepare Clay for them 2. How to make them. 3. To preserve them. 4. The XXVI. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXXIX. Of Cementing, what it is. CHAP. XL. How the covered Oven for Cement is to be made. The XXVII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XLI. How Rhenish Gold is to be Cemented. SEction 1. How to prepare it. 2. The first Cement Powder. 3. The second Cement Powder. 4. To Cement Rhenish Gilders. CHAP. XLII. Other Cements for light Gold. CHAP. XLIII. A common Cement for all Golds. CHAP. XLIV. More Instructions for Cementing. SEction 1. The Composition. 2. Another way of making it. 3. To Cement brittle Gold. 4. Another manner. 5. To make profit of Cements. 6. Of Philosophical Cements. CHAP. XLV. How to Graduate Gold or give it an higher colour. Sections 5. or V. ways how to Gild. CHAP. XLVI. How to make brittle Gold deft. Sections 6. By Six several ways. CHAP. XLVII. Another way to make Gold Deft. SEction 1. By a flat Test. 2. To bring Gold clean out of the Crucible. 3. To take away the ill Vapour. 4. Of the use of Mercury Sublimate. 5. Of the use of Sulphur and Antimony. CHAP. XLVIII. How to make Gold Deft on the Copel. CHAP. XLIX. How to Cast Gold through Antimony. SEction 1. Through fine Gold. 2. Through Poor Gold. 3. The XXVIII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. L. How blick or light Gold, containing much Silver is to be separated. Four several ways. CHAP. LI. How to separate Antimony that hath been used. Sections 4. By four Methods. CHAP. LII. How Gold is to be made fine and clean through Aqua Regis. The CONTENTS of the Chapters and Sections of the third BOOK. CHAP. I. Of Copper Oars. SEction 1. The purpose of this Book. 2. Copper of various colours and sorts. 3. Of Copper Glass. 4. Of Green or Azure Copper. 5. Of brown Copper. 6. Of Copper Shiffer. 7. of Copper Flint. 8. Of Copper Stone. CHAP. II. How to make Crucibles and Ovens to prove Copper. SEction 1. The Mould. 2. The form of the Crucibles. 3. The Clay. 4. Little Ovens for proof. 5. Another form of Ovens. 6. Ovens of Tile. 7. Proof Furnaces. 8. The XXIX. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. III. How to make Fluss to prove Copper Oars. CHAP. IU. How soft flowing Copper Oars are to be proved. CHAP. V. How hard flowing Copper Oars are to be proved. SEction 1. The manner of it. 2. The Oar must be burnt quite dead. 3. Some Copper not fit for Brass. 4. To boil Copper Oars with boiled Copper. CHAP. VI How to prove light Copper, six several ways. CHAP. VII. How light Copper Oars which are mixed and insperged with Flints may be brought to profit. CHAP. VIII. How to prove Copper Oar from Copper Stone, etc. CHAP. IX. How to prove Copper-Oars another way. SEction 1. Preparations. 2. Of Copper Shiffer. 3. When no stone in the Proof. 4. Roasted Oar do separate better than raw or fresh Oars. 5 and 6. Are other Methods. CHAP. X. To prove melted Copper Stone. SEction 1. The method of it. 2. The use of Venetian Glass. 3. The XXX. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XI. To prove Flinty Copper by Sulphur. SEction 1. The first proceeding. 2. The Retorts for it. 3. The red Sulphur of it. CHAP. XII. How to prove black Copper by defty and smooth Copper. SEction 1. Of Copper Needles. 2. A Proof easy but not certain. 3. An other way. 4. How Copper Flint and Tin Stone are to be separated. CHAP. XIII. To prove whether Led be Copperish. CHAP. XIV. Profitable Instructions for an Assayer. SEction 1. How Iron may be made Copper. 2. Iron will precipitate Copper; and Copper, Silver. CHAP. XV. How to separate Silver from Copper in the great Work. 12. Directions. CHAP. XVI. 13. Additional Instructions about good Copper. CHAP. XVII. Six Additional Instructions about the proving of fresh Oar, called Hard Led. CHAP. XVIII. Six Additions concerning Thornels or little pieces of Oar not fully melted. CHAP. XIX. Six more Instructions concerning good and deft Coppers. CHAP. XX. Seven more Additional Instructions for good Copper. The XXXI. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXI. Nine Rules how the Regulus of poor black Copper Oar is to be Assayed. CHAP. XXII. Seven more Instructions for the Hungarian way of Assaying. CHAP. XXIII. How Littarge pieces are to be made, by 6 ways. CHAP. XXIV. How Silver from speizy and unclean black Copper is to be made. CHAP XXV. Instructions for driving Lead and Copper for Silver. CHAP. XXVI. Of driving the Keinstocks or Thornels. The XXXII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP XXVII. A singular way of melting in the Assaying-Work. SEction 1. For Copper. 2. Copper Roasted. 3 & 4. Addition of parts and poor Copper-Stone. 5. Hard Oar and Littarge. 6, 7, 8, 9 & 10. To make the Oven for this Work, and to cast the pieces. 11, 12 & 13. The profit of the Assay▪ Work. The XXXIV. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XXVIII. How Copper is to be made into Brass. SEction 1. Of the difference of Copper for it in many Countries. 2. Of the mixture of Lapis Calaminaris, for the making Brass. 3. The Ovens for it. 4 & 5. Of Lapis Calaminaris which comes from Great Britain to make them Brass. 6, 7 & 8. Of the proportions of Copper and Lapis Calaminaris for Brass. 9 The XXXV. SCULPTURE Deciphered. The CONTENTS of the Chapters and Sections in the fourth BOOK. CHAP. I. Of Led Oars, Tin, Antimony, Quicksilver, Iron, Steel and Loadstone. SEction 1. The purpose of the Book. 2. Led known from other Metals. 3. Of bright Lead-Oar. 4. Of white Lead-Oar. 5. Of red Lead-Oar. 6. Of yellow Lead-Oar. 7. Of flinty Lead-Oar. 8. Of Lead-Oar unseparable. CHAP. II. How to prove Defty Lead-Oar for Lead. SEction 1. The mixtures for it. 2. How to dispose it in Crucibles and Ovens. 3 & 4. Iron to be added to it. CHAP. III. How to prove an undefty Lead-Oar for Lead. CHAP. IU. To prove poor separable Oars, by boiling it and trying it by Smelting. SEction 1, 2 & 3. A good way of beating Oars. 4. A hurtful way of beating. 5 & 6. Of smelting Mills and differences in beating the Lead Oar. CHAP. V. How to try common Lead-Oar for Lead in little Ovens. CHAP. VI How the inseparable and light Lead-Oars are to be Assayed in a little Oven. SEction 1. Of the little Oven. 2. Of Crucibles for it. 3. Of unroasted Oars. CHAP. VII. To make a Lead-Proof on a Table or in a Stove. CHAP. VIII. How to make Lead-Oars (though they will not separate in the water) to be profitable. SEction 1. Of Rocky Lead-Oars. 2. Of Sulphury Slacks. 3. Of Goslarish Oar. 4. Two melting Ovens on one Spring. 5. Of melt-Ovens for the Oar. 6. Of Crucibles for the Lead. 7. Of closing the Work in the Ovens. 8. Of kindling the fire. 9 The use of Copper to this melting. 10. Of opening the Oven. 11 & 12. Of the Cakes or Sows of Lead produced from the Lead. 13. Of Galmay or Lapis Calaminaris. 14. The Mine at Goslar wrought above 700 years together. The XXXVI. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. IX. Of melting Oars with Moll or Turf and Coals. SEction 1. The Property of Moll or Turf. CHAP. X. How to prove Spelter or Wismuth Oar, which some call Bismuth. SEction 1. Two ways of melting it. 2. The difference of its Contents. 3. To melt them by the Wind. 4. To melt them in an Oven. 5. The XXXVII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. XI. Of Tin-Oar called Zwitter. CHAP. XII. To prove Tin-Stone for Tin. SEction 1. The way of proving it. 2. In the Coals. 3. With the Fluss. 4. By a sudden heat. CHAP. XIII. How to prove Tin-Stone in the little Ovens. CHAP. XIV. Of beating and preparing the Zwitter or Tin Oar. SEction 1. & 2. To melt old gathered Slacks. 3. & 4. The loss of burning it. 5. The way of burning it. 6. The Goslar way of melting it. CHAP. XV. An Instruction for Tin Sope-work. SEction 1. Of Seeve-work.— CHAP. XVI. To prove Tin by Addition. SEction 1 & 2. The light Tin the best.— CHAP. XVII. To prove Antimony. CHAP. XVIII. Of Quicksilver Oar. SEction 1. Described.— CHAP. XIX. How to prove Quick-silvet Oar for Quicksilver. SEction 1. Jugs and Bottles to be fitted for it.— CHAP. XX. To prove Iron and Steel Stone. CHAP. XXI. To prove whether Ironstone be rich in Iron. SEction 1, 2 & 3. To be tried by the Loadstone. 4 How to melt the Iron Stone. CHAP. XXII. Of Magnets or Loadstone. SEction 1. 5. Several uses of it.— The CONTENTS of the Chapters and Sections of the fifth BOOK. CHAP. I. Of Salt-Petre. SEction 1. The purpose of this Book. 2. How to boil Salt-Petre. CHAP. II. What Earth's do afford the best Salt-Petre. SEction 1. From Sheep-Cotes 2. From under old Walls. 3. From under Earthen and unplastered Houses. 4. From under Horse-Stables. CHAP. III. How to prove the several Earth's for it. SEctions, 6. Several ways of proving it. 7. The XXXVIII. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. IU. How to make a Lixivium, Menstruum or Lees of the Earth. SEction 1. Of Tubs for the Lees. 2. Of Sticks and Reeds to be used. 3, 4 & 5. Of weak and Raw and strong Lees. 6. Of strong Lees or Suds. 7. The XXXIX. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. V. How to boil the Lees or Suds. CHAP. VI How to prepare Lees for a crude and raw Salt-Petre. SEction 1. How the Salt is to be taken out. 2. XL. SCULPTURE Deciphered. CHAP. VII. How to cleanse the raw Salt-Petre. SEction 1 & 2. Of Raw Salt-Petre. 3 & 4. Of Purifying it. 5. Of course Salt-Petre. 6. Proofs set out. 7. Of purifying it again. 8. Another proof. 9 Of scumming it. 10. Of cleansing the Kettle. 11. Of what Salt-Petre is generated, and how spoiled. 12. Mingling splinters of Wood with it. 13. Reference to the XL. SCULPTURE. CHAP. VIII. How to cleanse the great grained or black Salt-Petre. SEctions. 1. The uses of it. 2. To make it white. 3. To purify it through Ashes. CHAP. IX. How to make the raw Salt-Petre rich before boiling of it. SEction 1. The manner of doing of it. 2. The profit by it. 3. To water out the Earth and enrich it. 4. To enrich the Lees of Alum. 5. The XLI. SCULPTURE Deciphered. 6. The Sheds for Salt Petre, how built. CHAP. X. How Flints are to be proved for Vitriol, and Allum-Oar for Alum. SEction 1. To make Lees or Suds of it. 2. To make Lees of Alum. 3. To make Lees of Vitriol. 4. The Conclusion to the V. Books, and the Author's Apology and thanks to God. THE CONTENTS OF THE SCULPTURES In the first BOOK Of SILVER OARS. Page 1. SCULPTURE I. Represents 1. THE Effigies of Lazarus Erckern the Assayer. 2. The Scales and Boxes of Weights. 3. Glasses for Aqua Regis, Aqua Fortis, Aqua Vitrioli, Aqua Argenteae or Quicksilver, etc. Page 2. SCULPTURE II. Represents 1. THE Form of an Athanor or great Furnace. 2. The Forceps or Tongues and Forks. 3. The Copels, Tests and Philosophical Bellows. 4. The digestive Pot, with its Cover and Fire about it. 5. A covered Crucible. 6. The long Bell or Matrass Glass, in a Sand Furnace. 7. The Wind-Furnace, with a blowing Pipe. 8. A Furnace with a Copper-Head and its Receiver. 9 A Furnace with a naked and open fire. 10. A Pestle and Mortar with a Man beating the Metals. 11. The Owls Head, or another form of a cover to the eighth Figure in this Section. 12. A Retort. Page 13. SCULPTURE III. Represents 1. AN Assay Oven used by the Ancient Refiners (joined with Iron Plates.) 2. An Assay Oven used by the Norimbergers in Germany. 3. The Foot of it. 4. An Assay Oven made of Tiles joined together, which may quickly be done. 5. An Assay-Oven made of Potter's Loam and fastened with Iron Bonds or Hoops. 6. The upper Mouth-hole of it. 7. The lower Mouth-hole of it. 8. The Holes for Iron Bars to be put in. 9 An Assay-Oven made of Armour Plates. Page 17. SCULPTURE IU. Represents. 1. THE form of Muffles, which the Ancient Assayers did, and still the common Assayers do use. 2. The Muffle to the Norimburg Assay Oven. 3. The Muffle to the Assay Oven with two Mouth▪ holes. 4. The Stopples. 5. The bottom Plate. 6. The wooden Frame for that Muffle. 7. The lower part of the Assay Test. 8. The upper part of it. 9 The Mould for the Assay-Tests. 10. The lower part of the Assay-Tests. 11. the upper part. 12. The Assay-Crucible. 13. The small Instruments for governing the fire, made of Potter's Clay. Page 24. SCULPTURE V. Represents 1 &. 3. THE Copel Cases. 2 & 4. The Copels that are made in them. 5. The Copels set on one another. 6. The washed Ashes made into Balls. 7. He that works the Ashes. 8. He that forms and strikes the Copels. Page 25. SCULPTURE VI. Represents 1. THE Copel Case. 2. The Copel for Copper Proof and common Oars. 3. The Copels for Metals that are poor in Silver, or grained and common Oars. 4. The Copels for common Silver Trials, which are Assayed according to Weight. 5. The Copels for Sterling Silver Proof. 6. How the Copels are placed upon each other in the Fire. Page 56. SCULPTURE VII. Represents 1. THE Grain or Grainulating Kiln or Furnace. 2. The Wind-Oven. 3. Another Wind-Oven of Potter's Loam, girt with Iron, and placed on a three Foot Iron Frame. 4. The Crucible in which the Siver is to be melted. 5. The Crucible in which the melted Metal is taken out of the bigger Crucible. 6. The Copper Bason with two Ears, wherein the Granulating of Metals is performed. 7. An Iron Roast wherein the Silver is heated and roasted. 8. He that tends that Grain Kiln. 9 The Broom holder for Granulation. 10. The Granulating Vessel. 11. The Bellows to the Grain Kiln. 12. The Instrument used by him that tends the Kiln. 13. A Tub and Tankard for Water. 14. Pieces that are Granulated. Page 65. SCULPTURE VIII. Represents 1 & 2. THE Proportion of Touch Needles for Silver. 4 & 5. The Ingots to be compared with the Touch-Needles. Page 76. SCULPTTURE IX. Represents 1. THE burning Fnrnace. 2. The Test which is put into it. 3. How Silver is to be burnt on the Test. 4. The bellows blowing it. 5. The Iron Plates luted over the Clay, used against the heat. 6. A Fork and Hook to stir the matter, and the Irons used about proofs. 7. A complete Test unwarmed. 8. A Test which is in warming. 9 The Roaster or Iron on which the burnt Silver is dried. 10. The Water-Tub, over which the burnt Silver is brushed clean. 11. The Ball and Pestle for making the Test. 12. The Block on which the Silver is beaten with the Hammer. 13. The split or riven Wood for burning the Silver. 14. A Test that hath been used or broken. 15. A three footed Stool for several uses. 16. A Tankard to take out or Put in Water into. Fig 10. Page 80. SCULPTURE X. Represents 1. THE Oven in which the Silver is to be burnt. 2. The inside of that Oven. 3. The Wind-holes of that Oven, which drives the fire upwards into the Work. 4. The Test that is set in it. 5. The Iron Ring or Mould, into which the Tests are to be beaten. 6. A Test-Ring made complete. 7. The Ring filled with Ashes for the Test. 8. The round Muffles for it. 9 The Ball and Hammer for making the Test. 10. The Servant that beateth the blink Silver into pieces, and the Instruments for it. 11. The Man (that takes care for the burning of the Silver) standing on the backside of the Oven. 12. The Vessel of Water, into which the burnt Silver is to be cast and cleansed. 13. Bellows and Instruments belonging to the Oven. Page 90. SCULPTURE XI. Represents 1. THE forged Balance. 2. The forged Fork. 3. The half forged Fork. 4. The filled Scales with the half Fork. 5. The two pearls, the one as a Pendula, the other on the top of the Tongue in the Fork. 6. The end of the Beam, and the like is to be supposed for the other end. 7. How the Balance, Fork and Pendula are to hang on the Wartz on each side of the bottom of the Tong. 8. 8. The holes in the whole Fork. 9, 9 The little holes at each end of the Beam, in which the strings hang. 10. The Scales like small Dishes. 11. Pincers to take up small Weights or pieces. Page 94. SCULPTURE XII. Represents 1. THE outside of a Case for the Balance. 2. The inside of that Case, wherein the whole Balance is to hang, and to be kept free from Dust. Page 98. SCULPTURE XIII. Represents 1. THE form of the Boxes or Cases for Weights standing open. 2. The same Case as it is shut. The CONTENTS of the SCULPTURES In the second Book Of GOLD OARS. Page 106. SCULPTURE XIV. Represents 1. THE Man that worketh with the Ratter. 2. The middle Floor, whereon that which goeth through the Ratter doth fall. 3. The lower Floor, whereon that which comes from the middle Floor doth fall. 4. The plain Receiver of that which falls from both. 5. The Man that stands on a board, and out of a Wheel-barrow throws the matter or Oar into the Tunnel which guides it into the Ratter. 6. The Channel in which Water doth run upon the Ratter. Page 108. SCULPTURE XV. Represents 1. THE Miners which carries the matter to be washed in the Ratter. 2. The parts of the Ratter (more visible than in the former Figure.) 3. The Washman that governs the Ratter. 4. The upper and lower falls from the Ratter. 5. The plain Board's or Hearth on which they fall. 6. He that stirs about the muddy matter of both fall. 7. The Tub in which that which falleth on the Hearth is to be put and washed. Page 112. SCULPTURE XVI. Represents 1. THE form of Roasting Ovens. 2. The Shutters to them. 3. The inside of them. 4. The Partitions in them made of Tiles, and a Man attending at the Mouth of the Oven. 5. He that pours water into the Roasting-Oven. 6. The wood that is used for those Roasting Ovens. 7. The Instruments to cleanse the Oven. 8 8. The Ladder to go to the top of the Oven. 9 The pieces of Metal to be used. Page 123. SCULPTURE XVII. Represents 1. THE Athanor or great Furnace. 2. The Ovens on the sides of it. 3. The Earthen Receiver for it. 4. The Earthen Helmet for it. 5. The blind Helmet with a Pipe, on which Water may be poured. 6. He that fitteth the matter. 7. He that presseth the Quicksilver through a Leather. 8. The lower part of an Iron Jug or Receiver. 9 The upper part of it. 10. The Leather purse whereby the Quicksilver may be pressed out. 11. He that causeth the Gold to melt by help of the Bellows. 12. The pieces of Metal. Page 135. SCULPTURE XVIII. Represents 1. THE proportion of Touch-Needles for Gold. 2. The Ingots to be compared with those Touch-Needles, as also by the Touch Stone. Page 153. SCULPTURE XIX. Represents. 1. HOW the Assayer stands before the Assay-Oven to prove the Metals. 2. The Iron on which the proof is to be cast. 3. A Wooden Instrument to see through into the Fire, to prevent hurt to the Eyes. 4. A separating-Glass for proving Gold, placed on a little foot. 5. He that doth wash the Goldish Silver in water. 6. The Block, Hammer and Stool. Page 158. SCULPTURE XX. Represents 1. A Luted Glass Bottle covered with an Helm. 2. A luted Glass Bottle without an Helm. 3. Another kind of Glass Bottle. 4. The form of an Helm. 5. A Glass scale or half Pot, with one Ear and Mouth. 6. A Receiver with a pipe. 7. An common Receiver without a Pipe. 8. An Earthen Retort. 9 An Earthen Jug or Culb to burn Aqua Fortis in. 10. Other kind of Bottles, Glasses and half Glasses, or Pipkins and Tunnels. Page 161. SCULPTURE XXI. Represents 1. THE Athanor. 2. The Mouth-hole of it over the Grate. 3. The Mouth-hole under the Grate. 4. The Grates in the By-Oven. 5. The form of the By-Oven. 6. The Instruments to open or shut the wind-holes. 7. The Covers for the By-Ovens. 8. The Pins for the Registers or wind-holes. 9 A Semicircle piece of Wood by which the Athanor is to be made. 10. The Cover for the Athanor. 11. The Man that tends it. 12. A dish of pieces to be used. Page 173. SCULPTURE XXII. Represents 1. THE Tower of the Athanor in which the Coals are to be put. 2. The By-Oven in which the Bottle is to be placed. 3. How the Bottle is to be placed in the Oven. 4. The Glass Helmet made for it. 5. The Recipient or Receiver. 6. The Pot full of materials prepared. 7. The same Pot empty. 8. The Man that tends the Athanor and By-Ovens. Page 177. SCULPTURE XXIII. Represents 1. THE Tower of the Athanor. 2. 2. The two sides or By-Ovens in which the Jugs are to be set with the stuff. 3. 3. The Glass Receivers. 4. The earthen Jug or Receiver. 5. The Oven for the Retorts. 6. The little Receivers to be added to the great Receivers that there may be room for drawing the Spirits, 7. The long Oven. 8. The By-Oven in which the Spirits are to be forced into the Aqua Fort. Page 185. SCULPTURE XXIV. Represents 1. THE Tower of the Athanor. 2. The side-Ovens upon which the Copels are to be placed on Sand. 3. 3. The Glass Bottles for separation covered with Helmets. 4. The Receivers which are laid to the Helmets. 5 How the Aqua Fort. is by them to be drawn from the Silver. 6. An Iron Instrument with which the Glasses are to be taken out and in. 7. The Man that attends the Operations in the Glasses. 8. Another Man to attend the other Glasses upon shelves. 9 The Ingredients prepared in a Dish or Pan. Page 200. SCULPTURE XXV. Represents 1. THE inward part of Wind-Ovens. 2. The outward parts completed. 3. The holes next the Wind-Holes. 4. The Pots in which the Sulphur and grained Metals is to be prepared, with a Fire under it and a Man attending it. 5. A single Crucible and cover to it. 6. The Iron Tongues by which Crucibles are put in and taken out of the Fire. 7. The Frame on which the Crucible is to be set. 8. The Iron Vessel into which the stuff or melted matter is to be cast. 9 The Man attending the Wind-Ovens. Page 203. SCULPTURE XXVI. Represents 1. THE lower part of a wooden Frame of a Press for making Crucibles. 2. The shape of the whole Press, and how the Crucibles are to be forced under it. 3. The Iron Rings or Hoops about the Frame. 4. The shape of the Crucibles which are to be made in the Press. 5. The handle by which the Screw of the Press is to be turned. Page 207. SCULPTURE XXVII. Represents 1. THE Athanor and lower Mouth-hole of it. 2. The upper Mouth-hole. 3. The Edge on which the Iron Plates do lay on the Iron Grates. 4. The registers or air-holes above the Grates. 5. The little air-holes near the top of the Athanor. 6. The stopples for the registers or Air-holes. 7. A Test fitted for the Athanor. 8 & 9 Cement-Pots. 10. An Hook to stir the Coals. 11. The man that stirs the Furnace and works. Page 222 SCULPTURE XXVIII. Represents 1. THE form of a common Cup, cast in Brass. 2. The Cup of smith's Work. 3. A Crucible for the Work. 4. A Flat Test for it. 5. The Ingot. 6. The Plates of Antimony with the Gold Regulus. 8. The Antimony when the Gold Regulus is beaten from it. The CONTENTS of the SCULPTURES In the third Book of COPPER OARS. Page 235. SCULPTURE XXIX. Represents 1. THE inside of the little Oven made with Tiles. 2, The same when it is closed 3. The foot of the Crucible upon the Grate. 4. The little Oven of Potter's Clay, strengthened by Iron Hoops and Bars. 5. The foot of it. 6. The Iron Grate in it. 7. The Crucible on the Grate, with the Proof in it. 8. The wind-hole wherein the Bellows are put. 9 The whole Oven open with the Bottom. 10. The Iron Hoop which goes about it. 11, 12 & 13. The Bellows, Brush and Instruments. Page 247. SCULPTURE XXX. Represents 1. THE Melting-Oven to try Copper Oars from Copper-Stone. 2. The luting it with Clay. 3. The bucked or washed Oar. 4. The little Ovens in which the Copper-Oars are to be proved, with ordinary Bellows, and a Man to attend them. 5. The Bellows as they are used. 6. A Copper Instrument (with a Neck) in which water is put and set over the Fire, and used instead of Bellows (called Philosophical Bellows, see Lib. 1. Sculp. 2.) 7. The Pot in which the Fluss is to be made. 8. The Assay Crucibles. 9 The Block, Hammer and Pieces to be beaten. Page 265. SCULPTURE XXXI. Represents 1. THE Copper and Led Pieces weighed, and a Man that attends them. 2. The Oven for melting fresh Oars. 3. The Copper Pan into which the fresh pieces are to be cast. 4. The form of the fresh pieces melted. 5. The Melter. 6. The Vault which receives the dust and smoke. 7. The little Door out of which the dust is to be cleansed. 8. The Wheel that brings in Water with the Tub to receive it. Page 274. SCULPTURE XXXII. Represents 1. THE Assay Oven for Copper. 2. The supporters to be made of Copper. 3. The Assayed pieces as they stand in the Oven. 4. The Walls or four sides of the Oven, with the fire in it, and how the Oven is braced with Iron Hoops. 5. The stamped pieces and Coals on the top of the Oven. 6. The Copper or Iron little Pans, with a man putting the melted stuff into them. 7. The Kinstocks. 8. The Crane or draught by which the Assay pieces are to be lifted out of the Assay-Oven, or otherwise disposed of. 9 Instruments, viz. Ladle, Pitcher, Fork and Hook. 10. The Trough or place to cool the Instruments in water. Page 278. SCULPTURE XXXIII. Represents 1. A Drying Oven. 2. An Oven soon made, according to the Hungarian way. 3. A common ready Hearth attended with two Men. 4. The Kinstocks which are to be picked with an Iron Tool and beaten by a Man. 5. An Hearth for spizing, according to the Hungarian way. 6. 6. 6. The Copper Cakes, quenched in a Cistern of Water by a Man. Page 284. SCULPTURE XXXIV. Represents 1. A Fresh Oven. 2. A little By-Oven for Lead. 3. A fresh piece, with a Man lifting it. 4. The separation of roasted and weighed Lead, brought by a Man with a Wheel-barrow, and laid in heaps. 5. The Vault for the smoke and dust. 6. The Tunnel for the Smoke. 7. The fresh Oven without a fore Wall. 8. 8. The Assay-Oven. 9 The little Pans for the melted Work. Page 288. SCULPTURE XXXV. Represents 1. AN Oven in which Brass is to be made, the shape of it in the inside, and how the Pots and Crucibles are to be placed in it. 2. How the Brass Ovens are to be placed in the Work. 3. The shapes of the Pots and Crucibles. 4. The Shovel for the beaten Calaminaris Stone, which is to be mixed with Copper for the making Brass. 5. The Tongues by which the Pots are to be set in and taken out. 6. The Wind-holes in the Oven. 7. The Pieces of Britain Stone, or Lapis Calaminaris unbeaten. 8. The place for the Master that sets-in the Pots. The CONTENTS of the SCULPTURES In the fourth Book Of Lead OARS, Tin, Antimony and Quicksilver, Iron and the Loadstone. Page 303. SCULPTURE XXXVI. Represents 1. THE Walls of the Furnace. 2. The Lines on them shows the Gradations of the Metal descending. 3. The Man that manageth the Metal in the Furnace. 4. The back of the Furnace with the Coals, and Pieces of Metal flowing. 5. The grand Test. 6. The Oven for that Test. 7. The pieces from the Test. 8. The Man that beats the Oar. 9▪ The pieces of Oar and Cinders. 10. An heap of Charcoal. 11. The Water-Troughs to wash the Oar in. 12. The Pipes by which the foul water is cast out. 13. The Instruments for the Furnaces and Tests. Page 307. SCULPTURE XXXVII. Represents 1. THE little Iron Pans for Spelter or Wismuth Oar, 2. The Wood Fire for them. 3. The melted Spelter that is to be made clean in the Iron Pan's, and the workman that tends it. 4. He that draws the Oar out of the Mine. The CONTENTS of the SCULPTURES In the fifth Book of Salt-Petre, Vitriol and Alum. Page 325. SCULPTURE XXXVIII. Represents 1. THE Tub in which the Lees is made for Salt Petre, and out of which it is to be extracted, and the Can or vessel to put water into the Tub. 2. The greater Tub into which the Lees doth run. 3 & 4. The Master and the Balance by which he proves the goodness of the Lees. 5. The Lamin. 6. The Candle. 7. The Pincers. Page 329. SCULPTURE XXXIX. Represents 1. THE 8 Tubs into which the Petre-Earth is to be put. 2. The Pipe with Brass Cocks, into which the water is let into the 8 Tubs. 3. The channel by which the Lees fall from each Tub, and so into the Receiver. 4. The Sink or great Receiver of the Lees. 5. The ninth Tub from which the Lees run into the Kettle. 6. The Oven wherein the Kettle stands. 7. The Kettle. 8. The Iron Door by which the wood is to be put into the Oven under the Kettle. 9 The wind-hole, in the bottom of the Oven. 10. How the Oven may be seen in the inside. 11. The Iron Grate on which the wood lays. 12. The door into the working-House. Page 332. SCULPTURE XL. Represents 1. THE long narrow Tubs wherein to cool the Lees. 2. The Oven wherein the Kettle is placed. 3. The Master which makes and lets out the Salt Petre and puts it into separating Baskets. 4. The separating Baskets. 5. The Tub out of which the strong Lees run into the Kettle. 6. The Melting Vessels in which the Salt-Petre improves. 7. The 4 Kettles standing on the ground, wherein the Salt-Petre also improves itself. 8. A strong Tub into which the Salt-Petre is to be be cast, as it improves. Page 341. SCULPTURE XLI. Represents 1. THE forepart of the Salt-Petre-House wherein the Lee Tubs do stand. 2. The back part of it, wherein the Kettle and the Oven are placed and wherein the Salt-Petre is to be boiled. 3. The old pieces of Earth, out of which Salt-Petre is to be made. 4. The wood used for boiling it. 5. The Servant that shaves and fits the Earth for boiling. In the second Part of ESSAYS, THERE are the Twenty four English Letters, artificially Cut in Wood: and two more SCULPTURES Engraven in Copper. viz. under the Word Limbeck one, and Loadstone the other. THE best Artists may commit Mistakes or Errors, but they are Pardonable, when they proceed not from a wilful and careless Neglect, and therefore 'tis hoped that the Ingenious Reader will connive at the want, or misplacing of Commas, Periods, or Parenthesis, and for the rest they are here set down, that there may be no Mistake in the Sense of the Author. PAge 12. Line 24. for Essay, read Assay-Oven. p. 38. l. 15. r. Petre. p. 63. l. 13. r. Needles. p. 72. l. 2. r. Blink. p. 75. Fig. 7. r. a complete unused. p. 89. Fig. 7. r. the Fork and Pendula. p. 103. l. 24. r. a black Hair Sieve. deal Sicher Troy. p. 114. l. 27. r. rough Stones. p. 118. l. 15. r. Sandiver. p. 154. l. 3. for washeth r. weigh. p. 167. l. 16. r. which you. p. 171. l. 15. for Rape r. Linseed. p. 181. l. 14. r. Silver. p. 186. l. 14. r. hath. p. 189. l. 2. r. put in. p. 242. l. 17. r. with which. p. 252. deal 12. Necessary r. Profitable. p. 280. for Loathes r. pounds. p. 287. Fig. 2. r. How the. ibid. Fig. 6. r. Wind-holes. p. 313. l. 2. r. Tin by. p. 333. deal 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. r. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. Lazarus Erskerus CAP. I alias Erckern. BOOK I. CHAP. I. Of Silver Oars. Sculpture I. Section 1 Deciphered. The Assayer 1. the Scales 2. the Cases for Weights 3. Glasses for Aqua Regis, Aqua Fortis, Aqua Vitrioli, Aqua Argentea or Quicksilver, etc. 4. CAP. I Section 2 Sculpture II. Deciphered, 1. The form of an Athanor or great Furnace. 2. The Forceps or Tongues and Fork. 3. The Coppel or Test, with Philosopher's Bellows. 4. The Digestive Pot with its Cover and Fire about it. 5. A covered Crucible. 6. The long Bell, or Matras-Glass on a Sand Furnace. 7. The Wind Furnace with a Blow-pipe. 8. A Furnace with a Copper head, and its Receiver. 9 A Furnace with a naked and open Fire. 10. The pestle and Mortar, with one beating the Metals. 11. The Owl's Head, or another form of a Cover to the Figure 8. 12. A Retort. CAP. I Section. 3 THIS first Book speaks of Silver Oars, how they may be distinguished by The Purpose of the Book. their several Sorts, and afterwards by Assay-Scales and Assay-Tests; Of Muffles, Coppels, and of Clar for Lead, of Lead-Glass, of Fusion-Pouder, of Balances and Weights, and how a Led Grainer may be made, and then how every particular sort may be certainly assayed or tried, as also of Slake and Slake-stone, Flakes and Hard-Work, See the Dictionary. of Laech-Speize, Black Copper, Pagment, and of Granulations; as also of Planches or Plates of Silver and burnt Silver, with a fundamental Information how to burn Silver in the common way, and under the Muffle: as also the preparing and making Tests: and how to cast Silver which is Tough or hard, as well as that which is not tough or more ductile: also how to assay Tin, Iron or Steel for Silver, and to know what any Silver or coined Money is worth: and to make stroking or touching Needles, or Ingots of Silver for distinguishing the fine from the less fine Silver. Section. 4 Why Silver first treated of. Now, because I have in this Treatise first begun with the Description of Silver Oar and its Trials, some may wonder why I did not rather begin with Gold, (which is treated of in the Second Book) and why I did not give Gold the Pre-eminence, it being the highest and chiefest Metal of the Earth, and so by right it should have been first treated of. Therefore I think fit to inform the READER that I have not done this without good Reason; For, from Silver Trials, all other Assays and Preparations of Instruments do flow, as out of a Fountain, and have their Rise from thence; for which cause I have judged it necessary, in the first place, to give information of the same, and to place it in this first Book, because it is CAP. I to the Honour of the Crown of Bohemia, and bordering Countries in Germany, viz. Miechfin, Sachsen, Shesren, Manhrens, and other Countries where there are many Mines containing good Quantities of Silver, and many Miners, Guardians of Mines, Refiners, Provers, Smelters and Melters, who exercise themselves in proving of Silver-Oars, and of such Metals as contain Silver in them, and yet because there are many in these parts who have not gained the true Knowledge thereof, or have not in all things pertinent to this Science, obtained a fundamental Information, I have proposed to myself to be serviceable to such, and therefore I have more largely treated of Silver, and its Trials than of any other Metals, and am not willing to leave this unmentioned in this entrance of what I am to write. CHAP. II. How Silver Oars are distinctly known. Section. 1 Section SIlver Oars are found to be of many sorts and Colours, yet if they be not very fine, they are not to be judged by their Looks (how rich soever they are in Silver) and therefore 'tis proved by Artists (who have diligently searched into this Science, and by them found out many years past, as also by others who have since improved this Art) that the worth of every Oar may be certainly found out, so that the very smelting, melting, refining and account thereof, may be demonstrated both as to its worth and the Charges. Now it is here necessary to be known, that so many as there are Sorts of Silver Oars, so many are their Natures and ways of melting and refining them; and therefore Difference of assaying Oars. the Trials of Silver Oars must be ordered according to the Nature of the Oars, because the hard, harsh, gross and crude Oars, cannot be proved like those of an easier Fusion; or of a more mild, subtle and ductile nature, because, as an Oar proves either harsh or hard of fusion, so it must be helped (in the proving) by the Government of the fire, or by other ways; as, by much Experience in proving such Oars have been and may be discerned according as they melt in the fire: so that if there be not a knowledge of the Nature of an Oar before melting, and how it will do in the fire, such an Oar, cannot be melted to profit. Now for the better attaining the knowledge of the Difference of Oars; as, which are of an easy, and which of an harsh and crude Fusion; the most excellent and experienced Miners do give every Mine (and Oar from thence) Names, according to their Natures: all which according to the Terms used by them are hereafter named. Section 2 Glass-Oar. First, there are reckoned to the Easy-flowing Silver-Oars, these Nominal distinctions, viz. Glass-Oars (as the chiefest of the leaden Coloured Oars) almost to be compared to the best digested Silver, for it doth not loose above a sixth part in the fire, and the rest is pure and good Silver, and this digged Oar is a ccounted the best Silver Oar. Section. 3 White goldish Oar. Also there is found white-Goldish Oar, not that it contains Gold, but because it is good in Silver, it hath this name in respect of its Goodness. Section. 4 Horn Oar. Also the Horny Oar, (which is called so from its transparency or rather lucidation like Horn) and is very rich in Silver next to the three last mentioned Oars. Section. 5 There is a Silver-Oar which is Brown-red (almost like Cinabar, but not so light) and this they call Red-goldish Oar, and this doth yield above half Silver, and it Red goldish Oar. is found that these Oars do break like one another, and the difference not easily discerned. Section. 6 Black Oar. As for all Oars which are grey and black in breaking and withal heavy, they are often rich in Silver, but such as break black and light, or brown and yellow are not always rich, and it happens often that there is little or no Silver in them. Section. 7 Ironish Oar All Ironish brown and Yellowish streamy Oars are from decaying Mines, pierced by cold winterly Winds, and these contain some, but are not rich in Silver. Section. 8 Leadish Oar Also the leadish, or Oar that looks like mud (and therefore called muddy Oar) is sometimes rich and sometimes very poor in Silver, and indeed all leaden, horny, stony Oars, if they be yellow, white, grey, black, brown, red or green do not contain in themselves (if no other Oar be mingled with them) much Silver, and for the most part none at all. Section. 9 Glittering Oar. Also there is reckoned among the Easy-flowing Oars, all such Lead-Oars as are of a bright, glittering, shining Nature, or of a grey, brown or white Colour, yet these of themselves alone have little Silver, but the small flaky glittering or Wismet Oars, from the Mines in Bohemia, as also the much flaky, shining Oars from the Ours of Fryburgh in Misnia, do contain from 6 to 10 ounces in a centner. Section. 10 Float Oars many Sorts. Also all float or Easy-flowing Oars that are Yellow, white, brown, blue, green, or grey, do contain near that proportion. Section. 11 Azure or blue Oar. Also Copper-grass Oar or Copper of a Mountain green, or Copper glass-Colour do hold some Silver, but the Course Oars of an Azure, Mountain-Green Colour, are commonly poor. See the Dictionary. In fine, all Silver Oars in all sorts of Ours free from Flint, Blent, Cobolt, Mispickle, Glimmer, Wolferan, course spelter and Wismet (or be spizy and Copery) are called, saft flowing mild Oars. Section. 12 Flinty Oars many Sorts. On the contrary, all flinty Oars are reckoned among the harsh, gross and hard flowing Oars, and of these Oars there are also several sorts, namely the gross Flinty-Oar, the water flinty-Oar, and the square flinty-Oar, these contain little Silver (and the most part of them none) or not above half an ounce in a Centner: also Copper-flinty Oars that are yellow like Brass, also the Brown and Blew-staind-Flinty Oars, they do contain much good Copper (as may be Seen in the third Book) but such Oars contain little Silver, yet one sort more than another. Section. 13 Cobolt blended mispickle Oars. There are also rich-copper-Flinty Oars which have no Silver but the Blent, Cobolt or mispickle Oars (as in Section 11.) if they be speckled or spotted with round black or grey spots, they are sometimes rich in Silver and sometimes poor. Section. 14 Glimmer, Wolferan, Talk, Cats-silver and sparkling Oar. Also all common-white Glimmer or wolferan (as in Section 11.) or glimmering or sparkling Oars, or Talk or Catsilver are very poor in silver, yet the black Glimmers are sometimes rich; but for the most part all such glimmery Oars are commonly poor, so as I account these but as Patterns to other metalick Oars. Section. 15 Spelter and spizy Oars. Also all course-Spelter, spizy or coppery-spizy Oars (as in Section 11.) or the like kind, they are commonly poor in Silver and contain none at all. Section. 16 Spady Oars. Also all spady Oars (or such as may be digged with a Spade (if they be red, green, yellow or white (if there be no other mixed silver-Oars with them) for the most part do contain little or no Silver in them. Section. 17 Slack and Copper stone Also there is reckoned among the harsh, or hard-flowing Oars, the raw slackstone, and copper-stone, spelter, being alike in cleaving and splitting of Furnaces which proceeds from the stirring of the flinty parts, as also from the scummy part in melting them. Section. 18 The Ways of assaying them. But how the Proofs of the abovenamed soft-flowing, as also of the hard-flowing silver Oars are to be wrought, I shall by the following DISCOURSE distinctly and exactly inform the READER. Now, because that in many places there are no Workmen who can well make Instruments, belonging to the proving of these Oars, I will for the better Information, show first what is chiefly necessary to be done in such proofs, both in the whole, and in parts; as also what matter or stuff is to be used about them; as also what Instruments are to be made and prepared for them. CHAP. III. How the Assay- Ovens to prove Silver and other Metals are to be prepared. Section. 1 Special Ovens. THERE must be special Furnaces (for Assaying) made of good Potter's Clay, and bound with strong Iron wire or Hoops, that they may not fall asunder by reason of the strong heat which they must endure. But some diligent Assayers which intent to carry on their Work effectually, do form and adorn their Furnaces fairly and comely, so as they may be pleasing to the Sight: This indeed does Adorning them. give them an adornment, but there is no more done with it, than with a Common Furnace (that is made well, though plain.) Now there are many sorts of Assay-Ovens which Assayers made use of according to their several ways of working, but this is to be noted, That in one Oven, the Fire is to be better governed than in another, either by heat or cold, as the difference may be seen in the following Sculpture: But I intent to mention first, how the Ancients have made their Furnaces. Section 2 Iron Assay Ovens of the Ancients. The Common Assay-Ovens, in which the Ancients have made small Trials, they have caused to be made square, of strong iron Plates about fifteen Inches wide below, and sixteen Inches high, and sloping from below to the top, so that the square was about ten Inches at the top, and this Square had no Bottom, but in the Fire part it had a Mouth-hole (of four Inches and a half wide) and the other three sides had each of them at the Bottom a wind hole, four Inches long, and one and an half high: there was also every where about the plate, holes cut into it, so that it was ruff and sharp for the Loam to stick the better to the luting of their Furnaces. To make a good Loam. Now to make such a special good Loam, (as will hold well in the fire) take good and well▪ wrought Loam, beat among it Flocks of Wool, or Horse▪ dung, Blood of Oxen, scales of Iron and common Salt, with which lute the Furnace two inches and a half thick, let it dry, then take small ground Venice-glass, Bone-ashes, and a small quantity of Loam, mingle it well together, and plaster it all over the inside of the Furnace, let it dry well, then make a gentle fire in it, that it may be neald, and when the Furnace is to be used, there must first be a smooth fire-place, and upon that Copell-Ashes are to be laid the breadth or thickness of a finger, and this on the Furnace must be placed; and in the Oven upon the Fire-place a Muffle (which is form as the following Sculpture doth show:) and thus the Assay-Oven is made ready: and when there is any Trial to be made of the Furnace, after it is well glazed within by the last plastering over of the Furnace with the Venice-glass and Ashes, it will last the longer. And when the Furnace in length of time is quite burnt out, than the old Loam is only to be knocked out, and fresh put in the room thereof, and proceed as before. In such a Furnace, he that knows well the Government of the Fire, and is an experienced Assayer, may make all manner of Trials, only the Registers are sooner stopped with the Ashes than the Furnace with the two mouth-holes, of which there will be information hereafter. Section. 3 Norinberg Assay Ovens made of Potter's Loam. Some Assayers do use in their trial of Furnaces (which are made of Potter's Clay, and form like the abovenamed Furnace) and tie them with wire, and set them upon a foot which is broad and hollow, and hath in each of the four sides wind-holes (as the following Sculpture will show.) And in this Furnace it is more easy to govern the Fire, than in the above named Furnace, because the wind-holes in that Furnace (which are in the foot) do stop themselves easily; and such Assay-Ovens are called Proof-Ovens of Noringberg, and the Muffles appertaining to them, are also seen in the Sculpture. Section. 4 A slight Assay Oven of jiles. But if a man should be in a place where no Assay-Ovens are to be had, and yet would assay a few trials in haste; in such case, Take only a few Tiles, place them together in a square, and leave in the sides Wind-holes, and in the forepart leave also a Mouth-hole, and with a Pipkin cut in two, make a Muffle in it, and in such Furnaces Assays and trials may be well performed. Section. 5 Assay Ovens in which the fire is best governed. But in such Assay Ovens, in which most commodiously Assays may be made, and in which the Fire may be right and duly governed, also as such as are not easily stopped with ashes, and in which all the Trials (that may be made in any Furnace) may be tried, they are to be made thus, viz. eleven Inches wide, and sixteen inches high, which is the full height of the Assay-Oven, when you have measured eight inches high, then work it a little in, also that the Oven at the top may remain seven inches wide, and the thickness must be one inch and a half, and the lowermost Bottom three quarters of an inch thick, then measure from the bottom three inches high, and four inches and a half wide, which is for the lower Ovens mouth, then measure two inches above the lower Mouth-hole (which is for separating of the upper and lower Ovens mouth:) in like manner measure the height, three inches and a half, and four inches wide, then after a separation of an inch thick, make the uppermost mouth-hole about the bigness of a little finger, so that from the middle of the hole to the top of the Oven there may remain yet six inches and an half, then on both sides of the Ovens-mouth, towards the corner, measure three quarters of an Inch: and make there two holes a pretty-big Finger's widness, which must go straight through the Oven, as also the like behind: when all this is done, you must then also make a declination, from whence the Ashes may fall; which must stand two inches and a half from the bottom, and two inches and a half from the sides of the Furnace, and the declination must stretch hollow upward from the bottom, six inches and an half: Only observe this, That if you intent to make any thing of Clay, than you must add so much as the Clay useth to shrink, because one sort of Clay doth shrink more than another, but most commonly ☜ Clay doth shrink the tenth part: When this Assay-Oven is also finished, and is yet soft, then there must be edges cut in it, in which the Iron-bonds or wire may lay, after that, let it dry well in the Sun, and then let it be hard baked in a Potter's Furnace or Brick-kiln. Section. 6 There are also in like manner Assay Ovens made, which outwardly are of a square form, like the abovenamed Assay Ovens of strong Armour-plate. Furnace, and are made very neat and clean, of strong Armor-plate, and writhe with Ironpins, on which the Lute may stick well, and artificially brought together, also that such a Furnace may be taken asunder into five pieces, which Furnace, like to that of Iron-plate, must be neatly luted with a good and firm Lute, and to the strong plate of Iron at the outside of the oven, there must be little plates to put forward and backward in small Crevices, and so according to necessity the Trial may be well made: Of such Assay Ovens there is much Estimation made, but there can no more be accomplished with it, than in one of the other mentioned Furnaces, if only an Assayer have well the knowledge of the Fire, after which all Proofs are to be governed, then can he, without question, do well in all these Ovens. Deciphered. 1. An Assay-Oven used by the Ancient Refiners, joined with Iron Plates. 2. An Essay-Oven used by the Norinburgers (in Germany.) 3. The Foot of it. 4. An Assay-Oven made of Tiles joined together, which may quickly be done. 5. An Assay-Oven made of Potter's- Loam, and fastened with Iron Bonds. 6. The upper mouth-hole of it. 7. The lower mouth hole of it. 8. The holes for Iron-barrs to be put in. 9 An Assay Oven made of Armour- plates. Sculpture III. When any one of these Assay-Ovens is thus prepared, then cause two Iron-bars to be made of an equal length, which must go through the holes that are between the upper and lower Mouth-holes (Figure 6 and 7) and stand out about three Inches, on the outside of the Oven, on which the plate must rest before the upper Mouth-hole, and cause a bottom-plate to be made no bigger than from the Bars to the lower part of the upper Mouth-hole, and so broad that it may reach a little above the Iron-Bars, and from the bottom-plate towards the sides, so as there may remain near an inch of room on the Back part of the Furnace, whereby the Wind may pass through it into the Oven, so that the fire may do its work. To this Assay-Oven there belongs singular Muffles, which may be seen in their full proportions, in the fourth following Sculpture. There must be also a Cover to the Furnace, with little Instruments to be made of Potter's stuff, to govern the fire, the Forms of which are also in the fourth following Sculpture. CHAP. IU. How Muffles, Bottom-plates, Tests, and other small Potters-Work (necessary for Assayers) are to be made. Section. 1 EVERY Assayer ought to have so much knowledge, that in case of necessity he may be able to make his Assay-Ovens himself, as also his Tests, Crucibles, Muffles and what other Utensils or Instruments are daily used as necessary to Assaying, because there are not in every place Masters of this ART to be found who know how to make the same, and although much pains may be taken to instruct a Potter (in case of Necessity) how to make some Instruments belonging to this ART, yet it often happens that they do not make them well, nor in good shapes; whereby an Assayer may perform his Work: and therefore I (as well as others, when we could not have good Instruments made fitting for us) have been forced to make them ourselves, which are done thus. Section. 2 Of preparing Loam for Instruments. Take good Potters-Loam (as good as may be had) but the Loam or Day that is blue and becomes white in the fire, is found to be the best for use; Let such Loam dry in the Sun till it be hard, and when you do intend to make Instruments of it, let it be well pulverised, then moisten it with Water till it become soft, and let it be well trodden or broken with an Iron, then put among it the Washings of Pebble-stones or very fine sand, as much as the Clay can well bear, but that you may not add too much or too little, be sure to make out of such stuff some Assay-Tests or Crucibles, and put into them some hard-flowing Oar and place them in the fire, which will offer thee a Trial, whereby thou mayst see, if the stuff will hold, well, sound and firm; some do mingle among it some Chalk-stone, or the subtle red Talk or Glimmer in such place where there is much of it, but which is most necessary, Experience will teach: some take in stead of it the broken Pots or Crucibles, beaten small and sifted through a sine Seeve, and put so much among the Clay that they may work it well, because of its britleness, such Crucibles and Tests as are made of it hold well, (but when Pebble-stones, as hath been said before, are mingled with it, that it doth bind together in the fire, and the bigger the heat is, the more doth it bind) and this Proof-Test may be taken whole out of the Frame. Section. 3 Whem the Loam is prepared you must then have a Frame, in which you may beat the Proof-Test and How the Cases and Frames and Assay-Tests are made. Crucibles: the Frames are best made of Brass, but they that cannot have such may cause them to be made of good Wood of Pear-tree, and an Iron-ring may be put upon it, very closely, that the Frame, by reason of much use may not split or break: then anoint the Frame with a little Bacon, and put in it a little Ball of the prepared stuff, as much as may be enough, and grease also the upper part of the Frame, which is called the Monk, and beat the upper part with a wooden Mallet into the Case or Frame, then is the Test form; press it out with your Fingers, but have a care that the Clay be not too moist, otherwise you can not press the Assay-Test whole out: Some do put the Case with the Test upon a sudden and quick heat, and so the Test will come out whole, this is a very good way to make the small Crucibles, but with the great Assay-Tests, it would be too long and tedious. Section. 4 To make Muffles you must have wooden sticks cut To make Muffles of Clay over wooden-sticks or Fromes. in form of that bigness the Muffles must be, grease them with Bacon, and frame a Lump of Lute or Clay, of a convenient bigness, that it may be cut with a copper wire, into a thin leaf or piece, and put it over the sticks or frame, and cut out of it such another leaf, as may make it a half round piece, that you may close it behind, all this must be done upon the form, and must with a moist hand be stuck close to it: then let it stand, nigh three hours, that the Clay may be a little hardened, then cut the Muffle out, so as you will have it cut upon the sides and behind; and let it stand yet a little longer, that it may go easily from the sticks: Some do strew a little fine sand or ashes upon the Frame after it is greased with Bacon, that the Muffle may come easily from the Frame: But that many Muffles may be prepared together, therefore cause more than one of these Frames to be made, that in the mean time while one doth dry several more may be made. Section. 5 But, to the bottom Leaves or pieces you must have How the bottom of them are to be framed. Frames of Wood, in Widness as the bottom leaves are, thick and broad; they must be pressed full with the prepared Loam, than they will dry quickly, and come out easily; or cut out of a piece of Clay, a leaf with a small wire, so thick as you would have it, and shape it further as is necessary. Section. 6 Of drying and calcining the Loam for Assaying. These Tests, Muffles, Bottoms, Leaves and Crucibles thus prepared, must be very well dried, and then in a Kiln or Potters-Oven well calcined, although the Muffles and bottom Leaves are also used raw and uncalcined in the Assay-Oven, but there must be a very gentle fire, and the fire in the Assay-Oven, must first be kindled from above, downwards, and so they will remain whole, otherwise they will all fly in pieces; and thus you are fully instructed how the Potters-Clay is to be made into Instruments, and if they be not good and firm they are a great hindrance to the Assayer: the Forms of which are truly to be seen in the following Sculpture. Sculpture IU. Deciphered. 1. The Muffles which the ancient Assayers did use, and the common Assayers do still. 2. The Muffle to the Norimgberg Assay-Oven. 3. The Muffle to the Assay-Oven with the two mouthed holes. 4. Stopples. 5. Bottom Plates. 6. Covers. 7. Wooden Frames or Moulds for Muffles. 8. The lower part of an Assay-Test. 9 The upper part of an Assay Test. 10. The Frames or Moulds for Assay-Tests. 11. The lower part of the Assay-Crucible. 12. The upper part to it. 13. The Assay-Crucible perfected. 14. The small Instruments for governing the fire made of Potters-Clay. CHAP. V. Of Copels, and how they may be made firm and good. Section. 1 IT is necessary for a Refiner to have his Copels made well, because if the Copels Copels of good staff. be not made of good Loam or Day they will devour the fine Metal very much, especially when the Clar is not well made which is to be put upon the Copel, because it will rise, and so the silver Grain will be hid under it, and if the Clar be not good, the silver Grain will be lost under the Lead and not fined. Also, if the Ashes be not good, or something fat or oily, then will the Copels melt in the fire, which will prove of ill Consequence, because with such there can be no Trial made. But, that you may have good Copels, that your Trials may be the better performed, make them in this following Manner. Section. 2 Of Ashes for Copils. Take Ashes burnt from any light Wood, (as Sallows, etc. for such are best for this use) and put them into a Seeve, and pour Water on them that the Ashes may be washed through the Seeve into a Tub, so the Coals and grosser parts may remain in the Seeve, then pour into the Tub so much water more, that the Ashes may be covered-over, then stir it about, and let it stand an hour or two: whereby the water will draw out the fatness and oilyness out of the Ashes, then pour the remaining water very gently off, that the thick troubled water may not go along with the clear water; and then pour another water on it, and let it stand also till the upper water grow clear; then pour it again gently off, and this do till the water hath no fatness or sharpness: then the third time pour clear water on the Ashes and stir them about with a stick, as before, and pour that water, whilst it is thick and muddy, into another Tub, that the gross part of the Ashes in the first may remain till the water in the other Tub be clear and well settled; then let the water run clear from it again, this is the first clearing: then pour another water upon the washed settled Ashes, and stir them again with a stick, then pour the thick again into another Tub or Boul, that is to try if there remains any Fatness or gross Ashes, that it may all be cleanly separated, and let the muddy water settle very well because it is the last washing: and when the Ashes are thus far prepared, then make Balls thereof, let them dry well in the Sun, or in a Baker's Oven, and keep them clean for use. Section. 3 Of Vine-wood ashes and common Ashes. There are some Refiners that in stead of Ashes (burnt off light Wood) do take Ashes of Vine-wood, (but they are not everywhere to be had) and they do wash and prepare them as abovesaid, some do use only such Ashes of which the common Lixivium or Lye is made, but the two former are better, which you will also find by use and Experience, only there must be a care that the Ashes be clear and well prepared. Section. 4 Secondly, You must have to your Copels good Of Bone-ashes, and which Bones are most serviceable. and clean Bone-Ashes, for which take Bones that have no Marrow or Gravy, and burn them white, pulverize, and pass them through a hair Seeve, then grind them upon a stone, like Meal, and so you have Bone-Ashes prepared: then take two parts of the washed Ashes which have first passed through the hair Seeve, that they may not remain in Lumps; and with one part of the ground Bone-Ashes, and mingle these two well together, and moisten them with strong-Beer (but first let the Beer boil away one third) or, with a Glew-water: But, if you will bestow something more upon it, then beat the whites of Eggs in water, and moisten the Ashes therewith, but not too much, that when you press a handful together, the Ash-ball may well remain entire: then let the Copel-case be well filled with Ashes and put in, but be sure to scrape the superfluous Ashes off it, Munich. and give the Monk three or four blows with a wooden Mallet upon the Copel-frame, wipe the Monk clean off, and strew (with a little wooden shovel) good Clar upon the Copel, while 'tis yet in the Case, and part the Clar, with your finger, and set the Monk straight upon it again, and give two or three Blows to fasten the Clar upon the Copel (as necessity doth require) that the Clar may be fixed upon it, then take the Monk off, press upon other Ashes the Copel out of the Case, so is the Copel ready; in such a manner may you make Copels great and small, then let them dry till you have need of them, so will they be firm and good. Some do use a special Instrument made of Latin Section 5 which is full of little holes at the bottom, in which they put the Clar, and with a wire that hath underneath a An Instrument to strew the Clar. little cross- Plate, they cause it to run through, but I do not like it so well, as if it were parted with the finger. Some do take also among the Copel-Ashes the tenth Section. 6 Of Glue for Copels. part of good Potters-Loam (which must also be washed like unto the Copel-Ashes) and dry it in the Sun, and this is necessary to be used with it, and when the Clay is good and holds well in the fire: otherwise it may do more hurt than good in the Copels, and I conclude, when a man hath good Ashes that are well washed (as I have hinted before) good Copels may be made that need no mixture, and those Ashes may well be moistened with fair water, but the Copels are more brickle by it, and not so firm, as with the strong Beer or glew-water. CHAP. VI How good Copels may be made, wherein the Trials will not leap nor sparkle. SUCH Copels as I have hitherto thought Section. 1 fit to mention, are good to be used, by which the true quantity and proof may be found in them, when the Governance of the Fire is well observed, but if this be not minded, and the Copel be cool and hot, than some part of the Silver is soon lost, but if an Assayer is uncertain in the Silver and Money-proofs, and hath not a full knowledge of the Fire, it is better for him to cause the following Copels be made for Trials. Section. 2 Let Knuckle-Bones, or other Bones be burnt very Bones for Copels. white (the Calves or Sheeps-bones are best) among common Bones) stamp them fine, and grind them upon a Grind stone fine as flower, then mosten such subtle bone-ashes (like other Copel-Ashes) with strong Beer, and of this make Copels, and strew Clar on them, as hath been done with the other before named Copels, and let them dry; so are they prepared. Section. 3 But good and clean Bones of Fishes may be had, (which of all Bone-Ashes are the best to be used for Copels.) When you would assay upon these Copels, set them in the Proof-Oven, and when they are only glowing hot, then put what you do intend to try in then, and although they are only thus, the Proofs will not leap, but be purely finished: only this is to be noted, that the Assays upon these Copels are much colder, longer and go more subtly than upon the other Copels, therefore there cannot easily any thing of Silver be lost; and when the proof is finished than may the Grain be taken off very pure and clean, and nothing stick to it, although it had been a Coppery-Silver that was refined in it, which Grains do commonly enter into the Clar, and they cannot always be taken off cleanly from other Copels. CHAP. VII. How good Clar is to be made. Section. 1 IT is necessary that good Clar must be had for the making of Copells, because if the same be not good, then there can be no good Copels made, although the Ashes be prepared as well as can be. Now (as for my part) I have with Diligence tried many Bones, and have found that Calve's-head Bones or the Scales that come from their Forehead are the best: Take them and wash them from a boiling hot water, or let them boil well in the water, that the fatness and foulness may be separated from the other, then dry them and burn them until they be fair and white, than stamp and grind them on a stone, still moistening them with a little water, and put them in a glazed Pot with a Cover luted on it, and set them once more in a fire or Potters-Oven, and let them burn well for four hours, then let them cool; this done, take these burnt Ashes out of the Pot, and grind them once more very fine upon a smooth (or Marble) stone, that they may be very clear (of which clear preparation, the Clar hath its Appellation or name) keep it from Dust, and it will serve for your use at any time. Section. 2 Some also do use Hartshorn to make Clar, and they Clar of Heart's horn burn it and order it as the other abovesaid, and this doth yield good Clar, but those of the Scales of Calves-heads I like better. Section. 3 There is also of Fish-bones (as Pike and other Fishes Of Fish-bone. Bones) very good Clar to be made, but the Fatness must be first separated from it, by boiling and burning them (as before) but this according to one's pleasure, and which Clar any one likes best, he may use, only he must be careful to see that they be finely ground to Powder. Section. 4 When the Clar is ground to powder, than some do How to be kept. wash it in fair water, and make foursquare Pieces of it, or Balls (like Chalk-stone) as I myself did some years since, but I find that if it be finely ground, and dried only, it is the better, because by washing and drying it, and making them into pieces or Balls, they will grow hard, and cannot be so well scraped from the Lumps, as with that which is in Powder. Now, how the Copel-Case and the Copel is to be ordered and performed the following Sculpture will show. Sculpture V. Deciphered. 1. 3. The Copel- cases. 2. 4. The Copels that are made in them. 5. The Copels as they are set upon one another. 6. The Washed Ashes (or Clar) made into Balls. 7. He that works the Ashes. 8. He that strikes the Copels into their Frames or Cases. But that the Forms and Proportions of the Copels may Section. 4 the better be seen, the following Sulpture doth demonstrate. Forms of Copels. Sculpture VI. Deciphered. 1. The Copel-Case. 2. The Copel for the Copper-Oars and common Proof of Common Oars. 3. The Copels for Oars that are poor in Silver, and also for common Oar Trials. 4. The Copel for common Siver-Tryals, which are assayed according to Weight. 5. The Copel to Starling-silver Proof. 6. How the Copels are set one upon the other in the Ovens. CHAP. VIII. How Glass of Lead, or Lead-Glass is to be made. Section. 1 FURTHER, that every one may have good and fundamental Information of what belongs to Assays, therefore I do intend, before I further proceed, to show Lead-glass to what Oars it is to be used. how the Fluss, or lead Glass must be prepared, which lead Glass is a Fluss, and is used to the very hardest and unflowing Oars, to the end that they may as easily be boiled up as the soft Oars: of which boiling, hereafter shall follow more full Direction. Section. 2 To prepare Flus or lead-glass. Prepare this Fluss or Lead-glass, thus, Take fair and white pebble-stones, burn them in a Potters-Oven, stamp them small, and pass it through an hair Seeve, pour clean water on it, and wash the Mud from it, that the powder of the pebble-stones may be clean and pure: of these pebble stones take one part, and half a part of red Littorage or Littarge, mingle it dry together, put it into a Crucible, but not above two thirds full, and put common Salt on the top of it, or Saltpetre (if such can be had) about three Finger's height above the matter, and lute it well; and let it flow together with a strong heat in a Wind-Oven or Tyle-Oven; let the Crucible cool of itself, then open it, and all will be mingled in a yellow Glass; only a little Regulus of Lead at the Bottom, which is to be separated, but preserve the Glass, which is the Fluss. Section. 3 You may also melt the Littarge first by itself, and of the slakes that come from it, take ten parts to one Another way. part of prepared pebble-stones, and cover it with Salt, (as above) cause them to flow, and so a good Lead-glass will come of it. Section. 4 Another way. Or take instead os the washed Pebbles, good washed Loam, which is dry and firmly pulverised, one part, and three parts of good red Littarge, cover it with Salt, let it flow in a strong heat, this doth yield a fair Lead glass. Section. 5 To cleanse the Lead-glass. When the Lead-glass is made, and again melted in a Crucible, put a little Niter in it, and cause it to flow a while after, so the Lead-glass will become cleaner or more flowing: or one may use among it a fourth part of Caput Mort▪ and cause them to flow together, this also causes the Fluss to become finer and more flowing. CHAP. IX. Of the Weights which belong to the proving of Silver-Oars. Section. 1 THE Centner-weight by which all Oars, Slicks or washed slake-stones and what else of this nature are proved) is by the old Assayers proportioned thus: That the Centner is ordered to be just an Hundred pound weight: for this Reason, because in many places the Oars or slake-stones, and the silvery unwashed black Copper is bought by weight, and the fine Silver in it according to the Proof (before it is melted out of it) is paid for this end, that the Buyer may not be a Loser (because of the waste in melting to get out the Silver) therefore hath he so many pounds as the Common Centner of the Mine yields (or where it doth weigh more or above) which Centner of the Mint doth commonly weigh an Hundred and ten pounds, so that he may have the ten Pounds that is above, with the Silver in it, to help to bear the loss) therefore in a well ordered melting of poor Oars they do hold most commonly 3, 4, or 5 loath of Silver, for the loss of the Silver in Melting should not be above the Silver contained in the ten Pounds of the Oar, that was over, comparing it with the proof- Centner: but in rich work and rich Oars, or concerning very rich Copper, the ten pounds which are above are also justly taken along with it. Section. 2 1 Dram. Of dividing the common Proof Centner. 1 2 Drams or half a Loth. 1 Loath or two Ounces. 2 4 8 16 1 2 4 8 16 A Pound. 25 A quarter of a Centner. 50 Half a Centner. 100 A whole Centner. Section. 3 Two sorts of Penny weights. The Peny-weights are of two sorts, the one is with us in High Germany, the other is as 'tis used in Holland, after which the Silver or Grains may be tried, upon a just proportion how much a Mark hath in it of fine Silver. 1 Heller, or Halfpenny. Section 4 Of dividing the Pennyweight in High Germany. 1 1 Pence. 2 1 Drams. 2 1 Loath, or, 4 half Ounces. 2 4 8 16 Loath is a Mark, or 256 pence. Section. 5 ½ Of dividing the Low Dutch Penny Weight. The single Grains. ½ 1 2 3 6 12 Grains is a Half penny. 1 2 Pence. 3 6 Pence is a Mark, or 288 Grains. 12 There are so much as 256 pence. The Mark in the Grain-weight, is parted into Loathes and Grains, like as the Low Dutch Peny-weight is parted into Loathes, Pence and Grains, and this Weight is most commonly used for Trials in the Crucible for Coined Money, to which it doth best serve: for this Reason, because the Grains here are reduced into greater Numbers, and the Contents more exactly found out, because in the Peny-weight it is only parted into Pence, and Halfpences, and although the fourth part of a Grain (as to its Contents) is not usually reckoned, yet it is necessary for an Assayer to have such a fourth part in his parting or sharing for Information and Exactness sake, ¼ Single Grains. ¼ ½ 1 Grains is half a Loth. 2 3 6 9 1 2 4 Loath, or two Ounces. 8 16 Loath is a Mark, or 288 Grains. CHAP. X. How all Silver-Oars are to be tried. Section. 1 I HAVE mentioned before, That a difference is to be made among Oars, because Assaying of soft flowing Oars. some are harsh, hard-flowing and raw; as also that some are soft-flowing and mild: The soft-flowing Oars are thus to be tried for Silver: Take the Oar, grind it with an Hammer upon a broad Iron, (fitted to that purpose) as small as powder, weigh of it a Section. 1 Centner (with thy Assay-weight) put it on a well-made Test, and mingle eight times as much of Lead in Grains among it, and set in a warm Assay-Oven, and presently make it hot, and set Coals before the Ovens mouth, so the Lead will begin to drive and turn quickly to Slacke or Dross, and when it hath stood so long in the Proof-Oven, that the Led upon the Test is all covered over with dross, than it hath dross enough; (this is called Boiling up or Vpboyling) then take an Iron hook, lay it that it may be a little red hot, and stir the Oar with it cleanly about, which is done for this Reason, that if there should stick any of the Oar on the sides of the Test, it may be made loose, and that the Led also may work on it, and consume it: After the stirring, let it stand a while, and then take it out of the Assay-Oven, and pour the Lead and dross upon an Iron-plate, in one of the little holes that are to be made upon the Plate, and let it cool, and then separate the dross clean from the Lead, so is the proof of the Vpboyling ready, which is done in the space of about half an hour, afterwards set Coppels in the Assay Oven, and let them glow well for half an hour, (and this is called Nealing) and upon these well neal▪ d Coppels put your Lead so wrought, which hath been boiled up, and make it warm that the same may first begin to work, and when it begins to drive, then keep the fire not too high, that the Lead or work may drive well, and go off upon the Coppel in a conveient heat, and so the Lead will all be drawn into the Coppel, and the grain of Silver will remain alone, (provided that the Oar hath Silver in it) upon the Coppel, although it be very small, then take the Coppel out of the Assay-Oven, and take with your Pincers the Grain from it, so is the proof finished: Now, how this Grain is to be weighed, with the Assay-Scales, it doth require a special diligence; and of this you shall be more exactly instructed afterwards. Section. 2 You shall Assay these harsh and hard flowing Oars in Trials of harsh Oars. this manner, Take the Oar ground small, and weigh of it a Centner with your Assay-weight, put it on a good Test, and add to it its due weight of Lead, to wit, Fourteen Centners: set it in an Assay-Oven, and give it presently heat, that the Led in the Assay-Test may begin to drive, as you have done with the soft-flowing Oars, and when the Lead begins to drive, then let it be cold again, which will be, when you do shut the lower mouth-hole, and do open the upper, then will the Oar rise, and come to be roasted upon the Lead; when it is roasted enough upon the Lead (that is when it is seen to leave smoking much and begins to slack) then mayst thou give it heat again, as much as can be. This happens when you do lay Coals before the upper Mouth-hole of the Assay-Oven, so the great heat will force it, that the Oar will turn to slacks, but it doth slack small and not easily, and when the Oar is almost boiled up, and hath slacked finely, then stir it cleanly with an Iron-hook, let it stand again a pretty while in the Oven, and when all is turned to fine slakes, then pour it as before upon a Plate hollowed, or let it cool in the Test, and beat the slacks from it, so is the proof of upboyling ready. Section. 3 A quick upboyling of Silver Oars In such manner, almost, may all Pebbles or raw Oar be boiled up, and this is a right and good way to do it, but the upboyling is hardly done in an hour, yet it may be done sooner in this manner; when you have weighed your Oar, and set it on the Test without Lead in the Assay-Oven, give first some heat until the oar upon the Test is roasted, and smoke no more: then set the Lead, (as much as belongs to the Trial) upon the Test; give it a great heat, so will the Oar boil up something easier, and in less time than if it should have been roasted upon the Lead. Section. 3 Although there are some that believe such a Trial in which the Oar also is roasted without Lead) is false and not right, yet I do give this Information, That I have oftentimes, (with one sort or other) tried both ways, and I do truly affirm, That I have found no difference: But there must be a Care taken, that when the Oar is set alone upon the Test, that it may not be put into a violent sudden heat, because such an heat doth raise the small Oar, and doth cause it to dust away, especially when the Oars are stony, for it makes the Trial false (this excepted) I know no fault, but be careful and you will find it true. Section. 4 Another way to try raw Oar. Some have also another way to try raw mild Oar; as thus, They set first the Test in the Oven, that it may glow, and then put the Lead in it, and let it by itself slack pretty well, after that put upon the slacked Led, the weighed Oar in small Papers, so the hot Lead, and hot Slack will draw the Oar quickly to itself, and will not let it rise much, or boil up very well: this way I also like, only that in drawing the Oar upon the hot Lead, (especially the mild Oars) it will dust, and when there are many Proofs to be made together, there will something be neglected, and the Proofs may become false. Section. 5 If one doth know the Nature and Property of such Oars as will not easily boil or slack, but remain upon the Lead (for so will the Chalk-stones) the gross and raw blind or Cobolt, the mispeckle, as also the mild and fresh Pebbles and water-pibbles which must (assoonas they are weighed) be mingled with Flus or Lead-glass (as hath been before mentioned) which will hold the raw Oar, and doth not suffer it to rise high, because it hath help by the Lead-glass, so that it will become soft Slacks and slacks well, and boils up clean, as may be seen in melting: harsh Oars (which in Vpboyling each one by his proper addition may be helped) that they will be well separated, or else there will remain some Silver in the slacks, and so there would be some Damage. Section. 6 Of Assaying the Copper slacky Oar. In S. Joakims Valley (so called) there are Oars broken, which are called Coppery-Oars or flaky Oars, when they are once boiled up, the Work or lead will not go off upon the Coppel, but casts up a Ring or border, and eats much in, and makes the Proof false: and when this is known by an Oar, then must the work or Led which hath been boiled up (and from which the dross is separated) be again set upon the Test, and be slacked again, and then the Lead will come off clean and white; This is called, the Led cleansed of its Foulness, than it must go off upon the Coppel, as before. Section. 7 Cleansing of the gross sulphury Flints after Vpboyling. It happens also often, that the gross Sulphury oars do also make the Led black and harsh, also that upon a well nealed Coppel it doth not drive, but leap off, which makes the Trials oftentimes come false, because of its Foulness, such Led you must once more set upon a new Test or upon the same, and let it slack again, so will it be white and clean and go well off upon the Coppel, and lose nothing. Section. 8 To try Cobolt Oars. Concerning the Cobolt oars, there are many sorts of them, some fresh and some mild, black and grey, some in trying do go easily into the Lead, but such Lead that comes by Vpboyling from it, is black and red, and it afterwards doth work upon the Coppel, and dissolves, therefore it must after the first Vpboyling, be cleansed again of its Wildness and must be slackd once more, so it will become white, and go clean off from the Coppel: One may also set the weightiest Cobolt Oar in a Test in the Oven, and let the smoke pass away, some of which sort do leave grey Ashes, and some a black grain upon the Test, and the rest will burn all away, but put a little Lead to it, and it will easily go in it, and also go clean off from the Coppel, and is found alike with the other Trials. Section. 9 But some do take it as abovementioned, That when the raw oar upon the Test is roasted without Lead, the Roasting Oar in the Ovens. roasting doth take away some of the Silver, and that the gross Sulphur doth carry it away, and they will demonstrate it by some volatile raw Flints, and the raw slackestone, which comes from it; which after they are roasted do not yield so much Silver as if they were melted raw through the Furnace, to which I do yield, and have found the same true: But because the roasting generally in the great Work with quantities of oars is done in the naked fire, in which it also must lie several hours▪ chose in the Assay-oven and small Proofs there is but little oar put in, and that in a close Fire is roasted in a short time, I judge for certain, that through such roasting of the Oars in the Assay oven, nothing can be lost of the Silver. Section. 10 Probation by which the right and full worth may be found. Some may ask, If this way of using, trying and boiling up of Oars in the Test (and to let them so go off in the Test) be the right way, or no, by which the true worth, and how much Silver the Oar contains in it may be known? To which I answer, That this is the right proving, after which the melting Works may be ordered, and set up: But the true worth, how much Silver the Oar hath in it, is not found there. But to know this, Set a great Coppel (as is used to Copper Assays for Silver) in the Assay-oven, and neal it well, and put sixteen Centners of Lead in it, let it begin to drive, than put one Centner of the ground-oar, which must be parted into many parts, and put it in small Papers, one after another, when the one part doth come first on it, it will seem stubborn upon the Lead, and will cover it all over, but let not this hinder thee; Do it first a little cool, and then hot, so it will soon slack in the Section. 10 Coppel, and the slacks will pass away, then set an other part of the Oar on the Lead, and that will do like the first, which slacks will soon pass away, then put in like manner the Oar all singly upon the Lead, and it will all pass clean away in the Coppel, so that it will hardly be discerned, but seem like any other work upon the Coppel. In this manner may all other Works (if they be flowing or harsh, as also melted slack stone and Copper stone) be tried through; in which you will find a great difference, if you try the other usual Way of Refining, but this way cannot be used generally, except of all Oars that are melted, to slacks which are not altogether without Silver; therefore the common way of Assaying (with the Vpboyling upon Tests, of which all slacks do come, which cannot be wholly without Silver) is the best way: I have only mentioned these Assays, to demonstrate, That with the same (out of every Oar) the right and full worth of Silver may be found in it, as fully as in the other Common Assays: For several years, some worthy Assayers have weighed the Oars with the Centner-weight, Section. 11 To try with Lead glass. which they intended to try upon silver Proofs mingled with Lead-glass, and covered with Salt in a Crucible, and placed it before the Bellows, and did melt it into a Regulus, after which when the Crucible was cold, then have they beaten out the Regulus, and together with the slacks have set it again upon a Test in an Assay-Oven, and caused it to slack fully, which way is nothing worth, especially when many Oar-Proofs are to be made: then Refiners have soon seen it, and have When many Oars are▪ to be tried. thereupon ordered their Trials according to our way. Here I must mention also, That when an Assayer hath daily much to try (to whose hands without Question harsh and hard▪ flowing Oars come often) and if he be then well skilled he knoweth by much and daily Experience and Practice) how each Oar is in the Trial; therefore when he hath prepared the Oar for Assaying (and so he must because of the many sorts) use a bigger Assay-oven, that he may set several Proofs together at Work, whereby his Trials may be made the sooner, and must keep this Order, when he will set his Assays in the Oven, if they be 8, 9, or more, he must place them accordingly upon the Assays, which are prepared in this manner; viz. That always the hard-flowing Oars may be hindmost in the Oven, and that the soft-flowing may stand before: for they are soon boiled up, and so may be taken out of the Oven without hindrance to those that must be longest in the fire, and then be cast upon an Iron- plate, which Plate must be made thus, It must have as many Holes and Vents as there are Tests to be set in the oven at once: so that each Oar may be poured out from its own hole, that you may not mistake: But if it should happen that (because of thy many Trials) you must have above one Furnace, than put all the hard-flowing Oars into one Furnace, and the soft-flowing into the other; otherwise you must stay one Trial for the other, which would be an hindrance. This way of Assaying is at Kuttingburgh (because of the great Oar-Trade in common use there) so that in some places every Week 200 Trials of Oars are made, and the Contents are delivered to a Dram. Section 13 To assay to a Dram▪ Take Notice, That it is with this, as with other Trials, (as was before mentioned) only have a Care that you make use of an Assay-weight which may not be too little, and to have good and quick Scales upon which you may know the weight to a dram, or the fourth part of an Ounce, so than if you do well with the Proof in the Fire, then may you safely and surely give in the true Contents of as many Loathes and Drams as you do find, after that one is weighed. Section. 14 Further, take Notice, That when thy Trial is made and that you will draw up or weigh your small proofgrains, How to weigh the tried grain. let your Scales be kept in a Case of Glass (that the same may be preserved from the Wind and Dust) then put into the one Scale the small grain of Silver, and into the other the grain of Lead (as small as it is) and put as much of the Assay-weight to it, that it may stand even with the grain in the other Scale, when this is done, then change the Scales that are in the Proof-scales, and see if the Scales stand even as before, if then the Proof be found alike on the one side as on the other, and just with the weight, then may the same be judged true, and be given in. Section. 15 To boil rich Oar with Fluss. Such silver Oars as are very rich may also with the Fluss (made of Salt-petar and Argol asshall follow hereafter) be mingled and put into a Crucible and covered over with Salt, and may be melted like unto the Copper Oars before the Bellows, and there will be a silver Regulus, in the bottom of the Crucible (which is not very tough nor pure, because of other incorporated Metals) the which you may make fully tough upon a Test, and in this manner the silver is very easily to be had out, but it is not the true Contents, because the Slacks do yet contain part of the Silver in them, the grain also doth not come very fine from the Test except it be done upon the Coppel. CHAP. XI. How poor Oars of Silver are to be Assayed. Section▪ 1 AS for poor and unclean silver Oars which are mingled with stones (and yet may be washed off with water) Assay them thus; stamp and grind them in an Iron Morter very fine (like flower) mingle all well together; and weigh 28 Centners of it with the Assay weights, than put it into a smooth Tub, wash it with water till it remain like a fine slick or Clay, then weigh this wet slick and you will find how much those Oars do weigh and afford of clean slick, in one Centre (because the slicks that are made clean by washing are also weiged wet) try it upon silver (as you have been taught above) after such a Proof you may make your Accounts: and if by preparing and working thus you can subsist: such a Proof hath preserved many an Assayer from danger of loss. CHAP. XII. To try Muddy-water springs of Silver. Section. 1 SOMETIMES it comes to pass that from mild silver Veins, there springs out of the Mountain a blackish or yellowish muddy water, which doth often contain Silver: this you must try thus, Take a Potfull of this Water, boil it that there may remain a slime or settlement, weigh this, and do with it as with other Silver Oar, so will you find what it contains. CHAP. XIII. How a true Lead-Grain which is usually drawn off in the Proof, is to be made. Section. 1 EVERY Assayer hath need to have great Care of the Lead-grain which he may make of the Lead that he uses daily more than one grain, that he may be certain, because all Lead, almost, doth contain Silver, and although the Led of Villach is counted the best for to assay withal, yet there is but little to be found of it that is quite without Silver. Section. 2 So then there is no grounding upon this, because The Lead of Villach not without Silver. unexpert Assayers that do run off upon the Copel four Centners of Lead, and when they find no Silver therein, do therefore conclude that there is no Silver in the Lead, but there is need to run off so much Lead upon the Coppel, as much as is required to every Assay, and to try it more than once, and if then there is found nothing in all this, then may it be concluded, That the Lead holds no Silver, and yet one is not to rely altogether upon it, but an Assayer is to prove his Lead several times over and over, again: that if a piece or lump should differ one from another (because the Pieces of Lead are not all cast at once in the smelting House where it is made) that he may be certain of his Lead, which is of much concernment: and so you will find that also the Villach-Lead doth leave a grain of Silver when the full weight of Lead is assayed, which silver-grain is to be laid upon the Scales with the Assay-weight, that it may be abated from the other Grain of Silver which came from the Proof-Oar. Section. 3 Further some Assayers are of the mind, That if there is a little Copper added that holds no Silver at all, and The Lead-grain with the Addition of Copper. doth cause it to go off on the Coppel, that then the Lead-grain is found the better: this is well, if one desires to try Copper upon Silver, and so to make the Lead-grain; but to Oar-proofs, and to other things which are not Coppery such a Lead-grain must not be used. Section. 4 To make another Lead grain▪ Because all Oar-Tryals do slack in the proving such as are very rich of Lead, and yet do afford some Silver: the Opinion of some is, to take the weight of Lead, and a Centner of Earth of the Mine or common Oar which hath little or no silver, and boil them up together, that they may turn to slacks, as is done with the Oar-Tryals; then the slacks will draw in part of the Lead grain, which is to be counted for a true Lead-grain for use. But I judge because the Led grain is otherwise poor, that the Difference herein is not great, yet it is left to every one's pleasure to make use of his own way. CHAP. XIV. How a Slackstone or Copper-stone is to be made, and to be tried for Silver, and what the Slackstone is. Section. 1 What Slackstone is. SLACKSTONES (as the Philosophers do judge) are Sulphur and Arsenic mingled with a subtle Earth, and doth separate in fusion from the Dross, and doth draw the Copper and Silver to itself, demonstrated thus; The Brimstone in the beginning doth roast away, and the Arsenic doth sublime itself with a strong heat, but the Earth in which the Silver is and the Copper doth remain, which is afterwards easily brought to slacks, that the Metal may be separated, which otherwise could not be if the Arsenic had been with it, from hence may be known how to draw the Silver and Copper out of the Slackstone, so can it be no otherwise than to separate the Sulphur and Arsenic first from it, which is done by roasting, as may be seen in the great works of Smelting; thus, that the Slackstone in the beginning may have but small heat (and not a strong fire) so that the Section. 2 To separate it from Sulphur. cold Air may easily fall upon it, and cause the venomous Sulphur to rise, (which doth fly from cold, and ☞ loves the heat) and so doth easily separate, which otherwise doth stay in a violent heat, and remains always Slack stone, and is afterwards not so easily separated, yet a small heat only doth it not, therefore in roasting, the fire must be increased by degrees, and in the End, when the Sulphur is almost roasted away from the Slack stone, then with a strong fire the remaining Sulphur and Arsenic must be driven away, although the roast should flow with it, yet it is no hurt to it: I do write this, That it may be seen, that the Searchers of Nature, have also with Diligence searched into these things, and that Roasting hath had its rise from thence. Which way the Cakes are to be knocked out. When the Red Slacks or Copper-stones are prepared and the Cakes set upon one another, and you are willing to try them for Silver, then beat out of every Cake a piece, not quite in the middle nor quite at the ☞ end, which is the best for proof (because the Silver runs toward the Cold) so that the stone-Cakes are found richer at the end than in the midst:) Take all the pieces that are cut out, mingle them together, and make a proof of it (this is called Younger proof) which you may grind very small, and weigh of it a Centner with thy Assay-weight, and assay such a Stone (as you have been taught above) and as hath been done with the harsh Oars, put presently its due of Lead to it, and let it first roast off upon the same. In the end give it good heat, that the proof may be boiled up; But because this Proof is of much Concernment, therefore take sixteen weight of Lead, that the Trial may have enough, because for a Trial it is better to have the weights of Lead too much than too little. CHAP. XV. To try Hard Work and Copper-Laech upon Silver. Section. 1 DRY and fat hard Work or Copper Laech some Founders (especially them of Cuttenberg) Two Sorts of Hard Work. do use for an Addition to work the silvery Oars into slacks, that such Addition may be rich in Copper, and that fresh Cakes may be cast, and the Silver separated, to which in Comparison to common Refining, there belongs a particular Account and Understanding, for such dry and fat Hard Work must be tried for Silver, like unto a Leadish black Copper (which is almost one thing) and of which there will soon follow Direction. CHAP. XVI. To Assay melted Speiz, and what it is. Section. 1 THE Spiez Oar is in many places (especially in Joakim's Valley) and is found What Speiz is. out in melting: the Philosophers do think that it consists of Arsenic and Brimstone mingled with a subtle Earth, which doth separate itself from the slacks, like unto the Copper slack stones, only in the Spiez Oar and the slack stone there is this Difference: For, as the Brimstone doth surpass (as abovesaid) the Arsenic, so in the Spiezy Oar the Arsenic surpasseth the Brimstone: therefore the Speiz is whiter than the Slackstone, and doth loose but little either in the strong, or small fire, nor by roasting; nor can it be overcome ☞ by Lead, but is always found again, and doth loose but little; only this is necessary to be known, that when the Speize is melted in the flintish-Lead Oar gently, and not Section. 2 To take the Silver out of Speize. overheated, and doth then mingle with the slacks of Iron and (according to the manner of the City of Goslar) doth melt among the light Dust, so comes the Speiz to be lost, and none of it is found again, and the Silver enters into the Lead, which is caused by the Antimony in the Lead-oar, and the red Sulphur in the Flints: which are both again in the Arsenic. But when there is a desire to Assay the Speiz for Silver, you must grind it small, and weigh it, and with so much Lead (as a slackstone hath need of) set it on a Test in an Assay oven, and in the beginning a great Grain of speiz will be found swimming upon the Lead, which cannot be consumed by it, some Refiners do take this Grain with Pincers out of the Lead, and although the silver of the speiz doth enter into the Lead, yet without question such Grain doth contain some silver: But that the full Contents thereof may be found out, Leave the Grain on the Test, and add to the speiz on the Test, some filings of Iron, that hath no silver, and then the speiz will be quite consumed, and become dross or slacks. CHAP. XVII. How Black Copper is to be melted and cast into Ingots. Section. 1 THERE are many sorts of Black Copper, one part is very good, but others unclean Difference of the Black Coppers. and harsh, as Iron-slacky, leadish, speizy, and also sometimes tinny, according as a Copper Oar doth break by another metallic Oar, or, if any of them hath veins through the Copper Oars, such a Metal comes to be mingled with the Copper, and is the worse for it. So then, if you will cut out such black Copper and will cast an Ingot of it, Take of the Cakes which have been How black Copper is to be cut out. made upon the roast at once into Copper, cut a small piece of every Cake above and under, and not quite in the middle, nor at the end, according to proportion and bigness of the Cake; and here you must be careful that you do not cut a small piece out of a great Cake, nor a great piece out of a small Cake, because one Cake contains more silver than the other, and so a Proof may be soon made false. How the Proof-Ingot is to be cast. When the Cakes are all cut out, then put all the pieces into a Crucible, melt them before the Bellows together, and when the Copper begins to flow and drive, then stir it about with a dry splinter or stick, and let it stand a little longer, then take a clean Ingot rubbed with a little tallow, and cast the Copper into it, all at once, that nothing remain in the Crucible, but set the Ingot smooth, that the Copper may be no thicker at one end than the other, because where the Ingot doth hang, the Copper runs that way, and is richer there in silver, especially in rich Copper. You must also quench in water the cast Ingot, if the Copper hath not been leady or tinny, and with a hard Charcoal the tallow may be scoured off, and the Ingot cleansed, but the Lead and Coppery cast Ingot must be left cooling in the Ingot, that the Lead may not rise up, so is the Ingot finished, which is to be cut halfthrough the Ingot, and beat it cross way, then with a Hammer and Chisel strike it into two, so in the breadth the goodness of the Copper may be seen, and how the Ingot hath been together: and one half is to be given to the Buyer, and the other to the Seller, that if there should be an Error in the Proof than the Ingot might be assayed again. Section. 4 It is also necessary to know, that if the Copper doth Difference of the Proof Ingot. drive too long in the Crucible, it doth waste and become richer in the Contents, which is easily to be seen, besides, if the Ingot be cast too hot, it will be in some places full of little holes, also if it is not all over smooth, but wrinkly and with knots, than it is cast too cold, so it is not found alike in Contents: if any of this happens in Casting by negligence, than such an Ingot is to be done away, and the Copper Cakes again cut out, to cast another Ingot, and thereby you will fine the right proof, and contents; because if the first should be melted and cast again, than it must drive again in the Crucible, and the Copper would waste more, so the Contents would be richer, and the Trial false. Section. 5 If you intent to assay such, Cast Copper Ingots for silver: Cut (with a Chissel) at the end of the Ingot a Assaying the Ingot. little piece, put that away and cut another, beat it flat upon a clean Anvil, or, if 'tis brittle, then to small bits, which you may weigh and assay thus: weigh of such pieces equally two Centners, put each in a small paper by itself, make it so that it may lie flat in the papers, and not in heaps, put also two great well-made and well nealed Coppels in the Assay-oven, in the middle under the Muffle, and in each sixteen Centners of good clean Lead: but before all this, make a flame in the Oven with a Copper pipe, and the Oven and Coppel must be clean that no Ashes may remain in it, make it at the beginning warm, and when it begins to glow, and when the Lead doth go upon the Coppel, and doth not leap; then put the weighed Copper upon it; make it hot again until it begins to melt or to go fresh. After this open the upper Mouth-hole, and shut the lower, cover the Oven with a Cover, yet not quite close, but that it may remain open about an inch wide, or as necessity doth require; Afterwards set behind (and upon the sides of the Muffle) the little Instruments, so the Copper will soon begin to go, then let it have a requisite Coldness (because the Copper among other Metals (tried for silver) can endure the most cold. And after it hath ☜ gone a while cold, then lay before the upper Mouth-hole a few live coals that do not sparkle, or, if you do make your trial in the Furnace made of Armour-plate, as in Sculpture iii. Figure 9 then put before the upper Ovens-mouth the little plate full of holes, and govern the fire with such live Coals on the plate with holes, or by moving the Cover above, that the trial may be hotter and hotter until the end, then take the Cover Section. 6 quite from the Oven, and cause the Grain of Silver to be all over bright and clean from spots, because the Copper Assay and government of the fire is of much concernment, The Regiment of the fire. and is accounted so, because it is necessary to know how to give heat and cold (as it requires) if the same be duly performed) but if it is not so, and that the trial be too hot, then there will be an ounce of Silver less in a Centner of rich Copper, and the Contents will be found so much poorer, but because such a Knowledge and Government of the fire cannot be described, but is learned only out of much Experience, therefore do I rest here: But yet know thus much, that if the Proof on the Coppel doth grow high and clear, than it is hot, but if it doth go flat and darkish, then doth it go cold; ☞ There must in the Copper Assay in all Trials, the middle way is to be observed, and the true contents will be found: although young Assayers do much esteem their own Works, and do slight knowledge of the fire, yet it is certain, as the Copper for silver by such means is right assayed, so must it be done with all other Copper Trials, and he that is well acquainted with such Copper proof in the fire, he will want nothing in other Trials, as hath been said. Section. 7 Of the Grain produced from the Assay. Thus, when the Grains of such two trials have twinkled, fresh and clean, then take the Coppel out of the Oven, and take the Grains off, while the Coppel is yet hot, so they will part clean from the clear, and the Coppels which bring the yellow subtle Littarge always with it. Provided it hath had its due Heats and Colds (as hath been said before) but if it hath had too great heats then there will be no Littarge and it is not good to trust to such Trials, but when the two Assay Grains in the drawing up of the Scales are of a like weight, then is it a sign that the proof hath been well made, but if they differ, although the Trials have been diligently performed, yet there is no certainty to ground upon it, and it is better that such be made anew; but forget not when you do intend to draw up the Proof with thy weight, to put it in the scales with thy weight lead grain of the Assay lead, and to beat it off from thy proof grains, although it be very small. Section. 8 Another way to try Copper for Silver. One may as well lay the weighed copper first upon the coppel, and let it glow well, and afterwards the due weight of Lead, which is as well; only the coppel must first be well warmed, otherwise the Lead will leap upon it, and the proof become false, which cannot be by the former way, because if the Lead which is set first alone upon the Coppel should leap, it may then quickly be made still again, if a live Coal be laid a little while on the top of it, and afterwards put the Copper upon it, so it will not hinder the Trial. Section. 9 Proof Instruments to have great care of Further, every Assayer ought to know when the Coppels are not made of good Ashes and well prepared, for hereby they become tender, and will rob the proof of some Silver; likewise, when he doth use a new Assay-Oven, to which he is not used, and doth not know well the Degrees of fire in it, so it is better that he may learn first to know well the nature of his Coppel and Oven, that he may trust to it, and this may be done in the following manner: Take a Copper Ingot, of which a Centner contains about forty Loath, or twenty Ounces of Silver (which in many Trials hath been found of a certain Content) and of this make one or two Trials one after another, as often as you do intend to change your Instruments; then, if you find the first contents, you are certain of your Instruments, and there is no fault in them. Section. 10 Concerning the black-iron-streamy-slacky and raw Copper they are not to be assayed like the abovenamed good Proving of the black & raw Copper Copper upon the Coppel, therefore when you do intend to try such, beat them small and weigh of them two equal Centners, put each of them in a particular clean Test, place them in an Assay-Oven, and when they are glowing through, put to every Trial its due proportion of Lead, to wit, sixteen Centners (like them before) and make them warm, and so they will begin to slack, but you must not let them slack too much, for then the Lead will enter into the slacks, and there will remain too little Lead with the Copper, and so cannot go clean off, but if the proofs be right boiled up, then take them out, and let them cool in the Tests; afterwards separate the dross from it, and cause the Lead or work to go off upon the Coppel, as cold as can be, yet so as that the proofs (as hath been taught before) may not congeal too soon, but appear pure and bright, and hereby you will have the true Contents, because such unclean coppers when they are not boiled up at first, but enter raw upon the Coppel into the Lead, than they do slack upon the Coppel and fret on it, and the proofs must be hotter, so that the true contents cannot be exactly found out. Section. 11 The weight of the Coppels. Further also, I cannot leave unmentioned, That the Coppels after the proving of Copper do always come heavyer out of the fire, than they were set▪ in at first, ☞ which thing although it brings little profit to a Refiner to know; yet it is to be wondered, what the cause of it might be. CHAP. XVIII. To try Bell-metal for Silver. Section. 1 BELL-metal, of old broken-Bells (which is sometimes rich in Silver) must be tried Bell Metal. like unto the black raw Copper; but because of the Tin that is in it, it must be boiled up stronger, therefore there must be to such Trials, four parts more of Lead than to Copper, by which also the Lead doth loose more: Or, weigh of such Bell-metal only half a Centner, and allow to it so much Lead, as to a Centner of Copper, so it will slack clean, and there will remain enough of Lead with it, (after it is boiled up) to drive off in the Coppel. CHAP. XIX. How old Silver-plate or Coin is to be made into Grains. Section. 1 For what the Graining of Silver is profitable. GRAINING of Silver is done for the most part when bad, broken or other forbidden Money (coined in Hand) that the same may be all melted together and afterwards to Assay it, and to fit it for better coining, that also the bad Money may be rooted out of it: this is to be done thus; When there is much of it to be granulated, then must there first be a furnishing of necessary Instruments, viz. Crucibles and Wind-Ovens, that one may easily granulate a great quantity of Silver in Plate or coin, and when you have all Necessaries, than set the crucible empty into the wind-oven, a good hand-breadth higher than the grate, and cover it with an Iron▪ cover, cover the crucible all over with coals and ashes, and upon them live coals, let the fire kindle from above downwards, than you need not fear, that it will be cracked (as it happens sometimes Section. 2 when it is set in a sudden heat) and when the crucible Why the Crucible so easily breaks hath been set thus in the fire, and that the fire hath well kindled downwards, so that the crucible is red hot all over, then uncover it, and see if it is yet whole, and hath no crack, which is soon seen in the glowing heat, then put in the Silver that hath been first weighed in the crucible, and cover it, put coals over it, and give it a strong heat, that the Silver may sink, then may you put more Silver, if you have it into the crucible, and give it fire again, that it may sink, and also follow it with the Silver, until the crucible be full, when that is done, then give it fire enough, so long till the Silver in the crucible begins to drive, and when thou seest it drive then throw upon the Silver (in the Crucible) coal-dust, or Ashes that the Silver may be covered with it all over; stir it well about with a glowing hot iron hook, and afterwards with a small warm Crucible take the Silver out of the greater Crucible, and pour it in cold water. Section. 3 To granulate the Silver round. If you will have round Grains, then pour the Silver through a wet Broom, but if you will have your Silver hollow and thin for separation then stir the water with a stick well about and pour the silver into the boiling water, so will it become hollow and thin, or granulate it over a * Waltzen. Role, (which being half in and half out, the water will run about, so will it be hollow, after it is granulated; then pour the water off from the Grains, and dry them in a Copper basin over the fire. Section. 4 But if there be many to be melted and granulated; the Crucible is to be set likewise into the wind Oven, and first kindle the fire by degrees, that it grow warm, that you may see if the Crucible doth remain whole, because How to govern the fire. if the same in the first kindling doth remain whole, it will hold well in melting, provided the first be well tended, so that the Crucible may not stand naked, but that it may have a like heat, because the place that is left naked the cold doth work upon it, and in that part doth easily ☜ break, therefore it is necessary to put the coals sometimes down about the Crucible with an iron Instrument, that the Crucible may by preserved, and when the Crucible is glowing warm and whole, then put with an iron Instrument (which is made purposely for it) the old Silver therein, that the Crucible may be heaped full, and put the cover upon it, and afterwards coals, and give it convenient heat, and the Silver will easily sink down, and still go on in putting in Money so long till the Crucible be full with the melted stuff, and then give it a strong fire or two, that it may be fully hot in the Crucible, and when you see that it doth cast a black Scum upon the Crucible (which scum you must take off with a Scummer full of holes, and let it be cold) then sift it through a fine hair seeve, that the grains of Silver which have been taken (with the scummer) out of the Crucible may be put to the other Grains; keeping the black dust that falls through the hair Seeve, because there is yet silver in it, which afterwards you may make to profit; when you have taken all the scum from the Crucible, than cast again some clean coal- dust upon it, give it fire once more, that it may be very warm, and drive it, if it be not so, than the contents of the grains comes not alike, and it happens sometimes, that that which is not alike must be granulated again, which can not be done without loss, therefore be careful at the first, and do not hasten too much with it, so when it is full hot in the Crucible, then may it in the same manner (as hath been taught above) be taken out of the Crucible, and be cast through a wet Broom (which hath not many small twigs) into the water, or, if there be much to be cast, then have two Brooms to cast through, that the one after the other may be dipped into the water, this is the common way of granulating, and it is the best way to do it, by which the grains have an equal content, and near finely round. CHAP. XX. To granulate out of a Kiln. Section. 1 FURTHER, there is another way to granulate (now used) called Granulating out of the Kiln, and is thus: Cause a Kiln The manner of performing it. to be made of Potter's earth (a little above a Span diameter within) which must have Iron-hoops, and the middle ring or hoop must have a long Iron-handle, and at the end of the handle a ring; likewise the Kiln is to be cut out on that side towards the Bellows, and when there is an Intention to granulate in the Kiln, than it must be set before the mouth of strong Bellows, and coals put in it, and after let the Bellows blow into it, that it may glow well; and then the old Silver (with an Iron-ladle) must be put on the top of the Coals, and the Bellows must blow always, so will it melt easily; and put still more silver, and let it flow: do this so long till as much Silver is in the Kiln as it can hold▪ stir it well about, after that, Take the Kiln with the coals in it, from the Bellows, and take it with the handle upon thy arm, and the ring which is at the end of the handle in thy hand, by which you may govern the Kiln, and so granulate it out of the Kiln, through Brooms as hath been said before. This is a quick way to granulate, but the Contents of the old Silver is sometimes not found alike, and it Section. 2 doth also waste more than by other graining or granulating: A quick way of granulating. Now as often as there is need to melt in such a Kiln, it is necessary to do it always well over with a good Clay, that may hold well in the fire, otherwise, when the Metal is warm, it may flow through it. It happens also often, that if a Crucible doth leak or or run out; and in that case sweep all clean together, put it in a Vessel and pour water on it, and that which When the Crucible doth break. doth swim at top, take off, and throw away, and pour other water on it, this do so long until the water doth go clear off, then out of the Residue pick out the course sand and stones, and stamp the rest in a Mortar and searse it through a hair seeve, that which doth not pass keep it, because it is good, but that which goeth through, wash that again in a long Tub made of Fir, that the residue of the good may be got out: because where much is to be granulated there will be sometimes some Mischance, so that a Crucible may run out, and cannot be rectified again without loss and damage. The following Sculpture is thus Deciphered. 1. The Grain or granulating Kill or Kiln. 2. 2. The Wind-Oven of Potters-stuff upon a Trevet or three-foot Frame. 3. Another Wind-Oven of Potters-Loam with Iron-Hoops, on a three-foot Iron-trevet or frame. 4. The Crucible in which the Silver is to be melted. 5. The crucible in which the melted Metal (that is taken out of the fire) is to be put. 6. The copper▪ Basin in which the granulating is performed. 7. An iron-roaster on which the Silver is heated and roasted. 8. He that tends the Grain-Kiln. 9 The Broom- holder for Granulation. 10. The granulating Vessel. 11. The Bellowss to the Grain-Kiln. 12. The Instrument used by him that tends the Grain-Kiln or Furnace. Sculpture VII. CHAP. XXI. How the grained or granulated Silver is to be assayed for fine Silver. Section. 1 GRanulated Silver hath different Contents, therefore according to its contents The different Contents of Graind Silver. the Addition of Lead must be: but that there may be a true Understanding of the difference, so the Addition of Lead (according to the Contents) must be taken thus, viz. to that which contains fifteen Loath of fine Silver, the Lead must be 5 or 6 times the quantity, and to that which is burnt Silver, (and is 15 Loath and three drams in the Contents) to such there needs but four times the quantity. But if the Grains are from 12 to 14 Loath, then take to one Mark, ten Marks of Lead, and upon 14 Loath Contents, take Section. 2 The different Quantities of Lead. nine quantities, from 9 unto 12 Loath Contents, take 16 quantities; and from one to eight Loth-Contents, take 18 quantities: and although upon some Contents there might well be one or two quantities more, than one too little: so that the Proof may have its due of Lead, and if the proof is right governed there will be no want. When you are ready to assay such Grains or old silver, then set first the Coppels into the Oven, and not Assay Grains. above two silver Trials at a time: Let them be well nealeed and heated, and then put the weight of the silver or grains, to two equal marks of thy penny weight, place each of them into a small Test or put first the prepared Lead for the proof upon the Coppel, and let it begin to work, and after it, also the weighed grains; govern the fire by covering the Furnace, as also by putting the Instruments under the Muffle, that the proof may go off alike, and pretty cool; cause afterwards the Grains to shine bright, yet not over hot, that they may not bolt or fly out, else the proof will be false. Further, know also, that the Grains which are rich in Copper (and can endure much cold in trying) must be kept coldest, and afterwards let it shine clear (if the Contents be truly to be found) and that which is not rich To assay rich Grains. in Copper, with less coolness will leave its subtle Littarge on the Coppel (as hath been said above.) But the Burnt silver and the very rich Grains cannot endure the cold ☞ because it hath no streamy Copper with it, and the proof would easily congeal, and if this should happen there would be no Remedy afterward, but it must be done again, therefore such proofs must go off a little hotter. Section. 5 When the Proofs have too little Lead. But if it should happen (by not minding it) that to one poof, there should be one or two quantities of Lead too little, than the Proof will not shine clearly at all; which is easily to be seen by the Grains, when there are little Spots upon them: as also black and wrinkly, and not very clean, such Trials are false, and must be begun anew. Section. 6 When the Proofs do go too hot. Also it is to be noted, That if the proof do go too hot, than the Lead will carry more than ordinary, of Silver with it into the Coppel: and what one hath in the beginning of the proof, that he will find; only have a Care that the Grains (in the end) may be clean and clear, so you will find the true Contents. Section. 7 To make assay grains fine. When the Grains are gone off clean, than they must be struck off from the Coppels while they are warm, so do they go off clean from the Clar, but if there should yet stick something about it, then press the Grains with clean flat tongs, and the unclean will fly away: Further, Brush it with an hard Brush, clean off, and when they are very clean, then weigh them one against another, if they be alike and do stand even at the Globe of the Balance, then is the proof right: weigh then one grain by itself, and see how many Loathes, Drams and Pence, it hath by thy Assay-weight, that you may find by it, the true Contents, and see that the Lead-grain be always abated, though it be never so little. CHAP. XXII. How coined Money in great or small Sorts may be Assayed. Section. 1 WHAT concerns good and Gross Money, as Dollars and new Rix Gilders, try them Of Dollars and rix Gilders. thus, Take the piece you do intend to try, beat it flat at one end, upon a smooth clean Anvil, that it may be cut with small Shears used for Silver, and so cut it into little pieces, and weigh them according to your Grain weight, two, alike Marks, put this into a small Test, and make a Trial; if it be Dollars: put nine quantities of pure Lead, and to the new Gilders, put eight quantities, cause them to glow off in a reasonable heat) and cold (as you have been before instructed) and such proofs (when they are governed well in the fire) do yield a pretty deal of fine and subtle Litarge on the Coppel, which the unexpert Assayer knows not. Section. 2 It is also necessary to know, That neither these nor other proofs do leave any Littarge on the Coppel, if they To assay with covered Assay ovens be not done in Covered Ovens, of which Trials many Refiners do know nothing (as hath been said) therefore they ☜ do seldom bring a Proof to its true contents, for they know not how they must order their Coppels according to the quantities of Lead, which is of no small Concern, that they may not have too many nor too few Ashes, because, if there be too few Ashes, than the Coppel will become soft, because of the much Led which they suck in, which easily doth draw the silver with it into the Coppel, so the Contents is lessened, and if there be too many Ashes than the Coppel will be too big, and take too much room in the Furnace, and are not so convenient for use. Section. 3 To assay single and double Stivers. Concerning single and double Stivers, they must be Assayed in the following manner, Take two or three and cut them with Sheers into little pieces, and weigh two equal Marks, or pieces or parcels according to the Grain-weight, and take great care that you have some of the outside for the Trial to both alike, because the proof ☞ that hath most of the outside will be found richer in the Contents than the other that hath not so much of the outside. Section. 4 The Lead quantity. Put to each Mark or Proof eighteen Quantities of pure Lead, cause them to go off pretty cool, and at last to shine clear, which then also doth leave subtle Littarge upon the Coppel, yet not so much as of the Dollars; then if the Grains are of an equal weight, the Proof is right, draw one of the two up, with the Grain-weight, and as many Loathes and Grains as you do find, so much is there Content in a Mark of fine silver. Section. 5 Upon white Pence, Reinish and other Pence the proof To Assay Pence. is thus; Take twelve of them, and cut of each of them a bit or two for a Trial, only take notice that you do take of such Pence, some bit where it is thick, and of some where they are thin, that to each Trial there may be some of the thin and some of the thick Bits: add to each Trial eighteen Qantities of pure Lead, and cause them to go at first fine and cool; and lastly, to shine bright, so will the Grains be alike; but, if in the one Proof there be much of the thin, and in the other much of the thick Pence should come, than the Grains would not be alike, but oft times the proof in which much of the thin Penny did come, that fine Grain will be almost two Grains more; and the other so much less in which most of the thick did come. This is not much minded by some Refiners, but when their Grains do differ, than they do take the middle of it, but it is better the proof be right and that by diligence, the proofs may come out alike, because the Section. 6 small Money by boiling white doth differ in the Contents, To find the true Proof in small Money. so is the proof now adays better to be found than to melt a Mark of the Money in a Crucible, and so soon as it begins to drive, to cast it into an Ingot, and then to make a trial of it so (without question) the true Contents will be found, and agree with the other proof made of the thin and thick Bits. I must mention also, that some Refiners and Assayers are about to prove Coined Money with the Low Dutch Penny weight (which is not amiss) because the Contents do agree with the Grain-weight; as for Example, Suppose you have assayed new Gilders, according to the Grain-weight, and have found that the Mark doth contain fourteen Loath and sixteen Grains, but according to the Low Dutch Pennyweight, twelve pence and four grains, these twelve pence and four grains make just so much as 14 Loath, and 16 Grains, and so both of these are of one Content, yet of two Denominations. Section. 7 To Assay the Silver, according to the Common Centner weight. If it should happen that an Assayer should be in such a place where he hath no more than one Centner-weight, nor could have any more, and there should come before him Grains of coined Money, or a Lump of Silver to try, how much a Mark of the same doth contain (of Loathes, Drams and Pence, or of Loathes A loath is Half an ounce. and Grains) of fine Silver, he must take out of the Centner-weight sixteen pound, and let them be a Mark or sixteen Loathes, the eight Pound, eight Loathes; the four Pound, four Loathes; the two Pound, two Loathes, and one Pound, one Loathes; after that, the sixteen Loathes two drams; the eight Loath one dram, the four Loathes, two Peny-weight: the two Loathes, one Penny: and one Loth, a Heller or Halfpenny. If he hath then assayed a piece of Silver according to such weights, then may he find the Contents easily upon Loathes, Drams or Pence, but concerning new Gilders, which commonly do hold fourteen Loathes sixteen Grains, they will hold in such a peny-weight fourteen pound, and 28 Loathes, or a little more (which would be according to the abovenamed Directions) also fourteen Loathes, three Drams, two Pence, and almost half an Heller or halfpenny, do carry 14 Loathes and 16 grains. Section. 8 In like manner one may for Gold take to 24 Carats 16 pounds of the Centner-weight, and assay the Gold To assay the Centners upon Grains. according to it, but it is better if an Assayer hath by hand the Assay-weight, already parted to make use of the same, because to mind this doth require an expert Assayer, for an unexpert one will easily err. CHAP. XXIII. How Burnt silver Pieces and Plates are to be cut out. Section. 1 IF you will cutout a piece of burnt Silver, than first cut a piece out at the top, with a small half-round Chissel, not quite Burnt silver Pletes. in the middle, nor quite at the end, then turn that piece of Silver, and cut in like manner a piece out of the bottom, that it may not be all from one side, but opposite to the piece that was cut at the top of the other side, that is to be cut on the back side. Section. 2 But concerning Plates, cut them out at one side above, and the other below, and weigh of each half a Mark for a proof, put them together in the Proof- Scales, that is into one Scale, and into the other put the whole Mark, Plates. opposite into the other Scale, if it be not just alike, as it should be, then make it so, that the Scales may stand equal (and assay as you have been taught)▪ Blink Silver. Clear Silver may also be cut out also above and below in like manner for to be assayed; and so the Contents will always be found just when the Proofs have been well made. CHAP. XXIV. How Silver Touch-Needes are to be made. Section. 1 THE silver Touch-Needles (which are also called Proof-Needles) they are generally made and used by all Refiners and Guardians, and they that deal in Silver: by which Touch all Silver-Contents may very nearly be known: Now to make Section. 2 such it is very necessary to have weights that are a pretty To make them. deal bigger than common Assay-Weights: And then take good fine Silver, and of it make the first Needle, (and make a Mark on it) viz. 16 Loth of fine: And to the Second Needle, take 15 Loath of fine Silver, and one Loath of fine Copper: and To the Third 14 Loath of fine Silver and 2 Loathes of Copper. To the Fourth 13 Loath of fine Silver and 3 Loathes of Copper. To the Fifth 12 Loath of fine Silver and 4 Loathes of Copper. To the Sixth 11 Loath of fine Silver and 5 Loathes of Copper. To the Seventh 10 Loath of fine Silver and 6 Loathes of Copper. To the Eighth 9 Loath of fine Silver and 7 Loathes of Copper. To the Ninth 8 Loath of fine Silver and 8 Loathes of Copper. To the Tenth 7 Loath of fine Silver and 9 Loathes of Copper. To the Eleventh 6 Loath of fine Silver and 10 Loathes of Copper. To the Twelveth 5 Loath of fine Silver and 11 Loathes of Copper. To the Thirtenth 4 Loath of fine Silver and 12 Loathes of Copper. To the Fourteenth 3 Loath of fine Silver and 13 Loathes of Copper. To the Fifteenth 2 Loath of fine Silver and 14 Loathes of Copper. To the Sixteenth 1 Loath of fine Silver and 15 Loathes of Copper. Section. 3 To try them When you have weighed all these, than put every Needle's proportion into a Crucible, and do not let it drive much, for thereby the Needles may prove false: but so soon as the Silver and Copper in the Crucible begins to drive then stir it with a dry Splinter (or stick) and cast each proportion into a small Ingot, out of which the Needles are to be made, which you may shape as you please, and put a mark or distinction on each Needle, according to the Contents of each, thereby to see how many loathes of fine Silver a Mark doth contain, that you may not be deceived by the Touch, but thereby make a right Judgement. Section. 4 Needles half Loth. Some do part and divide the Needles into two halfloths, which is left to every one's Freedom, and there is enough in it, where the Touch may not be certainly known by the loath, Now when thou dost intend to use the Needles, then upon the Silver which thou hast made, scrape a fine shining stroke, and also make another stroke on the Needle by it, and see which stroke on the Needle is most like the Silver-stroke, and so you will see by them how much the Silver doth contain: and that the form of the Touch-Needles may be seen, this following Sculpture doth represent. Sculpture VIII. Deciphered. 1. 2. The Touch-Needles. 3. 4. The Ingots to be compared with the Touch-needles. CHAP. XXV. How Metals that are melted must be cut out, and assayed for Silver. Section. 1 OF wrought (lead which is Cast in melting of the silver Oars) some are clean and Clean work. pure, and others are foul and unclean; the Clean which come from the mild and good Oars, them, you may by themselves prove like unto Lead, and take a Proof out of it, when 'tis going to melt, and weigh of it at least a Centner, or else when the work is cast forth, as much as it doth weigh is to be cut and assayed together: And keep this Order, that always of the whole that is cast, a special proof may be made, and to take it out of 2 or 3 proofs: or else the true Content will not be found, except it be that of each cast piece the whole quantity be weighed in, and to go off upon a great Coppel altogether; but if you would have for a Proof some cut out of the Cakes, you may cut out of each (especially if the Work be rich) according to the bigness above and below, to weigh some of all, and to prove it. Section. 2 There are also some works which are very missy unclean work. and speizy and very unclean (like Kobolt and course Wismet and other speizy Oars) which are melted; and some among the rest are so very unclean that when the Cakes do lie a few days, they do fall asunder: such stubborn and unclean Oars, in general, cannot be assayed like unto the good; but when such Work hath been weighed, then cut or beat out of every Cake a piece, and weigh it so unclean as it is, viz. of every cut, and assay as followeth: Take of the work as much as it is in weight, put it on the Test in the Assay-oven, cause it to slack, that the Fury and wildness may be consumed, let it cool and knock it off, and cause it to go clear off from the Coppel, but if it be not slacked at first, but set raw upon the Coppel, than it will work upon the Coppel, and will not go clean off, as is shown. Some Assayers do use to take the Content of such unclean Another Custom among Assayers. work, and cause it to go together in a great Assay-Test or Iron-Kiln, and cast it forth, and then weigh of it for a Trial, which is not right (although they do think they shall obtain the true Contents) because by this running together the Contents comes finer, and the proof is made richer, therefore the abovesaid way is much better, by which the true Contents is found. Section. 4 But when an unclean Work is put upon the Coppel, then to imagine (when a work of itself will not go off that to add some other clean Lead, and to help it that When there is lead added to the work Trial. way, that it may go off pure) is vain. For this cannot be a certain way of their Proofs, nor are you to trust to the same: Because in the Work-houses the Lead is not altogether without Silver, so the Silver is found in the lead that is added (as little as it is in the other Contents) which becomes so much richer. Section. 5 Hearth trials Likewise as it hath been said, of casting and working, how they are to be tried, so it must be done with hearth Trials, they which are overlaid with Silver and rich-wrought Lead, and taken from the Hearths, let it be good, or unclean, only that at least, the half of the whole weight may be weighed and tried, so will you find the fine Silver very near, yet not altogether fully, because the unclean that was at first in the Work, and hath been weighed with it (before the Hearth▪ proof was taken off the work) when it is in driving was dissolved and taken off; as also sometimes the Proof is taken off too hot, and sometimes too cold, by this may every Assayer understand the Contents: and which (although, as hath been said, in comparison of the Silver that is brought forth) is not much out of the way. CHAP. XXVI. How Tin is to be assayed for Silver. Section. 1 TIN among the rest of Metals doth enter most freely into Lead, but the strength of the fire will not permit it to remain therewith, because as soon as there comes great heat to it, then doth it go again, and rise upon the Lead, and becomes altogether together stubborn, so that with no force of fire, besides other help, can it be brought to a true Vpboyling upon the Test, because the Tin doth oft times contain much Silver, and the Trial of it is very necessary: Therefore was I the more willing to instruct young Assayers of the Trial of it, which is done thus: Weigh two equal half Centners of the Tin, and to each half Centner, a Centner of good sound Copper, and sixteen quantities of pure Lead, put each half Centner with its Copper and Lead upon a Test, each by themselves: Begin first with a slow heat, and when it begins to drive upon the Test, it will begin to rise, then let it go very cool, and take two Centners off the abovesaid Lead-glass put it also to it, upon the Test, and the Lead-glass will cover it all, and will not suffer the Tin to rise so much: and when you have let it go cool so long (till the risen Tin upon the Test doth no more look bright, but black and dark) then give it again as much Heat as you can, and boil it up (as you do an unflowing harsh Oar) and when it hath slacked well, then stir it with an hot Iron-hook, let it stand a while longer, until it be boiled up very clean, then take it out of the Oven, suffer it to cool, beat the slacks off from the work or Led, and let it go off upon a Coppel: if then the Tin doth hold Silver, there will remain a grain upon the Coppel, draw it up, and you will find the Contents. Section. 2 The Lead-grain to this Trial. To such a Proof must you make a Lead-Grain on purpose, thus; Take a Centner of the Copper of which you did add to the Proof, cause it diligently to go off upon the Coppels with the Lead quantity: and keep the Grain of Silver that comes from it which (in the drawing up of the Proof- Grain all times to the Weight) is to be laid and abated, else one cannot be certain of the Contents: and after this manner in Tin the right Contents is to be found. Section. 3 Some Assayers are of another Opinion, to beat the Tin thin, and weigh of it two half Centners, and put every one upon a Test by itself in the Assay-oven, give Another way to prove the Tin. it a gentle heat that the Tin may be wasted into Ashes; and into the same Ashes (yet every one apart) they put 16 Centners of Lead and two Centners of the Flus upon a Test, and boil it up like unto an Hard-flowing Oar, and let it go off upon the Coppel, this proof is also right, but it requires a little more time than the former, although the Tin doth also rise upon the Plate (yet it may easily (by governing of the fire, when it hath first cooled and afterwards yery hot) be forced to slack cleanly. CHAP. XXVII. How to separate Iron and Steel from Silver. Section. 1 ALSO there is found sometimes Iron very rich in Silver, the reason is, because the Hammer-smiths do not mind the small contents in it, also they do not know that it contains any Silver, and so, that Silver in melting cometh among the Iron: to prove this, that the certain contents of the Silver may be given in: File the Iron very small (which you do intend to assay) weigh of it half a Centner, and add to it a Centner of yellow Brimstone, and let it go off Section. 2 With Brimstone. mingled well together and set it in a gentle heat, that only the Brimstone may flow and penetrate the Iron, and that it may be brought out of its substance, and let the Iron cool again in the Test, grind it again upon a Stone or Iron, and mingle two Centners of Flus, or Lead-glass among it; and add to it twelve Centners of Lead, cause it to boil up (as you are wont to do, with a hard flowing OAR) and in the end the work that cometh off, let it go off upon the Coppel, and you will find the Contents of the Silver. Section. 3 With Antimony. Some Assayers do use to prove Iron for Silver another way, namely, they weigh the Iron (although it be not filed small) viz. half a Centner and put it in a Crucible, and add to it a Centner of Antimony, let them go together, then let the Crucible cool, and put that which did drive in the Crucible upon an Assay-Test, let it smoak away, and grind it again upon an Iron-plate or Stone very small; mingle it with Flus (with an addition of the Lead as hath been showed in the proof before) then cause it to boil up clean, and let it go off upon a Coppel, but if the Led be black (because of the Antimony) then set it upon the Test alone, cause it to slack (as other wild unclean Work) than it will go off upon the Coppel. Section. 4 With gross-Flint. Others take small filled or thin beaten Iron, cut of it half a Centner, as also a Centner of raw gross-water flints, which holdeth no Silver (with its due of Lead) mingle it together and assay it (as raw Flint is assayed upon Silver) so the Brimstone which is in the Flint will devour the Iron, that it will become Slacks, and will then go into the Lead, and although the Flint holdeth a little Silver, yet that may be abated instead of the Lead-grain, and this way of Assaying Iron for Silver; I have found to be most fit, and it is done with little trouble, and the contents is also found right. Section. 5 Copper and Iron, as also Silver and Iron love one another To separate the Copper, Iron, and Silver. well, and these three Metals cannot be so separated, that a part may remain, to do any profit with: yet by a right understanding of their Nature this is possible; that from the two most constant among these three (as Silver and Copper) the Iron may be separated (being as an unclean Metal to those two) also the Copper dross, (which is separated in the Melting and doth contain Silver) may be separated; which parting is done in the following manner. Section. 6 The Lead-Oar hath commonly Antimony with it, How the Coppery Iron which holds Silver is to be made to profit. which (in melting as a soft flowing Metal) doth enter into it and devoureth it) for this end, and to prevent it, a due proportion of Lead must be added to the Iron in melting (as there shall be further Instruction given in the Fourth Book) for the Lead Oar (by Reason of the Antimony that is in it) doth work upon the Iron, and taketh the Copper and Silver to itself, which is the Reason, that at such places where the Lead-Oar is melted, the iron rich Copper Dross (which doth contain some Silver) may be used with Lead-oar in stead of old Iron, which is to be put among it by degrees, and so the Iron will be consusumed, and the Silver and Copper will enter into the Lead, which to my mind could not be employed better; but in the melting after the Gosslarish manner, the Lead doth mingle among the dust, whereby it doth partake of much of the uncleaness and wildish Nature which is in the Dust and slacks, and so is left with it: But how the Copper is to be separated from the Lead will follow hereafter. Section. 7 Ironstone that contains Silver. And in this manner the Ironstone (that contains Silver may be made to enter into the Lead-Oar, that it may take the Silver out of it, which cannot be done better; and this I was willing to impart for the better instructing of them, that Assay Iron and such melting works. CHAP. XXVIII. How Black or white Silver is to be burnt clean, and how the Tests for it are to be made right. Section. 1 SILVER-burning is to burn Silver pure and clean and deft upon a Test, and this Deft or neat is to be done to the Blink Silver (which is not yet clean enough) by two ways; one way under the wood, before the Bellows) the other under the Muffle, and is only done with Coals. But I intent to write first of the Tests in which the Silver is to be burnt clean; they are to be made and To prepare the Tests. prepared thus, Take Ashes from which Lees hath been made, which are not sharp or salt: wash them and let them be dry, and keep them for your use, and when you do intend to make a Test, first get an earthen unglazed test such as the Potter's use to make in their frames, and so large as thou wouldst have them, pour water in it, and make it wet all over, that the Ashes may stick the better, than put some Ashes into it, which must first be moistened like unto the Copel-Ashes, put it two fingers high in the Test, press it together with a wooden pestle, which hath about eight Angles: then put more Ashes after it, press them also down, do it so long till the Test be full, then struck off the superfluous Ashes with an Iron made on purpose from the test, and turn it about the Brim (with a round wooden Ball) so as the Ashes may lie smooth done upon the test, afterwards cut it, with a round sharp bend Iron, according to the bigness of the Silver that is to be burnt upon it, and when the test is cut out, then must you have a small hair Seeve, and put ground Bone-Ashes in it, and swigle or strew it over the test, that it may be white all over, and then turn the Ball over it, that it may lie smooth upon the test, so is the test ready. The manner of this Burning. When you intent to use such test, and to burn in it, than first make a Small-coal fire upon it, that it may be dry, than set it before the Bellows very even, so that the Bellows may blow just into it, which is to be known thus, hold a shovel over the test, and if the blowing of the Bellows do go off from the shovel and blows off all the Ashes and dust out of the test, it doth stand right, and then beat the piece of Blink-silver into bits, but first put a little straw into the test, and the bits of silver upon it; Give it fire and coals that the test and the silver may be well covered, then begin to blow, so the silver will melt easily, and begin to drive, than put away with an iron-hook all the Coals from the silver, and stroke the silver also clean off, yet so that nothing may be lost, then lay split wood, or other wood for fire, and fit for the purpose, and cause the Bellows to blow under Section. 4 Wood for the burning of Silver. the Wood upon the silver, so the silver will begin to drive under the wood, and that lead which did remain among the silver will be drawn into the test: only consider▪ when such split wood is burnt upon the test, than put more wood by or upon it, that still the silver may be burnt with a fresh flame, and so will it be sooner clean, while the silver doth yet go upon the test, and it must be stirred about with a round bowed Iron-hook, and made glowing hot, whereby the silver may be clean, or else it will retain some lead underneath. Section. 5 The content of burnt Silver. But that the Silver may not be Burnt so much, but may have a right and true content, namely, fifteen loath, and three drams, (which commonly the burnt Silver is to have) than you may in the mean time once or twice, with a well pointed Iron, (thrust a little into the Silver) and take a proof out (which will hang easily about it) then beat it off, and see if it hath much yellow lethargy, or beat it upon an Anvil, and if it be Deft, than the Silver is well burned, if not put the proof in again, and let the Silver drive longer upon the Test, until you do find the proof upon the Iron, white and deft, but the Silver upon the Test cannot be overdone, because the Test grows soft from superfluous heat, and take more Silver to it than it ought; all which is well to be observed, and diligent exercitation or use is needful, if one will burn blinck Silver upon a certain content. Section. 6 How the Silver doth cool. And if by negligence, the Silver (before it is done) doth become cool, put again Coals upon it, begin it again and burn it that it may be right, for the hard burnt Silver do (in Coining) hurt: of which afterwards a great damage will follow. Section. 7 Silvers that are not burnt too high. Some of the Refiners in the burning of Silver do put upon every Mark of Silver a half Loath or Dram of good Copper that the Silver may not come too high, but upon their just content, not that it remaineth with the Silver, but because it goes together with the Lead in the Test, that the same burnt Silver (as we have heard) may not become of such a high content; this is a good intention in such places, where the Silver for Payment upon a certain content are given in, and, without proving, accepted, and there reasonable diligence in burning may be so observed, that none of the parts may be wronged and hurt. Section. 8 Coppery Blinck Silvers. Whole Coppery blinck Silvers, such as they make in the Refining Houses, may be burnt very Deft, but they will remain too light on the Content, to the same must be put a little Lead, (as much as it will permit) as sometimes likewise may be done to the Silvers which are melted of speizy and Cobolt Oars for their Wildness and uncleanness sake. Section. 9 Now when the Burning is finished, and the Silver taken out of the Test, then is it to be fully quenched, whereby the Ashes will fall easily away, which stick about When the Silver burning is finished. it, and the rest of the Ashes must be taken away cleanly, with a strong Brush, and let the Silver be dry, and when the Thornels (if there be any) and the Silver hath taken hold on the Ashes, they must be beaten down with a Hammer, that the piece on all sides may be smooth. But that the Reader may have a larger understanding of the Silver Burning, also how the France, and Test, with all other things appertaining to them, are to be form, is clearly to be seen by the following Sculpture, which is thus Deciphered. 1. The Burning Furnace. 2. The Test which is put into it. 3. How the Silver is burnt on the Test. 4. The Bellows blowing. 5. The Iron-plates Luted over with Clay and used against the heat. 6. A Fork and Hook to stir the Melted stuff or Metals, as also for Iron-proofs. 7. An un-used or unwarmed Test. 8. A Test that is in warming. 9 A Roaster or Iron, on which the burnt Silver is made dry. 10. The Water-Tub over which the burnt Metals is brushed and cleansed. 11. The Ball and Pestle for making Tests. 12. The Block upon which Silver is beaten with an Hammer. 13. The split-wood for the Silver burning. 14. A Test that hath been used and Broken. 15. A three footed stool for several uses. 16. A Tankard to put Water, into Fig. 11. Sculpture. IX. CHAP. XXIX. How to burn Silver under the Muffle. Section. 1 BURNING of Silver which principally is used in lower Saxony) requireth a singular and better Diligence than the Common silver burning, and also particular Tests and Muffles: The Tests you must make thus: Let the prepared Tests to be made with with Iron rings. Hoops be of Iron, of the bigness as you intent to burn a great or small piece of silver, they must be high of a hand square, but at the top a little wider than at the Bottom, in one of them put in the prepared Test-Ashes, and fill it to the top, still beating down gently (with a broad Hammer) the Ashes about the Brim; and so further and further till you have beaten down all the Ashes that are left, or are too much upon the Test, stroke them off with an Iron, and then overturn the Rings and test alike upon a little Ashes, which is to be laid under; then take them with your hand out of the test, till it is half empty, and make the Ashes small again with your hands, then press the test full again with a heap beating it down also with the Hammer, as is before directed, and the rest of the Ashes also stroke off with an Iron, then turn the test again, and make the Ashes smooth with the Ball, than the test is prepared: Now the tests after this manner prepared are much better and stronger than they which are beaten into the tests. Section. 2 The Muffles for Silver burning. Concerning the Muffles which pertain to this Silver-burning, they are to be made over little round sticks after the bigness of the upper part of the test, and are to be cut out in the like form with the tests; and other pertaining Instruments which the Sculpture following will show. If now you will burn Silver, than put the Test with the Ring between four square burnt Stones in Sand or Ashes, as deep that the Sand may be even with the test above, in an Oven for it prepared, in which several tests may be put together, and such Wind-Ovens must have always one Wind-hole, which may drive two Ovens, especially in such places wherein many pieces of Silver come together, and once in one day are to be burnt. Afterwards put the Muffle on the test, which is made after its bigness, and a burnt stone on the top, that nothing may fall upon the Silver, put coals upon and under the Muffle, and about and upon the test, and when the test is grown warm then put in the beaten silver, and let it begin to work, but if you would have it soon melted, than you may blow it with Hand-bellows, through the Mouth-hole under the Muffle, and then it quickly goeth, and when it is melted take away the Coals again, and let it go also under this Muffle, stir it once or thrice with the Iron, as you have done in the other, than it will go upon the test, under the Muffle, all off: (just as the Silvers upon the Coppels.) With this burning of Silver both great and small pieces may be burnt, as with the Bellows, and without loss or any great damage upon the Content. Section. 3 A clean silver burning After this manner, I have seen at Goslar in the Workhouse (when it was kept) upon one Test on one piece near one Hundred mark of Silver burning: If now you will (while the Silver goeth) take out with an Iron one or two provings (as is done in the Silver-burning before) you may do it (and it is not to be despised) but who in this ART is conversant, the same needeth not so many proving, but he knoweth it upon sight, when it hath enough. Section. 4 Now when the Silver under the Muffle is burnt clear and begins to stay, one may let water run upon it in a Copper Channel and cool it, then with strong Tongues take it out and purify it from the Ashes, (as is abovesaid) then the Silver is burnt. Section. 5 Tests to be kept. The Tests may be kept together, because they are not without Silver, the same in some Mine-works the Workmen use to take to themselves, but in some they belong to the Republic: They may be made at any time to profit, and the Silver that is in them may be melted out, as may be seen in the following Sculpture, and is thus Deciphered. 1. The Oven in which the Silver is to be burnt. 2. The inside of that Oven. 3. The Wind-holes of that Oven which drives the fire upwards into the Work. 4. The Test that is set into it. 5. The Iron Mould or Ring into which the Tests are to be put. 6. The form of the Iron-ring. 7. The Ring filled with ashes for making a Test. 8. A round Muffle. 9 A Ball and Hammer for making of Tests. 10. A person that breaketh the burnt Silver. 11. Another person standing on the backside of the Oven who takes Care for the burning of the silver. 12. A Vessel of water into which the burnt silver is to be cast. 13. Bellows and Instruments belonging to the Oven. Section. 1 Sculpture X. CHAP. XXX. How Copper is to be Assayed for fine Silver. Section. 1 IN respect it is of use to burn the light-content silver fine (for many times they How much Lead is to be added. who should do it, know not fundamentally how much Lead is to be added, whereby they do too much, or too little) therefore to such light-silvers, if the Mark containeth eight Loathes of silver, than ten times the weight of Lead is to be added, and if the Silvers containeth from eight to twelve Loathes, eight weights of Lead, and then from twelve to fifteen Loth, six weights of Lead must be added, but if the burnt silvers centent should be fifteen Loth, than the Lead may be two weight less, but if it should be wholly cleansed, then 'tis better one weight too much than one too little, that the silver may be the cleaner: And when you have put it in the Test, let it be warm, and add two weights of Lead, and when it begins to go, then draw in the Silver gently, and let it go together, and when the Lead is almost gone, then add again two weights of Lead, do this as long till the Lead is all put in; and the Silver becomes clean, and when the Lead is done and singly added) there needs not so much Led, as when the Lead is added to the Silver all at once: you must not force it, but do it as cool as it will permit, else the Silver will go more into the Test than otherwise; when now the Silver is almost purified, then gently turn it with a glowing Hook, lest it retain a leady lump, or much smoke of Lead, but by this way it may clear itself and look pure. But as to the Coppery Silvers, if they are to be burnt fine upon the Test it cannot be done more conveniently than under the Muffle. Section. 2 The Silvers which are to be burnt pure and clean with To take the smoke of Lead from Silver. Lead, do retain with them a smoke of Lead, if now one would bring it off, the same must be set upon a plain plate, and blow it with the Bellows, than they may become very clean. CHAP. XXXI. How Silver is to be separated from Tin. Section: 1 MANY times it happens that in burning Silver-Ware, Monies, Copper, and other Metals melted together (of which A Test for it. the most part oft times is TIN) that the same cannot be made to profit, nor separated by every common Goldsmith and Prover, therefore let this following way be an instruction (as the most convenient) namely, Put a test in an Oven, and a Muffle upon it, let both first well glow, and if the burnt matter be ten pounds then add upon the test twenty pounds of pure Lead at once together, and when it begins to go, then put in it of silvery rich TIN half a pound, than the Lead will take it soon to itself, which will quickly (from the great heat) begin to ascend, and to raise itself up; let it stand a while upon it, then draw it with an Iron Hook clear off from the Lead, then add more TIN to it, let it stand its time also in it, then draw it off also, and this infunding the Lead and drawing away, do as long till the burnt matter do all come upon the test, and if the Led in working becomes weak, then refresh it again with one or two pound of new Lead, that it may endure the longer in the heat; but if the burnt matter be Coppery, it is the better; if not, you must add somewhat of Copper, because it becomes more Deft by it, and the Lead doth take the Silver and Gold easier in than out of the stubborn TIN only. In this work the Gold and Silver will go into the Lead, and the most of the Copper is drawn off with the TIN, then let the Lead go clean off, (as the Custom is) then have you the silver separated from it. Section. 2 But to bring the Copper and Tin (which is drawn off) to profit, it may be done thus; let such stuff dry, and How to make the separated Tin profitable. cause it to melt in a strong Fire, and so the Bell-caster, or Founder may mingle it among their stuff and cast it together (as in Anno 1567. the City of Slakenword, in the Bohemish Borders was burnt down, and within the Walls of the City there remained not one House) when I myself did (after this manner) bring much burnt Metals to right, and separated the Silver from it, which no body else would take upon him to do. Section. 3 To precipitate the Silver from Tin. The Philosophers do write of precipitating, by which the Silver in common tin may be put down, and form into a Regulus; thus, one must set the tin apart in a little Oven, make it very hot, and then precipitate it, and with such a precipitation the Silver in the tin will be brought down a hand square, and the same in the same deepness may be cut off, and the remaining Tin may be again and again and so often cut off until the Silver in the bottom may be brought to a Regulus, and then (though tin be with it) it will purify fully, and that which doth precipitate will not hurt the tin, but they do write nothing of it: I signify this, for the sake of such, who have a pleasure to this Art, and are willing to Exercise themselves in it, and so take it into their further Meditation, that they may have hereby a way of doing it: I for my part suppose, that because the Gold in the Silver, and the Silver in Copper; is to be precipitated, that likewise this precipitation is possible in the tin. CHAP. XXXII. How to drive out all sorts of Silver, that it may be Deft, smooth and fine. Section. 1 BECAUSE it happens many times that Silver in casting together from an evil smoke (or when happily a little tin comes among it, or, that among the old Silver there hath been tinny, false and gross mixtures,) becomes hard: then is it, as Section. 2 A little Lead Ball. follows, to be made Deft, again: Put the Silver upon a plain Test (which is done over with clean and fine Clar, blow it till the Silver runs and goes well, then add two or three Balls of very clean Lead, according to the quantity of Silver, blow it again until the Silver doth bear the Bellows, and becomes Deft; but you must (in the blowing upon the Test) once or twice (with a glowing Iron-Hook) stir the Silver that it may be Deft throughout, then let it cool, and put it in a Pot together as it pleaseth you, and take notice, that if somewhat of the Copper be blown away, by which the Silver on the content becomes richer, then if it shall retain the Content, which it had before, it must (in the casting again) be helped by adding so much Copper. Section. 3 To Brickle hard burnt Silver. But hard burnt silver, (or other good silver, which might become brickle from a leady Lump) that same Silver (if a little Lead be with it) may (in this manner upon a plain Test) be made Deft without any addition; except it hath too much Lead with itself, than it must be made upon a plain little Test (as above is taught) by the Silver, burning-pure and Deft. Section. 4 Also there may a Flus be prepared to make the Silver deft, (which doth cleanse the Metals very much:) A Flus to brickle Silver. thus, Take sal Alkali, Nitre, Red Argol, and salt Petre, of one so much as of the other, calcine, and dissolve it again in warm Water, and let it go through a filter and coagulate; so is the Flus prepared. CHAP. XXXIII. How to boil Copper from the pagment or old Silver in Coined Money, or from thin beaten plates of Silver. TAKE sulphur and vitriol of both alike in quantity, grind them small, and make them a little wet with Vinegar that it become as a Pap, mingle the Coin or old Silver among it, then take a long Linen sack, put the Money with these additions in it, sow the Sack on the sides from the top to the bottom, so that the Money may not lie too thick in it, pour Water into a pot, and hang the Sack in it, that it may neither touch below, nor on the sides; boil it well ten or twelve hours with the fire, and so much as the Water does waste by boiling, you must add to it again with warm Water, so that the Pot may be always full of Water, whereby the Copper will be boiled out of the Silver or Coin, and the Silver will remain in the Sack, then wash it with warm Water and pour it together, but the Water will boil and dry in, and the rest melt together (with the Flus which is used to Copper Oar) thus you have the Copper which hath been boiled out of the Money, only the silver by this is not altogether fine but retaineth some small quantity of Copper in it. CHAP. XXXIV. How good proof Balances are to be made and fitted. Section. 1 APROVER hath not only need that he have clean and just Balances for proving, An Assayer able to make Balances, but he must know also when they do fail (or else become changeable or uncertain) how to mend and help them again, so I judge it for a great piece of Ignorance (and it is also not well,) That some who profess themselves Provers of this ART, do often (when a little is amiss in the Balance, or worn out, or for any other small matter) use to send to Neurembirg and other more remote places in Germany, to mend their false Proof-Ballances, whereas they themselves should have so much Knowledge as to make and fit them with their Proof-weights, and Proof Instruments, so as they may be certain and sure of their Proofs. Section. 2 And how to help their Defects. Therefore, That a fundamental Instruction may be given, I will instruct all who do love this Proof ART (especially the young Provers) because there are not always Masters to be had, who know right well to manage such things: and to teach how the Proof-Ballances and weights, and other Proof-Instruments are to be made, and also (if it be needful) to mend and rectify them: and first I shall begin with the Proof-Ballance, Section. 3 The Balance of the Proofseales. which is to be made as followeth. 'Cause a small Balance to be forged out of the blade of an old Sword, that it may have a little broad and thin Tongue, and throughout be pure and well wrought, and nothing ruff or shivery be on it; this form Balance make fast with a little Screw, and file the thickest part, and then search the middle on the same place, and make a little hole with a drill through it, and fasten a round point in it, that it may stand out at both ends; fit it in, with thin bits of Brass, and solder it (with Silversoder fast into the Balance, so the solder will easily flow after the thin Brass. Section. 4 Out of this sodered point are filled the little Irons on which the Balance moves, and afterwards the little Tongue. Tongue beaten thin upon a smooth Anvil, and glow it often in a small Wood-fire, that it may not crack, then Wartz See the Dictionary. search the middle of the Tongue, from the Wartz or little Iron straight upward unto the end of the same (and its length is to be the same from the Wartz to the end) and mark it with a stroke, then cut upon the one side of the Tongue next to the stroke a bit of the Iron clean off, and on the other side of the Tongue, cut some also close by the Wartz, that the Tongue may roll over from one side to the other, then may you also cut off the rest of the Iron on that side, when this is done, then glow the Tongue and dress it again strait upwards, then file it (upon a soft piece of Wood, very smooth, according to your pleasure; you may also pierce (or make holes) neatly in the Tongue near the Balance for curiosity sake) afterwards bend a little the two ends of the Balance alike, before the Balance be quite fitted, that the two ends may be of equal length, and then file the Balance according to shape and form, as a well proportioned proof Balance, and so make an end; but how the filing and other Work is to be performed, that cannot be written, but it requireth a diligent exercise. The Fork in which the Balance useth to hang, that must also in like manner be subtly Filled, also the holes (in which the little Wartz come to lie) may be thin, clean and straight through it, and must be polished with a smooth little Stone, that no shivers may remain, which Fork must be so long as the Tongue, that the Balance may not slide out of it. Section. 6 When the Fork is prepared, then take the Filed How the filled Balance is to be proved. Balance, and hang it in the Fork with the Tongue downwards, and see if it be alike weight on both sides, if you find that one side is heavier than the other, you must help it until it does hang even, then make it smooth and clean all over with a gentle File or with a soft Whetstone, and polish it with the hard * Haemathite. Bloudstone, (which is called Glasscup) when the Balance is fully finished, then prove it again, that the Fork may hang even, and that it want nothing. But if there is no Smith, which can forge the Balance with the little Tongue (because all Smiths cannot make it so well of one piece) then take a clean steel Wyer, or a forged Iron in the form of a of a Balance without the Tongue) and solder it with silver solder, and fix the little Tongue upon it, the Tongue may also be garnished with Brass, afterwards File a Balance for it, (as hath been said above) but if you will not take the pains to Garnish it with Brass, then may you take Gold-soder and solder all what is necessary about Golden solder. the Balance very cleanly, because this solder will flow upon the Iron without any addition or increase, and if any thing doth break upon it, it may be neatly sodered with Gold solder, as experience will teach. Section. 8 The proof scales are used to be made blue, (that they To cause the proof Balance to be blue. may not rust so easily) and is done thus, cause a pretty thick Iron to be warm in the fire, but do not suffer it to ☞ be quite brown, lay the Balance with one end upon it, and draw it a long as it takes colour and becomes blue, which is soon done, only take notice the more a place is thin, so much sooner doth it heat and cool, therefore it is soon seen, that such places do turn white again in fair Wether, and clear shining, and these Balances become of a fairer blue, then if they were done in dull Wether, as experience does manifest. Now how that forged Balance, as also the Filled Scales are to be form, is to be seen in the following Sculpture thus Deciphered. 1. The forged Balance. 2. The Fork of that Balance forged. 3. The half forged Fork. 4. Filled Scales with the half Fork. 5. The Pearl and Pendula's, the one fastened on the top of the Fork, the other fastened to the bottom of the Tongue and Fork. 6. One end of the Beam, (and the like is to be supposed at the other end of it. 7. How the Balance the Perch and Pendula are to hang, on the Wartz (or little Filled pieces of Iron,) on each side of the bottom of the Tongue. 8. The Holes in each end of the Fork. 9 The little Hole at the end of the Balance, (and the like is to be supposed at the other end of it.) 10. The Scales like small dishes. 11. Pincers to take up small Weights or pieces. Sculpture XI. CHAP. XXXV. Of Filing or Joining the proof Ballance or Scales. Section. 1 FILING and Joining of proof Scales is a special Science, and is the true Masterpiece, To fit Scales. which is not known to every one that can make them, and is done thus; when the proof Ballance is Filled out, (as hath been said before) then make, of Silver, two flat clean and smooth scales, and also two very Section. 2 The weight of the Scales to the Balance. thin small scales, the which are called inset scales, which altogether are to be as heavy as the Balance, or rather a little heavier than lighter, and put fine silk Thread to them, in length of the whole Balance, from one end to the other, such Threads are to have a neat Knot on the top, Section. 3 The Knots, whereby the strings may hang to the ends of the Balance, and when the strings are made fast to the scales, then weigh them one against the other, with another proof scales, and see if they do weigh alike, then hang them to the ends of the Balance, put the inset scales therein, and hang the Assay-ballance in a Case made on purpose, and draw them up gently, if then the scales do turn on the one side; that is, when you do press the scales down on the one side, that the scales remain down, as also on the other side, and will not go back but remain standing, than the fault is in the Beam, that on the same places is fitted Section. 4 When the balance falleth. too high, from which the Balance falleth on both sides, and will not stand just; if you know this, then make the Beam on both sides somewhat lower, but so that it be not higher on one side than on the other; to the rectifying of this, you should have a little smooth plate of Pear-tree, upon which make a Cross stroke, and in the midst of the Cross must be a little Hole, and upon this lay the filled Beam of the Balance, so that the little Wartz in the little Holes, and the Beam and little Tongue may come to lie upon the stroke, than you may soon see how the Beam, the little Tongue, and the Ends are fitted, that so you may help and fit it. So when the little Beam is thus prepared, that it may stand near the Ends, a little lower than the Line upon the little plate, then lay it in the Fork, in its place; give it the right quickness so that it draw well and distinctly the smallest of the Weights of the Proof-Weights (and not stop in its lodge) nor have too much room (that is to say) that the holes below of the Fork may not stand too far off from the little Wartz, but only that one may see through to try it. Section. 5 Now, when the Proof-Scales are thus made with To make the Balance, to stand true. the greatest diligence, see that it has its quickness, and does not stand; also that there be no fault neither in the Beam or little Wartz, it must stand right both with the scales and also without them, if it doth not this, but goes heavy on the one side and light on the other, there is the greatest fault, which to mend many do not understand; but thus is it to be done, help the Balance above on the one end, and on the other side on the scale, (that is thus) bend the one end a little down, or a little narrower, than doth it give presently the Balance on the other side, weight, for the length, and takes so much from the other side of the scale, that the Balance may stand in again in the Fork, then try it again whether it do well either with a Burden or without a burden, and that it may have its right quickness; but if it does not so, but goes still a little at one side, then have you done too much, then help it with bowing back of the end, and the scale; but if you have not bowed the end on the right side, than the Balance will go more false, therefore you may easily see on which side it is to be helped with binding and fitting them, and you may also use this diligence, that when you have bend the end on the one side, and that you also do the like on the other side of the scale, but make it even with Weights, that the Balance may stand right in the Fork, by which you may see how it doth stand in either with Weight, or without, and then it is easily to be corrected. It requires great Pains to fit a Balance thus, for it doth try many times a Master; yea, it maketh him so err, that he cannot know oft times how further to proceed: yet this way which I have here proposed is the best to such a fittingness: and it must certainly be managed by an ingenuous, and not a dull Soul. Thus much I thought good to signify, for the clearer Instruction, because 'tis very pertinent to our present Discourse of Proving, therefore I omitted it not. Section. 6 And that the Proof-Ballance may be preserved clean and pure from Dust, and also that in time of use the wind The Case for the Proof Ballance. may be no hindrance, but stand firm, therefore it is to be put in a clean and well form Proof-Case made of wood, which on both sides is to be set with bright and Or, oiled Paper. clear Glass, that the Light may come into it, and that all things may well be seen (the Form is shown in the following Sculpture: And, for conveniency of the Sight, it were best to colour the Inside of this Case green, because the Fire is hurtful to the Eyes, and by this colour they are again quickened and refreshed. Sculpture. XII. Deciphered. 1. The Outside of the Case for the Balance. 2. The Inside of that Case wherein the whole Balance is to hang, and be kept from Dust. CHAP. XXXVI. How Proof-Weights are to be made and divided, and first of the Grains Pence and Carrat weights. Section 1 BECAUSE both the making and parting of the Weights is no small thing, therefore To be made of Silver or Brass. I am obliged further to demonstrate how, and of what such are best to be made: First, it is better they be of good Silver than of Brass, for the Silver daubeth not, neither coloureth it so soon as Brass doth, but remaineth all times pure and clean, if now the Silver be cast into an Ingot, than one may cut out four square pieces in the proportion and bigness (as every piece of Proof-weight shall weigh) heavy or light, and file all such pieces pure and clean, upon a Whetstone, draw them smooth: also every one in particular (in respect of the Division) is with diligence to be put upon the Proof-Balance, that if it be still too heavy, it may be made lighter, and true; and so lastly, it may stand just. But some Provers think one should make and divide the Proof-weights from above, that is from the greatest still to the smallest; again, some from the smallest to the greatest; but know that it is best to be done in the following manner. Weights of a Mark. If Proof-Weights are to be prepared anew, they must Section. 2 be divided from the greatest to the smallest, for this Reason, Because one may better and more easily have the just and certain weight of a Mark, than of one from the smallest, as from the half-Grain or Heller, and should make a Weight out of it, there the Mark would be either much too heavy or much too light, in which an error is easily committed, Therefore use, in such a dividing from above, a small Grain of seeved and washed Copper, by which may be seen how much must be taken away and filled off from a piece, which is yet too heavy; when now such Proof-weight is finished, then Proof-Weights. shall it be drawn up from below, from the smallest to the greatest with diligence upon a quick and good Proof-Balance, and if there is yet any want, which cannot be great, that it may be completely helped. Now, how the Proof-weights, piece by piece are to be divided, may be seen in the IX Chapter of this first Book. CHAP. XXXVII. For dividing the Weight of the Centner. Section. 1 AS the Grain-Penny and Carrat Weights Carrats. may certainly be divided from the highest to the lowest, so it may be done with the Centner-weight, but because in the pounds there are unequal parts, understand it thus, The Centner hath a Hundred pound: the half, 50 pounds: and Section. 2 Unequal parts. the fourth part, twenty five pounds; and if one would out of it divide sixteen pounds, (which one that is not well skilled in Division may have great labour therein) than you should do thus, when you have made right the Division of the Centner to the fourth part, then weigh the fourth part of the Centner with a proof weight (it may be a Centner or pennyweight) and how much it weigheth, than you may make your account how much sixteen pounds shall weigh: (an example.) I put, the new divided twenty five pounds which do weigh on the pennyweight 13 loathes, three drams; then I say, the twenty five pounds will weigh one Mark, thirteen loathes, and three drams, which may weigh sixteen pounds, which amounts to nineteen loath, no dram, no penny, one heller, and do prove a little more than a fourth part of a heller, so much then must weigh sixteen pounds, after this weight or sixteen pounds: divide your weight with small grained Copper, (the smallest as you are informed before) and although the Centner had more pounds, nevertheless the unequal division of it may likewise be found. Now when the proof weight is all perfected then draw it up likewise with diligence from the smallest to the greatest, as you have done with the other, if there should be found an Error, then mend it also, so there will be small Difference, and the Centner will remain in the desired Weight. Section. 3 But that you may be sure whether the Proof-weights be right and just, set them aside, and make one Proof-weight Whether the Proof-weights are made right; more, as heavy as this, than put the made weights which pertain to a Proof-weight altogether in a quick Proof-Ballance, and weigh them one against the other, and if they stand even together, than you have made them right; if not, and that thou findest them not alike, then look where the Error is, and mend it, for, whoever will be sure of his Weights, must not think much of this Labour. Section. 4 Lastly, Number and Mark every piece of the Proof-Weight with a small iron or steel Punch, how much each piece doth weigh, by which it may be known: (but the marking must be done after its made smooth on a Whetstone whereby the Shivers which it had from the Stamp may be made smooth again) and lay them into a little clean Box, made on purpose of wood (the form of which is to be seen in the following Sculpture▪) in which there must be as many little round or square Holes, as there are weights, than shut the sides that it may be kept from Dust, and that the Weights may remain clean and pure. The Sculpture is thus Deciphered. 1. The little Case for Weights opened. 2. The same Case shut. Sculpture XIII. Section. 5 Thus much I was willing to signify and write concerning the Proving of Silver Oars, and what appertaineth to them; and though it had seemed needful to Instruct, How such and every particular Oar according to their Natures and Properties, should be melted and made to more Advantage in the great Fires of Furnaces and Smelting works: yet because, in this Treatise, I have only purposed to write of Proofs in Small Fires, and lesser Ovens, and because these now mentioned works are almost common in the Smelting and great Mine-works: Therefore I am willing to let it rest here; yet some great Works and Melt, I have mentioned (in this and other Following Books) because thy are not so common, and merely for the Instruction of other Assayers. The End of the first Book. OF Golden OARS. BOOK II. CAP. ay CHAP. I. Section; 1 THIS Second BOOK describeth how Gold oars are to be known, and how to Roast Boil and Prove them; also of Washing, Purifying and Quickening the Gold Wash-works: and further, how Touch-Needles are to be made, and to Divide the Gold-weights; also to distil Aqua Fortis, and to rectify it: also how Silver and Gold are to be parted by Aqua Fortis and by Fusion; and to make the Gold deft to cement it, and give it an high Colour, and how it must be cast through Antimony, and be brought to its height with the Ovens, glasses and Instruments which are used to all these. Section. 2 To know Gold Oars▪ The Knowledge of Silver-Oars having been now treated of; We proceed to the Gold Oars, (although they are not found in so many Kind's and Colors) which must after their external Modes be known also, together with their proving and ordering of them. But they have this Condition attends them, (as Experience hath taught me) That no Oar hath GOLD only of it No oar by itself Gold▪ self, without other incorporated Metals) unless it be apparent CAP. I and seen, how small soever it be intermixed with Section. them, and the same Gold, which is thus to be found in these Oars is not wholly pure and clean, but commonly Silvery, although one more than the other. Section. 4 Gold in Horn Oar. Now, the fair Gold that is found thus Intermixed or commonly standing in a whitish Flint, and sometime in a blue and yellow Horn-stone, and also in a Blue shiffer streamy and yellow iron, but very small and flaming with Gold, and this is found in the Mine at Knein, two miles from the Eal in Bohemia, towards the West, where there is also found a grenish Silvery Flint, in a firm Quarry; and when this is ground and washed, than a fair and high Duke Gold comes out of it, which otherwise is not seen in the Flint, at the present: I know no place in Germany, where, out of any Oar, any higher Gold can be made. Section. 5 Further, all Goldish oars (which are commonly sandy) Gold in Woolfrain. Tin, and Iron Oars. have good Duke gold, yet not all alike, some are gross and in grains▪ others are flaming and light Gold, and there is almost in all such works a heavy * Shurl, her. Temper (or wolfram wash) especially in Tin and Iron stone, which with the Gold have been driven far by the Deluge, and it is both wonderful and neat, and the work and colour Section. 6 Why the Rivers carry Gold with them. and difference may easily be discerned, of these sorts: and the Rivers and Channels which do flow over such works are so seeded with it, that Duke gold in many places is found in them, not only in remote Kingdoms and Countries, but also with us in Germany, it is brought to profit, yet in Germany for the most part it is poor, and cannot bear the charge of Washing. Section. 7 But some old Writers say, That (out of the River Of the River Nile. Nile in Egypt, which did flow into the Sea in the time of the Deluge, in which all Sand was brought together) other Rivers and Channels have also been seeded with Duke gold; But, to this I cannot consent, for this Reason, Because this River is very great, and goeth CAP. I through that part of Ethiopia, (which is called India) in which also is found much Gold, and it is said to be the greatest of all other Rivers, and doth flow the furthest; yet I esteem it much too small to enrich so many Gold-Mines with Gold-sand and channels in so innumerable places of the World. Section. 8 Grains which are carried away by Foreigners. There is also with us in Germany all sorts of Grains which are found in many Mountains and Channels, and are carried away by outlandish men; some of them are flinted, in part brown yellow and black, and within like Glass, and in form commonly round, and also square, of which, as 'tis said, Gold is also made: for my part, I esteem such not at all, because I have assayed many times such Grains in the Fire, and other ways tried, but could not find Gold in them. But thus much I have from very credible Persons, who have assured me, That such Grains have not Gold in them, nor none is made out of them, but by such persons brought far into Italy and other places, for an Addition, out of which fine Colours and Amel is to be made, which colours and Amel by them is thus esteemed and sold dear, as if it were Gold, which also is agreeable to reason and may be believed, especially because many sorts of Mines, with us in Germany, are found which do yield glossy and fine Colours. Section. 9 Gold in Iron-man Oar. Further, sometimes with the digged Gold (which lies in flints, especially in the Gold-Mine at the Eal in the Kingdom of Bohemia) there breaks a small grey spissy Oar, which, after its colour, is called Iron-man, that same also is not only rich in Gold, but 'tis also silvery, therefore it is not to be compared with the other digged Gold which standeth in flints. Also there is found much Gold flints which have not only Gold but silver also, and commonly Section. 10 Gold in flint▪ more of silver than gold, likewise flints which are very CAP. TWO copery and silvery, the silver of it is also rich in gold; as also some white flints which have no Copper at all, and but a little silver, and are goldy, but the flints which are coppery, and whose Silver hath Gold are found commonly with small flints intermixed. Section. 11 Concerning the Marcasite, of which many make Fables, Gold Marcasite. and do write as if it were a mere flint, is very rich in Gold (because it doth not lose the fourth part in the Fire) and in roasting and glowing becomes more and more fine: I have many times diligently enquired after it, but never received any good account concerning it, much less could I hear of one who had seen such a flint. But, as far as I can comprehend, the Marcasite can and must be nothing else than a very good Gold-oar: Now whether this Name be given it, or any other, it matters not: But how these (one after another called Gold-oars and washed Works) are to be proved and tried, shall plainly follow. CHAP. II. What Proofs and Washings the Gold-washers use in Gold-works. Section. 1 How much may be washed in a day. GOLD-Washers who go abroad in the Country for Gold-washing, and get their Livelihood by it, they have for the Gold-works a special proving, whereby they do observe how much Gold they wash in one day, and accordingly make their Accounts, whether the Work will bear the charge of Washing, and whether it be poor or rich, and to this Proof they use a particular Weight, which is divided by the weight of an Hungary-Gilder, after the worth of so much as is used to pay for such wash-Gold. CAP. TWO Section. 2 But because commonly 92 Creicers are given for an Hungary Gilder weight of wash Gold, therefore they Of Creicers Golden and a Peny-Weight. make forth the greatest weight as high as an Hungury Gilder, and sign it with 92 Creicers, the second piece or half of the weight with 46 Creicers, and so of all the other pieces, one after another, with their Worth, till to the single penny, as followeth, 92 Creicers the weight of a Gilder. 46 Creicers the half Gilder. 23 Creicers the fourth part of a Gilder. 12 Creicers 6 Creicers 3 Creicers 2 Creicers 1 Creicers 2 Penny weight Bohemish Money. 1 Penny weight Bohemish Money. Section. 3 Of Gold Grains. By these Weights every one may be informed of a grain of Gold, how much it is worth when weighed, therefore commonly the Gold-washers which go into the Lands for such Work carry with them such a Weight, with a black * Sichertroegel. Sicher Troy, and a little Box full of Quicksilver, and a soft Leather, a proof Test, and a little Balance (to all these things pertaining) then as soon as one of them enters upon a sandy or soft Work, and worketh upon it: if he finds Gold in it (how small soever it be) then doth he cleanse a little of it, and doth cause it to enter cleanly into the Quick silver, and doth afterwards press it through the Leather, from it, and that which doth remain in the Leather he puts upon a Proof Test, into the fire, which he doth presently kindle, either in the CAP. TWO Woods or Mountains and causeth it to go off, and the Gold to be red-hot, and what it doth afterwards weigh according to his Creicer and penny weight, so doth he make his Reckoning, how much of such Oar he can wash and make it return to an account in one day, and so in a Week. Section. 4 If upon Search he doth find by such proof that the To prepare Board's for Washing it. Wash▪ work will recompense his labour pains and charges, than each one, according as he is best instructed doth wash the same, and make his profit thereby, among which there are some who do wash that which doth lie in the Fields under the moist earth, as also the Sand out of the flowing Rivers or Channels, and do wash it over a Board, in which are cut little Gutters and wrinkles, here and there, into which the heavy Gold will descend and remaineth; but part of it will wash over, especially if the work be rich and hath grain Gold; but if it doth go slow, it requires more pains. Section. 5 Some years past, there was found upon such Work A special good wash work▪ and sand, by the waterside, a special wash-Work by which, in one day near 300 weight of rubbish have been washed away, and the Gold saved: which is done thus, There must first be made of Brass Wire a Rattar or Section. 6 The Bigness of the Rattar. Seeve as wide or narrow as the Work requireth, and it is to be tied from above downward with Brass wire, and it must be stretched fast upon Iron-stays; that it may not bend or rise, the bigness of the Rattar is to be seven spans long, and five wide, and in depth a good span, with a bottom that doth enter two thirds into the Rattar, and with one third part to be extended for carrying the matter out (which is to be done over with Tin) the Rattar must also have, on each side, little wooden pieces fastened to it, by which he may reach to the foremost Instruments, that the gross matter that doth not go through may easily be emptied. CAP. TWO As also the lower bottom under the Rattar must have on each side Board's fastened to it, that nothing may fall from the Rattar, for from that place the Work passeth from the Rattar, upon the flat hearth (which is to be thirty spans in length, and four broad) and the Channel through which the Water doth runout must be wider than that above, and also covered-over with Tin: to this there is also Water used more or less, according as the Work is foul or sandy. Section. 7 This Wash-work serveth only for Sandy-works, but not at all for the clean and deft: yet because this work is not common to this day, therefore (for them that have not seen it) I have delineated it in the following Sculpture, thus Deciphered. 1. The man that worketh with the Rattar. 2. The middle Floor whereon that which goeth through the Rattar doth fall. 3. The lower Floor whereon that which cometh from the middle Floor doth fall. 4. The Plain Receiver of that which falls from both. 5. The person that stands on a Board, and out of a Wheel-barrow throws the Matter or Oar, into the Tunnel, which guides it into the Rattar. 6. The Channel in which Water doth run into the Rattar. CAP. TWO Sculpture XIV. Section▪ 8 Then some of the Gold-washers use upon their Of Seircing Gold Oar. hearths the strong Timode black and russet woollen Cloth, over which they do drive their Works, because the woollen cloth is rough and hairy, so that the small and round grains of Gold will remain, and not run forth (as it will from the Timode) whereby the Gold (upon the black Cloth may apparently be known, though it be small and little. CAP. TWO Section. 9 Others use in stead of the Timode or black woollen clothes Linsy-woolsy (half linen and half woollen; wrought in the manner as the Timode is) upon which the The sorts of cloth to be used for seircing it. Gold doth stick better, and such clothes do last longer, because of the Linen that is among the Woollen which doth strengthen it, therefore it is better for this Work. Section. 10 How to use the long Rattars. But there is another way of Washing (not much in use) which is called Driving and Washing through the long Rattar; but according to my mind, it is not so convenient a way for the small Works, which have great and small Gold, and are both sand and Clay together, yet I do not much decline from the before described Rattar-work: For, in this Labour or washing, because of the turning in the upper and lower falls, the running Gold is preserved better, and the Gold goeth with the small common Work over the plain hearth, upon which it is driven: and the manner of doing it is seen in the following Sculpture; thus Deciphered 1. The Miner which caries the matter to be washed in the Rattar. 2. The Parts of the Rattar, more visible than in the former Sculpture. 3. The Washer that governs the Rattar. 4. The upper and lower Falls from the Rattar. 5. The plain Board's, or Hearth) on which they fall. 6. He that stirs about the muddy water from both Fall. 7. The Tub wherein that which falleth from the hearth is to be washed. CAP. TWO Sculpture XV. Section. 11 Thus much I was willing in short to discourse about To purify the Gold Slicks. the Gold-Washing, as a Direction how the Work is to be done to Advantage. If now a Work be rich, than it is the better, and then may easily be found and used a manner of Washing, that the loose Gold by it may be preserved: and when the Slick is brought into a narrowness, and the Gold drawn out with the great Instrument, or with the slender and long one (which is called a Saxen) then may it be quickened and pressed through CAP. TWO the Leather; then glow out and cast all together, of which more shall be written in what followeth. Section. 13 Thus far I have spoken of the Gold and * Seyfen or Soper. wash-works which do need Boxes: Now I intent to write also of the Gold Oars which are had in the Mines out of the Veins▪ and how that must be buckt or washed; in which Of great Grained gold. the digged Gold is clearly to be seen, and such must have a special way of preparing it) namely, those Oars in which the Gold standeth in great Grains, and may be parted with the hand, or beaten in a great Iron Mortar, and, if there be much, then set it over a Seeve, made on purpose, and so cleanse it, and it needeth no more pains, nor greater Art: and it is better than that the Oars (without difference) were brought under the Buck, or washing place (especially because one useth to observe such a hand parting in smaller Metals, as Silver, Copper and Led Oars.) Section. 14 How digged Gold is mingled. But the poor Gold Oars which are mingled with small Gold (and cannot be separated with the hand) the same if they can be wrought without Roasting, may be Bucked and prepared two ways, viz. by a wet and a dry Bucking or beating; by the wet Bucking is the Oar washed through Tin plates and Channels (and like unto silvery Oar, driven over a plain Hearth, and afterwards made clean) but in the dry beaten Work, the Floor is driven over the plain Hearth with Woollen or Linsy-Woolsy stuff (as above, where the Gold-work hath been taught) and so washed and made clean and quickened. Section. 15 Flinty and Horn stony Gold Oars how to be used. There are also Flinty and Horn-stony Gold Veins, in which the Gold is very subtle and thin, and is mingled with other Water-flowing Gold Oars, the best way of preparing them is, That such Flints and Horn-stones, provided there may be had Wood enough in the place, CAP. TWO may in a special Roast Oven, made on purpose, be burnt: first, very hard and well, and when it standeth in the greatest heat, pour water upon it, that it may cool suddenly, and so the subtle flaming Gold will be, as it were, frighted, at the incorporated Oar, and run together, and become a round Body, and is strengthened and remaineth the better in washing, also 'tis better preserved: likewise, the Flint by quenching doth become so brickle, that afterwards in great quantity, it may easily be buckt and separated, and is not so hurtful (after it is roasted) to the tender Gold, as before when it was raw) because the hard Flint among the Gold-Oar doth more hurt in Bucking in respect of its weight, and the muddiness carrieth away some of the Gold with it, in the mudy Water, but seeing that it is very rare to find plenty of wood in such places where flinty, Horn-stone Gold Veins are; therefore every one is left to try the best way. Section. 16 The Roast-Ovens in which those flinty Oars are roasted, Roast ovens. and afterwards quenched with water, make them thus: Give to each Oven two els in square, and six els high, and cause it to be built up with stones, that the Oven before the lower part may remain, open so high that the roasted Oar may be drawn out of the hole (after the Oar which is to be roasted is put in) than it must be closed up with Clay, also there must be in the Oven, in stead of the roast, Separations, made of Tiles an Ell high, upon which the wood is to be laid, that the Wind may go between the Tiles into the Oven, whereby the fire may burn clear. When you intent to roast in such an Oven, then lay into the Oven upon the Tile-stones, short split wood, two els high; upon which put the stony Oar, as gross as it doth come out of the Pit, but the small which are not in very great pieces set along the sides of the Oven▪ that the great pieces may be in the middle, so that the flame and heat of the fire may wind about it, and also the heat CAP. TWO of the fire remain together in the Oven, and force itself through it to the top of the Furnace, and such forand enclosed Heat doth much more than in an open Roast, and when the Roast in the Oven burneth at the fiercest, then must water be poured on it, and be quened suddenly, therefore such a Roast Oven for better Advantage is to be built in such a place where water may Section. 17 To quench the Roast. easily be poured into it, so the subtle Gold will run together in grains, and the stone will become brickle (as hath been said before) although the same do become brickle only with burning, yet it becometh more brickle by quenching, and it is done more especially for the Gold sake. The form of such Roast-Ovens, and how they must stand in its proportion and shape, will be seen in this following Sculpture, thus Deciphered 1. The Form of the Roasting-ovens. 2. The Shutters to them. 3. The Inside of them. 4. The Partitions in them, made of Tile, and a person attending at the mouth of them. 5. He that pours Water into the top of the Oven. 6. The wood that is used in those Roasting-ovens. 7. The Instruments to close the Ovens. 8. The Ladder to go to the Top of the Oven. 9 The Pieces of Metal that are to be used. CAP. TWO Sculpture XVI. Section. 18 If there be a great quantity of the Goldstones, than there may be made more Ovens, as also bigger, and according as necessity requireth, regulate them that the Fire may have its full force. Thus much I was willing to mention concerning the Preparation of the Gold Oars: But because I have not from my youth, meddled so much in it, as with other Oars, therefore have I shortened my Discourse: and others that know better Methods have their Liberty to enlarge. CHAP. III. Of Gold Slicks▪ Section. 1 FURTHER, know also that when the Gold Oars and Gold Slicks are cleansed Of poor Gold slicks. for to quicken: and the Gold drawn out, with the Quick silver, and hath been quickened, yet there will remain from the quickening a Slick, of which some is poor in Gold, and some rich, yet the rich Slicks may be made to pofit and melted like as a rich Silver Oar: But the other common Gold Slicks, especially if they be of the Gold-Mine at the River Eal) are flinty, and that the Centner which hath but a dram of Gold, cannot better be melted than over the raw Slicks into Slackstones; but if the Slicks be not flinty of themselves, than there must be another flint, (which yields much Stone) added to the Slick in melting, and when the Slackstone doth not come out rich in Gold, then add more of such Flints to it, to help the Flint, until a Centner of the Slackstone doth contain 13 or 14 Drams in Gold, but it must not be wrought by adding more to it, because if it should become too rich in Gold (it is to be feared that) the Slakes would remain too rich: therefore, if there be enough of such flints to be had, let them be added to it, or if the Slick itself be flinty, and yield stones, than 'twere better that the Slackstone were brought no further in Contents, than to 10 drams of Gold in the Centner, and so the Slack will remain the poorer: thus the Iron flaky Oars (which have very subtle flaming Gold, and commonly the Centner of it doth contain a dram or two in Gold) may return to great Advantage. Section. 2 But the rich Gold Ram or Slick (out of which Gold is quickened) which in part useth to be very rich in Gold that sometimes it doth contain a Centner from three to Of rich slicks. many Loathes of silvery Gold, such can no better way be melted than with Lead; yet because that same Slack is very subtle, therefore the blast in melting doth raise it up very easily, so that it doth fly out, and is lost by it: to prevent this, Let the Slick be mingled with strong Yeast, and let it dry, then break it into Bits, or before it is quite dry, cut it to small Bits, and put it into the Oven, and so it will remain better in the fire. Section. 3 To bring both to Profit. 'Tis necessary I further direct, That when one hath a Gold Slick, and would melt it, and that a Centner thereof doth hold from two to five drams of Gold, and is not stony in itself, there must be other flints added so that the flint and slick may not be throughly mingled together, nor run upon the slick, for by this there will be danger, because the flint doth spread itself, and gives a little rough stone, whereby there will remain much of the Gold behind, but weigh the flint and the slick, each by themselves, and if any of it be melted, so much (according to the quantity, partly flint and partly slick and slacks) must be set into the melting Oven, and it will fine itself well enough together, and by this means (as Experience teacheth) more row stones and more Gold will be wrought out, than if such slick, flint and slacks had been mingled together, because the work remaineth close together and is not spread. CHAP. IU. How Gold-Slicks with Gold from digged Oar are to be prepared. Section. 1 WHEN the Gold-slicks which do contain Gold are made clean, and there is a desire to make more profit of it, by quickening and getting the Gold out of them, than the slicks must first be prepared in the following manner: viz. Take good strong Wine Vinegar, put into every gallon half a pound of Alum, cause it to boil up a little, and then let it cool, than put the Gold-slicks in a clean prepared Vessel, and pour the prepared Vinegar upon it, that it may cover the slicks, let it stand two or three nights in it, and work well upon it, so the Vinegar will make a fresh ground to the flamy Gold, that it will not easily enter into the Quick silver, and that which is yet among it of deft Oar will become slimy, and the Gold is made less, and when the Vinegar hath stood the mentioned days over it, then separate the Vinegar clear from it, and wash the slicks clean and fair with warm water, and let it dry, than put it in the grinding Tub or wooden Vessel, and so much Quicksilver to it as the quantity of the Gold in the slicks doth require, and rub it well together with the hands, afterwards with a wooden pestle, fitted for it, grind it well and so long, till the Quick silver hath taken up all the Gold; when this is done, then pour warm water upon it, and wash the slicks and Quick silver clean, and pour out the muddy matter, and the Quick silver will run together again: which must be separated very clean from the slicks, that nothing remain behind, because it is more Goldish: when this is done, dry it with a sponge; and put it in a double strong Timode or into a fine leather (which is Section. 2 To press the Quick silver through Leather. better) and force it with a strong Cord so as the Quicksilver being so pressed will pass through such Timodes or leather, and the Gold with almost as much Quicksilver will remain in the Leather; put this on a flat Test upon a coal fire, and the remaining Quick silver will cooperate and the Gold will remain alone; then glow it well and melt it together before the Bellows with Borax, so long till it doth hold the wind, then pour it into an Ingot: ☞ The prepared Vinegar (as hath been said) with Allom, is for the most part used by all Refiners, but they quicken Gold only simply with slick, but 'tis better that such Vinegar be prepared and used. Section. 3 When the Gold holds Silver. But if the Gold be a little silvery (as commonly wash Gold is, which do not come out of an higher Content than they are in the Oar) beat it thin, put it in Cement; as hereafter shall be discoursed, than it will be clean and have a high Colour. Section. 4 T● p 〈…〉 the d●●●g●d Gold. What Gold hath been picked out and is wholly digged (or else separated by the hand) such Gold may be melted with Borax and cast, and if there is yet any uncleanness than set it first upon a flat Test, let it drive with a little Ball of pure Lead until it doth hold the Blast, and afterwards again with Borax melted into an Ingot, and so it will be deft. This manner of quickening doth serve upon all slicks; (which have digged Gold) because as the same is washed in Sand, and picked out of the Oars; in the same manner it will come out in quickening, and doth not hurt the Quicksilver at all, and when it is forced out, then may it be used again. Section. 5 There have been also some Gold-washers which have had a singular manner in the Gold-washing and quickening; Section. 5 namely, they have first ground in a Mill the Gold Oars (or Slicks) very small (as small as Meal) afterwards they have moistened it with strong, hot Salt-water, and have mingled it very well like unto Copel Ashes, that the Salt may every where touch the Slicks upon the Oar; and while the Salt water is yet warm and hot they have upon five pound of the Oar poured twenty pound of Quick silver, and have mingled the Slick or Oar several times with it, and stirred it well, so long until the Quick silver could hardly be discerned in it, and they have afterwards put the Oar into several Vessels full of Water, made on purpose, and have stirred it, but one Vessel did always stand lower than the other, that that which did fall out of the upper vessel, (and so to the second or third) might be received and settle in the fourth. And thereby washed the most of the Muddiness away; then they have taken the Oar and mingled it with the Quick silver, and put it upon the Mill (which hath an hollow stone) and have ground it with water, that it might flow through it, until no more Muddiness did go from it, till all that which is come through the Mills be settled in the Vessels and preserved, so that nothing was lost: Lastly, the Quick silver was taken out of the Mill, and with diligence kept together, and dried, and pressed through Leather. This Work I like well upon great Quantities of poor Oars, in which the digged Gold is very subtle and not flinty, and yieldeth no stone, which cannot be melted otherwise to Advantage. This is a neat work, and is worthy of Deliberation; But I for my part have this further Consideration in it, That poor Gold slicks, cannot be much Charge; because, first, the Slick must be ground, and the Charge of the Salt or mingling, well considered, as also the Charge of the other grindings, and the waste of the Quick silver; but lastly, to make the Gold completely clean (besides the charges of the building up of the Gold-Mill) 'tis necessary to be careful herein, for, some Gold-Oar may have so much subtle Gold, as will pay richly for all the Charges. CHAP. V. How Clean Gold-slicks are to be made to profit without Quicksilver. Section. 1 IN want of Quick silver one may melt the clean and rich Gold slicks with grained By Lead-glass. etc. Lead, Litharge and Lead-glass in a Crucible with a little of Caput Mort. and Sandover, and cover it over with Salt, and so cause it to flow well in a Wind-Oven, and afterwards cause the Regulus to go upon a flat Test, because of the Black-stoney Veins there will be also much fine slick thrust out among the Iron, therefore the Iron is first to be drawn out with a good Loadstone, otherwise it will be much hindered in the upboyling, but if the Gold slick be flinty or the like, than it must first be roasted, so all the Gold which is not lose in the slick will enter into the Regulus of Lead, and be made to profit. Section. 2 To make firm Tests for Gold. The Test to such work must be prepared with washed Ashes, among which must be mingled half the quantity of small Bone▪ Ashes, and a little Potters-clay, and the upper part must be done over with good Clar, that nothing of the Gold be drawn into it, and when it is all thus prepared, than water must be poured into it, and let it suck it in, whereby the Test will be made firm and good, and when the Gold is gone off upon the Test, then take the appearing Gold, which is yet unclean, put it upon a flat Test, done over with a little Clar, and let the Bellows blow upon it, so long until the Gold doth endure the blast, and so it will be deft, and then you may (if it have yet a little smoke of Lead) cause it to melt in a Crucible with a little Borax, and cast it into an Ingot, or presently let it go into the Cement, as hereafter you will be instructed. Section. 3 To boil up the clean Gold slick. The rich cleansed Gold slick may also be boiled up with the following Fluss, like unto the Copper Oars: thus, Take Slick, mingle among it twice so much Fluss, put it in a Crucible cover it over with Salt, cause it to flow well, with a strong heat in a Wind-furnace, and there will be as much Gold Regulus in the Crucible as there was in the slick; then cause it to cool well, and knock the Regulus clean off from the Fluss, but because it is yet unclean from the Fluss, therefore cause it to go off upon a flat Test with a small lead Ball, until it melts and becomes deft: and although in the quantity of the slick, the quickening is most fit to be used, yet there may (by this Vpboiling) be ten pound at once melted in a Crucible, and the Gold be brought into a Regulus. CHAP. VI Of Fluss to boil up the Oars. FLUSS (of which hath been spoken) is made thus, Take one part of Saltpetre and two parts of Argol (both stamped small and mingled together) cause a glazed Pot to glow, put the matter into it, and cover the Pot quickly, so the fluss will be presently burnt out and become a black-grey Powder; or else, when the pulverised matter is put into the Pot, than put a live Coal into it, so it will burn out to a Fluss, mingle also Salt Petre, melted Salt and Sandover, and crude Argol with it, then is the Fluss ready. CHAP. VII. How Gold may be separated very clean from the Quicksilver. Section. 1 AFTER Gold is quickened, and the Quicksilver The use of Quicksilver in this work. pressed through a leather and forced from it, yet there will remain commonly a little Gold with it, especially when the Gold-slicks and Gold Oars have been poor, and that the Quicksilver did not become rich, such Quicksilver may be preserved for other Work of the like nature. But if there were no more such slicks to be done, yet the Gold (which did go with the Quick silver through the Leather) must be separated from it very clean, by an Artificial Separation, and such Quicksilver doth commonly contain two or three Loathes of Gold in the Centner, especially when the Quicksilver came from poor slicks, and Section. 2 How a Iron Jug or Pot is to be made and Leamed. such separation is done thus, 'Cause an Iron Jug to be made, which may be taken asunder at the belly, lute the lower part of the inside, about half a finger thick, with very good and weighty Loam, (that will hold well in the fire, and not crack) cause it to dry, set the upper part upon it, and bind them both very fast, and close together with an Iron Wyer, and then do it all over on the outside with good Clay, and when it is dry, than set it in an Oven (which is called an Athanor with which one useth to burn Aqua fortis) and put in it fifty pound of Quick silver (if you have such a quantity of it) and place an Helmet upon it, and also an earthen Jug before it, in which there must be full three quarts of Water, and all must be luted well on the outside, and cause it to dry, then let the fire burn by degrees to be stronger from one hour to the other, until at last the Jug be very red, yet make it not suddenly hot, that the Jug may not burst, nor the Quicksilver fly out, so the Quicksilver will all come over into the water in the Receiver, which when the fire is kept in good order) is done in seven or eight hours: when all is come over, then let the Jug cool well, and take it out of the fire, and open it, so will you find all the Gold in the bottom, then take it from the Loam, and let it flow together. After this manner (now directed) the Gold which remaineth in the Leather (which hath Quick silver with it) may be put in and drawn off: and the Quick silver may return to Advantage. Section. 3 To refresh Quicksilver But because the Quicksilver will become a little weak from the drawing over (so that it will not attract so soon as in the beginning) and if you would have it fresh again, then put it into a Vessel of Wood, draw warm salt Water upon it, grind it with your hand well together, and dry it with a Sponge, than it is as good again as it was before, and you may use it again: also there is no great loss by it in the drawing it off, if the Pots and Glasses be well luted. Section. 4 In case you cannot have always in readiness an iron Jug, cause one to be made of earth (which will endure the fire) and lute the same likewise with good and firm Clay, as you did to the iron Jug; so put the Quicksilver into it, and Helmet upon it, and set before it the Jug with water, and lute it well altogether, then force the Quick silver over it, and you may have it again for use, but such Labour is performed with Sorrow and danger, because if such an earthen Jug should crack or spring then the Quick silver will be lost, and will evaporate to smoke, therefore there must not be so much Quicksilver put in it, as into an iron Jug or Pot. Section. 5 Some use to put upon such a Jug an earthy blind Another way to draw off the Gold. Limbeck (that on both sides hangeth over) and therein they put water, and draw the Quicksilver from the pressed Gold in it, and when it is a little cool, they put it out through the Pipe which is above on the Helmet, and then the Gold will remain on the Jug. Now, which of these (that is found most serviceable and convenient to any one) he may use: only take notice, That if you let the smoke away and the remaining Quicksilver from the Gold (without distillation) take heed the smoke or vapour go not into thy Belly, because it is a poisoning and cold Vapour, which lameth and killeth: for, he will find that it will there congeal and afterwards spoil his body. Now, that the Reader may know how the Jug and Instruments are to be made which are to be used for quickening, and attracting, he may find exactly in the following Sculpture, which is thus Deciphered. 1. The Athanor or great Furance. 2. The Ovens on the sides of it. 3. The earthen Receiver for it. 4. The earthen Helmet for it. 5. The blind Helmet with a Pipe by which water may be poured in. 6. He that fitteth the matter. 7. He that presseth the Quicksilver through a Leather. 8. The lower part of the iron pot or Receiver. 9 The upper part of it. 10. The Leather purse for the Quicksilver. 11. He that causeth the Gold to melt, by help of the Bellows. 12. The Pieces of Metal. Sculpture XVII. CHAP. VIII. How Gold-Oars are to be proved for Gold. Section. 1 GOLD Oars are of two sorts, one is partly flowing, the other partly harsh (as is discoursed in the first Book) Now from the silver Oars the common Assayers have had in their proving two Processes, namely, upon the mild and flowing Oars, viz. the Iron-streamy and bright Oars) and such as are without flints: their Process was thus: They used to grind their Oar or slick very small, and have weighed a Centner of the Fluss, which they had prepared for the Gold-Oars, (as we shall discourse hereafter) and have mingled altogether, and did put it into a clean Crucible, and covered it with Coals, and have set it before the Bellows, and did blow about it, and when the Fluss was melted, then have they put fifteen Centner of clean Lead into it, and when it did begin to slack, than they take the Crucible out of the fire, and suffer it to cool, then beat the Regulus with the slacks out of the Crucible, and put it together upon a proof Test, in an Assay Oven, and have caused it to boil up, and slack again, as other silver Oars; and have stirred it about with a clean Iron-hook, and when it was well boiled up, they did let it cool; finally, they have beaten off the slacks from the Work, and upon a well nealed Coppel caused it to go off, but they have made their fluss, (for such proving) of one part of Litarge, and one part of Antimony well ground together and melted them, and when they did intend to use it with such Oars (as were not Iron-streamy Oars) they added a little filings of Iron, that the fluss might have something to devour and not hurt the Silver and Gold. Section. 2 The flinty Gold Oars. But the flinty Oars and slick which are harsh and unflowing they have assayed according to the former way, only they have first roasted it, and some do quench it in the roasting with Urine, or with a particular prepared Lie, thinking thereby to obtain the more: But for my part, I do not esteem such Processes, because no more (by such Labour) can be brought out by it, than by the following Method, which I esteem more necessary, and through which the Proof may be accomplished cleanlier, and in a shorter time: yet, because the abovesaid Labour was by the Ancients in use, therefore I do leave it according to its esteem with others. Section. 3 Another Proving. The other proving is done thus, take the Gold-Oar or slick, either flinty, raw, or deft, as it happens, and grind it small: Of this weigh a Centner with thy Proof-weight, and put to it fifteen Centners of granulated Lead, and mingle them together in an Assay-Test, then put to it a Centner of small grounded Lead-Glass, and set it in a warm Assay-Oven, make it first hot so long until the Lead beginneth to drive, and the Oar to rise, then let it cool again, that the Oar may roast over the Lead, and rise no more, then cause it be hot again, so will it slack very clean, then stir it about with an iron Hook, and let it stand a little longer, when 'tis enough, then take the Test out of the Assay-Oven, let it cool, and beat the work clean off from the slacks, and let it go off upon a Copel; when this is done, then draw up the Grain against the Lead-grain, and as much as it is heavier, so much doth the Oar or slick contain of Gold, or Gold and Silver, which thou mayst know by this that when the Grain is very white, then put it in a separating-Glass, to dissolve in Aqua Fort. but if the Grain is too rich in Gold, so that the Aqua Fort. will not touch it, then add to the Grain a little fine Silver which holdeth no Gold: so that to one part of Gold, there may be three parts of Silver and cause this in a Copel, with pure Lead, to drive together: After this, take that Grain, beat it flat with an hammer, glow and dissolve it in Aqua fortis, as you have been instructed before, then pour the Aqua fortis off, and dulcify the Gold with warm water, put it out of the separating Glass and glow it well, when this is done, then draw it up with the Proof Scales, and you will see how much a Centner of the Oar or slick doth contain of Gold and Silver, and by this Proof the Assayer may know that all the Gold and Silver which is in an Oar is certainly found, and hath not need of other Circumstances, because the Lead doth take very willingly the Gold and Silver to itself. But how the Gold is to have its due dissolution, dulcification, and what is else to be done with it, all this I intent to declare hereafter more fully. Hereby one may know that there is no need to take any Lead-glass for such soft flowing or deft Gold Oars or Gold-Slicks, but it may easily be boiled up, by governing the fire; one may also do the flinty Gold Oars in like manner, only they are sooner and better boiled up when Lead-Glass is added. Section. 4 Some Assayers have also used to grind the Gold-slick-flint A fine Gold Pro●f. and other Gold Oars very small, and weigh them off, and put it in a separating-Glass, and pour into it good strong Aqua fortis, and they let it dissolve as much as it will, afterwards letting the Aqua fortis be evaporated, that it may all come hard in the Glass, they beat it out, and boil it up in a Test, with Lead, and cause it to go off upon the Coppel. This proof I like well, and I judge, that if something more of Gold may be obtained, that it must be done this way: only the great quantities must not be regulated according to this Method: Therefore every Assayer is to take heed with good Diligence, that he may order his Assays thus, that he may always find the Contents as near as he can, so that he may afterwards in melting great quantities, find the same according to the proportion. CHAP. IX. How Gold in Lumps, Plates, Ingots or coined Gold is to be assayed, and first of Touch-Needles. Section. 1 BECAUSE in Touch Needles of Gold, there is often used much Deceit, especially Deceit in Touch needles. by such who do buy Gold by the Touch, therefore to such Proving it is necessary to make true Needles, without Deceit, That one may not be overreached by touching, so as when Gold is brought to a high colour by Graduation, that such a stroke upon the Touch-needles of eighteen Carats, with good Crown Gold may be made, and thereby may be judged. Section. 2 But first you are to be instructed that some sorts of Gold (that come from separating and have no red, but Of Gold and silver touch needles, called red and white. altogether white) cannot be touched upon a certainty with Touch Needles for Gold, on the contrary, such which have much red and little white, as the Crown-Gold, with white Needles, which are made for the separating, and washed Gold must not be touched, much less can the Rhenish Gold, which hath more white than red, be done by these now mentioned Needles, I will therefore first describe the Needles which are most in use, how they must be prepared and made, and afterwards the others also with this Caution, that every Assayer may take good heed that he may so well order his Gold stroke, that he may not be esteemed as one without understanding, and that he may not come to Damage, because through false Needles, not only they who are unacquainted with the several sorts of Gold, but also such who handle them daily, are oftentimes deceived. CHAP. X. How the white Touch Needles are to be made. Section. 1 TO all Touch Needles for Gold you shall take pure and fine Gold, although such can be as little demonstrated as fine Silver, and I judge such Gold to be pure and fine, which is cast and diligently blowed off, and afterwards beaten thin, and by Cement and other ways cleansed (of which hereafter) now you are to weigh such Gold off: (for Needles) with a singular Carat-weight, which must be a little more than a common Carat weight, and to every one must be allowed, as followeth. Section. 2 Weigh to the first Needle 24 Carats of fine Gold, which maketh the first Needle: to the Second, weigh 23 Carats and a half of fine Gold, and a half Carat, or six Grains of white fine Silver: to the Third, 23 Carats of fine Gold, and one Carat of white: to the Fourth, 22 Carats and a half of Gold, and one Carat and a half of White: to the Fifth, 22 Carats of Gold, and two Carats of White: to the sixth, 21 Carats of Gold, and two Carats and a half of White: to the Seventh, 21 Carats of Gold, and three Carats of White: to the vl, 20 Carats and a half of Gold, and three Carats and a half of White: to the Ninth, 20 Carats of Gold, and four Carats of White: to the Tenth, 19 Carats and a half of Gold, and four Carats and a half of White: to the Eleventh, 19 Carats of Gold, and five Carats of White: to the Twelfth, 18 Carats and a half of Gold, and five Carats and a half of White: to the Thirteenth, 18 Carats of Gold, and six Carats of White: to the Fourteenth, 17 Carats and an half of Gold, and six Carats and an half of White: to the Fifteenth, 17 Carats of Gold, and seven Carats of White: to the Sixteenth, 16 Carats and a half of Gold, and seven Carats and an half of White: to the Seventeenth, 16 Carats of Gold, and eight Carats of White: to the Eighteenth, 15 Carats and an half of Gold, and eight Carats and an half of White: to the Nineteenth, 15 Carats of Gold, and nine Carats of White: to the Twentieth, 14 Carats and an half of Gold, and nine Carats and an half of White: to the One and Twentieth, 14 Carats of Gold, and ten Carats of White: to the Two and twentieth, 13 Carats and a half of Gold, and ten Carats and a half of White: to the Three and Twentieth, 13 carats of Gold, and 11 carats of White: to the Four and Twentieth Needle, 12 carats and an half of Gold, and eleven carats and an half of White. Section. 3 One must also according to this Method make the Needles: yet further, if one would do it well (but it is not useful) to touch the meaner Gold under twelve carats: or one might make the Needles from carat to carat, so that the half carats are not brought in, for they are very difficult to be discerned) but the Needles will be fewer in number: this now is left to every one's pleasure: and these white Needles are to be used upon the parted and washed Gold, as abovesaid. CHAP. XI. How Touch-Needles are to be made and used for Crown-Gold. Section. 1 CROWN- Gold is not to be ordered like the former Additions: for the Italian Crowns have more Red than the French Crowns: so that it will be necessary to make to every sort of Gold particular Needles: for the French Crowns have almost the half part white, (or Silver addition) on the contrary, the Italian Crowns have their addition of one part white and two parts red (though they are not all alike, for some part have addition almost the half part white, and some parts more red than white:) therefore I will here set down the Division upon two parts red, and one part white; for, if the one sort of Gold should be whiter than the Needles (hereafter mentioned) then the half white and half red are to be used. Weigh then to the first Needle, 24 carats of fine gold, which maketh the first Needle: to the Second, 23 carats and an half of gold, and two grains of white, or fine silver, and four grains of red, that is, pure boiled copper: to the Third, 23 carats of gold, and four grains of white; and eight grains of red: to the Fourth, 22 carats and an half of gold, and six grains of white, and one carat of red: to the Fifth, 22 carats of gold, and eight grains of white, and one carat, and four grains of red: to the Sixth, 21 carats and a half of gold, and ten grains of white, and one carat and eight grains of red: to the Seventh 21 carats of gold, and one carat of white, and two carats of red: to the Eighth, 20 carats and a half of gold, and one carat and two grains of white, and two carats and four grains of red: to the Ninth, 20 carats of gold, and one carat and four grains of white, and two carats and eight grains of red: to the Tenth 19 carats and a half of gold, and one carat and six grains of white, and three carats of red. Section. 2 After this Method and Instruction one may divide the Needles more or less, so as they may decrease or increase from carat to carat as one pleases: These Needles are used not only upon the Crown or Coined gold, but also upon all other Gold, which is of such Alloy, or have in them the Addition, after the abovementioned Instructions. CHAP. XII. The Division of the Touch-Needles, when the Metal is half white, and half red. Section. 1 BECAUSE some Crowns are ordered which have half white and half red, The fairest Crowns in Colour. which I esteem the finest in Colour, therefore weigh in the division to the first Needle, 24 carats of fine Gold, as also in all the Needles, the highest best or first Needle shall be fine Gold: to the Second Needle, 23 carats and an half of gold, three grains of white, and three grains of red: to the Third Needle 23 carats of gold, six grains of white, and six grains of red: to the Fourth, 22 carats and an half of Gold, and nine grains of white, and nine grains of red: to the Fifth, 22 carats of gold, one carat of white, and one carat of red: to the Sixth, 21 carats and a half of gold, and one carat and three grains of white, and one carat and three grains of red: to the Seventh, 21 carats of gold, and one carat and six grains of white, and one carat and six grains of red: to the Eighth, 20 carats and an half of gold, and one carat nine grains of white, & one carat nine grains of red: to the Ninth, 20 carats of gold, two carats of white, and two carats of red: to the Tenth, 19 carats and a half of gold, and two carats and three grains of white, and two carats and three grains of red: to the Eleventh, 19 carats of gold, and two carats six grains of white, and two carats six grains of red: to the Twelveth, 18 carats & a half of gold, and two carats and nine grains of white, and two carats & nine grains of red: to the Thirteenth 18 carats of gold, three carats of white, and three carats of red: to the Fourteenth, 17 carats and a half of gold, and three carats and three grains of white, and three carats and three grains of red: to the Fifteenth, 17 carats of gold, and 3 carats and six grains of white, and three carats and six grains of red: to the Sixteenth, 16 carats and a half of gold, and three carats and nine grains of white, and three carats and nine grains of red: to the Seventeenth, 16 carats of gold, and three carats of white, and three carats of red: to the Eighteenth, 15 carats and an half of gold, and four carats, and three grains of white, and four carats, and three grains of red. Section. 2 After this Method you may divide the Needles more or less, or to increase or decrease from carat to carat, as you were instructed before. CHAP. XIII. How Touch-needles are to be made for Rhenish Gold, in which there is two parts white, and one part red. Section. 1 ALTHOUGH some of the Rhenish Gold hath also the addition of half white and The Division of Metals for Needles. half red, to which the Needles before set down are to be used: Nevertheless if the Addition be two parts white, and one part red, upon such you shall divide the Needles thus, To the first Needle weigh 24 Carats of fine Gold, which maketh the first Needle: to the Second needle, 23 Carats and a half of fine Gold, and four Grains of white, and two grains of red: to the Third, 23 Carats of Gold, and eight grains of white, and four grains of red: to the Fourth, 22 Carats and a half of Gold, one Carat of white, & six grains of red: to the Fifth, 22 Carats of Gold, one Carat and four grains of White, and 8 grains of red: to the sixth, 21 Carats and a half of Gold, and one Carat and eight grains of White, and ten grains of red: to the Seventh, 21 Carats of Gold, and two Carats of White, and two Carats of red: to the Eight, 21 Carats and a half of Gold, and two Carats and four grains of white, and one carat and two grains of red: to the Ninth, 20 carats of gold, and two carats and eight grains of white, and one carat and four grains of red: to the Tenth, 19 carats and a half of gold, and three carats of white, and one carat and six grains of red: to the Eleventh, 19 carats of gold, and three carats four grains of white, and one carat and eight grains of red: to the Twelfth, eighteen carats and an half of gold, three carats, and eight grains of white, and one carat and sixteen grains of red: to the Thirteenth, eighteen carats of gold, and four carats of white, and two carats of red: to the Fourteenth, 17 and an half carats of Gold, and and four carats and four grains of white, and two grains of red: to the Fifteenth, 17 carats of gold, and four carats and 8 grains of white, and two carats and four grains of red: to the Sixteenth 16 carats and a half of Gold, and five carats of white, and two carats and six grains of red: to the Seventeenth, 16 carats of gold, and five carats and four grains of white, and two carats and eight grains of red: to the Eighteenth, 15 carats and an half of gold, and five carats and eight grains of white, and two carats and ten grains of red: to the Nineteenth, 15 carats of gold, and 6 carats of white, and three carats of red: to the Twentieth, 14 carats and a half of gold, six carats and four grains of white, and three carats and two grains of red: Although now the Rhenish Gold useth not to be of so small a content, nevertheless the Needles are thus to be made for the Alloy or additions sake, that one may by the Touch know the Mean-Gold by it, and judge of the nearest Content. Section. 2 One may also according to this manner dress or order Needles of Copper: some few Needles with all red or Copper, for some Golds especially they which are rich among the Coins, (the Hungarians having all red:) But when one would make Touch-Needles upon a certain Content of gold, which with the addition of the Alloy should be otherwise than they which are shown before, than they may be divided after the abovementioned instruction: which you are to understand thus: Let the Contents of gold be with Alloy or addition, as it will, yet order thy Touch-Needles thus, That always gold and the addition may make together a full Mark, as is to be seen in the abovementioned instruction of the Needles. Section. 2 When you have divided the Needles with diligence, then let the division of every one severally be put The Division to cast together. in a little Crucible with a little Borax, flow it together and when it is flowed put it quickly out, for the sooner the division of the composed Metals flow together and come out of the fire, the better it is. Some let it go together in a Charcoal fire, but the Divisions remain not always deft of it, and sometimes the Coals break, and by that division does come to nothing, therefore 'tis better to let it flow together in a small Crucible, whereby there will not be so much care of running through. Section. 4 The Needels to be beaten into lengths. When the Divisions are cast together, then beat them every one severally into Lengths, and form them according to thy pleasure, beat and cut also upon the Needles the Figures what every one containeth of fine Gold and Alloy, that one may see how many carats and grains of fine Gold, every Needle hath, that in the Touch there may be no Mistake. If one hath a mind he may solder together the ordered Needles upon copper or silver pieces, that only the ends may be Golden divided Needles, as also commonly of the Gold-Touch, and usually Needles are made so, else they would come to much Money, as may be seen by the following Sculpture. The Touch Needles of the Common Gold smiths. Section. 5 But the Goldsmith's take not so much Pains, nor are at so large Expenses, but cut a piece of a Duccate and of a Crown, and of a Rhenish Gilder, and solder every on Copper piece, after this they touch their Gold: And by this they can very well see whether the Gold have its right Content either of Ducats, Crowns, or Rhenish Gold, but if there be a different Content, than they cannot know how much properly the Content is less. Sculpture XVIII. Deciphered. 1. The Proportions of Touch Needles for Gold. 2. The Ingot to be compared with those Touch-Needles. 3. As also by the Touch▪ stone. CHAP. XIV. How the Touch Needles are to be used. Section. 1 WHEN then the Touch-needles are prepared Touch stones with diligence, and one would use them, there is need of a good Touchstone upon which the Gold is to be touched, of such are found some part which are grey and pale green, but the black ones are the best, although the same be not all good, especially, if they are either too hard or too weak. The weak ones have this property, that upon them no Gold doth touch bright, but the Gold doth only grind on it, and becometh in the aspect weak and ruff, also the Hungarish or other weak Gold will not touch itself right upon Touchstones which are too hard, for the Gold doth run over it, that the stroke is not very well to be seen, and that Touchstone is not good which doth not touch the Gold, of what Contents soever it be, with a fine good and strong stroke, that it be bright upon it, and also the Touch-needles as long until the same stroke be like the Gold-stroak in the colour, and as high: than you have very nigh the Content of the Gold: only, as I have given an account above, Observe well, whether the Gold be high- grained; viz. whether it hath much Copper added, or much white, which is called Pale Gold, according to Ginnys. this, use the Needles, which every one doth not understand, and therefore he must have the Knowledge of the right stroke from great Practice. But as to the hard Section. 2 Concerning hard and brickle Gold. Gold, they do not give a right stroke, but they do touch all of a smaller content than they have in fine Gold, therefore such strokes are to be judged false and uncertain. CHAP. XV. How the Gold is to be proved by Aqua fortis. Section. 1 To cut pieces for Treal. IF you have Pieces of Gold either in Plates or Ingots, and wouldst assay them, than first cut Pieces or Plates above, at one end of it, and below at the other end, and beat the Bits thin that you may weigh so much as you have necessity to use for a trial, but if it is a cast Ingot, then beat it thin only at one end, and weigh of it for thy Trial. Section. 2 To such a Trial of Gold and Gold-Gilders, you The Carat weight must be small, must have a particular Carat-weight fitted for it, and it must be small because of the Silver-cut, otherwise the Balance cannot carry the Cut (concerning which shall be treated of hereafter) the dividing of the Carat weight is as followeth. Division of the Carat-weight. 24 Carats is one Mark. 12 Carats 6 Carats 3 Carats 2 Carats 1 Carats 6 Grains is half a Carat. 3 Grains 2 Grains 1 Grain ½ Grain ¼ Grain ¼ Grain If you would prove the Gold, see if it be of a rich or poor Content, and would also certainly judge how much a Mark▪ of it hath of fine Gold, than you must know first (and before the nearest Content of the Gold according to which you are to make your Trial, as shall follow.) That for such contents you shall have two sorts of ways to inform yourself, First, by the Touch with the before made Golden Touch-Needles;) Secondly, One may make a nearer Trial of the Gold, for, although the Proof do not remain whole in the Aqua fort▪ yet you may see very near what the Gold doth hold, Therefore it is best to use the Assay-proof upon Section. 3 it, by which one may also find, what the Gold containeth both in white or fine Silver. When now you have Assay proof▪ found by these ways the nearest content of the Gold, then make the cut of fine Silver (which must be without Gold;) take then the Gold and beat it with a Hammer upon an Anvil fine and thin, and make thy cut so, that the white or Silver, which is already with the Gold) may be counted with the Trial or fourth part (for it must contain three times as much Silver as of fine Gold.) To comprehend this the better, the following Example shall demonstrate it, which I have found by the tried Proof, that of the Gold which containeth 14 Carats, 8 grains of fine Gold, and 7 Carats, and four grains of white; I weigh it with the small carat weight to two alike half-Marks, then there will be in every half Mark 7 carats, and four grains of Gold, and 3 Carats and eight grains of white, to which I add three times the weight of fine Silver as the gold containeth of fine gold; this is my Proportion. Now I do multiply Section. 4 To make the Carat. the seven carats and four grains (which containeth the half Mark) of fine gold, with three, and there will come 22 carats of white or Silver to the Addition or to the Cut: from this I reckon, That of three carats, and eight grains of white there will be as much as the half Mark had of Silver with it before, so there will remain 18 carats, and 4 grains, and thus much fine Silver you must add in an half Mark. Section. 5 The Trial of it. As this Silver or Cut and the half weighed Mark do make together 30 carats, and 4 grains, so much also must be the inweighed gold, of the other half Mark cut. Put every one of these with its Cut upon a well nealed Copel, and add nine weights of pure Lead into it, let it go off together, and see whither the grains come alike, then lay one of the grains in the Scale, and as much as it now weigheth less than thirty carats and four grains, so much containeth a half Mark of Gold-Red-Copper, but to the fine Silver because it looseth upon the Copel, if it goeth off upon it with Lead as much as the Lead hath carried away, may by a grain weight be accounted; for, understand it thus; In case every grain did weigh after it was gone▪ of 29 carats, and 4 grains: also a grain wast of fine Silver, there would be wasted one Carat upon the half Mark, than there will come upon the whole Mark two carats; thus much Copper (or red) containeth a Mark of mixed Gold. Section. 6 To beat the little Rolls. If the grains are diligently drawn and weighed, then beat out of every grain a fine and clean piece or Roll, not too thin, and glow it often that it may not be shivery, and that nothing may go off; at the last glow the little Roll, and roll it gently over, that you may see whether by the often glowing and beating somewhat be come off: When now the Rolls are clean prepared, glow them once more, and if they from the glowing and rolling be come hard, let such things be mended. Section. 7 Disselving. But the glowing must be done in a golden little half Pipkin made on purpose, that nothing unclean may come in it, put then the Rolls together in a little separating Glass, put to it near so much Aqua fortis made for Goldproofs, that it may go an half finger broad over the little Rolls, stop the Separating Glass above with a hard twisted paper, that no vapours may go out, and put it thus into a little Vessel of Iron or brass made on purpose, over a few live Coals, that the Aqua fort. may begin to work, so will the separating-Glass become brown, but let it not work too much or too fast, yet take it a little while from the fire, and then put it on again, until the Aqua fortis hath done its working, and the Glass become white again: Then put off the Aqua fortis again and put fresh Aqua fortis upon it, set it again with the Vessel over the fire, and let it work: this is done, because if the first Aqua fort. were grown too weak, and had lost somewhat of Silver by the Rolls, that the other Aqua fort. might touch it again, and make it clean. Take notice also, That you may cause the last Aqua fort. to work in great Bubbles, that the Rolls may become very clean, and put in the second Aqua fort. which hath not beenused, for it hath its strength as before. Section. 8 To sweeten or dulcify. Then put clean sweet warm water upon the little Rolls, (Rain Water is the best for it) let it stand a little, and put more warm, or rain Water, upon it again, and set the Glasses with the Rolls over a coal fire, let it boil and work in great Bubbles, then take it off, and casting the water again away, this do three times with warm or rain water, that the silvery Aqua fort. which did hang about the little Rolls be dulcified, then is it enough: When the little Rolls are thus clean and sweet, than put them out very gently, with the last sweet water in a glazed pot or glass bottle, and pour the water off from it, and take the Golden Rolls with clean Pincers out of the Pot, and put them in a clean cloth to suck the rest of the water into it, and the Rolls will look very fine and brown. To neal the little Gold Rolls. Then put them into the Golden pot, and after, put them into an Assay-Oven, but not in an exstream heating, and glow them well and they will become as fine as a pure Gold: When this is done, Take the two little Rolls, weigh them one against the other, and if they are alike in weight, then have you proved them right: next, put them together in a weigh-scale, and weigh them with the Carat-weight, and how much they do weigh, so much containeth the Mark (of the mixed Gold) in fine Gold: this only is to be observed, That the weight of the Water, (as much as the Water hath left after it with the Golden Rolls) must be substracted always in the Weight from such Content. But how much there will be to subtract you must search with a singular Proof, with which you use to prove the Aqua fort. but when you have once proved the Aqua fort. than you have no need to prove it any more, but may keep it for use: yet 'tis commonly found that upon a Mark of fine Gold, as from 24 carats you must subtract one and a half, sometimes two grains for the weight of the water, and so you must subtract according to the Example of the before mentioned Proof, as upon 14 carats, and 9 grains, as much as the Golden Roll of one grain, did weigh, than there will remain 14 carats and 8 grains of fine gold, for in the gold proof, in many places, one useth not to give in, in buying, a half grain, but in the coin-works they use all ways to count, and give in the half grain: If then the little Rolls contain in fine gold 14 carats and eight grains, than a mixed mark of Gold will contain 7 carats and four grains of white or fine silver substracted. Now, the Gold of 24 carats and 8 grains of the whole cut, and 24 carats of Gold & 44 Carats of silver, you shall find (as I have said) that the Contents will be a mixed▪ mark, 14 carats 8 grains of fine gold, and 7 carats, and 4 grains of white, and two carats of red, and these three Contents will make together a full Mark. Section. 10 After this manner and method are to be proved all Coined Gold. other Golds, likewise the coined Gold, and one needeth not the Assay-Proof, in the coined Gold, if one knoweth the nearest Contents, but if one doth not know the Contents certain upon a carat, than an Assay of it must be made. Section. 11 To make the true Carats. Now I use this Method in my Cut (and commonly on the silver or Cut) to take two carats or somewhat less for a trial which doth agree with the Multiplication (as above-heard, of the three Contents,) and it is better to take two Carats of silver less than one too much, and so the Rolls will remain the firmer and more entire, and there is no fear though somewhat of the Rolls were lost or torn off. Section. 12 Another way to find red in Gold. You may also find in a Gold (of which you intent to prove the red and white) that if you make the Assay-Proof, (as above demonstrated) then cut one Mark of the Gold more, and put it with its due of Lead without any other Cut) upon the Coppels, and let it go off with the Try-proof, then weigh the same Grain, and you will see what is gone off, and how much it comes out lighter, so much hath been red with it. Thus you have the right and clear Instruction for Gold Proofs, and if you will follow it, you will do well, and thereby not be apt to err in your proofs. CHAP. XVI. How to prove the Aqua fort▪ and how much Gold it doth leave in the Proof. Section. 1 ALSO, if thou wilt prove an Aqua fort. how much is substracted in the Gold-Proof, The manner of Trying it. Take Gold which is cast divers times, through Antimony, and is brought to the highest: and make the proportion upon 24 carats▪ and weigh it also in two half Marks (as you have been instructed before) and multiply it by 3▪ than there will come upon every half Mark of fine Gold 36 carats of fine Silver, than put every half Mark of its proportion by itself, upon well neal▪ d Coppels, let it go off together, weigh the grains off, and see whether they come alike, and beat them in slender Rolls, and put them into separating Glasses, and put upon them so much Aqua fort. as one doth use to take to a Gold-proof, as hath been shown before in the Gold proof: then place it with an iron Trevet over a little Coal-fire: Let it dissolve, and put upon it the Second time fresh Aqua fort. set it over again; when now it is right, and well dissolved, pour the Aqua fort. on it, and make the Rolls with warm water very clean, and dry them, and glow them in a little melting pot for Gold, and they will become fine, then weigh them one against the other, and if the Rolls be alike then the Proof is right; then lay them together, and against it thy whole mark: (after you have weighed it) and as the Golden Rolls do come out heavier, so much is to be substracted in the Gold-proof upon this one Mark of fine Gold. Section. 2 Another way. Take this for an Example: I have weighed in two half Marks upon one Mark of fine Gold, and have parted it with the Aqua fort. (as above is mentioned) and after the dissolving, dulcifying and glowing, than the two little Rolls have weighed one Mark or 24 carats and one grain and a half, so that the Aqua fort. hath left behind two grains, in the Proof, thus much is to be substracted in this Aqua fort. upon 42 carats. Section. 3 Know also that such as is kept back in the Aqua fort. What the Remainder is. is nothing else but silver which the Aqua fort. could not draw out so clean, by which the Gold doth not become so very clean and fine, which is to be seen. If one letteth the Golden part go off with a little clean Lead upon a Coppel, to see how they become smaller or retain their weights. But if the Aqua fort. do leave its strength or spirits with the Gold, (as some do think) then the same could not remain nor consist upon the Coppels. Out of which may be concluded, That by Aqua fort. fine Gold is made: But this is sure, That a good and well purified Aqua fort. bringeth the Gold in parting (especially if the Gold Calx (as shall follow) hath been cleanly dulcified) to 23 Carats and 11 Grains. But it is not yet quite fine Gold, for the remainder with the Gold is nothing else (as is said before) than Silver: (as well in the parting the Gold, as in the Proof) else one may drive away what is left with the Bellows, and make it clean. Section. 4 But if you have no fine Gold, to the Proof of the Aqua fort. then take Hungarish Gold, whose Content Rules for it. you know certainly, and make of the same Content the Divisions and Proportions, than you may find what is to be left behind of the Aqua fort. and how much is substracted of it: But the Gold which is cast through Antimony (as is before mentioned) is for such use much surer and better: And know, That the same Aqua fort. after the Distilling must be purified and settled, before you do prove or use it to the Gold-Proof, of which afterwards an Instruction shall follow. Section. 5 Separating Glass, and other Glass Instruments To all such proving you must have clean separating Glasses, Tunnels and little glass Pots for Gold to sweeten in, these are to be made of good Venetian Glass, and the brighter, whiter and clearer they are, the better it is, that the proofs may well be seen in them. Section. 6 But the Iron or Brazen Instrument, upon which the little separating Glass must stand, is to be made four footed, An Instrument for the Separating glass. that it may stand fast, and also with a little handle, by which it may be taken off, likewise another little foot or instrument of Copper or Iron, which must be flat, upon which is to be set the Golden little Pots (if one will have it set in the proof- Oven for the out-glowing) because this Proof is the finest, most glorious and lovely, therefore all things pertaining to it must be made and prepared with all diligence and cleanliness. CHAP. XVII. How Silver is to be proved for Gold. Section. 1 THAT I may not mix the Proving First Trial. of Metals together, but give to every proof its due, and to write of every one apart, how it must be done: Know then if one would prove a goldish silver upon Gold, it must first be proved upon fine Silver, that one may find the right Content, both of the fine Silver and also of the fine Gold: Therefore when it is proved upon the fine (as I have taught in the Silver proof) then take the same proof Grains, beat them thin, glow them, and weigh a Mark of it with thy Pennyweight, and dissolve the Silver in a little separating glass in Aqua fort. then there will remain a brown Gold-Calx: Section. 2 To dulcify it. pour off the Aqua fort. very gently, then take warm sweet water (as you have done before in the Gold Proof) and put it upon the Gold-Calx, and let it boil over the Coal-fire in a little Culbe or bottle: now when the Gold Calx hath settled itself again, then drain the water off, and put upon the Gold Calx two or three warm waters more, that thus the silvery water may be clean taken off from the Gold Calx, then put the Gold Calx clean out of the Culbe, into a glass pot, that nothing may remain, then drain the water very clean off from it, and bring the Gold Calx in the golden little Pot clean together, and if there be wetness about the Gold-Calx, then press it with a clean little cloth where 'tis made moist, and gently on the end of one side, that the wetness may be sucked in (only touch not the Gold Calx with the Cloth.) Section. 3 When this is done, than set the little golden Pot upon the Trevet in the Assay Oven, but not suddenly (that To glow. the Gold may not leap, and the proof become false) and glow out the Gold calx, so will it become fair, then put it again out of the golden little Pot into the inward Scale of the Proof-Ballance, and see how much it weighs according to the divided Pennyweight, with which you have weighed it, so you will have the Content; now how much a Mark of Silver containeth, I put this as an Example, for I have proved, That a Goldish silver or grained Gold, of this mixed Mark) hath contained 14 loathes and a dram of fine Silver, and such fine Silver hath in a dram a pennyweight of Gold, than the Content in the Goldish Silver upon a Mark doth signify that it doth contain 13 loathes, 3 drams, and three penny weight of fine silver, and one dram and one penny weight of Gold. Section. 4 A Second Trial. Likewise in this manner one may also prove the fine Gold which is come from grained Silver, if one doth weigh a Mark of it, and dissolve it, and if the fine Mark in such a proof do contain one dram, one peny-weight, and one Heller of Gold, and is the Contents: and if a Mark of the grained Silver containeth 14 loathes one dram be reckoned upon fine Silver, than the Mark will signify one dram, one penny, one heller of Gold, and of such proof it is counted, that by it the Gold is found a little less than the former, but I leave it to every one's pleasure to try and judge. A third way. Some Assayers have this Method, when they would prove a goldish grained Oar for Silver and Gold, than they weigh the grained Metal with their penny weight, and prove it upon fine Silver, (as 'tis usual) and they weigh in a grain such grained Metal after the mentioned weight (as at first) and dissolve it raw in Aqua fort. Section. 6 and as much then as they do find in Gold, they subtract it from the fine-Silver, and this they count for the right proof to prove Silver upon Gold. Difference of the Proof. But that one may know that this their Proof is false and unjust, although somewhat more of Gold is to be found by it, therefore I will show some Reasons why the same Gold is not so high in Fineness as the Gold which is separated out of the Proof of the fine Silver by Aqua fort. First, although the Copper doth dissolve, yet the green Coppery water sets itself rather on the Gold than on the silvery water, and then the Copper which hath set itself cannot be brought off again so clean from the Gold, as from the tender silvery-water. Secondly, Gold cometh higher out of the separation than when the silver is Coppery, upon which the Aqua fort. doth not work so easily, as on the fine Silver: Therefore no Separater of Gold doth take upon him to separate such Silver after such proof, but all the Silvers which he separates in Aqua fort. must first be burnt upon a Test. Section. 7 Thirdly, Although the first Process to prove the A Singular Dissolving. Goldish Silver upon Gold is the common way, and also the right Proof, by which the true Content is to be found. Nevertheless, I must further mention a singular proof (which is found upon such goldish silver and grained Work) by which, in the dissolution the little grains or small cut pieces of Silver will remain whole in the Aqua fort. (of what light Contents soever they be of Gold) and how small and subtle soever the grains be: also that one may number all the little grains of Gold after the number of the little pieces of Silver, how many there be laid in the Aqua fort. and no splitting will go off from it (as in the other proofs) yet if the grains should be weighed in, (also raw) the Gold will remain the better whole, but this proving is to be done thus, when you have weighed off the Silver put upon it a very weak Aqua fort. which the Silver cannot well touch, and put it in a Culbe to dissolve over a little Coal-fire (as is usual) and let it be very hot, that the Aqua fort. may work with great Bubbles, and almost boil over, this dissolution do, so long until thy inweighed Silver be almost dissolved, but that it may have the better help, put (if the Silver be dissolved) a little more than half of new and a somewhat stronger Aqua fort. into the Culbe, and the Silver will dissolve itself clean out, and will split no more, although the second time, there be put to it, the stronger Aqua fort.) but what it doth will be done at first. This is a fine way through which the Gold remaineth together in grains close, but 'twill have somewhat more time than the other common proof: there are also other ways to such proofs, as follows. CHAP. XVIII. To prove Goldish-Silver by the Water-weight. Section. 1 I MUST further signify, That the old Artists have also proved the Silvers First Way. through common flowing Water, and known in the Weight, whether they have been rich or poor with Gold, This their Invention, because it proceedeth from natural Reason, doth please me, and is an inductive Meditation to many other serviceable things: Now the Water-weighing with the Silver is done thus, Take a Balance, and put in one of the Scales the Goldish-silver, and in the other Scale so much Silver, (which containeth no Gold) as that they may be equal ☞ weight, then let down both Scales just together into a Vessel full of clean water, so you shall find and see clearly that that Silver which is Goldish shall have in the water greater weight, but not so much as the Silver which hath Gold with it. The Reason of this Difference, is because the Gold in a like greatness excelleth all other Metals in weight, and is the heaviest Metal; Therefore such (as every one himself may judge) cannot swim so easily in the water, but must much sooner sink down on the ground, than they which are lighter: as the like is to be seen in the Lead, which goeth much before Tin and other Metals in the Water. Section. 2 How the Gold is to be found by the Water-weighing. But that I may give the Reader to understand, That 'tis possibly by such Water-weighing to reckon how much may properly be in the Silver, therefore know that such (in my thoughts) may be done and found out in this following manner. First, Take fine grained Silver which is without Gold, lay to it good pure Gold, put it in one of the weigh-Scales, and in the other Scale lay fine grained silver also, so that it standeth just even: then sink both together in the water, and so much as the Silver goeth before with the Gold, so much you must supply with good Gold to the weigh-Scale in the water, then take the Balance out of the water again, dry it well, and weigh it, and take so much from the Silver as the Gold hath drawn to it in the water, until the Balance standeth even in Aequilibrio, then sink it in the Water again, and supply again the difference with good Gold, and then take off from the Silver; this do as long until both weigh-scales stand just (both within and out of the water) than you shall find that in one scale will lie so much Gold as in the other: and by this way (if you do it carefully) you may also prove in weighing a goldish silver, whose content you did not know. Section. 3 Secondly, The water-weighing may also be done by Arithmetical Proportions, to which the Demonstrations Arithmetic. will be serviceable, but they are not to every one known, namely thus, That if the Gold (as I have tried it) weigheth against the silver in a like quantity 405 Marks, and 8 Loathes, and the fine silver also the like quantity with the Gold two hundred twenty seven Marks, 4 Loathes; this observe well, Then take the silver which contains Gold, lay it in one of the weight-scales, and weigh it against the Weights which are made of pure silver, that you may know the weight to be proper, then sink them together into the water: now, as much as it doth go for the Goldish silver, so much you must supply of with the silver weights, then make an account and observe the Proportions how the Gold and Silver stand together, as you have been instructed before, and I doubt not but you may come to a right proof by this Example. CHAP. XIX. To find without such water-Proof, whether Silver contains Gold. Section. 1 BECAUSE the Metals have divers Quantities of like greatness, one against the First Way. other (as has been spoken of the Gold and silver) if then you would know and find the difference of the mixture in the Goldish silvers you must draw the Gold through an Iron plate wherein an hole is made, into which a thin and subtle wire is to be put, and do the good silver also through the same hole, then cut a piece of both, equally in one length as near as possible, and weigh one against the other with a Proof-weight, upon a quick Balance, and so you will soon find the difference betwixt the Gold and Silver. Now, if you have a Goldish-silver, and do draw it through the mentioned hole, and doth take the right length of it, like the aforesaid former Wire, and doth weigh it likewise upon the proof- Balance against the silver-Wyer, than you will find a difference in the weight, out of which you may count the weight of the Gold (as much as is in the wires which you have weighed) then also weigh such with the proof-weight, how much it weigheth, and you may compute (after this thy Account) how much Gold is in the whole weight of the Goldish-silver. After this manner all other Metals may also be proved and accounted, because they have one against the other divers Quantities in like Greatness: likewise in the coined Money, if it be drawn to a Wire (in the same thickness with the Wires before mentioned) you may find in it the Copper and fine silver by this Rule. Section. 2 Also, this I would not leave unmentioned, as an Instruction The second Way. for further Consideration, and it is necessary to be known, That there is a difference in weight, betwixt Tin and Lead, if they be mixed together, as also in other Metals, which I have found in my diligent searching; For, one Copper against another, and one Tin against another, hath a difference also in the weight, else I would have proceeded further and surer with such reckoning. Sculpture XIX. Deciphered 1. How the Assayer stands before the Assay-Oven to prove Metals. 2. The Iron on which the Proof is to be cast. 3. A wooden Instrument to see through into the fire to prevent hurt to the Eyes. 4. A separating▪ Glass for proving Gold, placed on a little foot. 5. He that washeth the Goldish Silver in water. 6. The Block, Hammer and stool. CHAP. XX. How to separate Gold and Silver, and how to burn or distil Aqua fort. and prepare Instruments and Clay for the Work. Section. 1 HOW, in respect that to the Burning of Aqua fort▪ there belong many Preparations, it is necessary that of such I write somewhat, and signify the same: Wherefore, I will first speak of the Clay wherewith they use to Lute the Helms and Receivers, and to coat the Separating The Clay. Glass which ought to be prepared thus; Take good sound and substantial Clay, wash it in water that the stones and the course sand may come off, make it into Balls, and dry it well in the Sun; Of such washed Clay take ten parts, and two parts of washed Ashes, three parts of clean Stone- Horse-dung, one part of the scales of Iron, and two parts of Cow-hair beaten well, and mingle all these together, and moisten it with warm Oxen or sheeps-blood, and whilst it is warm, work it with an iron Instrument: one might also take, among this Clay, Venetian Glass beaten small, but not too much: and with this Clay one may lute-over the separating Glasses and the great Glasses, in which the Aqua fort. is to be distilled, such as will hold in the fire: it may also serve to join together the Ovens which are called Athanors, because it holdeth fast, and doth neither break nor crack. Section. 2 But the Clay and thin mixture with which one useth to lute over the Joints of the Helmets and Receivers, is To lute the joinings. is to be made thus, Take the white of Eggs, as many as you think fit, beat them well, in a Pewter dish, and take a clean sponge, and press the clear of the Eggs into it, by squeesing it out of the sponge into the dish, and do this until it becometh clear like Well-water, then take Mill-dust, 4 Loathes, Bowl Armoniak, one Loath, white dried Cheese without Crust or rind, two Loathes, and of Sanguis Draconis, one Loath; Grind all these very small, and sift them through a hair Seeve, mingle these with the whites of the Eggs, and with it, Lute over the Joints, which you must understand thus, That such Joynings be first with the abovementioned Day luted over and dried well again, than this thin mixture is to be put upon a little cloth and laid over it, and let it dry of itself, but this aught to be done before you bring it into the warmth, or makest a fire to it, than such mixture will hold fast, and the spirits will not go through, but if the Joynings should afterwards let the spirits go out, then do it over in the heat with Tallow, whereby the Clay will become hard and fast. Section. 3 Another Clay to bodies. Here followeth another Clay wherewith to lute or glaze-over the Culbs or bottles, which will endure the fire, Take a good washed dry Clay, a little Dragon's blood and Bowl Armoniak, and add to it a third part of Potter's clay, & a third part of a half part of Calx vive, make each apart into Powder, and moisten it with the white of Eggs, as is taught above, or with warm Ox or Sheeps-blood, add to it so much flox of woollen Cloth or wool shaved or shorn, as of the Bolus, mingle all well together with a stick or wand, and with it lute over the Glasses, but▪ not thick, also lute over the joints with it, and this will hold fast in the fire. Likewise other Clays are to be used to lute-over, which do also hold well: But because these now mentioned do suffice, I have omitted for brevity sake to set down others: therefore every one may try which are the most serviceable unto him. Section. 4 The Glasses or Bottles in which one useth to separate, Venetian Glass. and in which they put Aqua fort. are to be made of good Venetian Glass, of an equal thickness in the midst, for if they be made too strong or thick of Glass, they will not hold well, but they which have a right equal thickness, and are not strong will endure the fire the better, but if the Glasses be made of other Glass, than the Aqua fort. will work on them, and they are subject to break the sooner, by which there cometh damage, and they will be also dark and pale. Section. 5 To prepare Jugs and Retorts with sawdust. One may also cause Juggs of Potters-work to be made for Distilling Aqua fort. or mixing Clay with Bran or clean fine Sawdust, this therefore is done, That when the Juggs are made and burnt raw, that the Bran or Sawdust may burn out, and then to glaze such over ☞ with Venetian glass within and without, that the Glass flow into the holes, out of which the Bran and Sawdust is burnt away, whereby they will prove very firm and hold very well in the fire, of such stuff very good Retorts are made, which will not break in the fire, but are much better to use than the overluted Glass bottles, therefore such stuff is very convenient to use for Retorts: But how great the Juggs, Glasses or Bottles must be, I conceive, that every one's Work will teach what he may make according to it, for if one hath much Aqua fort. to burn at once, than it will require a great Jug or Retort for it, in which the stuff is to be put, and also the Recipient must be the bigger. Section. 6 Iron jugs. Also 'tis in use to burn Aqua fort. in Iron Jugs which are of two pieces, and can be done asunder, whose form you will see in the next Sculpture. In such a Jug one may set in more at one time than in a glass-bottle; also they need not fear the breaking of such Jugs, or that the stuff will be spoiled in it; and the Gold hath been of a better colour by such Aqua fort. made in Iron. For this and other Reasons, I judge it to be better always to burn Aqua fort. in such Iron Jugs, than in glazed Bottles, which can but once be used, the bigness of which must be as one may put in near 20 pounds of stuff at once, but if one would burn less, the Opportunity will show itself, how to proportion it, but for strength it must be the thickness of a finger, so it will endure the longer. Section. 7 If now one will burn Aqua fort. in such Jugs than must the joinings be well luted over, that no spirits may Luting the Jug. go out, lute-over also the Jug without, with thin Clay, that the fire may the less hurt it, and lay before it a Recipient of Glass, but of such a bigness that the mentioned spirits may have room enough in it, and that such may not break out of necessity or force, by which there will be damage. Section. 8 After the work is finished then must the Jug be suffered To gain the Caput. mort out of the Jug. to cool, and put water in it, then will it mollify the Caput Mort. put it out gently with an Iron, and so the Jug will become clean again. Deciphered. 1. A luted glass-bottle covered with an Helm. 2. A luted glass-bottle without an Helm. 3. Another sort of Glass-bottle. 4. The Form of an Helm. 5. An half Glass, or half * Absuzchal Pipkin with one Ear, and a Mouth. 6. A Receiver with a Pipe. 7. A Receiver without a Pipe. 8. An earthen Retort. 9 An earthen Jug or Culb to burn Aqua fort. 10. Other kind of Bottles, Glasses, half-Glasses, Tunnels. Sculpture XX. CHAP. XXI. How to make Ovens to Distil Aqua Fort. Section. 1 EVERY one useth to prepare the Ovens to the distilling of Aqua Fort. according to his pleasure: But there is one Form much better, and more profitable than the other (as I have seen and used many myself▪ for I find, That the Ovens called Athanors, which, as in the following Sculpture is Section. 2 Athanor. properly delineated, are the best to be used to distil Aqua fort. and they are to be form thus, Make a Steeple in square or round four Else high, and below in it lay an Iron Grate, under which must be a Wind-hole, according to the demonstration in the next Sculpture: and then make again on both sides of the steeple, in the same wideness, according to the height of the Juggs or Glass-bottles round or square Ovens, in which the Glasses or Juggs may stand: Put also below in the steeple or tower, Iron-Grates, so that it may have wind-holes below: in such By-Ovens must be left holes from the Tower, that the heat (as you shall hear) may come out of it, and if they are about a large span wide, and four fingers and a span high, then are they wide and high enough: only observe, That when you do set up the high Tower, you do not make it two thick near to the holes, but rather narrower▪ that the fire or heat may go the better into the By-Ovens, than cause to such holes, through which the heat doth pass, fit Instruments of Potters-work, with which you may govern the fire as you please. Section. 3 Some cause such Instruments or Registers to be made of strong Iron, but they are not so good as the earthen, for, if the Iron one become hot and glowing, than they give likewise great heat, and if they are drawn before the fire, than they cannot well be managed or governed by it, and there is also danger therein. Deciphered. 1. The Athanor. 2. The Mouth-hole over the Grate. 3. The Mouth-hole under the Grate. 4. The Grates in the By-Ovens. 5. The By-Ovens. 6. Instruments to open or shut the By-Ovens Mouth. 7. A Cover for the By-Oven. 8. The Pins for the Registers or Wind-holes. 9 A Semicircle piece of Wood by which the Athanor is to be made round. 10. The Cover for the Athanor. 11. The person that tends them. 12. A dish of Metals to be used. Sculpture XXI. CHAP. XXII. How the Ingredients are to be prepared for distilling of the Aqua fort. Section. 1 FOR distilling of the common Aqua fort. there are used only two Ingredients, Nitre and Vitriol, which must be prepared Calcining of Vitriol. before they are put in: first, the Vitriol must be calcined which is to be done thus, Take at once four pound of those Ingredients, Section. 1 and put them in an earthen glazed Crucible, set it over the fire, that the Vitriol may melt to a water, Calcining of Vitriol. let it boil gently, and stir it about continually with a wooden spatula, until the wateriness be evaporated away, and the Vitriol begins to be thick, then take with the wooden spatula, some part out of the Crucible while it is warm, and grind it upon a Grindingstone before it be cold, then take more out of the Crucible, upon the Grindingstone until all the Vitriol is out of the Crucible and ground small, for if you do not take the Vitriol warm out of the Crucible, but lettest it be cold in it, than it will become as hard as a stone, and so 'tis difficult to be brought out, neither is it easy to grind: Thus the Vitriol is to be prepared for the distilling of the Aqua fort. Section. 2 Salt-Petre. Concerning the Nitre, it needs not be calcined, yet one may set it upon a Oven that it may be dry, and then beat and grind it fine and small, then is it also prepared: But because it is not all pure, but some part of it is very Salt, therefore it is first to be clarified and purified from its Salt (which every one who converseth with Distillation of Aqua fort. certainly should know) and that with the hand: But how the clearing should be done▪ see full Instruction in the first Book. CHAP. XXIII. How Aqua fortis is to be distilled. Section. 1 In a Glass Body. TAKE four pound of clean Nitre, and three pound and a half of calcined Vitriol (as is mentioned) grind them very small, and put them in an overluted Glass-body (brushed with an Hares-foot bound to a little stick) the neck of the Bottles being taken off, that the water may go clean over, and not have cause to ascend, when then the stuff is put into the Bottle or Jugg, then put it in one of the By-Ovens, on the Grate (with a Copel made for it on purpose) and lay upon the By-Oven a Cake made of Earth or Clay, and daub it close about the neck of the Jug, and over-lute the joinings every where with the Clay very well, that no heat or vapours may go out of it, and let the Air-holes on the side be open (as you see in the former Sculpture) yet not too wide (for if they are open near three fingers wide, then 'tis wide enough:) But you must not put the Bottle (as now 'tis mentioned) Section. 2 naked into the Oven upon the Iron-grate, as you Copels to burn Aqua Fort. do with the Iron Jug, but in a small earthen Test (made on purpose) which hath below a little Foot which is called a Coppel: and in this put ashes or clean Sand, that the Glass Bottle may come to stand a good square hand above the Grate: when you have put in the Stuff set an Helm upon it, and dawb the Joynings very well over with the Clay, which you have prepared. Section. 3 But some have another way, viz. When the Bottle is put in, than they lay round about the Neck good prepared Another way. Clay, and over the Clay they lay Paper, so that the Helm may not quite stand on the Clay, and this is done for this Reason, that the Helm, (after the distilling) may loosen itself clean; and then they do set upon it the Helm, and lute it over with good Clay; and lastly, apply the thin stuff upon a little Cloth, that no spirits at all may go out. Section. 4 Water in the Receiver. You ought also to prepare the By-Oven, and likewise the Jug or Bottle with the Helm set in Order, that the mouth of the Helmet may go out a pretty distance over the Oven, then lay before it the Receiver, that the mouth of the Helm may well reach into it, that you may see how the water doth go, and the drops fall. Section. 5 And that you may also know how much the Vitriol hath lost of its weight; first, in the Calcining, you must ' put sweet or flowing Water in the Receiver, else the Water will be too strong, and very little water will remain, also lute all very well over the Joynings on the Receiver and Helm, thus, Take some of the prepared Clay, and lay it about the Joynings, then put in the Clay (through the joinings, in the Receiver) with a little smooth sprig of a Broom) which will do this Service, that the first and gross spirits (as you shall hear hereafter) may come through it; then upon the Clay lay a little Cloth, as abovesaid, that the Joynings may every where be luted-over, and let it be dry: Thus also you may set into the Oven, the Jugs with the stuff on both sides the Athanor, and with one fire burn and make perfect two or three works, and manage every one according to its necessity without hindrance to the other, of giving or taking heat, as hereafter somewhat more may follow. CHAP. XXIV. How Aqua fortis is to be distilled in an Iron Jug or Pot. Section. 1 BUT if you will put the stuff in an Iron Jug, which is cast or hammered, and distil Of Jugs cast or hammered. Aqua fort. in it, than put the Jug with its short feet, upon an Iron Grate or Roaster, that it may stand firm and fast, but if the Jug hath no legs, than it must stand upon a three-legged Iron, proportioned to the Jug, and before you do put the Helm on it, first place upon the Jugs neck an old broken neck of a glass Bottle, and then put the Helm upon it, so the Helm will remain whole in taking off: But if you have not a glazed Neck (as is said) than lute the Jug's neck round about with the prepared Clay, and lay over the Clay a Paper (as abovesaid) upon the Helm, and over lute it the best you can, than the Helm will go from it the better. Section. 2 When you have set into the Athanor the stuff with the Jug, and all the overluting is well dried, then put To place the same. into the Tower of the Athanor, live Coals upon the same, with other dead Coals; so that the Tower may be full to the top; then cover the Tower with a thick Cover made of Potters-Earth, but you must lay Ashes upon the Tower half an hand thick, and so fit the Cover, that no vapour at all may go out, and let the wind-hole below, on the Athanor, be open which is marked in the beforesaid Sculpture, with Figure 3: and shut the wind-holes of the By-ovens, and the Mouth-hole of the Athanor very close, marked with the figure 2. and draw it not open too soon with the Instruments noted at Figure 6. Section. 3 But, when the Aqua fort. doth begin to go, then Of governing the Athanor. open but one wind-hole, and, if it will not go well, then draw the Instruments a little nearer to the Tower, so the heat will go through the same space, under the Jug or Bottle which is set in, and in which the Ingredients are, and presently, the water will begin to run better. Section. 4 Of disposing the gross spirits. Now, if it thus proceeds, than a Vapour will come into the Receiver (these are the gross spirits) then let them go out through the little Pin of Wood near the Lymbeck of the Helm, then stick it in again, and lute it over the best way you can, that no more spirits may go out, and when the drops fall into the Receiver to five or six, so the water will go in the beginning from the calcination stuff, with which governing, shutting and opening of the Instruments, you may always keep the Oven in order that the water may go well. But when you put the stuff raw, uncalcined in; than you must do it very gently in the beginning, that the drops may fall in, to 15 and 16, etc. But 'tis a tedious and long while in distilling, and there can no more water be had than of the calcined stuff, therefore it is always first to be calcined, and when from the calcined stuff, the drops are fallen one or two hours to 5, 6 and 7 drops, than you may draw a little more with the Instruments which are between the Athanor and By-Ovens, and then the heat will be stronger, and the Drops will fall faster. Section. 5 Now, when the Drops come but to two and three, When it doth go too hot. it goeth too hot: then with the mentioned Instrument shut the under wind-hole again, very close: whereby they will go slower again, for in too hot going there is danger, that the stuff should ascend, and dash all in pieces (whereby cometh Damage) and although the calcined stuff doth not easily ascend, yet it may so happen in going on (especially if the Jugg be filled too much with the stuff.) Section. 6 How the drops must be counted. And know that You must number the drops according as one beateth with a hammer or fist, or keepeth a tact or time as in Music: viz. as many common strokes as can be done betwxt the drops, may be 4, or 5, or more, they are to be called strokes, therefore govern the sire also in an equal heat, until the water come almost over, and the Helm and Receiver become Cherry-brown. Section. 7 To force the spirits. Then you must strengthen the fire with opening of the Instruments while the Spirits go through the Limbeck or Nosel of the Helm and Receiver of the water, by which the Helm and Receiver (as is said) becomes brown. Then hasten not with the forcing of the fire, till at last, when the spirit is gone an hour to six or more, according to the quantity of the stuff, and the Receiver be no more so brown, then open the Wind-holes marked with the figure 8. and lay in the same holes under the Jug or Bottle) small split Wood, and force it with the fierceness of the flame, that the rest of the spirits may come over, and that all strength may come into the water, so as the Helm and Receiver become white again, and that also the Jug or Bottle which is put in, may glow near an hour well with the Caput mort. so that which remaineth behind in the Jug or glass, may have no more sharpness in it but become dry and of a radish Brown. When the Aqua fort. is thus distilled, then let the Athanor be opened and cool well, and lay over (above the neck of the Helmet, where it is luted) a wet cloth, also near the Lymbeck of the Helm over the Receiver, mollifying the overluted hard Clay well, that it may go off, that you may not break the Limbeck of the Helm, Section. 8 The Glass Limbick and Receivers to be taken off. which may use afterwards (the Receiver being first to be taken away) then put the made Aqua fort. into a Glass, and stopped it with wax: thus you have good Aqua fort. You may also be instructed, That when you are distilling of Aqua fort. and that the Coals in the Athanor are almost gone out (which happens hardly in 10 or 11 hours) then lift up the Cover from the Athanor, make it full again with Coals and cover it, else the Fire will go out, and all will be cold, as Opportunity itself will teach thee and make thee to remember. CHAP. XXV. How to distil Aqua fort. in 4, or 5 Hours. Section. 1 IF one in haste would distil Aqua fort. and cannot have such an Athanor, then must be made a little Oven on a wall three quarters of an Ell square, and two els high, and put in it an Iron-Grate. so that below there may remain a Wind-hole, and on this little Oven make another little Oven, in which may be put the Jug with the stuff, cause an Hole to go out of the Oven, which is set first into the By-Oven▪ lay also a Grate in it, as you have done in the Athanor, and you may in stead of the earthen Instrument before noted with Figure 1. use a smooth Pan-tile, and it will do the same thing: or, if you will not spend so much time about an Oven, then make but one square Oven, which hath a grate below, and under it a windehole, in which you may set the Jug or Bottle with the stuff, take then of the abovementioned stuff four pound of Nitre, and three pound and an half of calcined Vitriol; Grind both very small, and among it put six pound of Calx viva, and let all be well mingled together (but put not so much water in the Receiver, as above is taught.) Section. 2 Now therefore, when all things are well luted over, and become dry, then make a fire under it, and let the water go strong over it, so that at all times the water and spirit may come over together, and because the stuff is mingled with Calx viva, therefore you need not take care for running over, then strengthen the fire immediately until the water and spirits are come over. Section. 3 And lastly, the stuff in the Jug will glow so well through this Labour, that you may distil in 5 or 6 hours an Aqua fort. to which else you must have 24 hours, but you will have but little water, yet 'twill be very good to use for Separation. CHAP. XXVI. Another good way to distil Aqua fort. Section. 1 TO use uncalcined Vitriol for Aqua fort. it must be dried in the Sun till it be To use uncalcined Vitriol. white, then take thereof four pound, and two pound of Salt-Petre, beat it small, mingle it together, and set it in the Oven (as is done with the first stuff) put no sweet or clear water into the Receiver: this also yields good Aqua fort. only you must (as abovesaid) do very gently in going on, that the stuff may not run over: Section. 2 Take to such Aqua fort. good Hungarian or Goslarish Hungarian, Goslaran Vitriol, or such as is boiled out of flints. Vitriol, or which is boiled out of a flint, and of a fine and high colour, and not of such Vitriol of which Alum is made, for the pale Alumish Vitriols do not yield good strong Aqua fort. Some take also one part of Copper water, and burn Alum among their Additions, which is left to every one's freedom. This only is needful to be mentioned, That if one take much Vitriol among the stuff, such Aqua fort. which cometh out of it, doth very well work in separating, and gives much brown spirit, nor do they improve in the separation, as other Aqua fort. for they hold not fast on in separation. Section. 5 Likewise some take to their Aqua fort. four pound of Another way. Nitre and as much Vitriol, which of the two is the best, you may (like myself and others) learn by Experience. CHAP. XXVII. How to make an Excellent strong Aqua fort. Section. 1 YOU must, for the making of strong Aqua fort. Take three pound of calcined Vitriol, 3 pound of Nitre, one pound of burnt Bruxish Alum, out of Belgia, and two pound of burnt flints; burn these to a water, the first water let go, until the Helm begins to be coloured, cast it away, lay the Recipient again before it, and lute it all over well again, and let the other waters go over (as I have taught above) at last, force all the spirits over with a strong fire: this water keep in a good Vessel, and put to it, in an overluted glass Bottle, 6 Loathes of Nitre, 4 Loathes of Vitriol, and two Loathes of burnt flints, and one Loath of Verdigrease, and one Loath of roasted Antimony, and one Loath of filled Iron, and half a pound of white Lead, and let all these be beaten to small powder, and put upon it, of the Water now distilled, a little and a little at a time (for it useth to make a Noise until 'tis all put in) then cover it very well, let it stand some days in a Cellar, and stir it every day twice, then set it in and distil it as an Aqua fort. only that the Helm may soon come upon it, and let it go as long as ' 'twill go, for it will begin of its own accord to go; then give it very gentle fire, and draw it most gently over so long till all the water is brought over, then augment the fire, the fiercer the better, until the spirits with great heat are all come over, (which hardly is done in two days and two nights) like as you have done before with the Aqua fort. then let the Oven be cool, and take of the Aqua fort. and cleanse it from the feces, and preserve it in a sound Vessel which holdeth well, for 'tis an exceeding strong water, and use it. Section. 2 Some will say of this Water, That by it somewhat more of Gold, in the Separation, is to be obtained, than More Gold by this way. by common Aqua fort. Experience will manifest it; for my part, I believe it not: and for such Hopes without ground, I was neither willing to except, nor to try in distilling. Section. 3 A Lute upon which the Spiris do not work. You may also be instructed, That to this Water you had need of a great Recipient, wherein the spirits may have room; and, if you will take off the Recipient, and lay it before again, than you may lute over the Joynings with lute made of two parts Clay, and one part of Quick lime, and moistened with Rape Oil, and lute it: such a Clay the spirits do not touch, but the other which is used, by some, to lute with, they touch, and thereby are made always leaky, and never holds well. CHAP. XXVIII. How to distil an Aqua fortis, called Aqua Regis, which dissolveth Gold, Copper, Iron, Led and Tin; also Mercury sublimate and Arsenic. Section. 1 Ingredients. PROVIDE good Aqua fort. which is distilled only from Salt-Petre and Vitriol, and purified with Silver from its dregs and faeces, and in which one may dissolve Silver as necessity requires, put it into a sound well luted glass Bottle or Culb, and add 8 Loathes of melted Salt, which Salt in flowing must not run▪ over, but as soon as it floweth must be put out, that it may remain in its strength and virtue, and only come off from the phlegm or superfluous moisture; now, as soon as the Salt comes in it, then lay the luted glass Bottle with the Aqua fort. and Salt sideways in the Oven in which one useth to distil Aqua fort. but thus, That you may lay to the Bottle the Recipient also, and lute it well, than it will soon begin to go off, by its own Virtue, then draw the phlegm over with a small fire, and strengthening the fire more and more, at last force the spirits to come over, as is usual in distilling the Aqua fort. and you must drive the spirits much longer because of the Salt. Section. 2 To draw over by degrees. Then you may find that by this way of distilling by degrees, there will be a fine yellow and stronger water, because the spirits will not ascend too high, (as over the Alembeck:) But it requires good diligence and observation to prevent the water from running over: This Aqua Regis when 'tis thus burnt, may presently be used, and hath no need to be purified from its feces. Deciphered, 1. The Tower of the Athanor, in which the Coals are to be put. 2. The Oven in which the Bottle is to be placed. 3. How the Bottle is to lie in the Oven. 4. The Glassy Helmet, made for it. 5. The Recipient or Receiver. 6. The Pot full of Materials prepared. 7. The empty Pot. 8. The Person that tends the Athanor and By-Ovens. Sculpture XXII. CHAP. XXIX. To distil Aqua fort. in Retorts with other Advantages. Section 1 DISTILLING Aqua fort. in Retorts is no old Invention, and no long Labour, but a short way; if Retorts may be had which are made of one piece, and will hold Aqua fort. and Oil; then lute such over with good and sound Clay, let it be well dry, put in it the Ingredients or stuff, which shall be calcined and mingled with Calx viva, and lay the Retort in an Oven made on purpose (whose Description shall follow hereafter) and fill a Receiver with water before it, then make a fire in the Oven (and speedily Section. 2 increase it) than the stuff, because it is mingled with Calx viva, will not run so soon over, because the spirits Calx viva hinders the running over and water are to go over together, at last force the spirits with Fire, so that the Retort may glow bright, near two hours, at least: In such a Retort you may distil the Aqua fort. in 5 or 6 hours, but it will not yield so much water as through the Alimbeck, but it will be strong and good for use. Section. 3 For want of a Receiver. If you cannot have a great Receiver (as it often happens) to the distilling of the Aqua fort. then take a great Waldenburgish Jug, or one made of the like Clay, (that it may hold Aqua fort. lay that before as a Receiver, and make the Process, as now is signified, such an one I esteem better to the distilling of Aqua fort. in Retorts, than in a glazed Receiver. But when you will use it (in stead of the glazed Receivers to lay before the Jug and Helm) than you must have a neck of a glass Bottle: Lute it well over in the Jug, so that the Neck may reach out of the Jug near a Span, in the same Neck lay the nossel of the Helm, and lute it also well over, so you may see in the neck of the glass Bottle, how the drops do fall, and govern the fire accordingly. Section. 4 Earthen Receivers with Glass. Some who distil Aqua fort. do make (on purpose for the Receiver) great Jugs with great Bellies, of good and solid Clay, so that near the Jug▪ s neck, are to be cut in it square holes, than they fit to it square Glasses of good Venetian Glass, and then they lute over the Jugg with a thin Clay made of Varnish and Bowl Armoniac, and cause it to be dried well, and when they will lay the Jug before, than they place the Glasses to the Jug and Nossel of the Helm, so that they may see the drops fall well, and that they may govern the fire as it Section. 5 To sit the glass spouts to the Helm. should be. Also it often comes to pass, that the Helms have not always right spouts, they are either too high or too low: Now, these you may make yourself, as followeth, viz. slake a Coal-fire upon a Test, hold the spout so as that it may be only warm, then nearer and nearer; at last, lay it on the glowing Coals, and the nosel will glow, then bow it in the fire, as you wouldst have it, but you must not take it so quickly out of the fire again, lest it break in pieces, according to this way others are to be bend and fitted like Pelican's. Section▪ 6 I have taught before, how the Ovens are to be made and prepared in which Aqua fort. is to be distilled: if it To set By-Ovens to an Athanor. now should happen, that one would at once resolve to distil more than two at a time: then for such the Athanor must be made somewhat greater and larger than for others, but not much, yet may serve three or four By-Ovens, which are to be governed with one fire, only the Instruments which in other Athanors are drawn on the sides, in this must be drawn upwards, and hang them on the wall by nails, as the following Sculpture doth show. Section. 7 Another long Oven. Besides this, one may make another Oven to distil Quantities, in which four or more Jugs may be set in length one after another: so that the Oven standeth free, and you may always come to lay one Receiver on one side, and also another on the other side; for this Reason, not only that it may not hinder one the other, but also that on the backside under every Jug may be laid wood, and that the spirits may be forced strongly. Besides, such an Oven must have on the lowest part but one hole, in which the fire upon a grate is to be stored with wood, and under the grate one wind-hole more, and the same must not be opened, till the water is almost over, that one may strengthen the heat; likewise on the upper part, as on the head must be placed wind-hole, that the fire may have its draught in the length. Section. 8 If than you would distil Aqua fort. in such an Oven, than first calcine, and prepare the stuff afterwards; put it into the Jugs, and the first Jugg which stands next the fire mingle with Calx, then there will not be so much danger, that the stuff will run over: After this, when the water is almost over, then open the wind-holes, which are always to be behind by the Jugs, and force the spirits over, according to every stuffs necessity, by this you will have also good Aqua fort. and mayst distil much of it at once, but how the Oven is to be form you may see at the figure 7. in the next Sculpture. Deciphered. 1. The Tower of the Athanor. 2. The two sides or By-ovens in which the Jugs are to be set, with the Stuff. 2. 2. 3. The Glass Receivers. 3. 3. 4. The earthen Jug or Receiver. 5. The Oven for the Retorts. 6. The little Receivers to be added to the great Receiver, that there may be room for drawing the Spirits. 7. The Long Oven. 8. The By-Ovens, by which the spirits are to be forced into the Aqua fort. Sculpture XXIII. CHAP. XXX. How Aqua fort. is to be separated and cleansed from its Feces. Section. 1 WHEN the Aqua fort. is distilled, (according The way. to the Instruction given) than it is not to be used raw, as it comes from distilling, but it must be first cleansed and precipitated from its feces, that it may be pure and clear, and this is done thus, If the distilled Aqua fort. be two pounds, then put near 2 loathes of it into a little glass Vial, and dissolve in it half a dram of fine silver, and while the Solution is yet warm, put in, the other new burnt Aqua fort. so it will become white and thick as milk, stir it once or twice a day, every day, then let it stand one day, and one night till the feces do settle in the bottom like a Calx, when it is become wholly clean and clear, than put it off, and you have purified or precipitated the Aqua fort. for ☞ the separation prepared; only take notice that the Aqua fort. distilled in an Iron Jug. doth not give so much feces, neither is it so unclean as that which is burnt in a glass Bottle, because the Iron-Jug is a Metal of itself, upon which the Aqua fort. doth partly purify itself, and it likewise gives to the Gold a higher and finer colour than the other: Keep the feces clean together, pour it off, enter them into the Lead, and let it go off upon a Copel, so you will find the most part of the Silver in it, which you have used to the precipitation. Section. 2 To bring the feces to profit. Some use this Method, viz. They do precipitate the new distilled Aqua fort. with Hungarian or Bohemish Pence, or such like Money, which to the separating is all one, only the Aqua fort. remains not so clear, fine and white, but because there is Copper in it, therefore the Aqua fort. becomes a little green: for this Reason, this Aqua fort. settled with Coppery Money cannot be used to the Gold-Proof, for the Copper which is in the water sticks rather to the Gold Calx than to the Silver, and then 'tis not easily washed off so clean: which is prejudicial to the Proof: but, if after the first settling, the Aqua fort. be unclean, than you may settle it once more, and then use it to Separate or prove Gold, according to your pleasure. CHAP. XXXI. How weak Aqua fort is to be made stronger. Section 1 IF it should be neglected in the distilling of the Aqua fort. as easily may be done, To Prepare iron. when the Joynings are not well luted over, so that the water will become too weak, and in the separating will not touch the Silver: such weak waters may be made stronger by two ways: First, set in again a new stuff of Nitre, and calcined Vitriol, and put the weak Aqua fort. in the Receiver before it, and distil the stuff: after this make the spirits to go well over, so the Aqua fort. will become stronger, that it may be used well and safely in separations. Section. 2 Second preceding. The other way isshorter: thus, Set the weak Aqua fort. in a glass Bottle or Culb, which must be luted over upon a Coal-fire, heat it till it begin to boil, than the wateriness of it will boil off, which you may often prove while it is boiling, whether the water do become strong enough. Or, set the weak Aqua fort. in a Bottle, which is luted over in the Athanor, or in another Oven, (in which one useth to burn Aqua fort.) and put an Helm upon it, and draw off from it the Phlegm or superfluous wateriness, until the Helm begins to be brown, foe the weak Aqua fort. will become stronger and is fit for use. Section. 3 The Phlegm which is drawn off you may retain, for To draw off the phlegm. if you do distil another Aqua fort. than you may use it in the Receiver again, for this phlegm is much better than common water. CHAP. XXXII. How Gold and Silver in the Aqua fort. is to be separated. Section. 1 The Preparation. TO separate Gold from Goldish Silver in the Aqua fort. Know that the Silver must first be burnt clean upon a Test, than cast it into an Ingot, and beat it thin upon an Anvil, and cut it into little lamins or thin pieces, bow them that they become hollow, glow them in a Crucible that the Aqua fort. may touch them the better, such glowed Lamins when they are cold, put them into a luted neck separating Glass, and put not above five or six of those Mark-Goldish-silver Lamins in at once; (because of the Danger in breaking,) and if you have much Silver (for they take much room with the Bottles) then put upon it so much of the purified and settled Aqua fort. that it go over the Silver a good large Finger, and as soon as it begins to work of itself, put the separating Glass with the Silver upon a warm Sand in a great earthen Test of good stuff upon an Athanor, that the Sand, may always remain hot, and when the first Aqua fort. hath work enough, that it will touch no more, than put away the Silvery Water into another luted Bottle, but not too hot, that the Bottle may not break, and put upon it other good Aqua fort. which hath not been used, set it in warm Sand, and let it work the second time, but a little stronger than at first, until it will work no more: Then put it clean off to the Silvery Aqua fort. and put upon it the third time Aqua fort. and set it upon the hot Sand, and let it work strongly, and with great Bubbles, until all the Silver be dissolved from the Gold, which will come out very clean through the three waters now mentioned: But, if one had more to separate, one might use the last water upon other Silver, and put it upon it the first time, for it will touch and work so that somewhat of the Aqua fort may be spared. Section. 2 The Second Proceeding. Know also, that upon one Mark of beaten Silver, there will remain one Mark and a half of good Aqua fort. and upon a Mark of thin graind Silver, (because the Grains remain somewhat thicker, and not so light as in beating) two Marks; now when the Aqua fort. hath separated and attracted all the Silver from the Gold, than put the Silvery Aqua fort. together in a Bottle, as abovesaid, and upon the Gold or Gold Calx (which remains in the Bottle) clean, boiling hot water, so that it go well over the Gold, and put it over again, let it boil well with the Gold calx, then put it off in a particular Vessel, clean and Section. 3 pure, that nothing come off from the Gold, and put upon To dulcify the Gold. Calx. it another clean hot water, let it boil with it, do this until the water goes off from the Gold very clean and clear, and hath no sharpness at all in it, and that it take to itself the remaining Silver which the Aqua fort. hath left behind with the Gold in the moistness, till it cometh clean, this is called dulcifying, but that you may be sure that you have the Silver sweetened clean, prove it thus, let fall a drop in a Coppery clean dish, and if it do not slain it, then 'tis dulcifyed clean, such sweet waters are all to be put together, because of the Silver in it, and use it for precipitation, (of which you shall have an instruction hereafter) When the Gold calx after this manner is taken clean off, then hold in your hand the Bottle, and put the Gold or Gold calx very gently out into an half Glass Bottle, with the last clean water together; then put it again into the Bottle or Culb, and hold your hand before it again, and turn the Culb so that all the remainder of the Gold (together with the water) may flow against the hand, than put it finely and gently to the other Gold in the half Bottle. Section. 4 To glow out the Gold Calx. When all the Gold calx is settled in the half Glass Bottle, then drain the water off cleanly, and put also the Gold calx (being moist) into a clean Crucible, and set it on the fire, and let the water softly evaporate, and boil in; then set the Crucible warmer, and at the last very hot, that the Gold calx may glow clean out, than the Gold will receive a fine colour, let it be cold, and weigh it, then in the casting all together nothing will go from it. Now if you will cast together the glowed Gold calx then mingle it with a little Borax, and put it in a new clean Crucible, (but rub it at first very clean with chalk) and set it in the Fire, and when the Crucible gloweth, blow to it that the Gold may come to flow, of this you may use a little in the Fluss, and when you will cast it, then lay Section. 5 To cast the Gold. a clean little Paper upon it, which is Luted with Venetian Soap and Wax, and while the Paper yet burns upon the Gold, cast it out under the Flames, so it will receive no scum, but will casts itself also clean, but if you will cast an Ingot, then make the Ingot warm, and Lute it with Wax, and then quench the cast Ingot with Urine, and so the Gold will become fine and deft. Section. 6 But if one have much to separate, if it be Golden grained or Gilt Silver, and you would separate it in the water, than it must be first burnt clean upon a Test, and the burnt Silver must be Grained, (for it would be a hindrance to the Separator, if all Silver should be beaten) especially in a great quantity, yet he who hath time and opportunity, will do better to beat the Silver, or cause it to be beaten, whereby the separation will be done sooner and with less Aqua fort. (as above is signified) but if you want time and opportunity to beat it, then take the burned Goldish Silver, and set it in a Crucible in a Wind Oven, and grain it with a split or round stick, or stir the water with a stick fast about in the Vessel, to make the Silver cast itself into Bubbles, whereby it will Section. 7 To separate the Silver for granulating. grain itself thin and hollow, and when 'tis drained, then dry and glow it, and put it in the separating Glass, and put Aqua fort. upon it, that it may go over it pretty well, and set an Alimbeck upon it, that it may begin to move of itself, and, when it ceaseth working, then set the separating glass upon the Copels in the sand upon the Athanor, and let the Alimbeck or Helm stand continually upon it, and what Water goeth off from the Aqua fort. keep that same by itself, for 'tis in the distilling of the Aqua fort. to be put into the Receiver, and is better than common Aqua fort. and you must still govern the fire in the Athanor by strengthening and weakening it as the work requires: and of this graind Silver, put 9 or 10 Mark of it into a bottle at once, for it will not take so much room as the beaten, yet if there were a quantity to separate of the Golden silver, one may prepare more of such Athanors than Section. 8 Aqua fort▪ for the granulated Silver. one, that divers of the Bottles may be set in at once, but you ought to observe this, that one must put upon the Graind more than three times fresh Aqua fort. for the thick Grains sake, that the Gold may be pure. Section. 9 And if it happens that a Glass Bottle should break, and the Silvery Aqua fort. run into the sand, 'tis not When a glass Bottle breaks: quite lost, for one may boil most part of the Silver out of the Sand again with warm Water, and that which remains in the sand may be mingled with that which is swept off, and passes through the melt Oven, and be made to profit, but of such danger there is little Fear upon the Athanor, especially if you have good separating Glasses, and also are careful. Section. 10 To dulcify the Silver. When the Silver is separated clean from the Gold then sweeten the Gold Calx well out, dry, glow and cast it together (as often as hath been mentioned) and know, if you have been diligent in separating and sweetening it the Gold which comes out by the separation, will be 23 Carats and one grain; but commonly it cometh to 23 Carats and 7 or 8 grains. Section. 11 Further, I add as a Caution, That you must not The Content of parted Gold. let the Aqua fort. evaporate too dry upon the Gold (as many times it happens by Negligence) whereby the Silver can not set itself on the Gold Calx again, which afterwards the other Aqua fort. will hardly touch, and therefore so soon as one part of the last Aqua fort. be poured from the Gold, one should quickly cast upon it hot flowing water before it be cold, that the Silver Section. 12 To shoot into Cristals. may not settle itself too hard on the Gold, and turn to Cristals, and though hot boiling water will dissolve those Crystals, yet 'tis better, it may not be, but be soon dulcified. When the Aqua fort. remains Silver. Likewise, if it be neglected so that the Gold should come too white out of the separation, and were not of a high Content, than it is by the Cement (as in next Sculpture is signified) to be perfectly cleansed. But that you may understand the Labour of the Separation, and how the Ovens and separating Glasses use to stand, you will also see in the following Sculpture. Sculpture XXIV. Deciphered. 1. The Tower of the Athanor. 2. The Side-Ovens upon which the Copels are placed on Sand. 3. The Glass Bottle for Separation covered with Helmets, 3. 3. 4. The Receivers which are laid to the Helmets. 5. How Aqua fortis is by them to be drawn from the Silver. 6. An Iron Instrument by which the Glasses are to be taken out and in. 7. The Person that attends the Operation of the Glasses, in figure 5. 8. Another person to take off and put on Glasses upon the shelves. 9 The Ingredients prepared, in a dish or pan. CHAP. XXXIII. When the Gold is abstracted, how the Silver is to be brought again, out of Aqua fort. Section. 1 IF one have dissolved Silver from the Gold, through Aqua fortis, and the Aqua fort. hath sucked the same into itself, and if one would bring it again out of the Aqua fortis; this may be done several ways. The common Method is this (which is used by most Goldsmiths) if they separate but a little silver, and require no great pains, than they take the settled water with which they have purified the Gold (as is said before) and put it in an half Bottle made of Copper, to the silvery Aqua fortis: only observe the right measure, for if the settled water be but little, and on the contrary, if the silvery Aqua fort. be too much, than it will begin to work too hard in the Copper Bottle: to prevent this, put into the Copper Bottle, to the settled water, and to the inweighed Aqua fort. a little more warm common flowing water, and then it will not so much hurt the Copper-bottle; and the Silver will quickly and apparently fall down in the Copper Bottle: Let it stand a while, then put the Copper Bottle (together with the water and fallen Silver) over the fire, let it boil a little, than the Silver will the better and closer come together. When this is done, then cause it to settle and pour the clean water off (which will be fair, clear and transparent) put the silver Calx into an half- Glass bottle, or, if it be much, then into a clean Kettle, and pour clean warm water upon it, two or three times, until the silver Calx be clean and pure, and see that the Silver always settle well, and preserve it carefully together, that nothing be lost. Section. 2 The Reason why the silver Calx must be dulcified, is Because the sharpness which the Aqua fort. hath left in Why the Silver Calx is sweetened. it may come out of it, for the sharpness doth rob some of the silver in the fire by drawing over the Helm as shall be shown. Now, when the water is drained from the silver Calx then put it in a clean Copper half Bottle, and let the water of it boil off and evaporate, that it may be very dry, than put it in a Crucible, set it in the fire in a wind-Oven or before the bellows, according as it is more or less: make it not too suddenly hot, that if there be left by the silver Calx, any Spirits of the Aqua fort. that they may evaporate before the silver Calx floweth, and the waste of the silver may become the smaller, which waste is not often small, and comes all from the spirits, for if they could be retained in the separating Glass then little would go off from the Silver. Section. 3 The content of the Precipitated Silver. After the melting together of the Silver in the Crucible, than grain it, or cast it in an Ingot, as you please, this is the old manner of the Goldsmiths and common Separators to cleanse the silver out of the Aqua fort. and this silver which is thus settled out of the Aqua fort. is not fine silver: but it worketh on the Copper from which it is to be cleansed, and the stronger the water is in cleansing, the more it will touch, and mingle among the silver Calx, and it holds commonly a Mark of cleansed silver, and this thus cast, holds near 15 Loath of fine silver. Section. 4 To bring the blue water to profit. The settled blue water is to be used again with profit when you distil Aqua fort. and have put the prepared stuff into a Jug (whereof Iron ones are best) then put of this blue water two pound upon ten pound of calcined stuff; as soon as this is done, set the Helm upon it, for it will presently go off itself, without any fire, and lay the Receiver before, (without any sweet Water) lute it well every where, and let it first go over the phlegm, then increase the fire till all the spirits are driven into the water (as is said, when we spoke of burning the Aqua fort.) than you may put this blue Aqua fort. into a great Culb glass, which is cut off in the Neck, and luted over, and evaporate the moist phlegm with the fire, than it will become stronger, and so put it to the stuff in the distilling. But the Aqua fort. which comes of it, when the blue water is put upon the calcined stuff hath not so much feces in cleansing and seething down, and is not so unclean as other common Aqua fort. which is burnt of other stuff, because the blue water becomes Metallick by the Copper in the precipitation, and hath purified itself in the Jug or Bottle. Section. 5 To precipitate Silver in an earthen vessel. Know also, That one may in a glazed or earthen Vessel (if it be good, and will hold Aqua fort. and Oil) cleanse the used silvery Aqua fort. and the silver precipitated in it, namely, one must put such Aqua fort. together with the clear water, (as aforesaid) mixed in the glazed or earthen Vessel, and lay in it red hot pieces of Copper, and set the Vessel warm, than the silver will quickly fall to the Bottom, but 'tis better to cleanse it in a Copper Vessel, which may be done in a coppery or Section. 6 earthen vessel, yet in the cleansing of it, put iron Lamins, than the silver will come clean out of the water, as Experience teaches. Iron Lamins in the Precipitation. CHAP. XXXIV. How Aqua fortis drawn from Silver may be used again. Section. 1 THE Second manner of bringing the Silver out of Aqua fort. and to draw off Aqua fort. so that it may be used again for Separation, is a singular ART and Dexterity; 'tis thus, Put the Silverish Aqua fort. in a good glass Bottle which is luted over, and wherein Aqua fort. may be distilled, set it in one of the Ovens which are for distilling, and luted over (but in an Athanor is the best, and not so dangerous, as in a common Oven) let it be dry, than put the silverish Aqua fort. through a long glazed Tunnel, warm and not cold, into the Bottle, than set a Helm upon it, but not so strong luted over, lay the Receiver before, and lute the Joynings over so that you may take the Helm off again, (as you will hear hereafter.) And being thus set in, then dress the Athanor, and put fire and Coals in it. And by the Instruments (of which we have spoken above:) first give it a gentle fire, and let the phlegm go over 9 or 10 beats or times (as before) and when the water or phlegm is almost over, than shut all the Instruments on the Athanor, and take off the Helm again, and fill more silvery water through the long Tunnel, warm into the Bottle, (else it may break and do hurt) and put the Helm on again, and lay the Receiver before, it but lute it not too strong (as at the beginning) and let the water go over again gently. In this manner 'tis to be done the second and third time with the silvery water; and when you think it be silvery enough in the Bottle, or hast no more to put in, and the flegms are over, then take off the Helm again, and cast into the Bottle (to the Silver or Stuff) a piece of Tallow as big as half a hazel Nut, than the Silver will not ascend in the Bottle, put on the Helm again and lay the Receiver before it, and lute it all over well, and the best thou canst: then let the fire go on the stuff again, and make the fire fiercer (as you see convenient) At last, give it a strong fire, and force the spirits, near 12 hours, pretty well, yet not too high in the beginning, but by degrees increase it, that the spirits may go over with great force, and that the Culb may glow very bright, let it stand in the fire, near two hours▪ that the Silver may almost melt in it, than the spirits will come all into the water, and the Silver freed of them, for if they were not clean forced from the Silver, but remained by it, they would hurt it in the casting together, and draw it away; which may be seen apparently upon the Coals, that there will lie thick leaves upon it: They therefore who are ignorant of this, do many times work with danger, and great loss of Silver. Section. 2 One may also put the silvery Aqua fort. into the glass Bottle luted over upon the Athanor in deep Sand, and draw the phlegm (as now is mentioned) gently over, by which may be seen how it governs itself in the Bottle, and how the water decreaseth, and so have more care in putting in more water: finally, the spirits will be forced over, and the Silver be glowed out in the Bottle, yet the last out-glowing is better to do in my mind, as above in the Athanor. Section. 3 When the water is thus drawn over, then let all be cold, and take off the Aqua fort. in the Receiver, which you may use again very well to separate, especially to the Gold-proof, and hath no need of further cleansing: then take out the Silver which was left in the Glass, and put it into a Crucible, and cast it together. Section 4 Some of the Gold-Separators have also this manner in drawing over the water, that they do add to the silvery Another way to draw over the Water. Aqua fort. in the separating Bottle, if it be six pounds, than one pound of the stuff, of the Aqua fort. (viz. of Nitre, and calcined Vitriol, as above is signified) and do not put it into the Bottle until the water be almost gone over, and if the spirits begin to go over, they lute it again very diligently, and keep the Fire (as is necessary in burning of the Aqua fort.) that the spirits at last may come over too: and yet they do think that the Aqua fortis will receive a virtue and strength again from the added stuff, and is better for use in separations; then they force the Silver with the Caput Mort. (which yet is but little) into a Crucible, and cast it together: Whether now this way be better than the first? Experience must teach: So than you will have a good and right Instruction concerning the Silver and Gold separation in the water; and 'tis a complete way of separating; especially if one be provided with all things necessary to it. CHAP. XXXV. How to separate Gold and Silver by Fusion. Section. 5 How to understand Separation by Fusion. AS it is an excellent piece of Art to sepapate Gold and Silver (in Aqua fort.) viz. The rich Gold containing Silver; so is also the Separation by Fusion upon the poor Golden Silver, where the Mark contains one penny and an half of Gold, to two or three drams, which is an handsome and profitable separation; so that I know no better way: but upon the rich Goldish Oar, that way is not to be used. Section. 2 But this separating by Fusion is to be understood thus, That, because the Gold in the poor Content of Goldish Silver is largely distributed, (through the Addition of Gold in the Fusion in a little Silver) it may be brought into a narrowness; namely, as when the Goldish Silver is thirty Mark, and one Mark contains a dram of Gold, than the thirty drams of Gold (which are in the thirty Mark of Silver, will bring in two Marks of Silver, and then separate it in the Aqua fort. which is a very great profit, because that one hath not need to refine all the thirty Marks of Silver, and then to separate them in Aqua fort. Section. 3 If you have a goldish Silver, which is poor of Gold, put it in a Crucible, let it flow, and grain it in the water, and if it be but wrought Silver, and not fine, 'tis nothing: then weigh the graind Silver, and prove it upon fine Silver and Gold, how much it contains, that you may keep this Account, that there remaineth nothing behind on Gold or Silver, and also canst certainly know, how much the waste hath been in the Silver by the separation. Section. 4 After such proving and weighing, make the grain a little wet again, and take to every Mark of Silver, four Loath of yellow small beaten Sulphur, put also the grains wet into a glazed Pot, and put the Sulphur upon it, mingle it well together, and cover the Pot with a Cover, than lute it well over, and make a gentle fire round about: so that the sulphur may melt on the grains. When this is done, Let the Pot cool, and break it in pieces, than you will find the grains and the Sulphur burned very black together, beat it asunder, and take heed that nothing of it spring away. After this put the grains (thus with the Sulphur prepared) into a good Crucible, and upon the Grains put also a Mark of wrought Silver, and half a Loath of Copper; but if it be burnt silver, then take to every Mark two loathes of Grained Copper, and set the Crucible in a Wind Oven, which is made taper-wise with good and sound Clay under the Iron grate before, towards the wind hole, that if the Crucible should run over, yet the scoria or dross of all the stuff may flow out of the Oven into the hole under the wind-hole, than there is no need to gather it so largely dispersed; and, that also the Grates may be taken out and laid in again: After such Crucibles are set in, then cover them with an Iron-cover very close, let the stuff flow well, and when 'tis flowed, uncover the Crucible, and stir it well with a glowing Iron hook of a finger thickness, and cast the Silver first down with grained Lead, viz. that you may spread the grained Section▪ 5 Led upon the stuff in the Crucible, in which the Gold will cast itself down with some little silver, then put Precipitation, or casting down▪ also upon it some of the stuff (as is directed hereafter) and stir it once with the Iron hook, then cover the Crucible again with the cover, and let it stand thus a while in the stuff, then uncover it again, and cast it down with grained Lead and a little grained Copper; do this three times, and always use afterwards of the mentioned fluss; but take notice, if you have in the Crucible 20 Marks of silver, that you may not use of the fluss (to three times casting down) above 10 loathes, and one and a half of grained Lead, and 4 loathes of Copper; for if you should use more, than the silver Regulus might be too great. Now when you have precipitated, or cast it down the third time, let the Crucible stand with the stuff a long time in good fluss, then take it out of the fire, and cool it, and beat it asunder, and of 20 Marks of silver you will find in the bottom, a Regulus of near 6 Marks weight, or something lesser, in which there will be as much Gold, as in 20 Mark of silver. Section 6 After the finishing of the first running or casting the When the scoria contains Gold. Metal, then prove if you find the scoria or dross upon the Silver, and the Silver upon the Gold, and that if the scoria doth contain Gold, set it again in a new Crucible, and let it flow, and use your casting with the grained Lead and a little Copper (as before) but not so much, unless the scorias were rich in Gold, and then one useth much of the grained Lead and Copper, whereby the silver Regulus will become the greater, and the Gold will come better together; especially observe, that if much Gold be in the silver, then use at first most of the lower casting, that you may precipitate all the Gold, and when you have all the Gold in the two Regulus', and do find Section. 7 When the Regulus is poor in Gold. that they are still too poor in Gold, that is, if you have not in the same a fourth, or at least a fifth part of Gold, by which the Gold in separating did not remain whole, then set in the Regulus again, grained and prepared with sulphur (as at the first time) and put the same ashed grains in a new Crucible, and spread a little Copper upon it, and cover it with fluss, and put a cover upon it, and set it, thus covered, again into the fire in the Wind-oven, and let it flow well, then precipitate it again with grained Lead, and use to every one of the castings the fluss, (hereafter set down) and stir it well about with an Iron hook, now that the silver Regulus be not too great, and not so much (as that you need to separate it in the Aqua fort. in vain,) you may help it with the lower stuff or castings, whether the Regulus be great or small, (as above hath been demonstrated) and so deal also with the remaining scorias, when such is yet rich in Gold; for by diligent proving one may always perceive whether the Gold be all in the Regulus, or whether some be yet behind in the scoria, that you may regulate yourself accordingly. When then you have done all things in the Cruciple by precipitating and stirring about, and hast lifted out the Crucible, than cast the stuff out of the Crucible into an iron Morter, luted with Tallow and a thin Clay, and made a little warm (which I judge very good) for in such a casting the Regulus comes clean together; and as soon as this is cast out of the Crucible, than set the Crucible quickly in again in the Wind-Oven (especially if the Crucible be good, and, That you may trust to it) Put the stuff out of the Mortar, and beat the Regulus from the scoria, and presently put the Scorias in the Crucible, let it flow till it doth flow very easily, and cast it down again, and do it as you are instructed at the first, than put it again into the Mortar, and cool it; Lastly, when all the Gold is cast down in the Silver-Regulus, then take the Regulus and burn it clean upon a Test, and grain it afterwards, either in the bubbling water (as above mentioned) or cast it into an Ingot and beat it thin, then separate it in Aqua fort. as I have taught. Section. 8 To this separating there doth belong good and sound Crucibles, in which you at once may set in to separare near 50 Marks of silver or more, besides, I have seen a Gold- separator in Saxony, in such a Crucible hath set in, and cast down near an hundred Marks of good burnt Silver, thus prepared with sulphur: But, because it causeth some fear to set in so much at once, therefore I judge it better, especially, if one cannot trust to the Crucibles, that one in one Crucible may set in no more than 50 Marks (except it were so much to separate) and then some more Wind-Ovens must be made, and more Crucibles be put in. Section. 9 But for a true Instruction of the Precipitation (with the before given manuduction) know, That it hath this Condition, viz. When there is put (after the former Directions) much Goldish silver with sulphur prepared in a Crucible, and the Gold is cast down with the Lead, Copper and Fluss, than the Gold will precipitate or cast itself from above, so you may with a little glowing draw out of the Crucible some scorias, but not the half part, then cover the Crucible again, and preciptate it again, and at last put the stuff (as I have mentioned before) in an Iron Morter, by this way, I suppose, that the scoria of the Gold will be clean at once. Section. 10 I must also further Instruct, That one may use upon Another Way to precipitate at once. the poor Goldish Silver (of which a Mark contains but a Heller or Penny-Gold) this following Method of Separation in the Fusion, first, that one must put into a Crucible of the graind Gold, with sulphur prepared as above is taught) near 50 Marks, and let it flow well, then precipitate it with graind Lead, and a little Copper and when the Precipitation is right done, and the scoria with all the stuff cast together with the precipitated Silver, and the Regulus and the Gold put in another hot Crucible, and again out of the same, into the first, and then to cast it into an iron Mould of an Oval form, well washed with Clay, and dried again, so that it may flow in breadth, and the silver Regulus with the Gold may settle (yet broad and thin) and then you will find, that in such casting that all the Gold will give itself in the silver Regulus at once, and you need not set it in the scoria again, but it will be clean and free at once: this now is an ingenious Method, though I never used it: because the silver Regulus is so often cast through with the scoria, and doth spread among the scorias, so that the silver may the better catch the Gold, and take it to itself. To such casting one must have a singular iron-Instrument made on purpose to open and close again with two handles, the same is to be holden with thick wet Gloves on the hands, and poured out to avoid the heat thereof; Every one may consider of this, but, I judge it most convenient, the casting of the Crucible, as followeth. CHAP. XXXVI. How the scoria or dross is to be made to Profit. Section. 1 The first way. THE remaining silver which in the precipitating comes not into the silver Regulus, but remains in the scoria, you may make to profit, and bring it from it; only observe this, If one useth to the precipitation much Copper and little Lead, than the Scorias will become rich in Copper, therefore to make such good again, requires much Lead: But if you use to it much grained Lead and little Copper (as hath been taught in my former Instructions) than the Scorias will become rich in Lead and poor in Copper, and the Gold will precipitate never the less (after this manner) into a silvery Regulus, which in the well making of the scoria is very profitable, without any great damage to the Silver. Therefore make it thus, If the Scorias be 30 Mark which you would make to advantage, Prepare a very flat Test, of good washed Ashes (as I have taught in the first Book of the silver work) set it before the Bellows, that it be not too strong, let it be warm, and then put upon it 15 pounds of clean Lead, blow it gently, and when it begins to drive, than put continually one piece after another of the scoria into it, so the Lead takes the Content of it to itself, and the Sulphur is blown off from the Test, also the Scorias doth not stick so much in the Test, because 'tis poor in Copper: But if there be not enough of Lead, than you may add somewhat more, till all the scoria be sucked in: then drive it upon the Test clean off, so you will find, that not much more than a dram is gone off from the Silver in the separation. Section. 2 Another way. Also, one may put again all the scoria into a Crucible, and let it flow in a wind-oven, and when 'tis flowed very well, the silver (with filled Iron, or Iron-Scales and grained Lead) is to be precipitated, stir it well about, and with the filled Iron follow it so long, till the scoria doth touch no more the iron Hook, then lift it out of the fire, and let it cool well: In this precipitation (with the Iron) the Sulphur will lose its strength, and le's fall the Silver, and thus with this precipitation the most part of the Silver settles itself in the Crucible, which with the remaining scorias is easy to be brought to profit, especially because it is rich in Lead. Now, because I am just come to the scoria, I must (in kindness to the Reader) mention somewhat of its rare Section. 3 The scoria is malleable. nature; for first, When the scoria is cast into an Ingot, while 'tis yet hot, it may be hammered and beaten, as one pleaseth, like Lead. Section. 4 Than one may cast figures and medals which will look like glassy Oar, and if one cast forms of it, and turn it over, and lay it upon a gentle coal-fire, till they are warm, than ☞ set it over a coal-fire, and the silver will glow out of it, as if it grew in the Mine, and, 'twill look lovely and fair: and this I signify, that any one may use it at their pleasure, and, like an Artist, know what is to be done therewith. CHAP. XXXVII. How to make a Fluss for Precipitation. Section▪ 1 FLUSS is made by taking lethargy, Glassgall, and melted Salt, of each a like quantity, How to make it. small beaten, and filled Iron, and a like quantity of graind Lead, this Fluss or fluible Composition maketh the scoria's deft, so that the Gold will settle itself the easier, and precipitate gently, and not suddenly; and if you will use it, you may do it the more safely in the Precipitating with the Graind Lead and Copper, lest the silver Regulus be too great. Section. 2 So you have a clear Instruction how you shall do Separation in the fluss requires diligence. with the Separation in the fluss all in all, which is well to be observed, for it requires a more singular and exact diligence in the Aqua fort. than in other separations, as you will find. Section. 3 The use of the Test. Concerning the old used Crucibles and Tests, which come from such separations, they are to be kept together, for they are not without Silver, and to make such serviceable, set one of the old Crucibles in the Wind-Oven full of Lead, let it drive gently, and lay the pieces of the used Crucibles one after another in it, than the Lead will draw all that remains of the scoria to itself, and becomes as washed: and you may use the same Lead, in stead of other Lead, or add but a little of it upon the Test, and then you may make it be profitable; for the more you keep all things together the less is the damage of the Silver: but all is to be swept together, and washed at once alike, and then melted for your advantage. Section. 4 And, when in this Separation a Crucible runs out, (as it oft happeneth) then is this stuff and scoria (because 'tis heavy, and remains in the water) like another Silver to be searched and found out. But, that you may see the Wind-Ovens (with all the appertaining Instruments and Vessels to this Labour severally form) I have in the following Sculpture for this end delineated them. Sculpture XXV. Deciphered. 1. The inward part of the Wind-Oven. 2. The outward part prepared. 3. The holes next the wind-holes. 4. The Pot in which the Sulphur and graind-Mettals are prepared, with a fire under it, and a person attending it. 5. A single Crucible, and a cover to it. 5. 5. 6. The iron Tongues, by which Crucibles are put in, and taken out of the fire. 7. The Instrument in which the Crucibles are to be set. 8. The iron Vessel into which the stuff or melted matter is to be cast. 9 The person attending the Wind-ovens. CHAP. XXXVIII. How to make good and sound Crucibles for separating the Fluss. Section. 1 BECAUSE there must be good and sound Crucibles to the Separation in the Fluss, therefore I will give here a little Instruction how they are to be made: The chief and that of most concernment is good Clay, that holdeth well in the fire, of which may be made good Crucibles. When you have such Clay, let it be well dried in Section. 2 the Sun, beat it small, and sift it through an hair sieve, put among it the tenth part of small beaten flint-stones, which is burnt and washed: and half so much small ground Chalk, or in stead of that Glimer or Tallow, or in stead of these burnt Water-flints small ground, mingle all these well together, and moisten it a little; work it well together with your Feet, and after with your Hands: then take smooth pieces of Pear-tree, or other strong wood, suitable to the bigness of the Crucibles; which may be taken in two parts asunder, on which may be laid two iron Rings or moulds, beat and press the Crucibles into the same, but let the upper part of the Crucible be first well oiled over, that it may the better go out. After the preparation of the Crucible, let it be dry in the Frame, than the Crucible will go out whole, for if the lower part be oiled, than the wet Crucible might with the upper part, lift up itself out of the frame, and hardly remain whole; or, take one part of Potter's clay, a fourth part of good Clay, and a fourth part of the above mentioned flind-stones: but you must observe whether the stuff or Clay be too fat or dry, and those Portions which you take unto it, and so you will have good Crucibles which will not fail. Section. 3 Some use Crucibles having three feet, below, upon which stand the Ovens, and need not be set upon a foot of the Crucible; such Crucibles I much esteem of, for the heat may easily come without hindrance of the thick bottom, that the Silver or Metal in it, may become sooner hot, than in such Crucibles which must be set upon a thick foot, they stand also and hold better and longer in the fire than they which are set upon particular feet of Crucibles, especially when the feet, as well as the Ashes of the Crucible are not so very dry, than it draweth the bottom of the Crucible, and the Moistness to itself, and cracketh it very easily, and by this may be seen that out of a common threefooted pot (used for boiling and casting Copper and Brass) in an hour and a half you may always make warm and cast a Fluss of 12 pounds in a Wind-Oven; yea, one may well cast some Fluss out of it, especially, if one have tongs to it, to lift the Pot out of the Fire. I was willing to mention this as an Instruction, and the form of such Crucibles you will find in the following Sculpture. Sculpture XXVI. Deciphered. 1. The lower part of the frame of a Press, for making Crucibles. 2. The shape of the whole Press, and how the Crucibles are to be forced under it. 3. The iron-Rings or Hoops about the Frame. 4. The shape of Crucibles to be made in the Press. 5. The Handle by which the Screw of the Press is to be turned. CHAP. XXXIX. Of Cementing, and what it is. Section. 1 CEMENTING is a singular fine ART through which one may draw and separate from the Gold, Silver, Copper, Brass, and other Metals, by a moistened Powder, that the Gold may remain separated from its Addition and Alloy: But 'tis only to be used to such Golds which are not much more than half Gold, for if the Silver and Copper be more than the Gold, to this the other Separations are better, and 'tis done with the same in a shorter time, and with less labour and expense: and according as the Gold is rich or poor, the Cements is likewise to be prepared. Section. 2 But to Cement there appertains such stuffs and matter as will work upon the Silver and Copper, because of their sharpness, and consume them as a sharp Salt species, among which is to be taken Verdigrise, calcined Brass, and such like, that they may give a fine and grateful colour to the Gold, or else Lapidem Haematitem, Crocum Martis, Tutiam, or calcined Vitriol; which Ingredients, how to be put into the Cement, is left to every one's Liberty, but he must observe, that he take nothing which is contrary to the Gold, or that may make it unclean and do hurt. The Powder of Tile is to be used in the Cement, that it may attract what the other Ingredients do scarify, and loosen, as Silver and Copper from the Gold with their sharpness and moistness, which else would stick and hang about the Gold, whereupon the Gold becomes fine and clean. Therefore I have set down some Cements which I have used and found very good; But, because in this Art of Cementing there is necessary a particular Oven, which holdeth fire long, therefore I shall first mention how it is to be made, with its Form. CHAP. XL. How the covered Oven for Cement is to be made. Section. 1 IF one hath much to Cement, there is no better way, than to prepare such an Oven as in the following Sculpture; and although there may be other Cement Ovens, yet I conceive that this is the most profitable; for it will hold about 24 hours such a continual fire, that there needs not any attending of it, and it is done thus: Make a square of Tile-stones, the inside an Ell wide, and an Ellhigh, to the edge (where the Oven is to be tapering) and then from the same edge to the Tower of the Athanor is to go half an Ell high, and that the Tower of the Athanor be an Ell and a half or two els high, and the inside an Ell and half wide, and so the whole Oven three els, or three and a half high, and there must be on the foreside of the Oven two Mouth-holes, the lower a third part of an Ell long, and a sixth part of an Ell high, through which the wind may go, but the upper an Ell and half a quarter wide, and so high; and by the same Mouth-hole there must lie (in the inside of the Oven) an iron Grate, with an edge, as in the next Sculpture marked with Figure 3. and out of the same Grate, before the Mouth-hole in the Oven, an earthen plate upon which a Muffle as high as the Mouth-hole is to be placed, and then under it the prepared Cement comes to stand pure and clean, or else the Pot with the prepared Cement is to be set in it without the Muffle: you must also make four smoak-holes upon every side one, as in the next Sculpture at figure 4. Section. 2 Now, if you will Cement in the Oven, and the Cement Concerning the Cement oven. is set in, then put in above in the Athanor (or Tower) live Coals, and fill it after with dead Coals; then cover it so as no Air may go out of it, only leave the Mouth-hole open (marked with the Figure 1.) and the air of smoak-hole, (noted with figure 2.) that the fire may begin, and have air; then shut all the other air or wind-holes close, and let open only the uppermost hole of the Tower near the cover (noted with figure 5.) About the bigness of a little finger, that the Cement be not too hot, and not to suffer any damage. Section. 3 In such an Oven you may keep a Fire 24 hours, (as abovesaid) that there needs not much waiting on it, nor casting fresh Coals into it, for the Coals in the Athanor will follow one another, and keep the fire all the time in due heat (as you please). But if there be cause to continue the heat longer than 24 hours, than put more Coals into the Athanor, and so keep the fire as long as is needful. Section. 4 Now, concerning the Cement ovens which have been used formerly, those I leave in their esteem; and when you have tried both, the Difference will be found. Section. 5 But if one cannot quickly have such an Oven to the Cementing, then put the prepared Cement between Tile-stones in a clean Coal-fire, and let it glow its time (as hereafter) but so that it may not melt. Thus, you may do all the cementing: but be diligent, and careful of the coals: Now the form of the cement Ovens may be seen in the Sculpture following. Sculpture XXVII. Deciphered. 1. The Athanor and lower Mouth-hole. 2. The upper Mouth-hole. 3. The Edge upon which the iron Plate doth lie on the iron Grates. 4. The Registers or Air-holes above the Grates. 5. The little air-holes near the top of the Athanor. 6. The stopples for the Registers or air-holes. 7. A Test fitted for the Athanor. 8. 9 Cement Pots. 10. An hook to stir the Coals. 11. A person that attends the Furnace and works. CHAP. XLI. How Rhenish Gold is to be Cemented. Section. 1 How to prepare it. RHENISH Gold (to cement it either in Ingot or Plate) must be beaten thin, (the thinner the better) and cut it in littles pieces, as broad as Crowns. But if it be Rhenish Gilders which you would have cemented and clean, then beat them a little thinner, but if there be not much need of that, then beat them whole: Upon such beaten Gold, or Gold Gilders the Cementing is to be done thus, Take Section. 2 The first Cement Powder. 16 Loathes of powder of an old dry Tile (not too hard burnt, neither too sandy) then 8 Loathes of Salt, and 4 Loathes of white Vitriol, grind these Ingredients all together small, and moisten them with Urine or sharp Vinegar, like Copel Ashes, so is the Cement powder prepared. Then take that which you intent to cement, glow it first in the fire, and let it be cool, than spread some of the Powder in a Test or Pot, which is to be of an equal wideness, a finger thick, and lay the Gold (which you must first moisten in urine or vinegar) upon the cement Powder, one piece near the other, as broad as the Test, then spread upon it again some of the moistened Cement Powder half a finger thick, and upon it (as now is mentioned) the urine moistened Gold, lay one lay upon another, until the Test or Pot be full, cover it over with the Cement powder the thickness of one's Finger, that one may see the Gold: then put over it another Test, or cover very well luted, that no vapour or spirits may go out; then set the Test (or Pot) with the Gold, and cement, thus prepared, in a Cement Oven: and observe, that it may stand in like heat 24 hours, and glow brown, that the Gold may not flow in the cement (to prevent Damage) for, if it should flow in the Cement, than the Silver and Copper which the Cement hath extracted, may suck in the Gold again, and thereby all pains of beating and Cementing will be in vain. Section. 3 Now, when the Gold hath stood in the Cement 24 hours, than shut the Oven every where, and let it be This second Cement. cool, then take it out and open it, and wash the Cement Powder off with warm water, than the Gold will be found very near 23 Carats on the Content; and if you will have it higher Gold, then do the Gold over again with another singular fresh Cement (to which take 16 loathes of Tile-pouder, and 8 Loathes of Salt, and 4 loathes of white Vitriol, one loath of Salt-petre, and one loath of Verdigrise) and let it cement again (as before) 24 hours, do this till the Gold is very clean, and high to your delight: It is done well in a few hours, but when you have spare time, let it stand the 24 hours, 'tis then better and surer; But, how much properly every Cement makes the Gold better, the proof will show. Section. 4 To cement Rhenish Gilders whole. If one lay Rhenish Guilders whole in the Cement, and cement it, than there will not only come silver off from it, and Copper, but it will come to be of the Content of the Hungarish Gold, yet they retain their Impression and Circumscription, only they become lighter as much as Copper and Silver have been in them: in this manner is to be cleansed through the Cement, a light Gold, in an Hungarish Content: only observe, if you have according to your pleasure made it higher through the Cement, than you must boil the cemented Gold at last in clear water or lie, until all the sharpness come off from it, so it will become cleaner, than by washing only. This you must do with all Cements, so you will receive Gold as high as your desire is. CHAP. XLII. Another Cement upon light or mean Gold. Section. 1 UPON light Gold always the first Cement must be made of two parts of the powder of Tyle, and one part Hungarish, or other Salt; but to the other shall be taken two Ingredients, viz. of Virdigrise, Lapis Haematites and calcined Vitriol, as much of the one as the other, and Urine boiled very dry and small beaten, thus the Gold will become high and fine. CHAP. XLIII. A good Common Cement for all Golds▪ Section. 1 The Ingredients. TAKE fourteen loathes of Tyle-powder, 4 loathes of Haematites, one loath of Crocum Martis, one loath of Verdigrise, six loathes of white Vitriol, and three loathes of Salt-petre; Grind them all small, and the Gold with Urine moistened, and as before after the first Cement, to be cemented, and it gives a very fine Gold: Some use among this and other Cements, Antimony and Sal Gemmae, this is left to every one's freedom: but Reason tells us, That if one cement the Gold right, as it may be, with 2, 3 or 4 of those Ingredients, and, that it is not needful to take above 7 or 8 of them, for, I have found it so: But, if you will do something more for the Graduation sake, it may be done, for it is certain, That every Gold which is very clean and high, brings his right Gold-Graduation and fine natural right Gold-colour with itself, but one may give the Gold (besides this) a high colour, that it may excel with this colour all other high Golds. But in my Judgement, the same looks not so lovely, as a Gold which hath with itself a high fine Colour. CHAP. XLIV. More Instructions for Cementing. Section▪ 1 WHEN the Gold is cemented, and almost clean then some do use this Method, The Composition. they put the same Cemented Gold into an other Cement made of four parts of the Powder of Tile, one part of Sal Armoniac, one part of Sal Gemmae, and one of Salt, all small ground together, and the Gold moistened in Urine, and put it into a Cement Test (lited as above) and clarified 12 hours: until the Gold becomes very clean: But why they use Sal Armoniac among it (which useth to touch the Gold) I cannot tell: therefore know, That it will not do it raw, especially when 'tis mingled with the watery Salt, (as here) but it purifieth rather that no other Metal (which is made loose of the other Cement, and yet partly doth hang on it, and in it) may remain. Section. 2 Then some when they have much to cement, and yet are not willing to beat the Gold thin, they put it in a ▪ Another way. Crucible, and grain it in a water, and when it falleth thin and hollow, (as is mentioned in the silver work) they mingle such Grains with the cement Powder, and cover it also with it, that the graind Gold be not seen, and set it in, as they have done with the Cement before, and when it hath stood its hours, they make the Grain clean from the cement Powder by washing it with warm water, and set it in again, with the fresh cement-Powder. But because the Grains cannot fall all alike thin in casting, but some are thicker than others, which the cement cannot quite bite through, like the thin Grains, and then they grain it (when it hath been twice thus in the Cement) once more, than it will come among the other again, and the cement will work the better, and purify the Gold. Section▪ 3 This manner of cementing is best upon the light brickle To cement the brickle Gold. Gold, which suffers not itself to be beaten. And though the Gold must be graind once or twice (yet 'tis better, first to make the Gold deft with much pains) and then to beat it thin: Therefore when the brickle grains are set in, once, four or six times, and hath stood in the cement, and is become clean, and of an high content, to thy desire, then is it deft enough: For all Brittleness and uncleanness of Tin or Brass the cement draws out of the Gold; And the Copper and Brass is much sooner and better drawn out of the Gold, through the cement than the silver. In this cement the Gold suffers a great damage, for the silvers will still contain the Gold which is melted out of the cements. Section. 4 Another manner. One might also cast the clear or light Gold in thin leaf's (like as is usual in the coin-works in casting of small Money) and then to lay the cast Ingots in the cement in pieces, which when they are cemented twice, and so become more deft, than one may beat them a little thinner, and cement them, and follow them with beating and cementing till the Gold becomes very deft, and so you may beat it thin, and then it will become high enough in the Content. By this way the Gold may be better holden together, and the Graind may be brought out of the Cement; and will not go into the Gold, nor will any Gold come into the Cement. When the Gold is thus made pure by the Cement and brought upon the Content, as one would have it, then make it clean from the Cement (as above) and do a Crucible over with Borax, put the Gold in it, and let it flow, force it off from the Bellows or in a wind-Oven, until it appear very bright, and holdeth the blow, so is it deft, then lay a paper anointed with Wax or Tallow upon it, and while it yet burneth, cast it in an Ingot▪ which is done over with Wax, and is warm, then quench the Gold in Urine, so you will have fine Gold and deft Gold. You may also be instructed, if you have quite done cementing, and hast much of the used Cements in which To bring the Cement to profit▪ is the Silver, and Addition which hath been in Gold, then melt the same Cement with other sweep which is not Goldish through a melt Oven, and bring it to profit, so that the Silver which the Cement hath sucked in out of the Gold may be made again to profit, for the Cement takes no Gold to it. Section. 6 But, as for the Cement of which the Philosophers and Alchemists do write, by which one may change Copper Philosophic Cements. into Silver, and Silver into Gold, those I leave to their worth, for such belong not to these Cements. For ☜ in my Books I write nothing else, but what is natural and approved, upon which one may trust, and not labour upon a vain hope. CHAP. XLV. How to graduate Gold. Section. 1 The first way. GRADUATING Gold (that is to give the Gold a higher Colour above its fine natural Colour, to become more red, its right high Gold colour) is to be done thus: take good Rhenish Gold, add to it as much fine Copper, cast it together, beat it thin, and cement it off again that it may have its first Goldweight, then set to the Gold, and so much pure Copper again, and cast it together, beat it thin again and cement it the second time, and so do until the Colour pleaseth thee: By this Process, some think the Gold may come to such an high Colour, that it will exceed the Copper in colour, if it were thus cast 30 times with the Copper, and cemented off again, only that one must use the Cement (written hereafter) which is much better than a common Cement: namely, Take the Powder of Tile which is well dried in the Sun, and common Section. 2 A very good Cement. Salt once dissolved through the Filtre, purified and once glowed, make out of every one, a part of small powder searsed through a hair fieve, and then put in Roman Vitriol, first rubified, as followeth: Take good red Vinegar distilled through an Alimbeck, and in this dissolve the Vitriol, and purify it through a Filtre, fair and clear, and let it evaporate upon warm Ashes till you find it fair, then put it in a new Pot, set it betwixt Coals, and stir it about with a little wooden stick, till it becomes blood Red, let it be cool, and grind it small, and then 'tis rubified: also take Verdigrise, and dissolve it in distilled Vinegar, and distil it by Filtration, and let it evaporate, and glow it, as you have done with the Vitriol: Take also so much Shall Armoniac, dissolved in red Vinegar: and of these now mentioned powders, take of one so much as of the other, mingle them well, and sprinkle them with the Vinegar wherein the Sal Armoniac was dissolved, so is the Cement prepared. Section. 3 Some do write, That one may mingle the Gold with the Copper, alike in weight, and then to cast it through Another Sort. Antimony, and then blow it off and purify it, and again with the Copper, and so mingle and cast it through so often till the Gold receives thy desired high Colour: I believe also, That if one can have good Antimony, that it will give the Gold an higher Colour. Section. 4 But the common Graduations may be done thus, That one may make a Powder of two parts Copper, and one part of Sulphur; Calcine them together till no blue flame goes off them, so you have a Graduation Powder, grind it: and when this Powder is used, the Gold will be of a little lighter Content. Section. 5 How the Gold smiths may Gild. Of such high Graduated Gold, and how to be used, many of the Philosophers do write, but 'tis nothing to this, for in my Judgement, when 'tis indifferently brought high, it may be most convenient for the Goldsmiths to use for guilding, that they may reach the further with it, because of the Colour, yet it is free to every one to make Experience of it. CHAP. XLVI. How to make brickle Gold, deft. Section. 1 THIS Labour hath formerly been esteemed a singular Art of the Coin-workers and Goldsmiths and other Gold-workers, and indeed it is a fine and useful Art, not to every one known, and is necessary to be know to all Goldsmiths: For there are several ways to make the Gold deft, only one is more easy and better than the other. And I will here show some ways, which partly I have tried myself, and out of which every one, according to his occasion may take Instruction, to use that which will be most convenient for him. Section. 2 Hungarish Crowns or Rhenish Gold. When you have the brickle Gold (it may be Hungurian Crowns or Rhenish Gold) and wouldst make it deft, then do it thus: First, Cast the brickle Gold into an Ingot, then put it in a Crucible in a coined Oven or before the Bellows, and give it a strong fire, and observe when the Gold sweateth, and will soon flow: Then cast good purified Salt petre upon it, so the Gold will Salt Petre. burn, because of the Salt petre, and quickly flow, and as soon as it flows, than the Salt petre will quite cover the Gold, than you must not drive it hard, so as you may not see the Gold under the Salt Petre, but pour it out under it, into an Ingot, luted with Wax, so is it Deft; Calx viva. some use among the Salt Petre, Calx Viva, it doth the same, and the Gold becometh deft. But if it should be neglected, that the Gold in the settling in, might flow in the Crucible, before the Salt Petre were cast upon it, then pour it out again into an Ingot, and put it in again, for else it will not be smooth and deft although you do cast much Salt Petre upon it; but if the Gold (as in the Rhenish Gold sometimes happeneth) were not too brittle, that it at once doth not become very deft, then put it in the second time, and it will become deft, although there may be Brass in it. Section. 6 You may know also, That when the Gold shall be driven too hard with the Salt Petre, and that it appeareth and may be seen under the Salt Petre, than it is not deft, for the brittleness driveth itself again out of the Salt Petre into the Gold, therefore 'tis to be observed, That the Salt Petre be cast upon it in the right time, and also the Gold cast out again, in the right time, and so you will have deft Gold▪ CHAP. XLVII. Another way to make Gold, Deft. Section. 1 By a flat Test. CONCERNING the good Gold, or of Hungarish Content, if the same be brickle, then take a flat Test, made for it on purpose, that the Gold may have room upon it, Lute it over with pure Littarge, and set the Gold upon it (yet you must not set in it, at once, above two Mark) and set the Test with the Gold before the Bellows, and drive it; But if it will not endure the blowing, then add a little Ball of good clean Lead, and drive it again, until it will endure the Bellows and become deft, then put it in a Crucible, and cast it into an Ingot, and quench it in Urine, and so the Gold will be deft, one may also cause the Gold to flow with fresh coals, upon a flat Test, and then drive it, and this also doth well. Section. 2 To bring the Gold clean out of the Crucible. But if you will cast such Gold (if it be good or light) out of the Crucible on a Plate, then take a Paper, and dawb it over with Wax and Venetian Soap, cast a little piece upon it, and while it yet burns, lift the Crucible off, and cast the Gold out under the flames, and so it will remain warm and have no scum, and cast itself clean, that nothing may remain hanging on the Crucible. Section. 3 When the Gold is brickle by an evil Vapour. If a good or Hungarian Gold becomes brickle, because of an unclean Fire or bad smoke, than it may also be made deft, upon a flat Test, with the Bellows, or one may, when 'tis cast into an Ingot, lay in one of the before written Cement Powders, an hour or two, and so it will become deft. Or melt it with good Venetian Borax, and drive it before the Bellows, till it endureth the blowing, or in defect of all these Ingredients, if a Gold be only brickle by an evil smoke, then make it deft with Venetian Soap, and let the Venetian Soap burn upon the Test, than there will remain a grey Powder, which you may use instead of the Borax, and so the Gold may be cast clean. Section. 4 Some also cast upon the Brickle Gold in the Fluss, Mercurium Sublimatum. Mercurium Sublimatum, and blow the Gold with it, and it will be deft (which is a good way) others on the contrary use yellow Sulphur, but the Gold must be cast out soon after it, or take Antimony, and cause it to flow in a Crucible, and when it is flowing, than they cast as much Section. 5 Sulphur, Antimony, Glass. Sulphur and Argol in it, and let it stand so long in the fire, till it becomes a Glass, and with this Glass the brittle Gold is to be driven deft. Section. 6 Some of the Goldsmiths use a Powder, made of Brass calcined and Verdigrease, but it should not be so, for both these species are Metallish and go in the Gold, by which it becomes higher or meaner. Section. 1 CHAP. XLVIII. How to make Gold Deft upon the Copel. WHEN you have good Gold, set it with Lead upon a Copel, and let it be very hot that it may stand pure and clean upon the Copel, but before it hardens upon it, put it with the Tongues gently on the Copel, that the Gold may simper and quiver; do this till it becomes hard and standeth still, then 'tis deft, but if it harden upon the Copel, before it be moved, then 'tis not deft, but all such Gold receives a pale colour of the Lead. Section. 2 And although many other Ingredients do make the Gold Deft, which are often used of many, yet I will not set them down (for brevity sake) but leave it to every one's freedom, to follow mine or their own Instructions, only I desire they would diligently observe my meaning, not only in this, but in all my Books, and not neglect Section. 3 Alterations the Work itself, than I hope they will find it right, as they desire, and the Work will judge itself. For such a thing cannot well be so pictured on paper, as thereby to judge and comprehend all out of the writing, but by reading Instruction comes, and by Practice the Experience. CHAP. XLIX. How to cast Gold through Antimony. Section. 1 Through fine Gold. IT is an old Invention to cast Gold through Antimony, so that the Gold by it may be made very clean and fine, and therefore, they have supposed, this to be the only means, and none else besides, by which such may be done. Now this is true (when the Antimony is good) that the Gold may be brought out very high, and almost fine out of the same, so that it will become the finest Gold that is, and no Cement can be made like it. But because Antimony is not all alike good, but some much better than the other, therefore the Gold becomes some finer than the other: so it is not well to trust to this, that the Gold should always come out sure and very clean. And although the casting through Antimony be used sometimes upon many Marks of Gold, yet 'tis not taught so, that all such with it may be brought out very fine, and upon the highest Content, but it may satisfy, if it be brought in the quantity, upon the Content of good Ducats, for by the higher driving, the Antimony comes into the Gold, and without a singular Care in purifying of it, it goeth much more off, than by Cementing; therefore the best casting through is upon a little Gold (to bring such almost very fine and to the highest) which is done thus, If the content of the Gold be of 16, 17, 18 or 20 Carats, and you would make it very pure and fine, then take one part of the Gold (if it be of a pretty rich Content) and two parts of good clean Antimony (because the clean Gold is sooner to be cast through) put it together in a a Crucible, blow it, let it flow, and when well flown together, then pour it into a warm Cup, made of Iron or Brass, and greased with Tallow or Wax, let the Antimony and the Gold be cool in it, than you must turn the Cup, and dash it upon a stone, whereby the Antimony may go together with the Regulus (which hath settled below and looks of a grey- yellow colour) and be easily beaten out.) But that you may bring the Gold upon the highest Content, cast such Regulus once or twice more with fresh Antimony, and at all times into the Cup, after set the Regulus upon a flat Test in the fire, blow to it, and it will melt quickly, but blow with the Bellows very gently, so that it may just blow upon the Gold in the Test, and do this until the Antimony be evaporated, again very clean from the Gold, and that the Gold do endure the blowing well, and becomes deft, then let it be cool, and quench it in Urine, cast it then to thy pleasure, so you have very fine and high Gold, which is judged fine Gold. Section. 2 To cast through poor Gold. But if the Gold be poor upon the Content, or very light, then take more of the Antimony, and add to a Mark of Antimony 4 Loathes of Sulphur, and cast the Gold through with it, as hath been said, and put in the Regulus with fresh Antimony, the second and third time without the Sulphur: Lastly, drive it upon the Test, that the Gold may become very clean: you may also take to such casting through, upon every Mark of Gold, 4 Loathes of Copper or scales of Copper, so it will receive a fine colour from it, but when you take Copper to it then take the more Antimony that it may consume it and the Addition. Section. 3 Another upon light Gold. Some use to the casting of light Gold, which containeth of it, from 12 to 18 carats, a singular Powder of one part Sulphur the other Antimony, and one part of prepared Caput Mort. and take to it of Mark Gold, 12 Loathes: let it flow well together, then cast it into the Cup, and beat the Regulus from the slacks, and cast it with half so much Antimony again twice or thrice, then drive it upon a Test, so you have good high Gold. Now, how the Cup, Ingot and other Instruments to the casting through are to be form, the following Sculpture will show. Sculpture XXVIII. Deciphered. 1. The Form of the Common Cup, cast in Brass. 2. A Cup made of Smith's work. 3. A Crucible for the Work. 4. A flat Test for it. 5. The Ingot. 6. The Plates. 7. Of Antimony with a Gold Regulus. 8. Of Antimony when the Gold Regulus is beaten from it. Section 7 To lay t●● Gold whic● is cast through the Cement. When the Gold which is come out of the casting through, is blown clean, yet it may retain a smack of the Antimony: to prevent this: Beat the Gold very thin, lay it in a particular Cement made on purpose, as is mentioned in the Description of the Cements: Let it stand some hours in it, so it will extract such also, and becomes clean. CHAP. L. How the Blick or light Gold, containing much Silver, is to be separated. THE Silvery rich Gold, especially that which comes of from melting, of which a Mark contains from 9, to above 12 Carats off fine Gold, this is to be separated thus: Grain it in a boiling Water (as above is said of the fine, thin and even Silver) then prove it, so as it hath a like Content, then take the Grained and moisten it with water, and take to every Mark (of the abovementioned Powders) 12 loathes, of good yellow Sulphur, and mingle it with them, and put it in to a glazed Pot, luted with a cover, and make a fire round about it, till the Powder on the grained be well flown; let it cool, then beat the Pot in pieces, then take and put the grained into a Crucible, set it in a Wind-Oven, let it flow very well, and cast upon it a little ground Sandover, mingled with grained Lead, let it stand a little longer, then pour it into a warm luted Iron Morter, and if much of it settleth to a Regulus on the bottom, and the Silver becomes a scorias, then beat it off from the Gold Regulus, which will be yellow and grey, but because the Silver of the first Fluss, will not all come into the scorias, therefore grain the Gold once more, and prepare it with the Powder, and let it flow, and pour it again into the Mortar; Lastly, take the Gold, and cast it through only with the Antimony, blow that which is cast through upon a Test, and cast it clean, so you will have good and Deft Gold; This casting through, is a way if one have need of the Gold in haste, else there are other and better ways, namely, when the Gold is cast once or twice with Sulphur, that it may be driven deft, and then cast into an Ingot, then beaten thin and cemented, whereby not so much will go off from the Gold, but it requires greater time. Section. 2 To cast the used Antimony. The used Antimony, through which you have cast at last the Gold, retain singly, and put it again in a Crucible, and let it flow well, and add to it filled Iron, so much, that the stirring-hook with which you stir it about, may no more be touched, so the Antimony, eats itself Section. 3 T●e Iron 〈…〉 s the virtue of the Antimony. weak on the Iron, (which it doth easily touch) and doth let the Silver and Gold fall, as much as it hath with it, then pour it into a Mortar, and according to the quantity, the Regulus will settle itself on the bottom, this retain singly or apart. Section. 4 To beat down (through casting) the Scorias. The scorias which is come from the first casting (as above is mentioned) put likewise into a Crucible, and beat down the Silver in it with grained Lead and filled Iron, as long until the scorias, with the Iron Hook (that stir▪ r it about) toucheth no more, by this time, almost all the Silver will fall down, and of this Silver, retain also a part. The remaining scorias with the Antimony, which is left out of the Silver and Gold, (as now signified) being precipitated; take them together and put the Lead upon a Flat Test, or in an unglazed Clay Dish, set two of them within one another, and when it is entered, then let it go off upon a Test (as is usual) and observe when the entered Lead begins to drive upon the Test and goes clean, then put the Silver Regulus (which is fallen out of the scorias) upon a Test, that it also may go off clean, and then this Silver Proof upon Gold, will show how rich it is in Gold; also prove the Regulus, which is fallen out of the Antimony upon Gold. If now the same Regulus, (which before by itself is to be burnt upon a Test) be not very rich in Gold, than put it also among the Silver, and separate it apart in Aqua fort. and you will hardly find a nearer way to make such Gold clean: and although this Instruction looketh as if there were an Ambiguous way, yet it is not; but when one is in work, than it goeth soon to an end; for the Gold, thus with the Sulphur and Antimony prepared, floweth easily, and thereby many castings may be done in a day, or in half a day▪ yet every one may require a consideration, how the best is to be done. CHAP. LI. How to separate the used Antimony▪ Section. 1 To Refine Antimony. IN regard that the burnt Antimony keepeth back somewhat of Gold, yet there remains Gold and Silver in it, now to bring this clean out of it (which is called to refine the Antimony) do it thus: Put the used Antimony together, in a Crucible, and if it be a pound, then add 4 Loathes of filled Iron, 1 Loath of Copper, 4 Loathes of Lead, and 4 Loathes of Littarge to it, let it flow well together, then cast it into a Cup, or let it cool in the Crucible, than set the Antimony again in the Crucible, and beat it down with a little grained Lead and Littarge, and cast upon it Section. 2 To precipitate it. melted Salt; let it stand well in the Glass, and cast it into the Cup, then drive off the Regulus which cometh out of it, upon a Test, than you will receive the Gold and Silver, as much as the Antimony had retained; this you may cast once more through with fresh Antimony, and so the Gold will come out, yet the Antimony will retain still some of the Gold, (which comes in the Silver, made out of the Antimony) and this is to be separated in the Aqua fort. and if it be too rich in Gold, then must be added to it, fine Silver, that the Water may touch it. Section. 3 But some do use the parting of the Antimony thus, they take a part of Antimony and one part of Vitriol, one part of grained Lead, one part of Salt Petre, three quarters of filled Iron, and a little Copper, and this they put into a Test, and let it evaporate, so there will remain among them another mixed matter, to this they add (according to the quantity of the Antimony) more fresh Lead, and boil it clean up, then drive the Lead off upon the Test, and so will it find in itself the Silver and Gold, which the Antimony hath had by itself. Section. 4 Rich Antimony. When the Antimony is very Rich in Gold and Silver, then may it be made pure, as followeth (and it is the best cleansing, only that it taketh much labour and somewhat longer time) Take the Antimony, put it upon a Test, let it flow well, and add to it filled Iron, and stir it about always with an Iron, and cast as much of the filled Iron into it, until the Iron, with which you stir it, touch no more the Antimony (as before mentioned) which is then very easy to be seen; then add to the same Antimony, Led, and boil it clean up, by this addition of the Iron, the wildness is taken away from the Antimony, so that then (which is very easily boiled up) it will go clean off upon the Test, and will not work upon the Test, which is a good way. CHAP. LII. How Gold may be made fine and clean through Aqua Regis. BECAUSE the Aqua Regis toucheth only the Gold and not the Silver, therefore I judge the Gold may be made purest and finest by this way. Take good high Gold, set it upon a good Test, made on purpose for it) let it go off upon it, with clean Lead, that you may be sure no Copper remains in it, then blow the Gold upon the Test, unless it become deft, then beat it thin, glow it, and then put it in a good and well luted Glass Bottle, pour upon it Aqua Regis, and dissolve all the Gold, and what will not dissolve but remain in the bottom of the Glass, that is no Gold; then pour the Aqua Regis (in which the dissolved Gold is,) clean off, and put it in another glass Bottle, and draw the water from it, than the Gold will remain in the glass Bottle; cast it together and blow it clean, and this Gold thus prepared may be judged, as fine Gold, because the Aqua Regis toucheth nothing ☜ but Gold and Copper, and if the Gold be first made clean from the Copper, upon the Test, then can nothing else but pure Gold come out of the Aqua Regis, but how much good Aqua Regis (as I have said) is to be made, of this, you have been sufficiently instructed before. Thus much Courteous READER, I was willing to describe of the Gold Oars and their Labour, as a furtherance to Experience, and for the use of common Mine-Workers, and young Assayers, and so leave it to further Consideration. The END of the second Book. OF Copper OARS. BOOK III. CHAP. I. How to know Copper Oars. Section. 1 THIS Third Book describeth Copper Oars, and how they are to be known, The Purpose of this Book. and then how to assay them, as also of the Black Copper; and lastly, how the pure Copper is to be tried, and also how after the High Dutch and Hungaan manner the Silver is to be refined out of Copper, with Instructions annexed of a singular new way to refine Copper, and how Brass is to be made out of Copper, and how white Iron may be made Copper. Section. 2 Now, Copper Oars are more easily to be known than Coper Oars yield fine Colours. any other metallic Oars, as having in them varieties of Colours, so that many more delicate colours come out of them then from any other metallic Oars. And of these there are three sorts. Section. 3 Copper Glass. First, Copper Glass, and this is to be numbered among the deft, and smooth flowery Copper Oars, for the Copper-Glass Oars which are bluish, (and yet their colour come near to Grey) are the richest Copper Oars, and contain the most Copper and Silver, and yield deft and good Copper. Section. 4 Secondly, the green Coppers which are rich in Copper but poor in Silver, also the fair lazure coloured Copper or blue and Green-mixt-copper-Oars contain likewise much Green and lazure Colours. and good Copper, but generally very little Silver. Section. 5 Thirdly, the brown copper Oars (like an iron Vein) Brown Copper. if they be either harsh or mild, yet they are found rich in Copper but poor in Silver: likewise also the copper shiffers (in which there are Characters or Figures of Fishes, called Gamahes. Snails, and other Resemblances and representations of corporeal Creatures) and also rich in copper, and commonly do contain Silver. Section. 6 In brief, all copper Oars and shiffers that have no flinty, speizy or other harsh matter within them, are to be reckoned among the soft flowing Oars. Section. 7 Copper flint. But there appertains to the harsh flowing copper Oars, the harsh copper Flint, and what is splendy, mispickly, glimery or spady, as also all flint Oars by themselves without any other Oars mingled with them, or shiffers in which the copper flint doth stand streamingly intermixed. Section. 8 Copper stone. Also the raw slack stone, copper-stone (Oven-breachers occasioned from melting such raw Oars.) Now, as the silver Oars are known before the proving and melting, (as to their natures) and how they may do in the fire, so it must be known likewise with the copper Oars, that one may help them in proving and melting: And because they differ, therefore the raw, unflowing copper oars do not prove like the weal flowing and mild, as will follow in my Instructions, but it must first be shown how the Assay Crucibles also the little Ovens for proving copper Oars are to be made, (and in case of necessity) that an Assayer himself may prepare his stuff and Instruments. CHAP. II. How to make Crucibles and Ovens to prove Copper. Section. 1 TO the copper Oars which are to be proved for Copper, one must have little and good Crucibles for them, which the Goldsmiths do use: But, because they are not to be had in every place good, and in a fit Mould, therefore I Judge it convenient, That every Assayer do make such himself. Section. 2 Crucible form. To the making such Crucibles, Frames or Moulds of Brass are necessary (or of Pear-tree wood, so that one may put on it an Iron ring, that the Mould may not be so apt so break.) Section. 3 The Clay. The stuff or clay out of which you intent to make such Crucibles, prepare them of Potter's Clay, like the Tests for making Proofs of Silver Oars (as is before signified) then take a Ball of such Clay (as much as you think fit) and press it into the frame or mould, so that the Clay on the sides may well go up and in the middle remain a pretty deep hole: after the manner that the Crucible is to be: then anoint the upper part over with Bacon, or Oil; and put it into the Frame, in which the Clay is to be pressed until it toucheth the top of the Frame, then turn the upper part of the Frame downwards, and that which is put in will easily be drawn out again; and thus the Crucible is form in the frame, as it ought to be, set also the frame (while the Crucible stands yet in it) a little while before the Sun to be warmed, than the Crucible will go out very well and sound, and, although it might be pressed out otherwise, yet it cannot be done so conveniently as when it hath stood a little near the warmth, because thereby the Clay doth shrink, so that the Crucible by that heat may well fall out of itself. But why the lower part of the Frame must not be fastened, the reason is, that the Crucible may be lifted out of the upper part of the frame, and it could not be brought off again without spoil, therefore it is better the lower part remain ungreased, that the Crucible may be brought out whole. But when the stuff is made very brittle, and the clay not fast, then anoint the lower part with fat, and the Crucible will easily be brought out with your fingers, and so remain whole. Thus they make Assay- Crucibles, and when they are well dried, let them burn in a Potters-Oven, or a Tile-Oven, yet let them not be set in too strong a heat (lest they melt) and they must be taken out in time. Section. 4 But what concern the little Ovens, (wherein they use Little Ovens for Copper. Proof. to take the Copper proofs) the best are prepared of Potter's stuff or Clay, to be set and used at pleasure: and make them thus, Take the prepared Potter-stuff, and form of it a little round- Oven, the diameter nine inches wide, with which the Proof-Oven useth to be divided, (of which Instruction is given in the first Book) and 12 inches high, and in the midst a Belly of 11 Inches, and no bottom below, yet it must be an Inch and half thick, and as much as the clay shrinketh, so much must be added again, and whilst 'tis yet soft, it must be cut in the edges, that one may put Iron-hoops about it, and with Cross- Bars join the upper and lower Hoops, or else it will very easily fall asunder: Now, when this Oven is very well dried in the Sun (or warm place) then let it be burnt hard in a Potters or Tile-Oven, and lute it well about with the Iron-hoops and bonds (as has been already taught) After this make a foot with a bottom, to this Oven of Potter's stuff, being three square fingers deep within, and just so broad as the little Oven below, having a hole in the side, as wide as the breadth of a large Finger, through which the Bellows is to blow (as you will hear hereafter) and there may be an edge within the top upon which you may lay a little Iron-Grate, as in the Sculpture: this foot must also be burnt in a Potter's- Oven, and bound about with iron-hoops and bonds, as the Oven: then lay the Iron-Grate in it, and set the Oven upon it, then 'tis prepared as it ought to be. Now, when you will prove in it, set it upon the Grate, in the little Oven, on a little foot made of Poters' Clay, which must be three square fingers high, but not full three fingers broad above, upon which the Crucible is to stand with the Proof. Also there must be little Covers to the Copper-Proofs, which must be put to, or luted upon the Assay Crucibles: and they must also be made of Potters-stuff, and burnt as the other, but not by a sudden heat lest they crack: and be careful to cover the Crucibles, that no Coals or uncleanness fall therein, whereby the proof may become false. Section. 5 There may also a little Oven be made, just in the form and wideness as before, only that it have a Bottom and Another Form of a little Oven. be 14 Inches high from the bottom, and that two inches from the bottom there be two holes quite through it, in which you must fix two Iron Bars a finger thick, and lay upon it a little iron Grate (like that before) and under the Grate let there be made a hole of a finger wide for the Bellows, This little Oven which also must be Hooped about with Iron, and is in all things like the other only this is whole, but the other may be taken asunder in two pieces. Section. 6 A little Oven of Tiles. In case you want Bellows to such Ovens, there is another Oven to be made, in which the proofs may be proved: thus, Take burnt Tiles, join them together in a square, about a span wide, with good Clay, and lute the joinings with it, and leave a Wind-hole before, as wide as the Oven is, a Tile and half high, and over the Wind-hole in the Oven, lay a little Grate of Iron, and four square Bars, a finger thick, and a span high from the Grate, so is your little Oven prepared, but before you prove in it, you must glow it with fire; that it vapour not in proving, then set upon the little Grate a little foot, for the Crucible to stand on, and when the Crucible with the proof is set in, and coals and fire put upon it, and that it grows warm, then fan in some air with a wing, by the Wind-hole in the little Oven, so the wind will ascend through the Grate into the fire strongly, and the Copper-Proof will boil itself up in the Crucible: This is an easy way for preparing this little oven, but you must observe to do things exactly, that the Proof may be complete in the fire. Section. 7 There are also used to the Copper Proving Furnaces (such as Goldsmiths have) to boil up the Proofs before Proof of Furnaces. the Bellows: but I judge because the blowing in the Furnace goes but on one side of the Crucible, therefore the Proofs cannot be so well boiled up on all sides, as with Bellows which go from below upwards. Also when the Bellows blow but on one side, the Crucible is apt to break, especially when 'tis not good: therefore how the abovementioned Ovens are to be form within and without, is showed in the Sculpture following. Sculpture XXIX. Deciphered. 1. The inside of the little Oven made of Tiles. 2. The same, when it's closed. 3. The foot of the Crucible upon the Grate. 4. The little Oven of Potters-Clay, bound with Hoops. 5. The foot of it. 6. The iron Grate in it. 7. The Crucible upon the Grate with the proof in it. 8. The Wind-hole through which the Bellows are put. 9 The Whole little Oven open with the Bottom. 10. The Iron-hoops which go about it. 11 12 13 The Bellows, Brush and Instruments. CHAP. III. How to make a Fluss to prove Copper Oars. TAKE two parts of Argol, and one part of Sulphur, grind them small and mingle them, put it in an unglazed Pot, than put live Coals in it, when it begins to burn in the Pot, let it burn till it gives over of itself, let the Pot be cool, so the Fluss is prepared; then take it out of the Pot, put the Coals away, and keep the Fluss small ground in a ☞ warm place, so it will remain good; for, if it be set in a cool and moist place, it will turn to oil: or, take the pot, let it be warm, pour the Fluss into it, and cover it; thus the Fluss will kindle itself in the pot, and burn out: this Fluss is to be used to good and deft Copper Oars: But what be flinty, and other Oars which are hard to separate, to such this Fluss is too weak, and there must be something added to it, as you will hear in the sequel. CHAP. IU. How soft flowing Copper Oars are to be proved. RICH smooth-flowing and good copper Oars (which are not flinty and speizey) prove them thus, Grind the Oar small, and weigh of it with thy proof-weights two Centners, and put them in a Crucible, and three times so much of the before mentioned Fluss, both well mingled, and cover the Crucible above the Oar and Fluss with common Salt a full finger thick, press it down and cover the Crucible luted with Clay, that it go not off, nor Coals fall therein, and make a fire in one of the said little Ovens, set the Crucible upon the little foot, cover it with Coals higher than a hand breadth, let it be warm, and blow through the hole under the Grate, that the wind may go alike round about the Crucible, and let it stand a while in the fusion, so the proof will boil clean up, and if the Crucible doth not break, then take the upper fire off and lift the Crucible hot, out of the Oven: set it upon a plain Tile, that if the Grains of Copper be not run altogether, it may be helped: Then let the Crucible cool, open it, and in the bottom you will find a grain of Copper which is fine. For these good smooth Oars will yield fine Copper: Then draw it up with thy proof-weights, and try how many pounds of Copper a Centner of Oars doth yield. But you must observe in the proving, that you drive not the proof too hard in the Crucible, for the Copper will burn, and drive itself very easy in the slacks, as one may see in the slacks; (which will soon receive the colour of the Copper Oars) for when they are very red in the Crucible: then the Copper-Proof is driven too hard, and the Content is lighter, but if the slacks are brown, than the Proof is made. CHAP. V. How hard flowing Copper Oars are to be proved. Section. 1 HARD flowing Oars are not to be proved The manner of it. as the smooth, but in another manner: thus, Take the Copper Oars, beat them as small as the Seeds of Hemp, and and mingle them together: weigh two Centners of it in the proof-weight, put it in a proof-Test, set it in a proof- Oven, give it a very gentle fire, that it may begin to roast itself, then stir it with an iron about the Test, else the Oar will turn to Ashes together in the Test, and will not roast: and when 'tis stirred the first time, then give it a little stronger fire, that it may glow well, lift it out of the Oven, and let it cool, than put it in the Oven again, and let it roast again until it hath done smoking (and smells not of Sulphur) then grind it a little smaller, yet not so small as Mill-dust, and roast it again till it stinks no more Sulphurish, then stir▪ it once or twice with the little hook, that it may not be ashes again. Section. 2 When 'tis thus ground anew, and washed the second The Oar burned quite dead. time, let it cool, and set it the third time in the Assay- Oven, then roast it, and grind it very small, then wash it once more that it may be burnt quite dead, then grind it again very small, so is it prepared for the Proof. Then divide the Oar upon a Balance in two equal parts, and put one part in an Assay-Crucible with 3 times so much of the foresaid Fluss, and with a fixed part of flowing Glassgall, mingle them well in the Crucible, and cover it with common or flowing Salt (as in the proof before) and lute it over on the top with Clay, that the Cover be fast, so that no Coals may fall in, than set it in a little Oven, blow the Bellows, give the proof a strong sudden fire (a little stronger than the former proof) and when the proof hath stood in a pretty good Fluss, then lift the Crucible out of the fire, and let it cool, and break it, and so you may find in the bottom a Grain of black Copper, of such Goodness as the Oar and Flint is in the melting, and may thereby get Copper, which is the right proof of it. Section. 3 Yet there is of one sort of flinty Oar, fairer Copper than of another, and commonly all flints which are of an Some Copper not fit for Brass. iron Nature) yields iron streamy Copper, therefore they are not to be used for making of Brass. Of this graind Copper (as it comes out of the Proof) weigh it with a Centner weight, than you may see how many pound of black Copper, a Centner of flint or raw Coper Oar do yield, so you may easily reckon how many such Centners, do afford one Centner of Copper: and know therefore, that if you do weigh two Centners of flinty Oars to the proof, if the proof should be amiss, than you have a Centner more of the roasted Oar or flint, to make another proof, otherwise it will be a great hindrance to roast but one Centner to the Proof. But on the contrary, the old Assayers have used this Method, and proved every Copper Oar or flint upon pure Copper, and thereby know how many Centners of it, will yield one Centner of pure Copper: this I believe to be a just proof for them, who have roasted and purified the Copper themselves. But those who work the Silver in it, and sell it with the Silver, it is better for them to know how many Centners of black Copper they may have in a roast, so they may know how many Loathes of Silver, a Centner of black Copper contains. And among all melt, the Operation of Copper (upon which is to be made a proper Account) is the most pleasant and fairest Experiment; for if the Proof be ☞ right, than what is produced will be so too. Section. 4 To boil Oars for Copper. Therefore, if you will (with the old Assayers) prove the Copper-Oars upon boiled Copper, do it thus, Grind the Oars small, weigh of it two Centners: if they be unflowing or flinty then roast them (as above) in an Assay- Crucible, and weigh to it four Centner of Fluss or Lead-glass, made of Littarge and Flint-stones (as in the first Book of Silver Oars) and mingle them well, and cover it with Salt, and also cover the Crucible, and set it in a little Oven before the Bellows: and let it flow like another Copper- Proof, and when 'tis cool open the crucible, and in the Bottom is the Regulus, among which is copper, and lead together, put it upon a flat Test luted with Littarge, drive it till the copper appears to be of a clear Green, then lift the Graind-copper from the Test, and quench it in Water, and weigh it with thy Proof Weight, so you may find how many pound of boiled copper you have from two centners of flinty-copper Oar in the Proof: one may also very easily burn the copper, especially if the Oar be poor in copper (as you may find by the Operation). Therefore I conceive it better, to prove the copper Oars first upon black copper, and then upon boiled copper: and this way, the Proof of the light contenty copper Oars cannot so easily be hurt. CHAP. VI How to prove light Coppers. Section. 1 POOR copper-Oars (especially the copper Flints and copper-Glass which are in the Mountains or in light shiffer Mines) they must be proved thus; Take a common Proof of the Oar, grind it well, and weigh with thy Proof weight twenty or more centners, and draw it in a Vessel, so that therewith the light clay may be separated from the pure slick and copper Oars; weigh the slick which comes from it, thus, and mark how many centners yields a pound, that you may know how many centners of raw Oar (from the Rock or vein in the Mine) do yield a clean centner. Weigh then two centners of such pure slick, and put them in an Assay-test, to be roasted in an Oven (as you have done with the copper Oars) but that the proof may not be false, (because the slick doth use to sparkle in the first setting of it into the great heat, especially if pebbles be among it,) therefore cover the Test wherein the weighed slick is, with another Test; let it remain thus covered till the slick glow well; then take off the upper Test, and roast the slick (as you are instructed before) and then grind it very small, and divide it into two equal parts, and mingle one of them with the Fluss (appertaining to the copper Oars) and put it into a crucible, covered with Salt, and do as you have done above with the harsh copper Oars, and you will find in the bottom of the crucible, a grain of copper: then weigh this with your Proof-weight, so you may know out of how many centners or quantities of such raw, rocky or wash-work you may make of a centner of black copper, which grained copper you may prove afterwards for Silver, and find the Content, and mayst order thy matters accordingly. Section. 3 This proof upon poor mixed copper-Oars, I have put here because experience manifesteth, That the Copper Oars do not break throughout clean upon the Veins, but have much flint and subtle copper-glass mingled with them, yet in the washing they do willingly separate from it, and bring it into such a compass that one may know that all the rest of the Oars from those Veins may be wrought to good profit, which could not be, if they should be melted raw. Section. 4 Concerning the poor Shiffer which contains very little Copper, they cannot well be brought into compass, for they rise for the most part in the Water, and are fugitives, although some do separate in the water, and afford a slick, and thus they may be brought into compass, and may be thus proved, and made to profit like the other Oars. Section. 5 Then the Copper-flint will stand apparently mixed and streamy, in some shiffers which are to be proved either raw or among others, or the shiffer apart whereby it may be found what copper the Shiffer doth yield, and the melting ordered accordingly. Section. 6 The other mixed copper-Oars (as Lasure Copper green, or brown rich copper-Oars) cannot be well separated in the water from their mixtures, for they are very light, and run not in weight, like the other flints, but go forth in the water, therefore such are first to be proved for Silver, if they have none (as commonly they are poor) then 'tis not much to try, but if they contain Silver, glow them hard, and suddenly quench them in cold water, than the insperged or mixed Copper Oars will run together in little Grains (as above is signified of the Gold Oars) then wash and grind them small, and draw it into a slick, and when it separates, than you may in the great Work according to the quantity of slicks regulate yourself. But how these copper Oars are to be dried in the little oven, you will be directed hereafter. CHAP. VII. How light Copper Oars which are mixed and insperged with flint, may be brought to profit. THE light flinty insperged copper Oars (by reason of their hardness and unflowingness) cannot well (in a great quantity) be melted throughly, or brought to profit (the flint being so hard, and before it becomes small enough in the Beating) it makes insperged oars, subtle, and rise in the water: therefore there can no surer or better Method be found for such Oars, than to roast them in an high roast Oven, made on purpose, (as before is often mentioned.) And when it burns to a great heat, pour water upon it, and let it cool suddenly, so the frighted Metal will run together in grains in the flints, which are heavy, and remain fast by setting them in the water, and then they may be washed and separated, and that which is not clean Copper will be a good and heavy Copper-stone, that so the flinty copper Oars (when they are roasted and are brittle) may very easily (in a great quantity) be bucked through, and the Metal which is gathered may be washed, or so much of it, as in one gathering can be melted throughly (like raw Oar) which is to be made into ten or more equal parts. And the roast Oven which is to be used to this Washing, may be form (as in the first and second Book of flinty Gold Oars) are more fully described. CHAP. VIII. How to prove Copper Oar from Copper-stone. IF one would try and prove Copper Oars especially the flinty (containing much or little Copper, called raw slackstones, or raw Copper-stones) you must doit thus; Grind the Copper oars or the flint small, weigh from it two Centners, put them thus, unroasted in an Assay-crucible, and weigh to it four Centners of the fluss made of Salt petre, and Argol (as before) with two centners of flowing Glass-galls, mingle all in the crucible and cover it (like a copper-Oar) with Salt, and set it in a little Oven, and boil it up also before the Bellows, and let it be cold, than you will find in the bottom of the crucible a copper-stone, then separate it from the slacks, and weigh it, so you may see how many centners of the flint yields a centner of copper-stone. But if the flint be very rich in copper-water, than there will be no stone with the fluss; therefore try the flint in another manner, viz. Weigh it raw, and put it in a crucible, mingle among it three times so much of clean good slacks (smooth ground) which yield no stone, nor contains any Silver, but come from poor Oar, cover it with Salt, and set it in, let it flow with strong blowing: than you will find as much as the flint hath in itself: But the flints that are rich in copper-water do yield a slackstone which is not good to be melted, for in the roasting, it will shrink too much and retain no Silver in itself, by which many times hurt is caused. CHAP. IX. How to prove Copper Oar another way. Section. 1 ALL Copper-Oars that are rich or poor in copper may be tried upon copper-stone, after this manner, Take a pound of the Oar or Flint small ground, and prepare a little Oven of Tiles square or round of a span wide, or let it be joined with Potters-clay, bind it about with iron-rings, and lay below in it, Powder of Coals and Clay, (as in the Melt-ovens) with a hole on the back of the Oven, through which the Bellows may go; then put in your fire and Coals, and blow them well, that it may glow, and set the raw Oar which is ground, in it; yet not at once, blow continually strong at it, that the oar may melt through the Coals down into the little Oven, and when it is enough, let it cool, and take it out of the Oven, and beat it, so you will see what it yields of copper or copper stone: if you find in the stones either copper or slacks like grains, beat them small, and draw it into slicks, then will the copper and stone separate from the slicks. Section. 2 Copper Shiffer. This is a fine Trial upon the copper shiffer and poor inspersed copper Oars, but when the Oar doth not yield stone or copper, you will see it in the slacks, when they are not coppery, but all is turned to slicks. Section. 3 When there will be no stone in the proof. Further, if you would have such through-proofs of copper, and the flint yield no stone, than first roast the flint quite dead, and melt it in the little Oven, and you will find a Regulus of black copper, or such as the flint or copper Oars do yield, which put together and weigh, and see what it hath yielded, so you may know how many Centners of flinty copper it yieldeth from a Centner of copper, for all roasted Oars work themselves fresh, and ☞ separate better than raw Oars. Section. 4 But if one will try more than one or two pound in the little Oven, than one may slick it off from the copper Another way. with a little hot Crucible, and separate it from the slacks, but what remains in the little Oven together with the Section. 5 slacks, which are not flown out, must be beaten and washed, and what is found shall be reckoned the Content. Section. 6 Also in this wise one may melt raw copper flint unroasted in the little Oven, and drive it off, and see whether it give good copper-stone or raw slackstone; also whether the stone in the fire be fixed or volatile: Only observe, that the little Oven must be first very well glowed, before it be melted in it, or else it will become all cold in the little Oven, and will not come together, as experience teacheth. CHAP. X. How to prove melted Copper-stone. Section. 1 COPPER STONES are best proved like a raw Copper-Oar or flint (as hath been formerly shown) viz. if one beat the same very small like Hemp-seeds, and then weigh it, and in a gentle fire upon a Test, let it be roasted, and put in the ground pieces, until it burns itself dead, and then let it be ground smaller, and mingle it with fluss, and a little Glass-galls, and cover it with Salt in the Crucible luted in a little Oven, it will boil like a raw Copper Oar or flint before the Bellows, and will settle itself to a copper Grain in the bottom of the Crucible, draw this up and weigh how much it contains, and make thy account upon it, how many Centners of copper-stone yields one Centner of black and unpurifyed Copper. Section. 2 There is another Trial, namely, to weigh two Centners of Copper-stone, and mingle them with Borax and a little Venetian Glass, and let it flow upon a Proof Test, and blow with a hand Bellows until it appears green, so you will see how much the Copper-stone yields of Copper: and in this Proof the Copper will become clean and pure and most ready, and yield no black Copper (as in the Proofs above it doth.) That you may see the form of the little Ovens, and how to make the Copper-Proofs in them, they are in the following Sculpture Deciphered. 1. The melting Oven to try the Copper Oars from the copper-stone, and the Man that blows the Bellows. 2. The luting it with Clay. 3. The bucked and vvashed Oar. 4. The little Ovens in which the copper-Oars are to be proved with ordinary Bellowss, and the man that attends them. 5. The Bellowss as they are used. 6. A copper Instrument with a neck in which water is put, and then set over the fire, and used in stead of Bellows (called the Philosophical Bellowss. See Sculpture II. Book I. 7. The Pot in which the Fluss is to be made. 8. The Assay Crucible. Sculpture XXX. CHAP. XI. To prove Flinty Copper by Sulphur. Section. 1 BECAUSE all Flints have Sulphur in them (yet some more than others,) if you will try them, and make a proof upon them, Weigh two centners of the Flinty raw Oar, and put it in a Proof-Test, and roast it dead (as I have mentioned before off the Copper-Oars) let it be cold and weigh such roasted Oar again, now so much as these two Centners have lost, so much they have had of Sulphur, for the Sulphur goes in the fire and in the air, this proof is easy, yet it is not manifested what Sulphur it doth yield, but that you may have the same Sulphur apparently; Beat the flint small, to the bigness of an Hazel Section. 2 Retorts. nut, put it in a great Retort made of the best Potters-Clay, that the neck of the Retort may hang in water, make a wood-fire about it, than the Sulphur will ascend from the flint, and you will find most part before in the Receiver of the Retort, fine and yellow, but 'tis yet unwashed, and must be cleansed in a strong fire. How, this is further to be done, is to be seen in great iron Retorts when the Sulphur becomes red. But this is to inform the Reader, That all flints burnt in iron Retorts to Sulphur do yield red Sulphur, which Painters use to heighten yellow or orange Colours, but the manner of making Sulphur, with great Retorts do not appertain to this Treatise, therefore I have named it only for the Proof-sake. CHAP. XII. How to prove Black Coppers by defty or smooth Coppers. Section. 1 AS all Coppers come black out of the Oars upon melting, yet some much finer and cleaner than others, which must after be cleansed and made ready, as they which contain no silver, and not purified, must be made ready and deft: Also to know certainly how many Centners of it after cleansing it yields of clean Copper (which must be proved in a little Fire.) Some think it may be known by Of Copper Needles. special copper Touch-Needles, made on purpose: but because the black-Coppers are not all alike, but some iron-streamy, some tinny, spizy or leady, I cannot certainly determine concerning such Proofs: But the best way is thus, First, cut off from the cast Copper Ingot, and weigh 2 or 3 Centners of it, and lute a Test with small ground leady Glass, put the weighed Copper in it, and blow it in a fresh coal fire, till it hath a clean green copper Colour, then presently, take the Test out of the Fire, and take the Copper out of the slacks, and quench it off, then cut it asunder with a Chissel, and you will see whether it be good: then weigh and count how much the inset black Copper hath yielded ready Copper. Section. 2 This Proof not certain. This proof, although the Copper be surer to be found, than by the Touch-Needles, yet 'tis not certain to ground upon; because the Proof is small and the Copper little, therefore very easily the Fire may take away somewhat too much if it be over-burnt, which in great Works cannot be done, and so somewhat more of red copper will be brought out. If you will have the right proof, and know the right Content, the same must not be esteemed too great a Labour, to make more than one Proof of the black-Copper, and then take the middle out of it. You may use to this Proof, Borax, which cleanseth the Metal much, and brings the copper to be sooner ready: but, because one cannot use Borax in the great Works, it were better this proof (especially iron-streamy Copper) might be helped with a little clean Lead, because 'tis used in cleansing: and the copper will become leady, which doth much cleanse the Copper, but if the copper Section. 3 Another Manner. be leady, then there needs no lead to be added. Some Assayers use this Method in their Proofs, viz. They take a Test which is made moist, and make a little hearth in it of Coal Powder, mixed with clay, having a flat smooth hole cut out: upon this they set the copper which is to be proved, and blow it with the Addition of a little Lead-glass, this will the sooner make it ready, but I think there is small difference in what ever is driven off from it: but be sure you drive not the copper too hard, and yet let it be of a right copper or blick colour. Section. 4 Copper flint and Tin stone may be Separated. And, because many times copper-flints are to be found, in which almost the half is Tinn-stone, and if copper be melted out of it, it would be very tinny and spizy, also if it were done among other coppers, all would be spoiled in the cleansing. To prevent this, there is a particular way, viz. that by beating and washing one may separate both Metals by bucking or cleansing, and then melt every part asunder, and bring it to profit; of which way I should write something here, but because I do not give a full Instruction in these my Books of the great Works viz. of Bucking, Washing and Smelting Metal Oars) but only lesser Works, therefore I will here end, till another more convenient time, when they may be further discoursed of. CHAP. XIII. How to prove whether Led be very Copperish. IF you think your Lead have much Copper with it, and would be assured thereof, Then weigh with the great weight a Centner of the Lead, put it upon a very flat Hearth, and make a small fire of A flat Hearth. Wood upon it, lay also a green wood before, that the Lead may go and very gently pass away under the before laid wood: Now, when such lead hath copper in it, if only two pound in a Centner, so the copper will remain on the hearth, and what you find is but leady copper, but if you will have it very clean, then blow it with a Bellows upon a hearth, till it becomes ready, but in the little proof, 'tis seen upon the Coppel, for when the Lead which hath much, begins to go, then touch the Copper flowers, and the coppels will become black after 'tis gone off. CHAP. XIV. Twelve necessary Instructions for an Assayer to follow. Section. 1 FIRST, whether Iron doth become Copper? to which the Reader shall have this Answer, That I have a long while supposed, because the Iron in the Coppery waters, as in Vitriol, green Argol, and such like, do precipitate the Copper, that the Copper only is precipitated in such iron water, and not the Iron itself becomes Copper, yet I have seen in ☞ Vitriol Mines, (in a Mine called Hesper) when the nails and other Iron Pins fixed in the copper-Oar, by length of time have become a good Copper merely by Penetration; therefore I must conclude, That the Iron doth become Copper; for though in the Vitriol, and other copper waters, the Copper precipitateth the Iron, yet there is not so much of it therein, as to turn it to copper: only know this, That while the Iron in such Coppery waters doth precipitate the copper, so the copper will precipitate the Silver (if it be in it) therefore 'tis fit, that to the common precipitation of Silver in the Aqua fort. that the copper with iron pieces or lamins be put into the cleansing (as above is mentioned) with which the Copper and silver are precipitated, and what hath been in the Aqua fort. cometh out whole. CHAP. XV. Twelve Directions how to separate Silver from Copper in the great Work. Section. 1 TO separate thus is a curious ART, which for many years the Refiners have kept as a great Secret, how the Precipitations are to be made right. But because the large Works are very great, therefore Section. 2 One way of Preparation doth most serve for Copper. it could not remain secret, but is now known; yet there is still a difference, for in one Furnace it is better refined, and the prepared copper is made purer than in the other, also the Additions are not every where alike, and then many sorts of coppers cannot be refined all in one way, therefore for their sakes, who either know nothing, or but a little of such things, I will write somewhat as a tendency to that Art. Section. 3 First, observe whether the black Copper be weak, deft, hard or brickle, for if they be weak and brickle before the refining, than the Silver will not come so soon out, but if one will give it its just due and heat, than the copper will flow under the lead through the Oven, and may cause hurt; therefore to the weak Coppers, there is no better way than to mingle other hard or brickle copper among it, that the one may hold the other. Section. 4 Secondly, one must be instructed how much the Copper holds in Silver, by a diligent Proof, for according to it, the Copper must be mingled with lead. And if the Contents be unequal as from 24 Loathes, to 14, 8, or 10 Loathes, than it must be made into a Cake by weight, near 27 pounds and an half of rich Copper, and 55 pound of poor Copper, upon this make your Account, how much Silver is in this 3 quarters of the Centners of Copper, and how much the Lead containeth which is to be used to the Addition, and then to every Loath of Silver which is in the copper and lead) 17 pound of Section. 5 How much Lead to be used. lead is also to be counted; and thus, of the refined lead (which is to be parted from the copper) a Centner will not contain above six and a half, or at the highest seven Loathes of Silver. But if the refined lead should contain more than 7 loathes, it is a sign that the Cakes remain too rich, and that the silver is not all come forth of the copper, and that there was not lead enough to the Addition. Section. 6 But, that one may know how 'tis with the Additions upon every Copper, and what is to be observed in the refining Furnace, I shall demonstrate it by Examples. Section. 7 Take two Centners of lead, and three quarters of a A profitable Rule. Centner of Copper (of a rich and poor Content) either weak, hard or brickle, one among another, if therein is not 12 or 12 and an half loathes of Silver, then take lead Oar or other lead to it which is silvery, that you may have the above mentioned silver in the fresh piece, and then add Lead, or Littarge, as much that there may come to four pieces, 8 Centner of Lead, and three Centners of Copper, and of this there will come out in parting 6 Centners of refined lead; every Centner of which contains 6 Loathes and a half of Silver, the other Silver and lead will remain in the cakes and lead, which will almost all come to profit again, as you will hear hereafter. Section. 8 Another Addition upon two and a quarter of a centner of Lead, viz. take three quarters of a centner of copper, and if there be not in it 15 or 16 loathes of Silver, then take to it rich lead, which may enter in a fresh piece of such Silver: or, Take fresh and hard lead and Litarge, so that from 4 Pieces (upon an Oven) may come 9 centners of Lead, and 3 centners of copper, of this there will be 7 centners of refined Lead, of which a centner is to contain 6 loathes and a half of Silver. Section. 9 Also, take two and three quarters of a centner of Lead, and three quarters of a centner of copper, and if there be not 18 or 19 loathes of Silver, then take rich lead that it may reach the Silver and Litarge, and hard and fresh lead, so that (upon an Oven) in 4 fresh Pieces may come 11 centners of lead, and 3 centners of copper; and in dividing of this again, there will be 9 centners of fine lead, and one centner is to contain 6 loathes and an half of Silver. Section. 10 Or take three Centners of Lead, and three quarters of a Centner of Copper, if there be not therein 20 or 21 loathes of Silver, then take rich lead which came in a fresh Piece of the silver, viz. from 4 Pieces (in one Oven) 12 Centner of lead, and three Centner of Copper, and when this shall be separated, then 10 Centner of pure lead; and one Centner will contain seven loathes of Silver in the Keinstocks and Thornells, and there will remain 15 or 16 loathes of Silver, and they are further to be wrought, as hereafter will follow. Section. 11 But if there be very rich, or much other rich copper, and little of the light Contents, and that you cannot reach the right Addition, as above mentioned, than one must oft times add a rich fresh piece, viz. to three quarters of a Centner of rich copper add three Centner of lead, and so the separating Work will prove rich: and although the Keinstocks may also remain rich to 4, 6 or 7 loathes: yet they may further be added to the rich Copper, and the fresh pieces be so right, that the refining lead may come out upon the true content, at six, or six and a half, or seven loathes of Silver, at the highest. Section. 12 But, if there are poor contenty coppers (not to be reckoned with the rich) yet you must do with them as before; but never take more than three quarters of a Centner of Copper to two or three quarters of a centner of lead, and if such black copper contains 8 loathes, the centner of the separating work will contain two loathes and an half of Silver: and the poor separating lead which comes from poor fresh may be added again to other fresh pieces, (as by the following Instructions may be seen) but there is no help for it, and, if possible, the poor fresh lead may be left alone. CHAP. XVI. Thirteen additional Instructions about good Copper. Section. 1 ITEM, One piece shall have 2 Centners and an half of Lead, and three quarters of Copper, and there shall be no more in one piece than 18 loathes. Section. 2 Item, Three quarters of a Centner of fresh Copper to 21 loathes, and three quarters of a centner of Lead: to three loathes and a half, half a centner: to two loathes three quarters of a centner of fresh lead, and a centner of Litarge: thus you have four Pieces of 77, and a half loath of silver, in 11 centners. Section. 3 Item, Three quarters of a centner of copper to 18 loathes, and an half centner of lead: to four loathes and an half, three quarters of a centner: to three loathes, one quarter of a centner: to two loathes, one quarter of a centner of fresh, and one centner▪ and 18 pounds of Litarge, mingled in 74 loathes of lead, do yield 10: and a quarter and an half of a centner of lead. Section. 4 Item, Half a centner of copper to 15 loathes of Silver content; and one quarter of a centner to 20 loathes, and one centner of lead: To 4 Loathes, half a centner: To two loathes, one quarter of a centner of fresh: one centner of Litarge leaded in 70 loathes of Silver doth yield 10 centners of lead▪ Section. 5 Item, Half a centner of copper to 15 loathes: one quarter of a centner to 17 loathes: One centner of lead to 5 loathes: half a centner to one loath and an half; one quarter of a centner fresh; one centner of Litarge leaded in 70 loathes will yield ten centners of good lead. Section. 6 Item, Three quarters of a Centner of Copper to 17 loathes: one centner of lead, to 4 Loathes: one dram, one quarter of a Centner to 4 loathes and an half: one quarter of a centner to one loath and an half: and one quarter of a centner fresh, one centner and 18 pound of Litarge leaded in 74 loathes yields 10 and an half centners of lead. Section. 7 Item, Three quarters of a centner of Copper to 18 loathes and half a centner of lead: to three loathes and an half, a quarter of a centner: to four loathes and an half three quarters of a centner: to three loathes one quarter of a centner: to two loathes one quarter of a centner of fresh, and one centner of Litarge leaded in 76 loathes and a half yields 10 centner of lead. Section. 8 Item, Three quarters of a centner of copper to 16 loathes and half a centner of lead: to 3 loathes and a half: three quarters of a centner: to four loathes and an half: one quarter of a centner: to two loathes one quarter of a centner of fresh: and one centner of Litarge (or instead of it, three quarters of a centner of fresh) leaded in 70 loathes and a half do yield 10 centners of lead. Item, Half a centner of copper to 19 loathes: and a quarter of a centner to 7 loathes: one centner and a half of lead to three loathes and a half: and half a centner to one loath and a half; and one centner of Litarge leaded in 69 loathes and a half, yieldeth 10 centners of lead. Section. 10 Item, Half a centner of Copper to 19 loathes: one quarter of a centner to 16 loathes: one centner of lead to 4 loathes: one dram and half centner to one loath and a half: one quarter of a centner fresh, and one centner and 18 pounds of Litarge leaded in 74 loathes do yield 10 centners and an half of lead. Section. 11 If there be no Litarge to be had, then take half a centner of good copper to 9 loathes, one quarter of a centner of copper to 30 loathes: one centner and a quarter of lead to 4 loathes, and an half centner to one loath and an half, and a quarter of a centner fresh: thus make all times the additions upon the hard lead, that there may be in a piece 10 centners, 10 and an half, or 11 centners of lead, also the silver in 4 pieces, 70, 72, 74, 75, 77 loathes, thus the lead doth contain 7 loathes of silver, happily one dram more or less. Section. 12 Item, Three quarters of a centner of fresh copper to 20 loathes: three quarters of a centner of lead to 4 loathes; and half a centner to two loathes, and one centner of Littarge: and half a centner of fresh lead leaded in 76 loathes yields 10 centners of lead. Section. 13 Item, Three quarters of a centner of Copper to 21 loathes: three quarters of a centner of lead to three loathes and an half; and half a centner to two loathes: and half a centner of fresh lead, and one centner of litarge, or three quarters of a centner of fresh lead, leaded in 77 loathes and a half do yield 10 centners of lead. CHAP. XVII. Six additional Instructions about proving of fresh Oar, called hard Led. Section. 1 ITEM, Three quarters of a centner of Copper to 11 loathes; and half a centner of fresh lead; 2 centner of Litarge is leaded in 8 centners, into 4 pieces, contain 33 loathes. Section. 2 Item, A half centner of copper to 8 loathes; a quarter of a centner to 15 loathes: one centner and a quarter fresh, is leaded in 8 centners, into 4 pieces contain 31 loathes. Section. 3 Item, Half a centner of copper to 15 loathes; one quarter of a centner to six loathes, three quarters of a centner to two centners of Litarge leaded into 9 centners, into 4 pieces, contain 36 loathes. Section. 4 Item, Three quarters of a centner of copper to 11 loathes and a half, and half a centner of fresh; and two centners of Littarge leaded in 8 centners, into 4 pieces, and contain 34 loathes and a half. Section. 5 Item, Half a centner of copper to 13 loathes: a quarter of a centner to 10 loathes: half a centner of fresh, two centners of Litarge leaded in 7 centners, into 4 pieces, contain 36 loathes. Section. 6 Take notice, if the Copper be very poor, than you may add such lead, as doth contain one and a half, or 2 loathes of silver. CHAP. XVIII. Three Additions concerning Thornels, or parts of Oars not fully melted. Section. 1 TAKE two Centners and an half of Thornells, that is half separated Oars, and half roasted, and a centner and a quarter of hard Lead: and a quarter of a centner of Litarge, the Lead must contain 3 and a half: 4 loathes, 4 and a half, till to 5 loathes. Item, to a Centner of Littarge is counted 3 quarters of Lead; and a Centner of Littarge is counted at 135 pounds; and also upon 145 pounds of hard Lead, one centner of soft Lead, although to some separating Works are taken 130 pound of Litarge in stead of a centner of Lead, and 140 pound, hard Lead, instead of soft lead. Also there goes commonly off from 10 centners one centner and a half of Lead; thus you may know how to subtract from the additions together with the Loathes, which will be found in the centner. CHAP. XIX. Six more Instructions concerning good and deft Coppers. ITEM, Take Copper to 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, Loathes, and of this one may make hard Lead, being commonly taken as Additions: of which 65 pounds will yield at all times in 4 pieces 39 loathes of Silver; but if it be not enough (with the 65 pound of Copper in the Content) than one may take of the Copper three quarters of a Centner, and at all times upon one loath of Silver 29 pounds of lead, and this will make in one piece, three Centners four pounds of fresh lead, and in four pieces, 12 Centners, and 16 pounds, in which are 42 loathes of Silver. Section. 2 Item, 65 pounds of Copper to 15 loathes: one centner and a quarter of a centner of fresh lead, and 305 pounds of Litarge, there will come upon 4 pieces 11 centners 31 pounds of lead, in which will be 39 loathes of Silver; and if one doth sever it in an Oven, and with such Additions, there will come out of it 9 centners of lead, which will contain to three and three quarters of a loath, or three loathes and a half: this is together, 33 loathes, three drams; so there will remain in the Thornels and Keinstocks five loathes (if well wrought) but it consumes much lead by it. Section. 3 If the Copper contain 18, 19 or 20 loathes, 'tis usual to take sixty or sixty five pounds of Copper, according as one hath poor or rich lead, and the Addition is made thus, that together in 4 pieces, may come 75 loathes of Copper and lead; and upon this 75 loathes, is taken one loath and 15 pounds of lead; if then one do sever it in an Assay- Oven, it will yield 9 centners and an half of lead; and this will contain 6 loathes and a half, or six loathes three drams, and then there will remain in Thornells and Keinstocks, 11, 12 or 13 loathes, but how the Additions are to be made, is hereafter specified. Item, One piece shall have (with lead and copper,) 3 Centners, 25 pounds, and four pieces; together 13 Centners, and of lead 11 Centners, 25 pounds, so there will come in one piece 65 pounds of Copper, to 17 loathes; and two Centners and a half of lead to three loathes; yet the 4 pieces will contain no more in copper and lead, than 75 loathes. Section. 5 Item, 65 pounds of Copper to 18 Loathes, make 47 Loathes addition in the Lead. Take one centner three quarters of Lead to 4 loathes, they do bring in 4 pieces; 28 loathes one quarter of fresh, and 30 pounds of hard, so there will come 11 Centners, 25 pounds of lead, in 75 loathes. Section. 6 But the Thornels which are to be severed from it, must have this Addition, Take to one piece, one centner and a half of lead-Thornels, 1 Centner of roast Thornels, 1 centner 18 pounds of hard, and one quarter of a centner of fresh Lead, and 30 pounds of Litarge, than the lead will commonly contain 3, or 3 and a half, to 4 loathes of silver. CHAP. XX. Seven more additional Instructions about good Copper. Section. 1 ITEM, if one take to a piece of 80 pounds of Copper, which may contain 15, 16, 17, 18 or 19 loathes, and so there will be of 4 pieces, ten Centners of lead, and so in one piece, 2 Centners and an half, the process is thus, Take one Centner of Litarge, one centner and a quarter of lead, to 4 loathes, one quarter of hard lead, and a quarter of fresh lead, as it happens, yet that in 4 pieces will come to no more than 72 loathes of Silver, and take to one loath 14 pound of lead, and this in one piece will be two Centners and a half, and 2 pounds of lead, yet 'tis always better ☞ to take much Litarge and little lead, for the Litarge doth draw better to itself the Copper than the fresh lead, likewise much Copper than little, and so the lead will not consume so much, and there will be wrought much more copper with less lead. Therefore if you take 65 pounds of copper to one piece, than there will be to four pieces, eleven and a quarter of a centner of lead, and one meltting may make just so many pieces. But if you do take 80 pounds of copper, for 65 pounds of lead, than there will remain in the Thornels and Keinstocks, 10, 11, or 12 loathes. Section. 2 Item, Take 75 pounds of Copper (rich or poor) and in four pieces 72 loathes, that upon one loath may come 14 pounds of lead into four pieces, 10 Centners, 8 pounds of lead, and this doth yield commonly good Keinstocks, and if this be thus severed, than the lead of it will contain 7 loathes of Silver, and a dram more or less. Section. 3 Item, to make hard lead, take 65 pounds of Copper to 19 loathes, and 200 pounds of Litarge, and 190 pounds of hard lead, and 40 pounds of fresh lead, to two loathes; and thus there will be in 4 pieces 52 loathes, and one dram, and ten Centners, and 80 pounds of lead. Section. 4 Item, take 75 pounds of Copper to 16 loathes, and not more than 48 loathes in 4 pieces, and to one loath 21 pounds of lead, that the most part may be Litarge, so the lead will contain 4 loathes and a half, or 5, and remain in the Keinstocks 6 or 7 loathes. Section. 5 Fresh Copper. In brief, to fresh Copper one may take three quarters of a centner of Copper, and two Centners and an half of lead, and in four pieces not above 34 loathes, this doth well; and to the hard lead, three quarters of a Centner of copper, two and a quarter of a centner of lead, and no more, and it will bring into it 33, 34, to 38 loathes▪ of Silver. Section. 6 Hungarian Copper. Concerning the poor coppers (they are partly severed in Hungary, and contain to five, six, seven, eight loathes of Silver, or nine at the highest) they must be so severed, that the severed lead may come upon the right Content, as a centner upon six to seven loathes of Silver, so the copper will be good, and if you add lead according to the Content, the copper will not have lead enough, and the Silver will not come all out, and the Keinstocks will remain rich. Deciphered. 1. Copper and Lead in pieces, weighed. 2. The Oven for Assaying those piecs of fresh Oar. 3. The Copper-pan into which those fresh pieces are to be put and melted. 4. The fresh piece melted. 5. The Melter. 6. The Vault in which the Dust and Smoke is received. 7. The little door out of which the dust is to be cleansed. Sculpture XXXI. CHAP. XXI. Nine Rules, showing how the Regulus of poor black Copper-Oar is to be assayed, after the Hungarian Method. Section. 1 FIRST, I will mention how the poor Coppers are to be split before their melting in the separating Works, and the content made rich, that they may the better be melted and separated. Section. 2 Item, in the Sheds or Houses where The Melting Oven for them. black Coppers (which commonly contain 5, 6, or 7 loathes of Silver) are used to be smelted there, the melting Oven for them is form like a driving hearth with a Vault, and in the forepart thereof the fire is to be made of Birch, or other small split firewood (as is used in Kitchins) and the melting Oven must have a Crucible before it, in which the black Copper (when 'tis wrought enough and becomes good Copper) may run out of it: On the other place of the Oven are the slacks done off, and the Bellows are not to blow in the midst of the Oven, but on an iron Pipe, which is directed against a corner of the Oven, in which the Wind may blow, so that it may go through the Pipe into the spleiss Oven in the midst of it upon the copper. Section. 3 If you will smelled them, then put into the smelting Oven 38 centners of black copper, of which the centner contains six loathes of Silver) when this is smelted, let the slacks go off from it; that it may be 11 to 12 centners, than 4 to 4 centners and an half, in which you must be diligent, that you may know how to give it its due heat. After open the smelting Oven near the foremost Crucibles, and set the copper in it, and smelled of the 38 centners of black copper, out of the Crucibles 18 to 19 centners of good and rich copper, but of the smelted Copper, every Cake is to be cut out, and cast into Ingots, of which a centner holds commonly near 9 loathes of Silver, the remaining Silver you will have in what is swept off, and in the slacks, as follows. But because much smelting at once (as in great works) is counted by the Smelters a Work for half a week, therefore to this belongs a Master and a Servant, and they cannot work but twice a week in an Oven, and to such Operating in one work, there is to be used near 4 lays of Wood Section. 5 Red Copper Regulus. The slacks that come from the abovementioned black Regulus, or which are twice done from the copper, must be beaten small as walnuts, and smelted through a smelting Oven, then draw the slacks off again from it in the crucible, and out of it you will have a red Regulus. Section. 6 Of this red Regulus, one must take 40 centners for a smelting Oven (as above is signified) and may smelled of it 30 to 31 centners of red Copper, and of this the centner contains two and a half, to 3 loathes of Silver, which cannot all be brought out, therefore it must be forced out with an hammer. But if it be made to sell for Bells, than there must be smelted of this 40 centners, or 33 centners to 35 centners of red Copper, and to this one needs but one Oven, 2 to 2, and half the proportion of wood, and 'tis counted by the Smelters for two Works for a Week, as upon the black Coppers. Section. 7 But the slacks which (of this 20 centners of Regulus) are to be done off out of the smelting Oven (and happily 6, 7 centners to 7 centners and an half) they are to be beaten asunder and smelted through a smelting Oven, and one may draw off the slacks in the Crucible, and make of a Cobolt Regulus. Cobolt Regulus, or Copper-stone, 40 centners upon a smelting Oven, and smelled it off from 32 to 34 centners of Licbeter or spizy Copper. Licbeter or speizy or unclean Copper, of which a centner contains one, or one and an half loath of Silver. Section. 8 Now when all is smelted off, then take that which remains upon the brim of the driving hearth, also that which is about the crucible, and some good slacks, and beat them stamped Copper. small with the stamp, upon which the water doth run, and then the good copper will fall on the ground, and that is to be gathered and washed and then settled: and, if it be at hand put 12 to 14 centners upon the smelting Oven. Likewise happily 5 or 6 centners of leady-Copper which remained upon the hearth; and if the copper enters in it, and will not out again, then put to it 18 centners of black Regulus: and smelled again 20 centners of stamped Copper (which Copper is to contain 12 to 13 loathes) and this same, being thus assayed, one may set it upon the driving hearth, and drive it off with the poor and rich lead. What comes off at last from the stamps in the casting and settlings, is also to be taken up, for 4 centners of this will yield a centner of copper, and such is to be smelted with the slacks. CHAP. XXII. Seven more Instructions for the Hungarian way of separating, and how the first work or Instrick is to be performed. TO the first Instrick (by which you must understand the first Schicht, work or operation which a Master with his Servant can smelled in 8 or 9 hours) they do take 30 centners of rich or good Copper and fresh lead, which comes from Craccaw, of which a centner contains near one loath of Silver) 110 centners: in all 140 centners of Copper and lead: out of which work will come 40 pieces, this being put out of the former Crucible into a copper pan, there will come upon one piece of rich and good Copper, three quarters of a centner▪ of fresh lead, two and three quarters of a centner: And every Smelter must observe, That the Addition of every piece come only to one piece, and that the piece may be cast equal, that to the whole work may not come more or less pieces than were weighed to it before (as above is signified) the slacks are afterwards to be drawn clean off, out of the foremost Crucible, and smelted again in the Oven, and out of this will come slack-lead, and the centner will contain one loath. Section. 2 But the abovesaid 40 pieces are to be assayed so that always five pieces be set upon the Assay-Oven, and the lead which flows out of it (being in a hole) is afterwards to be cast into little copper pans, and the Centner of the same lead (according as the copper is rich) will commonly contain 2, to 2 loathes and a half of Silver; and that which remains upon the Assay-Oven is called Keinstocks Keinstocks. (which are pieces yet undried or unroasted, and what falleth down from the Assay-Oven, and between the roast-Oven are called Thornels, of which Thornels they do weigh 80 or near 100 pounds. Section. 3 Thornells. These Thornels are thus to be made to profit; Take 20 Centners of them from the Assay-Oven, and 20 centners from the roast-Oven, and 40 centners of hard lead, and Litarge, of each sort half; (in the whole 8 Centners) out of this there will come from the Work 20 pieces: and there will come upon one piece 2 Centners of Thornels, and 2 centners of hard lead and Litarge, for it must be thus distributed upon the pieces, and the slacks upon the foremost Crucible must be drawn off clear, these are to be smelted apart, and out thereof will come the slacks of lead. Section. 4 Afterwards 5 pieces of these 20 pieces of Thornels The first Inlay. are always to be set upon an Assay-Oven, and assay the lead of it, of which a centner will contain near 2 loathes of Silver, and the Keinstocks will remain above, and what falleth down betwixt the Oven is (called, as is said, Thornels) and they do weigh near 8 pounds, as above is mentioned. Section. 5 The second Inlay. To the second Inlay, by which you must understand the second Work) the Additions are to be made thus, they do take rich or good broken Copper, 20 centners and 20 centners of Thornels from the separating and roast Oven, one with another, and 20 centners of Litarge, (in the whole 60 centners) out of this comes 40 pieces, so there is to each piece half a centner of good Copper, and half a centner of Thornels, and half a centner of Litarge, and these are to be set (as before) always 5 pieces upon a separating Oven, and assayed, and the Lead of it is to be cast into little copper pans, and the centner will contain 3 and a quarter, to 3 loathes and a half of Silver, and the Keinstocks will remain in the separating Oven, and the Thornels fall down: Now, this is not used in the common work, but only when rich Copper is to be taken to Section. 6 The Third Inlay upon rich Copper. the work, or the store doth increase. To the third Work you must understand the third measure, which is called Rich putting in: the Additions are to be made thus, Take 30 Centners of rich and good Copper, and of the Thornels of Lead, 120 centners (in the whole 150. centners) then smelled all through the Oven, and draw the slacks clean off, and of these will come 40 pieces, and of one piece will come three quarters of a Centner of Copper, and three Centners of Lead, and these 40 pieces are to be assayed, and every time set 5 pieces on a separating Oven, and the Centner of this lead will contain near 3, and three and a half loathes, and of this there will also come Keinstocks and Thornels like as of the second Work. Section. 7 But to this third Work or Inlay, To one piece is to be taken a quarter of a Centner more of lead than to the first; the reason is, because to the first there hath been added Crackaw lead, which hath contained Silver: secondly, because it is Copper: and thirdly, That so the rich works in the lead (which in the working are become Coppery) may also be included. CHAP. XXIII. How Litarge Pieces are to be made. Section. 1 LITARGE Pieces are to be made thus, First, their addition is upon a Shich, to 15 centners of rich copper add 15 Centners of Thornels from the Assay-Oven, 60 Centners of Litarge, and 37 centners and a half of slacks or fresh Lead, (in the whole 127 centners and an half: This stuff may be smelted in the Oven by a Master and his servant in 8 hours, and the slacks being clean drawn off, and then being cast into a pan, it makes 30 pieces; and in one piece, will be half a centner of rich Copper, and half a centner of Thornels from the Assay Oven, 2 centners of Litarge, one centner and a quarter of slacks, or fresh Lead. Section. 2 These mentioned 30 pieces of Litarge are to be assayed, and always 5 pieces to be set upon the Assay-Oven, lethargy. and out▪ of this willcome the lead which is called Litargelead, and one Centner will contain 2, to 2 and a dram of Silver, and there will come also out of the Assay-Oven Keinstocks, and Thornels, as in the second Assay-work. Section. 3 Another Addition upon Litarge pieces is this, They take 15 centners of copper, 15 centners of Thornels (from the Assay Oven) 90 centners of Litarge, 15 centners of slacks or fresh lead (the whole 135 centners) and out of this will come 30 pieces, and to one piece will come half a centner of rich Copper, and half a centner of Thornels from the Assay-Oven, and three Centners of Litarge, and half a Centner of slacks or fresh lead. Section. 4 The beforementioned 30 Litarge pieces are to be assayed, and set 5 pieces at once upon an Assay Oven, and the Centner of lead which comes of it will contain two to two loathes and a quarter of a loath of Silver: of this also there is Keinstocks and Thornels, as formerly hath been mentioned. Section. 5 When all the before-written assayed rich and poor The last Inlay. lead are brought together, they make this account upon it (whereby they may know to make an Inlay, (that is a quantity of it) so that a centner in the same Inlay of rich Copper and lead in the assayed lead may contain 5 loathes and a quarter of a loath of Silver, and this Inlay is to be made thus. Take 26 centners and a half of rich copper, and 115 centners and a half of rich and poor lead (that they may come upon the beforementioned reckoning) so that a centner may contain 5 and a quarter, or at most 5 loathes and an half of Silver; what is done above, is with damage, and the ready copper will become too rich: In short, 141 centners and three quarters of a centner, are also to be smelted through an Oven, and the slacks drawn clean off upon the foremost Crucible, and a Master and servant to make this shich or work into 42 pieces, so there will be to one piece 5 eight parts of a centner of the rich Copper, and of all the sorts of rich and poor lead, 2 and three quarters of a centner. Section. 6 These now mentioned 42 pieces they assay upon an Assay-Oven, but no more at once than 5 pieces of rich lead, that one centner with the other may contain 5 loathes and a quarter of Silver, and there will remain also upon the Oven Keinstocks and Thornels, which are fallen down, such Thornels which come of rich lead they separate, for they are the best, and are to be used again, and to be laid among the Litarge-pieces: Upon this poor Contenty Copper Assaying, meditate with diligence, for 'tis a profitable Instruction. CHAP. XXIV. How Silver is to be separated from spizy and unclean black Coppers. WHEN the speizy and very unclean Silver Contenty coppers are to be separated from other good coppers, than they use the prepared coppers, which are deft of themselves, though they are brickle and unsmooth, and are not to be used to all sorts of Works: to avoid this, prepare to assay such degenerate black coppers as follows: Take such black Coppers, and dress them like a black Licbeter Copper with help of the lead, by these means they will become clean and deft, and brought thus into compass, so that oftentimes of three centners hardly remains one, yet nothing of the Silver gone off, but what hath been before in the three raw centners, and this is to be found together, and then separate this prepared copper, with good copper, or by itself (as is usual) and in Hungary they use this care about the poor Coppers, though not very unclean, which in their separating is often tried, and the coppers becomes rich by it. But that you may see how the copper Ovens are form, and how to assay upon them, this following Sculpture will show. Sculpture XXXII. Deciphered. 1. The separating Oven as it stands framed. 2. The Supporters to it made of Copper, as they are to stand under the Oven. 3. The cast pieces as they are to stand in the Oven. 4. The Walls of the Oven (or the four sides of it) and the fire in it, and how the Oven is braced with iron hoops. 5. The stamped Pieces, and coals on the top of the Oven. 6. The copper or iron little pans, with a man putting the melted stuff into them. 7. The Keinstocks. 8. The Crane or draught by which the assayed pieces are to be lifted out of the assay-Oven, or otherwise disposed of. 9 Instruments, viz. Ladle, Picker, Fork and Hook. 10. The troughs or place to cool the Instruments in water. CHAP. XXV. Instructions for driving Lead and Copper from Silver. IF you have enough of that rich Lead, of which a centner contains 5 loathes and a quarter of Silver, then prepare the driving hearth, form with a Vault like a great Baker's Oven, and lute it with all diligence, and lay 100 Centners of this lead upon it, and six centners of the richest copper, which is to be picked out of the hearth of the speize Oven, of which the Centner contains 10 to 13 loathes of Silver, (which is called the stamped Copper,) drive the work, but not quite off, and if it make lead slacks, then quench it and retain the same lead slacks, so in this will be near 50 marks of Hungarian Silver. Two drive harths. But there must be two driving-harths one near the other, and while you drive off the one work, the other must be prepared with diligence for the other, and then put upon it six centners of the richest Copper, and an hundred Centners of rich Lead, which contains 5 loathes and a quarter of Silver, and drive off the work (as aforesaid) and when the Silver will almost go to it, then add the said lead slacks in which the 50 marks of Silver are, and let the work go quite off, thus you have 100 marks of Silver to 15 loathes of fine. But such works are used to drive them off in 4 or five weeks, that commonly one week with another, is reckoned to make 125 marks of Silver, and 'tis needful to such a driving off, to have 4 lays of wood, and you must not feed the fire upon such driving harths with long split-wood, but (because the Oven hath a singular Vault) it must be fed with good dry faggot-wood, and let the Bellows go true upon the work. CHAP. XXVI. Of driving the Keinstocks and Thornels. Section. 1 KEINSTOCKS are prepared upon the said Assay-Oven; and if it be of rich or poor Lead, or Thornels or Litarge pieces, put them together in a driving Oven, and let there be four such driving Ovens, and in every one 4 Rows or lanes: upon these you are to set all sorts of Keinstocks, near 120 centners, then make a fire of dry split wood before and behind the Rows of Litarge, and dry the Keinstocks about 12 or 14 hours, and that which runs first out into the Litarge rows (which will be but little) this pour out, and it is fresh Lead, and what remains of the Thornels will fall down in the rows, than they are to be melted to thornels, like those which are flown out under the melting Oven. Section. 2 Item, such Keinstocks which remain above those Ovens, are not to be boiled in the great speize Ovens (like the raw black Coppers) but must be beaten and knocked that the shiffer and other uncleanness of them may be removed, and then put them upon the boiling hearth, and drive the copper to be pure, and when the slacks are clean drawn off, then split the plates or cakes one after another, this is ready and deft copper, and so the remains that are in a centner of such ready copper will be almost a loath of Silver, and one doth take to a shich 4 harths to contain near 18 centners; there are to be two such harths or copper-ovens in the separating houses or sheds, Section. 3 wherein you may spleize or work all working days. Copper Regulus. The slacks which are to be drawn off from the harths' are to be melted again through a melt Oven, and a Regulus made of them, which is called a copper Regulus, which I judge to be like the Copper, made at Swatk, set them in a dry Oven and dry them off, from this the thornels will fall down into the rows, these must be melted into thornels, (as above is mentioned) for such copper Regulus must not be wrought by itself, for they are speizy, therefore you must mingle them among the Keinstocks, which are to be dried, and you may make pure copper of them. Thus you have sufficient Directions how Coppers Section. 4 may be assayed and separated. But concerning the reckoning which (always in such Section. 5 things) is necessary to be made known, I will not recite here, for every ones Practise will teach them, and the keeping of the Book is the surest Rule for it. The next Sculpture is thus Deciphered. 1. A drying Oven. 2. An Oven soon made according to the Hungarian way. 3. A common and ready Hearth for drying. 4. Keinstocks, as they are to be picked and beaten by a man. 5. Harths' for the Hungarian speizing or working. 6. Copper Cake, quenched in a Cistern of Water by a man, 6. 6. 6. 7. A Pipe and Tub that lets water into the Cistern. Sculpture XXXIII. CHAP. XXVII. A singular way of melting in the Assaying work. WHEN flint or Copper Oars are intended Section. 1 for Copper, than the Oars are to be roasted well and sticked through; and then to make it Copper it must be burnt and roasted again. In such work one may surely know the Content of the raw stone, and also by the Content of the Stone (which is sticked through the little Proof) how much Copper and Silver is in it. When the stone for making of Copper is perfectly prepared and burned; then take of this roasted Common proof (among some other) and prove it by 2 or 3 proofs upon Copper, and then the Copper upon Silver, and when the Copper-stone in the roast is of unequal content, it is not well mingled, yet you will find in the content, a very small difference; yea sometimes none at all, and then see whether the content of Copper (of the roast) doth agree with the content before, which is found in the through burnt stone. Therefore try whether you have all the Silver in the roast which was in the Copper-stone, if there be a difference Section. 2 Copper roast to 3 or 4 loathes in a Centner against the other, then take the middle of it, and make your Additions thus, In case you have found in a prepared roast (through the little proof) that two centners contains three quarters of a centner of Copper, and a centner of this Copper contains twenty loathes of silver. Then weigh of Section. 3 Addition of parts. that which is melted 2 centners of the roast, and set them asunder, one heap after another, and of every heap two centners of roast, and to every part weigh its due of Lead, that may always come upon a loath of Silver, (which is in the Copper 18 loathes of lead) or if it be good, 17 pound: and are to be weighed to the roast- heap which is weighed off, and because two centners of the roast do contain three quarters of a Centner of copper, (and must be melted through, to one piece) then after the common proof, three quarters of a centner of Copper will contain 15 loathes of Silver; then weigh to it 15 times 17 pounds of lead, so upon every fresh piece will come two centuers 35 pounds of lead, and one fresh piece will weigh 3 centners 7 pounds. But 'tis to be observed (in making the Addition of the lead) that you must know what the lead contains, viz. whether the centner had 1 or 2 loathes of Silver. Then upon the same Silver which the lead contains upon every loath must be counted 17 pound of lead; for the Assay-work must contain but 7 loathes, if they contain more, 'tis a sign the Keinstocks is too rich, and the Silver comes not all out of the Copper (as is before mentioned) therefore if one hath lead which contains silver, such cannot be taken to the rich Coppers, for the fresh pieces are too great and receive too much lead, and the Copper will go through the Assay-Oven with the lead to loss. Section. 4 But if one have copper-stone or poor copper which may Addition of parts. yield to 10 or 12 loathes, to this it may be used; especially if it becomes good, than the Addition must be thus: If you find by the Proof, That 2 centners of the roast-stone contains three quarters of a centner, and one centuer of the Copper 12 loathes of Silver: then in 3 quarters of Copper, or in two centners of roast-stone there will be nine loathes of Silver; to this add the due of lead, upon every loath of Silver, 17 pound; and because one hath not other lead than what the centner contains in 2 loathes of Silver, than there will come upon the 9 loathes of silver, in the copper, and of the silver in the lead to one piece, 2 centners and 1 pound of the two loathes of lead: but to a fresh piece you must not take all such weak lead, or which doth contain silver, but mingle it with the fresh lead that the silver may come out cleaner, yet for want of fresh lead, sometimes such weak lead is taken as necessity requires. Hard oar and Litarge Upon the common melting Furnaces, the Additions Section. 5 are made in stead of the fresh lead: with hard lead or Litarge, and subtract the waste, what might go off in the fresh, and in stead of the 100 pound fresh lead you must take 125 pound hard lead and Litarge; yet the Litarge and hard lead must be refreshed with fresh lead, else, at the last when the hard lead is too weak, there will be damage: This may be used also in this labour and melting, if one have Litarge and hard lead that (according as above is mentioned) to add to the 2 centners of roast the competent weight of hard lead and Litarge, and let it go through the Oven, and then the fresh pieces are cast right. Spar-stones. But possibly some person may say, It could not well Section. 6 be done for the spar-stones sake; yet it must again be considered, Though the spar-stones may be leady yet they will be very poor in silver, and therefore they are not spoiled, though they be leady and mingled with them, and so bring them among the Copper-stones, in the roasts, which will afford but little profit, therefore 'twill be more profitable to melt them. Further observe, If one would melt the stone, and beat the hard lead and Litarge, care must be taken that Section. 7 one doth put in the hard lead and Litarge when the stone is in the Oven; and then the lead needs not stand so long on the hearth among the copper and slacks, and thereby burn: but it were better to refresh the Litarge and hard lead fully (after the Goslarish manner) whereby you may make (with one labour in one day and night) 100 Centner of fresh lead which else is lost, but when the Additions are to be made with it after it hath been refreshed, then there goes nothing more off in the little by-Oven, only that it will flow and work through amongst the Copper, and such refreshing of the hard lead and Litarge may be done (if one thinks it not too great a labour) that the work might go the better. Section. 8 How to make the Oven and cast the fresh pieces. When the Melter thinks fit to shut the Melt-Oven, than he must make the Crucible in the hearth a little narrow and deep like a fresh Oven, and near that Oven another little Oven, in which the wind may drive, and wherein he may also warm the added lead; and when he begins to set it, and hath two centners of the weighed roast upon the Oven, than he must put in some weak slacks, by which he may see when the two centners of roast are throughly done when those slacks do come, than he stops the hole of the Oven, and draweth off the slacks and stones from the Copper: and then take out of the by-Oven the hot lead, and the Copper in the crucible, with a warm ladle to reach into the crucible, and take out a ladleful or two, that it may come among one another, and then he must cast into the pan the first fresh pieces, and when it is cast then weigh it, by which you may easily see whether the desired copper be come: and when the first two centners of the roast are melted throughly, and the weak slacks do come and the Eye or hole of the Oven is stopped, than the Melter must set up another heap of two centners of the weighed roast, but whilst he casts the fresh pieces, the Melter must take out again the gathered Copper which flows out upon the hearth, and warm another weight of lead in the little by-Oven, that the work may go speedily on, and not be hindered. Section. 9 When these two centners of roast are set▪ in the second time, than the Melter must put in again some of the weak slacks, and when they come, than he must stop it (as before) and draw off the slacks, and must take the lead out of the little by-Oven, and cast the fresh piece, thus he may melt continually as long as he hath Copper-stone to put in. Such fresh pieces when there are enough, cast into the Section. 10 melting- Oven, and they are to be melted off, while other fresh pieces are melting and making. The profit of this Assay work. This melting-work is (in my judgement upon such Section. 11 Copper- stones which yield copper) very profitable in comparison to the other: because you have the Silver quickly out of the copper, with the same Expense as is spent upon the black Copper making, and used with profit, better than when they must first be melted in the copper, and afterwards with great Expense to be wrought, and the Silver to be assayed out of it. Upon which every one who useth to melt may further consider. This also I think fit to mention for the Instruction of Section. 12 the common copper-Melters, so that all who care for it may be diligent in it: for this is not only a supposition, but proved in the great work. Deciphered. 1. The Fresh Oven. 2. The little By-Oven for lead. 3. The fresh piece, with a man lifting it. 4. The Separation of roasted and weighed lead, brought by a man in a Wheel-barrow and laid in heaps▪ 5. The Vault for the Smoke and Dust. 6. The Tunnels to convey away the Smoke. 7. The fresh Oven without fire in the Furnace, or forewall. 8. The Assay-Oven. 8. 8. 9 The little Pans for the melted Metal. Sculpture XXXIV. CHAP. XXVIII. How Copper is to be made Brass. TO the Brass burning as it is observed in Section: 1 Cauffingen in Hessen, and as before in the Copper different in Countries. City of Goslar and in Ilsenberg on the Haiz, they use Goslarish Lapis Calaminaris which is sometimes gathered out of the Smelt-Ovens, where (in smelting the lead Oars into 10 or 12 pieces) it ofttimes lies about a hand thick; but the Lapis Calaminaris at Galmay mountains, and other mountainous places, (as those near the River Ache in Schwaben or Swevia, in the County of Tyrol in Austria, and elsewhere) breaketh yellow and grey, and is to be added to the Copper to make them of a yellow Colour, and which is called Brass, but the Goslarsh Lapis Calaminaris must be roasted or burnt and ground small upon a Mullet made on purpose, and then they prepare it as followeth. To prepare Lapis Calaminaris. They take one part of it, and two parts of small ground Coal well quenched, and well mingled; dry them with one another, then pour a bowl-full of water upon the Lapis Calaminaris that it may every where suck it in, let it stand an hour and moisten together, but some use Urine instead of water, and add a little Alum; this gives the brass a fair colour in the first fire: then they have a crooked Instrument and draw all well together 3 or 4 times, then mingle it with a proportion of Salt, and draw it again with the Instrument twice or thrice, thus the Lapis Calaminaris is prepared: but they make always so much Calaminaris together at once, as will be needful for two Ovens. When they make Brass they make round Ovens in the ground, so that the wind may force the fire through Section. 3 The Ovens for it. the holes below in the Oven, and in one of these Ovens they set 8 pots or pipkins at once, and let them be warm and hot, and when they are so, take them out quickly, and put the Calaminaris in them, also they have a shovel made on purpose, that therewith they may take up and know how to distribute near 46 pounds in such eight pots. Then they lay in every pot upon the Lapis Calaminaris 8 pounds of small broken Copper pieces, and set-in the pots again, and let them stand 9 hours in a great heat, and in this 9 hours are to be taken one heap and a half of Coals, and when such Coals are burnt out, then stir the stuff in the pot with an iron, and see how 'tis flown, and let it stand in the fluss, and graduation an hour more, then lift the pots out of the Oven, and pour them (if you will have a piece of Brass) all in one hole, and while the stuff is warm, break them, yet so that they may remain and lie close together. Section. 4 Britain stones. Thus the Brass receives in the breaking a fair yellow colour, but if you make Kettles of it, and other work, than cast the stone into great pots and large pieces purposely for it, which stones are called Britanish Stones, or Lapis Calaminaris, (because they come thence) from which they cut afterwards some Ingots; and from them draw wires, and beat out what they please for other uses. Section. 5 Sometimes the Brass-burner sets in the Brass once more, especially if they will have the colour higher, but 'tis not with profit to be done, for the expense is more than the gain. Section. 6 The Proportion of Copper and Lapis Calaminaris. Further, 'tis to be known, That the Brass receives in such burning a heaviness, for if you put in these eight pots 46 pounds of Copper, so the Brass will receive in ☞ 9 hours an increase of 26 pounds of Brass, so one poureth out again 90 pounds of Brass, this comes from one Oven in the week, as to 14 fires) to 3 Centners 34 pounds of Brass increase: And others say, That the Goslarish Calaminaris brings more increase than the mountainous Calaminaris, but it makes the Brass in the breaking grey, therefore in the glowing you must take care, that the stuff may not run in the work; and it must only be made glowing with the flames of wood. This I was willing to mention in short, how Copper is to Section. 7 be burnt to Brass, for their sakes who know nothing of it: But how the Kettles are to be beaten, and the wire to be drawn and extended by water, is to be seen at Ilsenberg, in their works, and in many other places. Deciphered. 1. The Oven in which Brass is to be burnt: the shape of it in the inside, and how the pots and crucibles are to be placed in it. 2. The little brass Ovens are to be placed in the other. 3. How the Pots and crucibles are to be form. 4. The shovel to take up the beaten Lapis Calaminaris stone, which is to be mixed with Copper for the making of Brass. 5. The tongs by which the Pots are to be set in, and taken out. 6. The holes in the Oven. 7. The pieces of the Britanish stone or Lapis Calaminaris unbeaten. 8. The place for the workman that sets in the Pots. Sculpture XXXV. Thus I conclude the Third BOOK concerning Copper Oars, and its Labour, with other necessary Instructions appertaining to it; and the Reader may consider further upon them: as also of other things which he may have occasion to use. The END of the Third Book. OF Led OARS, TIN, ANTIMONY, QUICKSILVER, IRON, STEEL, and the LOADSTONE. BOOK IU. CHAP. I. Of Led Oars. THIS Book shows how to prove Lead Section▪ 1 Oar for Lead, and how the common The Purpose of this Book. or unseparable light Led Oars are to be smelted in the great smelting Work: next, how to prove an Oar for Antimony and for Spelter, and how to bring the Spelter out again: Also to try Tin-stones for Tin, and Quick silver Oar for Quick silver: Also of Iron stone and Steel stone, for Iron and Steel, with some Instruments for Tin soap works, and trying of Tin stone in the little Oven: and also of the wonderful properties of the Magnet or Loadstone. Led known from other Metals. Now, concerning Lead oars they are usually to be well Section. 2 known among the other Metal oars, for they are mostly grey, heavy, bright of colour like the Lead itself, and from Section. 3 Bright Oar. its brightness is called bright oar; and such bright coloured Section. 4 White lead Oar. Led oars are the richest, and contain above half lead: then there is white lead oar like a Sand-stone and red lead Section. 5 Red Lead Oar. oar, like a reddish clay, these Two, viz. the white and red are heavy, but not so rich in lead as the bright: also Section. 6 Yellow lead Oar. yellow lead oar mixed with grey, which is called, the Lead ram: These and such like Oars are counted the smooth-flowing and deft oars: and the heavyer they are, the more they yield in lead. Section. 7 Flinty Lead Oar. But the lead oars which are poor, and taken from flinty, blendy or mountainous places, are either visibly or invisibly insperged or sprinkled with brightness (like the Lead oar at Goslar) and are very heavy: yet commonly no visible Section. 8 Unseparable lead Oar. brightness in them, they are somewhat hard and unflowing, yet they do partly separate and purify in beating and washing, but partly they do stick fast in the water, that one with the other remain unseparated. CHAP. II. How to prove defty-lead Oars for Lead. Section. 1 The mixtures for it. PROVING of Lead oars do require different observations (as in other oars, therefore the pure-soft and flowing-lead oars, you must prove thus, first grind the oar small, and weigh of it two centners, and put it in a crucible, with twice so much fluss which is made of Copper oars) with a little Sandiver, and mingle it with a little filled Iron, after this put also on the top of the Crucible a half square finger high of common Salt, press it down a little and cover the Crucible, and lute the joinings with a thin Clay, that no coals fall into the crucible, for that will do hurt, especially in the Lead-Proof, by reason the fluss will boil up in the Crucible, and the lead will not come together in one grain, but in the slacks, like grains. When your Crucibles is thus prepared with the proof, then set it in a little Oven, prepared for the proof of the Copper Oars, put fire in it, and when the Crucible Section. 2 is glowing, blow very hard with a hand- Bellows, that How to dispose it into Crucibles and Ovens. the proof may have a strong heat, so that it need not stand long: then take out the Crucible, and let it be cold, then beat it asunder, and you will find below a grain of Lead, so much as the 2 centner-proof-weights will yield; then draw up the Proof-weights, and you will see how many centners of the bright or deft-lead Oar will yield a centner of lead. Iron is to be added to the melting of lead. But to this proof must be added filled Iron, that the Section. 3 Antimony which is in the raw lead-Oar may touch the Iron rather than the lead, for if it had no Iron to consume, it would begin on the weak Lead, therefore in many places, in the great fire, old Iron, or Iron scales, slacks and cinders are to be added to the melting, whereby more Lead is produced: it hath also this service in melting, that some Lead yields foul and unclean work, which by the Addition of the Iron becomes clean, for the Antimony or remaining Sulphur will give itself (in the melting in the Lead-Kilns) to the Iron, and will come away that so the lead may be pure. But some Assayers pretend to set the Grain-lead Section. 4 upon a Test, which in proving is found below in the crucible, and let it drive, so it will become clean: which is false, for the Lead being a weak- volatile Metal, easily consumes itself in the fire: therefore I judge that when the proof hath once suffered the fire, the Lead will become good and clean, unless the grain of the Proof be not clean, and that there doth hang on the same Lead, raw glimmer or stone, which is a sign that the Proof hath not received its due heat, which ought to be observed by the Assayer) and then he must make the proof once more. CHAP. III. How to prove an undefty, Lead-Oar for Lead. BUT the right lead Oars (which have with them some flint, or other harsh stuff) they prove thus: Beat the lead Oar into pieces, as small as grains of hemp, and weigh of them 2 centners, and set them in an Assay test in a proof Oven, and roast them, but make it not too hot at first, that it may not run together like Cinders (and do just as is above mentioned with the Copper-proof) then grind the roast-Oar very small, mingle it with the fluss (covered rindx with salt) and you need no filled Iron to this, for it hath two contrary Sulphurs which consume one another, so that the lead will remain sure, then boil the proof in the little oven before the bellows (as before) thus the lead will be right in the proof. CHAP. IU. How to prove poor separable Oar by boiling it, and trying it by smelting. Section. 1 A goodway of beating Oar. MANY times also Silver containing Lead glimmer do break in the Oven (being insperged with stony-Oar) but when you have a separable Oar, let it separate itself from the glimmer in the water, viz. when the Oars are beaten that they may be drawn in washing and cleansing to a pure Oar: of these I must mention something for the good of the Mine-workers, what difference is to be observed in the beating, because oftentimes by Negligence comes damage; but first of the try-proof in the little work. Take a common proof of the light oars, beat it small Section. 2 and mingle it well, weigh of it by the Proof-weight 20 centners, more or less, and draw it into a Tub to a clean Oar, and gently separate this from the light, and weigh how many centners of clean oar, the washed common oar will yield; and than you may easily reckon how many centners of common oar will yield a centner of good oar; and this pure oar may come to be so by the beating, sifting or washing it, (and do waste and prove, as above) but the good clean and bright oar is proved upon lead; thus you have the content of the Lead. Now concerning the beating in the great work, the Section. 3 lead Oar you know is a heavy Oar, yet 'tis subtle and easy to be beaten into dust, which swims upon the water, and goeth forth; especially, if the same be in a glimmery or flinty, or horny stone (which Quarries or horn-stones do afford) to which add the glimmer in beating, and make it dust, and this subtle dust (which is the best of the Oar) doth oft times yield a blue, dust which will lay itself on the great walls or stones in the washing, and comes to no profit. Section. 4 A hurtful Beating. But, some use the Beaters or Workers (which build the Beat-works) to prepare thus the wet-works, viz. That the hindmost stamping pestle which beats the light or rocky Oar from behind, and beats against the lamins or plates; understand it in this manner, That the hindmost pestle may fall first, than the middle one, and at last, the first next the Plates. This beating is not profitable because it causeth great damage, by reason that the beaten stuff or rocky Oars set themselves before the Plates, so that the graind Oar cannot well come through, but beats itself into a small or subtle dust, and goes away in the beaten or washed Section. 6 stuff, therefore many Washers esteem the dry-beat Works Difference in Beating. better, where one may work over the Seeve, and have the great and small Oars asunder, and also make more sorts than with the wet work, which is found that if the wet-beaten work is built and prepared thus, the poor or rocky Oars will be beaten back from the plates, viz. that the Pestle nearest the plates will fall first, than the middle one, and at last, that which is behind, thereby the plates will remain clear, and the holes will not be stopped, but the water will carry the pure Oar through without hindrance, whereby not only more Oar will be preserved, but also the Oar may be made great or small, and so to greater profit: and having found this in the work, I would not leave it unmentioned being so fit for every Mine-worker and Assayer to know. CHAP. V. How to try common Lead-Oars for Lead, in a little Oven. LIKE as the Copper Oars (mentioned in the Third Book) are to be tried in a little Oven, so may it be done with the Led Oars, especially if they are very clean, right and good, let them be thus beaten raw, as small as half an Hazel nut, than set them upon a little Oven, but it were better 3 or 4 pounds of such small beaten oar might be laid first upon a Test, and gently roasted, and then beaten and roasted again, that its great wildness may come off, and so the lead will easily separate from the slacks without other Additions. CHAP. VI How the inseparable and light Lead Oars are to be assayed in a little Oven. CONCERNING the light-common-Lead-Oars, Section. 1 which do not separate in the water, they must be beaten in like manner as is spoken of the separable; only they must be roasted somewhat better, and when they are thus prepared, then melt them through the little Oven, but when the lead is In the little Oven not come altogether, then beat the slacks very small again, and take the clean lead from it, as you separate the stone; Now when the Lead oar is flinty (if one be diligent) then weigh the lead which is cleanly separated, and make your account how many centners of Oar may yield a centner of Lead; but if the lead oar be very coppery, 'tis to be roasted, whereby in the proof melting the Copper will come among the lead, therefore it must be separated upon a very flat hearth, and you must cause the lead (as above in the Copper proof direction) to run off with a gentle fire, and so the lead will become clean, and the Copper will remain settled, and this makes clean work (as you are taught before.) But the little oven for proving the lead oars must be prepared (like to the Copper Oars and flints) that you may bring out the slacks and lead very clean, as such practice will show. Section. 2 In Crucibles But in the Assay Crucibles the proof must be thus: Take the light lead oar, grind it small, weigh two Centners of it with thy Proof-weight, set it upon a proof Test in the Oven, let it roast till it stink no more of Sulphur, then grind it small, put it in a little Crucible with four centners of the fluss (which is used to the deft lead Oar) put in it also melted Sandiver, and cover it with Salt, lute it with clay, and let it boil in the little Oven before the Bellows, blow more strongly to this proof than to the clean bright proof, and thus you have the Content right. Section. 3 Vnroasted. You must also know, That every lead Oar may be proved unroasted; thus, Grind it small, weigh two centners, use the fluss to it (according to Instruction given) only with the Sandiver take amongit raw Argol, mingle it together, cover it with Salt, and the crucible with a covering: Lute the joinings with clay, and set it in one of the little Ovens, blow strong to it like to a Copper proof (as above) thus you will find the Content of the Lead. CHAP. VII. How to make a Lead-Proof on a Table or in a Stove. THE Lead oar to this proof must be very clean and good, take and roast it a little, then make a fluss of two parts of good clean Salt-Petre, and one part of small ground Coals mingled together, put two parts of this fluss, and one part of the roast Led Oar also well mingled into a Crucible, cast a little glowing coal in it, than it will begin to burn, and the Lead which is in it will flow together, and although this is an uncertain proof (not to be trusted to) yet thereby one may learn to know the property and nature of Minerals. CHAP. VIII. How to make Led Oars (though they will not separate in the water) to be profitable. ALTHOUGH I intent not to write much of the smelting, and thus to mingle what pertains to the smelting and lesser proving; yet I could not but leave somewhat to signify of smelting of the light lead Oars, because 'tis necessary, and no common labour, but to many unknown. Section. 1 Rocky lead Oar. The Lead-Oars which are poor, and will not separate in the Water, are flinty Glimmer, or such as come from unseparable Oars, and yet to be made to profit (if one have a pretty quantity of them) but not by the common smelt-work or arched Oven, for there the wild and sulphury slacks of the oars consume the Lead very easily, Section. 2 The Sulphur Slaks▪ devour the Lead. that almost no Lead, or not half so much as in the little proof is found or can be made, but only after the useful melting at Goslar, with which the light contenty lead Oars of the same place are to be smelted in a great quantity, and by no other ways, as by me and many others have been tried. But that you may have a sure Instruction for this work, and how such volatile oars may be helped, I shall therefore describe the whole Goslarish Method, which they use in preparing their Ovens, etc. First, I will signify what manner of Lead-Ovens there are at Goslar, and what they contain, that one may the better find out what doth follow. Section. 3 Goslarish Led Oar. The Led Oars at Goslar are commonly black Oars, also a white-gray flint with insperged Copper flint, and are very shining, which Glimmer is not to be seen in the Oar, but apparently in the melting and slacks, a Centner of the best of that Goslarish oar (if there appear not Glimmer) doth not contain above 16 pounds of Lead, but of the common Oar (mingled among the flint which cannot be separated from it, and breaketh the most) usually there is but 7 pound of Lead, and of the lightest less: this also hath an Oar Quarry which stands intermixed with it, and this Oar is to be roasted in very great Ovens, and to every one three fires given; and then a Centner will contain but little above 5 pound of Lead, and one dram of Silver (notwithstanding it contains ☞ more before the roasting) which I judge doth come of this, that in the roasting such Oars there comes among the others, light and good; and therefore the Content is more equal, and these 5 pounds of Lead, and one dram of Silver are for the most part melted out in the Smelting. Section. 4 Two melt Ovens upon one water. Secondly, In the same place must be no more than two Smelled Ovens to one spring (though the Melters think (if it might be so for the Waterfalls-sake) that it were better that every Smelled Oven should have his own spring and wheel, because every one might order his Bellows most advantageously, which must be with great might and with heaps (as will be shown) to force the Oar through the Oven: yet it is at all times set through the smelled Oven nearer the Wheel, than through the other, and so where is more set, there is more Led made, and with more profit of the Coals. Section. 5 They make such Smelled ovens inward, within a wall of Smelled Ovens. two bricks and a half deep, and two bricks wide, and the Walls above it, two els and a half high, of Shifferstones which are not thick, that one may, when he will, break out the Oven for the Lapis claminaris, which grows in it (as hereafter you may hear) for the Shiffer or slackstone in the same place will very well endure the fire, and they do lay the foundation of the same two els deep under it, crossways; that it may go out against the bellows, yet some foundations extend or reach to the wheel-room, but I do not approve of it, for it they become moist thereby, or draw moistness to itself, than it is hurt in melting, therefore it matters not a little that the smelled Ovens be right in their wideness and height, as also that the Foundations be in their right places, that no water may come in, not too deep nor too moist, for if the water go on the Foundations, than the stuff in the Lead will not separate nor work well; also that the forms may lay right according to every kind and condition of the Oar, neither too sharp nor too flat, which should be fitted that the Bellows may blow in the midst of the stuff in the Oven, just near the forewall; The smelled Ovens at Goslar have very great Bellows, of six Ox hides to one pair, to force the Oar through in great quantities, therefore the Bellows must be strong. Section. 6 Two Crucibles for the Lead. Concerning the Crucible in the Oven, it must be made thus, Lay upon the Foundation a great stone, which is called the Crucible-stone, upon this they make a hearth of Clay, mingled with little slacks, and upon it, another hearth of Clay, and when 'tis dry they wash the Crucible which is half in the Oven, and half out, the middle standing right under the Wall) with burnt Oars of a thumbs thickness, and when 'tis dry and well warmed, that it will glow very well, and become firm in the Crucible like steel, than the smelled Oven is prepared till the closing: but such a Crucible must be to the smelled Oven five quarters of an ell deep, and without the oven, it must so bend itself that the Lead may come to stand before the oven in the Crucible, and not in the oven. Section. 7 The Closing the work in the Ovens. When all this is done, than they put a vessel with Coals in the warm Crucible, and upon the Coals three Vessels full with light coal-dust, which they make thus: They make on the Wheel on the end of it a Cannoneer or Mallet, and as the wheel goes round about, than the Mallet falls down twice upon little hard coals, which the servant of the Melter, when he hath time doth put under with a Shovel, albeit it is a slow work, yet they make so much dust with it as may serve two ovens, for they are not willing to lay so great a burden upon the Wheel, but they beat no Clay with it (as they use in the dust in other Smelting) than they moisten their Coal-dust, and force and beat them with some heavy thing, into the Crucible in the oven, (commonly with an iron Beetle) that it may not come upon one another, and also before the oven, where they make it a little higher, that the slacks may not flow out, and leave a hole open below on the oven, under the forewall, (which is called an Eye) that one may almost reach his hand into the Oven. Section. 8 Of kindling the Fire. After the preparation and closing of the oven, they put on the Top of it glowing and other Coals, and after that a dray or two full of their slacks, than coals again, upon it the burnt oar, and so continually coals and oars till the Oven be full to the top, also they lay before it live coals, but not many, only that the dust may remain warm near the fore-wall, where the slacks flow out: Now when the oven is set full, they stay till the fire burn in the Oven, and then they begin to melt, and make the Oven wet, with weak slacks, as in other melt: neither have they Iron-stones, but copper which is to lie ☞ pretty far in the oven, for the Iron gratty slacks will devour the Iron stones quite in twice working, which they do not so easily to the Copper: yet in time they do consume also, so that they must be renewed once in a quarter of a year. Section. 9 Their time to melt is 23 hours, in this they set into one Oven 66 to 70 Centner of roast oar, and the oar will flow like water, and work itself very fresh, and there is nothing else to be taken to it, but only the burnt Oar. Now, when the Melter lifts off the uppermost slacks, Section. 9 (which is very heavy and thick) the rest under it will stand very clear, and then with a great iron Ladle he pours them out, which will run like lead, so fresh as they are, and the slacks look like a melted slackstone. But the lead creeps through the light dust in the Oven, and hides itself under it near 23 hours, and therefore the wild Sulphurish slacks cannot reach it, nor the long during heat consume or devour it. Opening the Oven. When the Melter hath observed his time, than he Section. 10 opens the Funnel below, and takes out the light dust together with the slacks which are settled in it, and whilst the Melter is drawing the dust out of the Oven, a servant must gently pour water, that the Melter may endure the heat, and when all the dust is drawn out, than the Melter with his fork stirs the Lead in the Oven below, so that all the Lead may come together, than he casts the Lead into the hearth standing by the Oven, and it must be kept warm continually. Of the Cakes or Sows of Lead. Out of this he draws it into Cakes or sows of Lead Section. 11 (according to the old Fryberish Method, and brings out of the 60 or 70 Centner of melted Oar (in such a time well melted) near three centner of Lead, of which one centner contains 4 loathes of Silver, and the rest of the Lead and Silver will remain in the slacks; and though there be ☜ almost as much yet remaining, it is a Wonder that so much should be produced out of a poor contenty stubborn Oar. But if you would melt other Oars besides this (after Section. 12 the Goslarish Method) you must be careful the Oar may work itself fresh; for if it do not, than you must help it, for the light dust cannot suffer the very soft slacks▪ also when the light lead Oar contains pretty much Silver and little Lead, then at all times, according to the condition of the Oars, there may be added hard Lead, that the Silver may have a refuge into the lead. I must signify, that in the melt Oven of the Goslarish Led oars, they lay on all four walls of the Oven a grey with a yellow mingled matter, every Row or Lay as Section. 13 Galmay, or Lapis Calaminaris. thick as a straw breadth) which they call Galmay, used in the brass-melting (and adding as you have heard in the end of the Third Book:) and this matter must be put out of the melt Oven after 8 or 9 Rows or Lays are made, else the Oven will be too narrow, so that no more can be melted in it with profit. Deciphered. 1. The The Walls of the Furnace. 2. The Lines on them, shows the Gradations of the Metal descending. 3. The man that manageth the metal in the furnace. 4. The back of the Furnace with the coals and pieces of metal flaming. 5. The grand Test. 6. The Oven for that Test. 7. The pieces from the Test. 8. The man that beats the Oar. 9 The pieces of Oar and Cinders. 10. A heap of Charcoal. 11. The water-troughs to wash the Oar in. 12. The Pipes by which the foul water is cast out. 13. The Instruments for the Furnace and Tests. Sculpture XXXVI. CHAP. IX. Of melting Oars with Moll or Turf. BECAUSE some years since the Miners and Smelters have pretended that all sorts of Oars might be melted with Sods or Turf (as the Saxons call it) I could not omit in this part, but give the Reader my Judgement. And because the Oars are not all of one sort, but partly harsh and hardy, and partly mild saft and flowing, and that the Turf yields very heavy and much Ashes, which in the Melt The property of the Molls. oven comes to be a slack (almost like a Glass) I judge it must not be used at all to the weak oars, to which this separating Work is unprofitable, for through their many heavy Ashes the weak flowing oars are hindered, and the Oven thereby stopped, and though you use half coals with it, yet it would not turn to profit. But what are harsh-hot-graty Oars (especially roasted lead oars by help of Coals) may be melted, and it will be serviceable, for they will work themselves more separable and deft: so that one need not much other addition (as aforesaid.) But if one would melt such harsh Oars with Turf only, I fear the Oven will be stopped many times, by which the work will be much hindered; therefore I conclude it better to melt with Coals, than with Moll, Sod or Turf. CHAP. X. How to prove Spelter or Wizmet Oar, which some call Bizmuth. SPELTER Oar is a white heavy Oar, and Section. 1 yields among other Oars the most flowing Metal, which needs no singular Pains to melt it down: But there are two sorts Two sorts of spelter Melting. of melting it, in the Wind, and before the Bellows; as will follow: for, if you will prove this Oar, how much Spelter it may contain, then grind it small, and weigh a centner of it, and two centners of the fluss (before spoken of, made of Argol and Saltpetre) mingle it, and put it in a Crucible, covered wit Salt, and cover it, Lute it with Clay, and boil it up in a little Oven before the bellows, like (to a flowing Lead proof) thus you will have the Spelter below in the Crucible like a lead Regulus; draw it up after thy proof weight, and you will find how much Spelter a centner of Oar yields: but, till of late, we had not the way to melt so much out of the Oar, as hath been found in the proof, and the difference is alike, for we find almost the half part more in the little proof, when the Spelter Section. 2 The Difference of the Content. is melted out of it: But, as it hath been mentioned in the Tin-slacks (which by a strong fire will melt the remaining Tin) so it is possible to do with the Spelter. To melt on the wind. But to melt the Spelter out of the Oars two methods Section. 3 are used: one by the wind, the other by Bellows: the weakest sort of Spelter Oars are to be melted on the wind, which is to be done thus; Take of the Oar, and beat it to little pieces, about the bigness of Walnuts, and put it in little iron Pans (set in order) that they may spread abroad, and set them in the field in the wind, and make a fire of dry wood, so that the wind may bring the flame into the pans upon the Oar; thus the Spelter will flow quickly out of the Oar into the pans, and when 'tis almost flown out, stir the Oar about, that what the flame hath not touched yet, may be melted all out. Section. 4 This is the true proof for the Spelter oar (and the right melting) because after this, can nothing more be melted out of it; then lift the pans off the fire, and put out the oar, and make the spelter clean, let it be cold, and put fresh oar into the pans, and melt continually; this spelter so melted is the best and cleanest, and some centners may be made at a melting, which melting is clearly to be seen in the following Sculpture. Section. 5 The other way of Melting it, is thus, make the Oar To melt in the Oven. clean and beat it small, and prepare a little Oven, a good span wide below, and four spans high, and above two spans square, then place a weak Bellows (like a little Smith's Bellows) behind, and in this melt the spelter Oars or slicks with wood and soft Coals; and before it be all slacks, draw it out of the Oven into a trough of wood, made on purpose, and in this stir the glowing Oar to and fro, and so the spelter will flow together, then Zevar Colour. separate it and make it clean; what remains at last of the dross (by either way of Melting) makes a blue colour in great quantity, and may be used for glass to give it a blue, 'tis here and there sold to the Glass-houses. Sculpture XXXVII. Deciphered. 1. The little Iron Pans for Spelter or Wismet Oar. 2. The fire of wood for them. 3. Melted Spelter that is to be made clean in the iron Pan, and the workman that tends it. 4. He that draws the Oar out of the Mine. CHAP. XI. Of Tin. Section. 1 ZWITTER or Tin-stone whereof Tin Tin-stone or Zwitter. is made, is heavy Oar, yet the Metal which it produceth is the lightest of all other Metals; the Zwitter is to be known by its brown colour, which inclines a little to yellow, yet the rich Zwitters are black and of fine growth, and so smooth as if they were polished, and very rich in Tin, yet sometimes the Zwitters are found in another form like Iron stone, or a pointed woolferan Oar (which the old Miners have not known) therefore 'tis needful to prove the Zwitter with diligence whether it be Tin-stone or not, and whether it yields much or little, that the Mine-workers may the better know what to do. But the Tin-stone, as well in the little proof as in the great work, must not only be burnt, but also purified clean before the melting, otherwise it yields not so much Tin, as when cleanly prepared. Yet, 'tis to be known that every Tin-Mine-work hath a singular manner to prepare the Zwitter or Tin-stone, which is to be admired. CHAP. XII. How to prove Tin-stone for Tin. Section. 1 The way of Proving it. ALTHOUGH the proving of the Tin-stone how much properly doth contain a centner, be an uncertain proof, yet by it thus much may be learned, that one may know whether the Tin-stone be good or light, likewise what happily may be made of Tin, and to know its true content, and the most common way to be used therein is as hereafter followeth. First, when you have taken a common proof of the Zwitter, or well-beaten Tin-stone, then grind it small, and weigh of it with thy proof-weight what you think fit, and draw that which is weighed off into the slick or dross, and weigh that too; then set it in an Assay-oven upon a test, and roast it in a pretty heat, and when it is cold again, grind it, wash that which is light in a wooden trough, and weigh the clean slick again, and observe how much goes off from the slick in the roasting and shifting, and do this two, three or four times, till the stone is very clean, and that nothing more goes off from it; thus 'tis prepared to the proving. In the Coals. Of this prepared Tin-stone weigh two Centners, and Section. 2 mingle among it small ground Pitch, and take a glowing hazel or Lime tree coal, or any other that doth not spring or break in the fire, but remains whole, cool it in the sand, and cut in it a Channel, and at the further end of the Channel, make a little hole, into which put the mingled Tin-stone above, upon the broad place of the Channels, and lay upon the same Coals, other Coals, just as broad as the first, for which you must also have a hole below and above, that the Bellows may blow between, and lute the Coals on both sides, that they may remain together; and when 'tis thus prepared, lay it together with a cool temperate fire, so that the Tin-stone may come above and in the little hole (in which the Tin is to flow) lay glowing coals upon it, and blow it with the Bellows, so that the blowing may just move upon the coals in which the Tin-stone is, so the Tin will flow out of it with a fresh flame, then lift the Coals out of it, and let it cool, and weigh how much Tin the two Centners of the prepared Tin-stone hath given, than you may make account how many Centners of the common Zwitter yields a Centner of Tin, this I judge the surest proof. Section. 3 With the Fluss. Than one may weigh off the prepared Tin-stone, and with the fluss (made of Saltpetre and Argol mingled, and put into a Crucible and covered with Salt) boil it in a little Oven (like to the Copper Oars) with the Bellows to give the Proof a strong and sudden heat: for the Tin will burn easily in a strong fire, and so you will find how much Tin the Tin-stone doth contain. Section. 4 Upon a sudden Heat. But the Tin-Melters have a singular proof upon the bucking, and washed unburnt Tin-stone, namely, to cause a shovel to be very glowing hot upon which they put the Tin-stone that remains upon it, and springeth not off, and doth colour itself, this they account a good Tin-stone, but if there be much false Oar among it, they may see it, and I judge it more needful to prove the Tin this way, because you may know whether it be good or bad, and what may be made out of it, but for those who have not long conversed with it, or well understand it, 'tis better to use the first proof. CHAP. XIII. How to try Tin-stone in the little Ovens. WHEN the Tin-stone is cleansed and burnt, then weigh an half, or whole pound or two of it: and set it through the little Ovens (as before is taught of the Copper and Led Proof) and melt it with the Bellows, without any other Addition, whereby you may fully see how much Tin-stone it yields: but observe, if you will set the Tin-stone in the little Oven, or will melt it, 'tis to be put in wet, and no small or smooth Coals used to it, for the Tin cannot suffer the heat, like Copper and other Metals. ☜ CHAP. XIV. Of beating and preparing the Zwitter. BECAUSE in preparing the Zwitter, Section. 1 commonly so much Tin-stone cannot be made and washed from it, as in the little proof, which I do impute to the useful and long observed beating, because the Pestles fall not (as I have mentioned above in the Lead-work) I judge the other beating (though not tried and prepared upon the Zwitterwork) not to be unserviceable for the dressing it; but by it more Tin-stone is obtained, and it stands with Reason, because thereby the Lead-oar may be profitable to the Zwitter or Tin-oar which I leave to every one's consideration and pleasure. To melt old gathered Slacks. There comes often many profitable works to light by Section. 2 trying, which otherwise would have been lost; as lately the Melting the old Tin-slacks which have lain long useless; also upon a new Method, that you need not melt them as before, through the Zwitter Oven, but over a common Melt Oven, which is used to raw Works, and may always add fresh, making it not only much but also good Tin. But because commonly the Melters make not out of Section. 3 one Vessel of Tinstone, so much Tin as out of the other▪ that is not as I judge in burning and preparing; but the fault is in their way of Melting, else it were not possible to melt such Tin out of the slacks, as now is proposed. I must further instruct the Reader, That I am of this mind in preparing and melting the Tin-stone, because 'tis Section. 4 sure, That out of the common Zwitter so much Tin The loss in Burning it. cannot be made in the great proof, with the usual beating and melting, as is to be found in the little proof, because in beating and melting, there may be loss, (as above is mentioned) therefore it follows, That to this preparing and melting some better ways may be invented, in my Judgement suitable to this way. Section. 5 The way of burning it. For the Tin in melting cannot suffer so much, and is more volatile in the fire than Led, and good clean Tin-stone goes off as well in beating, burning and washing as the Lead oar: and I judge it more profitable and fit to be tried, that the Tin-stone be left in grains, and then well burned, but not made half so clean, as to the now usual melting; and when it is melted over the light dust with Goslarish Melting. strong blowing (after the Goslarish Method) under which the Tin may hide itself, and remain sure, for the slacks and great heat: and I doubt not but by this way, out of 60 Zwitters may be made more Tin than in the common way of melting, considering the light Contents of the Goslarish Led oars (are as is above written) which doth not separate in the water nor are made clean: but of the Lead which is in it, (as it is said) one Centner commonly contains but five pound of Lead, by reason of the light Content, and the many flints with the Oar, which will not let it waste away, and in no other Melting can Led be melted out of it, as by the admirable way of Melting in this place is discovered; whereby I judge this trying would not be fruitless, if it were truly tried, yet I leave it to every one's consideration. But if the Goslarish Method should not be used to this, than I know that through their Melt-ovens it can no ways be done▪ CHAP. XV. An Instruction for Tin-stone Work. THERE are many sorts of Tin-stone Section. 1 Working: some being rich and some poor; in the Stone, and in the washing there is much hurt by the great waters which the Tin-workers use, by which so much of the Tin-stone as is flowing and subtle runs away, so that for two, three or more Miles the Tin-stone is found under the Water: which in my Judgement may be the more profitable, because a full Mine-Tub of the Wash-work yields commonly one Loath of clean Tin-stone, and may be set over the Seeve-work and washed, so as a Wash-man may do as Seeve-Work. much in one day, as two Boys can bring. But such cleansing must be in a Tub of water with a hole in the bottom, that the slicks may fall through upon a plain hearth, and yet the Tub be always full of water, and in this the Tin-stone is to be driven over the plain hearth made clean and preserved. By this Work, if in one day 400 Mine-Tubs were filled and made clean (to which there needs but four persons) there might in a Weeks time almost half a Centner of Tin-stone be made clean and gathered, and this were to better profit than the other usual way; but I leave it to every one's pleasure. CHAP. XVI. To prove Tin Additions. Section. 1 YOU must take clean Tin, wherein is no Addition, cast it into a round Ball in a frame (made on purpose) cut the Ingot clean off, and take the Tin you would prove against it, and cast also of it a round Ball like the other, and cut the Ingot also clean off, weigh the Balls against one another, as the pure Tin, and if they weigh alike, than they are of one sort of Tin, but if one Ball be heavier than the other, Section. 2 The light Tin the best. there is Addition either in the Melting, or put to it afterwards; but the lighter the Tin is, it is the better: but to know justly the Addition, you must have a particular weight made on purpose▪ and when the Addition is found, than such proof must be weighed against the clean wrought Tin, and the Tin Vessels made for the Tin, upon divers Mine-works, will have a difference on the weight (as is mentioned of the Coppers) and the Proofs will not agree. CHAP. XVII. How to prove Antimony. ANTIMONY is a fine heavy Oar bright like Lead, yet spizy, and in Germany and Bohemia it is found in great quantity, yet some better than other: and now, because it is used in some matters, I will show the best way how to prove it: viz. Beat two or three pounds of the Oar small, put it in a pot with a hole at bottom, cover it, and set it on another pot, Lute the joinings, and set them between Tile-stones in the fire, that the lower part may be cool, and that the fire may not touch it, let the upper part stand in a glowing heat, so the Oar will flow easily, and also the Antimony from it through the hole, then cool it, and take out the Antimony, so you will see how much Antimony those pounds of Oar will produce, and accordingly you may order yourself. CHAP. XVIII. Of Quicksilver. QUICKSILVER is a fine red and brown Oar, like Gold Oar, partly deft and partly insperged in the Mine. To prove this Oar it cannot be done in an ordinary fire (as the other Oars are, Quicksilver Oar▪ nor melted out of it) but as a spirit must be driven off in a strong distillation, for its Metal is in the fire volatile like a spirit. CHAP. XIX. How to prove Quick-silver-Oar for Quicksilver. FOR the accomplishing whereof, the best way is to take half a pound of it, or somewhat less, beat it as small as half a Nut, and put it into a Retort or other well luted Instrument, and drive the spirit into another Instrument laid before it in water or other moistness, thus the vapours or spirit will presently resolve itself in the coldness or wetness into Quick silver: But if one hath no Retorts, he may use a well luted glass Bottle, and set upon the Bottle a Helmet (which hangs over) in which water is to be put, and the joinings every where well luted, that no spirit may go out, then let the Retorts on the Bottle in a little Oven, and make first a gentle fire with wood, than stronger, thus the Quick silver will drive itself from the Oar in the coldness or wetness, for the Quick silver loves coldness ☞ and moistness, and avoideth the heat as its Enemy: Now when you have found Quick silver in the proof, weigh it, and then you may see how much the Oar was which was set in, whereby your reckoning may be made accordingly. But concerning melting of Quick silver in the great Jugs. Work, do thus, beat the Oar small as a little nut, put it into Juggs (made on purpose) in each about four pound: then prepare a flat hearth of moistened Coal-Ashes, on which set round Tests, three square fingers deep after one another, and turn upon it the Jugs filled with Oar, stop it well with the moistened dust, about the Tests and Jugs: then make a wood fire upon it, and the Quick silver will avoid the heat, and seek the cold which it finds in the Test below. This Labour in the great Work is to be seen in Germany, and in many places upon the Mine-works. CHAP. XX. Of Iron and Steel-stone, how to know and prove them. IRONSTONE is brown, and its colour is so that commonly it looks like roasted Iron; but the best and richest Ironstone its colour is bluish, like to a dug Iron, and some of these Iron-stones are Magnetish, and draw the Iron apparently, which proceeds from their hidden heat, as shall hereafter be discoursed of. CHAP. XXI. How to prove whether the Ironstone be rich in Iron. Section. 1 Tried by the Loadstone. SO this by the Loadstone; therefore if you will try the Ironstone, roast it (though some take it unroasted) grind it small, and take a good Loadstone, turn or draw it about with it, and the good will hang all on the Magnet, stroke it off with an Hare's foot, and lift the Ironstone up again with the Magnet as much as it can bear, and if at last any remains that will not be drawn up, that stone is drossy and not good: Thus you may see whether a Mine hath ☜ Iron, or whether the Ironstone in it be rich or poor in Iron, for the Magnet (as is said) lifteth up no other Metal but Iron and Steel. The Steel-stone and Ironstone are alike, though not in colour, some look like yellow sparr, this the Magnet will Section. 2 not lift up raw: nor some Iron stone at all; but if By the Steel-stone. you roast the Steel stone, it colours itself, and is like the ☞ colour of the rich Iron stone, and then the Magnet will lift it very easily, and sooner than the Ironstone: and then the Iron may be made (with a long and strong heat, and with hard Coals in a Secret glow) without damage to good Steel, and the common Steel by Smith-working will turn into Iron again. Section. 3 When such proof is found by the Magnet that the Ironstone is good and rich, than the Hammer-smiths (with their Additions) use further to prove and try it, in the great fire. Section. 4 The Iron stone being of an hot Nature, will not flow To melt Iron. stone. or melt with a small fire, as Gold and Silver will, but it must be a great and strong fire, and when 'tis forced to flow out of the Iron-Ovens, many Instruments may be cast, and its hot Sulphur will flow from it: also upon melting of it, somewhat of its substance will come out, and though it be refreshed in the fire with fresh Ironstone, yet so much of its substance will go from it as it hath lost in the first melting. But when the Iron stone is to be melted in the high Ovens, or in the running work (with a true Addition as every Ironstone requires) then let it force itself, yet the twice melted Iron is best for use, and most deft for to work. Thus much of the Ironstone, how to prove what it yields in the little work: But how the Iron may be boiled into Crocum Martis, as also to get Vitriol out of the roasted Iron (of which the Philosophers write much) and how the Iron is to be wrought after several Manners and Methods, and hardened: But all this belongs not to proving of Metals, and so it falls not under my Instructions, but the Reader is left to find out other ways. CHAP. XXII. Of Magnets. LODESTONES or Magnets being mentioned in BOOK II. CAP. II. and in this IV. BOOK, I will discourse something of its Nature and wonderful Properties, because there is none amongst all Jewels which doth so naturally show its Virtues as this Jewel or Magnet, and therefore I will let the Reader understand what Serapion an old Philosopher writes of it in his Book De Simplicibus & Mineralibus, where he sayeth thus, Take the Magnet, lay it in an earthen Vessel, and add much of Calx viva, lute the ☜ Vessel well about with Plaster, and make a great fire under it, and let it stand in the heat till the fire goes through the earthen Vessel that it may well glow; then set the earthen Vessel with the matter to burn in a Potter's Oven, till the overluting be consumed on the Test, then take the Loadstone out of the Vessel, and mingle it again with Calx viva three or four times, and let it burn as before, and when 'tis taken out of the Oven the fourth time, then hold the Magnet in such a place that neither the Wind, Water nor Dew may come to it, nor any other Moistness, till it be cool, then beat it small and add yellow Sulphur, in like weight; Thus the Magnet is prepared, and if one do drop Water only upon it, a great fire will spring out of the Magnet, which would burn all that it toucheth. This was Serapion's Opinion, against which I have nothing to say, whence the Magnet doth so vehemently love the Iron, and the Iron the Magnet, as though they were both of one Nature, and created one for the other; the Magnet being very desirous of Iron, and draws it to itself with its whole Power, and the Iron presently shows itself by springing to it, and so remains hanging on it. The Magnet is also called the Sail-stone, for the Sailors look upon it as their Chief Instructor in their way upon the Water, far and near; namely, after they have touched the little tongue or Needle in the Compass with the Loadstone. Also the Magnet is used to the Compass Needle, in the Mine-work, and to direct their Glass and Audits; and also in the famous and worthy Art of * Mark Schiden. Separation: and also with common Miners, the Sun-Compass is very useful; so for Brevity sake, I will conclude this Fourth Book: and desire the Reader, for this time, to be contented with the Instructions I have here given. The END of the Fourth BOOK. OF SALT-PETRE, VITRIOL, ALUM and Salt Springs. BOOK V. CHAP. I. Of Salt-Petre. IN this BOOK Salt-Petre Earth is described, Section. 1 and its Properties, and how to be The Purpose of this Book. known, and how to make Lees of it, and of the Washings and Boiling of it, and the Purifying of the Raw Parts of it, and how the Salt is separated from the Earth, and cleansed with particular Instructions how the weak Salt-Petre Lee is to be made richer and boiled to greater profit. Of Vitriol, Alum and salt springs. Also how to prove the Flints for Vitriol, and Allum-Oar Section. 2 for Alum, and of Wells or Springs of Salt. Now, because Salt-Petre is much used for several uses (as may be seen in the Four foregoing Books) especially for the distilling of Aqua Fort. I thought it a necessary knowledge for every one who shall use the former works, that he may himself purify the Salt-Petre, and cleanse it from the Earth of common Salt. How to boil salt Peter. Therefore, I shall, in this Book, give a large and true Section. 3 Instruction to all such (and others who are Lovers of the Products of Nature) and tell them of what Species Salt-Petre is, and of what 'tis made, also how to boil it, so that every one for his own Use may prepare it himself. Section. 4 Salt-Petre is a Stone-Salt, which hath in itself a sullen cold fire, therefore for many things serviceable, especially for separations (of which I have written in my Books before) and of great use for making Gunpowder from which it cannot well be spared) but 'tis to be made out of many Sorts of Earth, as hereafter follows. CHAP. II. Of what Earth Salt-Petre is best to be made. Section. 1 Sheep stalls. THE best Earth which is richest in Salt-Petre, and hath not much Salt, is the Earth out of old long-lain Sheep-stalls, which are very dry and not wet: The other Earth which yields good Salt-Petre is the Calx or Clay of very old Walls, in a Town or City: where the Earth itself Old walls. is Salt-Petrish, having not stood too wet, nor always dry, but sometimes moistened, and then again shined ●pon by the Sun: Section. 3 Next to this is the Earth which comes of broken Old Cellars Chalk-Walls in ruin'd Houses, built upon vaulted Cellars, and lain there some years, because the Vapours out of ☞ the Cellar through the Vault may draw it in, as also from the daily moistness from above, and so the Salt-Petre is generated: and this Earth may be digged to a good depth, for it lies mixed from above down to the Vault, which (by the beforementioned way) may be proved how deep the Earth shall be taken for the use. Also Earth which is old (and hath lain long in unplastered Section. 4 Houses, Cellars or Vaults) is good▪ but if Vnplastered Houses, etc. it lies not above a Span or half an Ell deep, it is not good to take up, therefore it must be tried; only take Notice, that in those places where you intent to boil Salt-Petre, must be also of Salt-Petre, or of a Saltish Nature, that they may be worked together. ☜ Now, those places in general which lay in good fat and claiey Countries, and the Earth of unplastered Hors-stables, or old sheep-houses (where the Sun hath power over it) as also the Earth of Brewers and of Dyers-houses, and of all Alumish places, and the Ashes of Soap-boilers and Tanners, and all other Ashes (whereof Lee is made) are very useful, only this latter Earth, does yield much Salt: which is some hindrance in boiling. CHAP. III. How Salt-petre is to be proved. SALT-PETRE and all other saltish Section. 1 Earth you must prove thus, Put it in a little Tub with water upon it, which may cover it a square hand, let it stand two or three hours, then let it run off, and retain the Lees. Then take a little Balance made on purpose, pretty Section. 2 quick in motion, that it may draw a half pound of the proof weight, then have two Scales of Brass or Copper, set in each weigh scale one, and in one of them a Centner of the Proof weight, and in the other Scale drop with the point of a Knife or a Spoon one drop of this Lees and after that another, until you have weighed a Centner of the Lees, then with Pincers take the Lees and the little Scale, which must have room for a Centner of Lees in it) from the Balance, and set it upon a foot made on purpose over a little warmth, or upon a piece of Iron-plate or Lamin, and hold a large Candle under it, and the Lee will begin to boil in the little Scale, and let it boil till all moisture is boiled in, and the remains becomes yellow-white, and hardish, then lift it off, and put it in the Balance again, lay as much of the proof-weight against it as it weighs, so you may see how much Section. 3 Salt-Petre a Centner of this Lee will yield; only observe, If you make your proof too hot, than the Salt-petre will be of a black-brown, and so spoiled, then make it anew, that the Proof may be right. But that you may know whether it be Salt-Petre or Section. 4 Vitriol, take with a knife, out of the little Scale, some of the rest of the matter, and lay it upon glowing Coals, and when it melts and burns, and is sharp upon the tongue and cold, than it is Salt-Petre, but if it be Salt and no Salt-Petre, than it sparkles upon the Coals, and will flow, and is upon the Tongue like a common sharp Salt. Section. 5 By such proof (performed with diligence) it▪ doth many times prevent that no unprofitable or saltish Earth is brought in or made to Lees, or boiled off (as I will show in my following Instructions.) After the Proof is made, observe diligently when the Salt-Peter doth burn, whether it leaves behind much feces or dregs like Ashes, which will not burn, and this is Salt. For, if it be found thus, though the Earth be pretty rich in the Proof, yet it is not to be accounted so good, as if the proof were poorer, and burned clear off upon the Coals, therefore the Salt by it is not so good, but it must always be separated from the proof, for it weakens the strong Lees, and hinders much in many things, as Experience showeth. But if you have not the Opportunity▪ with the Balance Section. 6 and Weights, or understand them not, then make a Another Proof. little Scale of Brass of a hand-breadth, and put off the Lee which is made in it, and set it upon a few hot Coals, let it boil in, as is above declared, so you may see whether the Lee which is made of the Earth be rich of Salt-petre or not, which is a nearer way also to have the Proof, yet he that knows it by Balance and weight is surest of his Reckoning. 7. How the Salt-Petre Lee is to be proved, the Sculpture following shows. Sculpture XXXVIII. Deciphered. 1. The Tub in which the Lee is to be made, out of which Salt-Petre is to be extracted, and the Can or Vessel to put water into that Tub. 2. The lesser Tub into which the Vessel doth run. 3. 4. The Master with his Balance, by which he proves the goodness of the Lee or Suds. 5. The Lamin▪ 6. The Candle. 7. Pincers. CHAP. IU. How the Lees or Suds shall be made out of the abovementioned Earth's. Section. 1 Lee Tubs. IF you will make a Lee of Salt-Petre Earth, then boil it▪ if▪ you have a great quantity, and let it be cut open, as deep as it is found good after your Proof, and put it among one another in a dry place, than cause Tubs to be made, of the bigness that one may contain 10 Wheel-barrows of Earth, so that you may have Lees enough, according to the bigness of the boyl-work, or greatness of the Kettle; now know that there usually appertains to a common great boyl-work, (when the Kettle weighs two Centners of Copper) eight Tubs, set them in such order, that on every side 4. (and so the eight one over against the other) must stand so far from one another, that one with a Wheel-barrow may run betwixt them, and the Tubs must stand an half Ell high from the ground, and every one shall have a Tap-hole below, and on the side, in which may be put a Tap of Wood, to be pulled out, and there must lay below under the Tubs a Channel in which the Lee may run together into Tubs or Sinks, placed in the ground, so as the ground may be higher than the tops of the Tubs. Section. 2 Of the reeds or sticks, to be used. When the Tubs are set, then lay in every one a bottom of Wood, full of holes▪ which doth not lie up from the bottom above two fingers high, and upon the same lay a bottom made to it on purpose of Sticks or Reeds (which grows by Rivers or Ditches (bound together a quarter of an Ell thick) but if such stuff cannot be had, then put upon the bottom full of holes, some chopped Straw▪ a span long, and upon the same Straw, lay small little Board's, that it may remain together, thus the Tubs are prepared, then run the Earth with a Wheel-Barrow into it, and when you can have old long-layen Tanners or Soap-boilers Ashes, from old holes▪ put two or three Wheel-barrows full of them below in the bottom, than put the other Earth (which you have proved and brought in also upon it) and so do until the Tub be full to a span breadth, then lay it upon an hurdle or frame of Reeds, and tie it fast, and let water be poured upon it (so much that it may remain standing a good square hand above the Earth) but if one could have a convenience of letting the Water upon it with a Channel, it were better) and do this so long, until the Water may▪ remain a good square hand above the Earth, and that it may be poured upon the Reeds or Hurdle, that no hole may be caused in the Earth, but remain even; then let the Water stand upon the Earth near 8 hours, then let the Lee run gently off below through the Tap-hole, till it doth run muddy, then pour the first Lee again upon the Earth, and so do till it runs clear, then run the Lees quite off and retain it, and this Lees is called the Weak-Lees. Section. 3 Of weak Lee. Then pour upon the once extracted Earth, common Water again, and let it draw out the other Water, which the first Water hath left in the Earth, and this that than comes the second time, is the after▪ Water▪ and is called watering out, and such Water one may use instead of fresh Water, upon new Earth, and that which runs from it is called raw Lees (which is strong enough to boil) and a Centner made of this common Earth, doth usually contain 3 to 4 pound of Salt-Petre, or above, then put the extracted Earth out of the Tubs and renew it again constantly, that one may have Lees enough to boil day and night, and need not delay boiling for want of Lees. Section. 4 Also there must be set above near the Kettle, a Tub, out of which may run so much Lees into the Kettle, as is boiled, that the Kettle may remain continually boiling, and always full; then boil this one day and night, until a Centner of Lee may be taken out of the Kettle, and may contain in the like Proof a quarter of a Centner, or 25 pounds of Salt-Petre, which may be done in two days, and one night. Section. 5 Then take two Tubs more, prepared with bottoms full of holes (and the sticks or red bottoms as aforesaid) only above the stuff must be laid again a bottom full of holes, and put straw upon it, and then Ashes of good Wood (of the best Elm) mingle it together, and moisten it with good warm Lees, before it be put into the Tubs, then being prepared, put it into the Tubs, an Ell high above the straw, but if you can have the Ashes for a small price, 'twere better to put them together in it, and then pour upon them the boiled Lees (containing 25 pound) boiling hot water, let it run gently off, and it will first come muddy, therefore put in more till it run clear. Section. 6 Strong Lees When all the Lees is gone through both Ashes, which is done that the Ashes may take the fatness of the Lees and become fit for washing, and so retain of that which runs first off a part, and put upon the extracted Ashes, common hot raw Lees, and let the Ashes be watered out with the same Lees which goes the second time through the Ashes, and is called strong Lees, than water it out the third time with hot Lees (and this is called weak Lees) after this the Ashesmay be watered out with common Lees, until the strength comes out of it. By the following Sculpture you are taught how the Tubs are to be set, and the Lees made and boiled from it. Sculpture XXXIX. Deciphered. 1. The eight Tubs into which the Petre-Earth is to be put. 2. The Pipe with a Brass Cock, by which the Water is let into the eight Tubs. 3. The Channel by which the Lees falls from each Tub, and so into the Receiver. 4. The Sink or great Receiver of the Lees. 5. The ninth Tub, from which the Lees runs into the Kettle. 6. The Oven wherein the Kettle stands. 7. The Kettle on the top of the Oven. 8. The Iron Door by which the Wood is to be put into the Oven under the Kettle. 9 The Wind-hole in the bottom of the Oven. 10. The Hole where the Oven may be seen into. 11. The Iron Grate on which the Wood doth lay. 12. The form of the Door by which the Oven may be looked into (being more largely Described than in Fig. 10.) CHAP. V. How to Boyl Lees or Suds. TAKE the weak Lees, and put it in the Kettle, and boil it, and then let the strong be gently put into the Kettle, and so boil the first strong Lee (which did run off) with it, till all comes in the Kettle, and the Lees be strong enough, and you must sometimes, with a great Copper-Spoon full of holes, stir the Lees about in the bottom of the Kettle, (for when the Lee yields Salt it will fall on the bottom of the Kettle) then lift it out with the great Ladle, and always take the scum from it, then prove the strong Lee by drooping one, two or three drops upon a cold Iron, and when the drops stand upon it like Butter (that is, when they flow not off, when you turn the Iron) than the Lees is strong enough, or set the Lees in a little Copper Vessel, upon cold water, till it becomes cold, than the raw Salt-Petre will show itself, whereby you may see always whether the Lee be strong enough, which may be seen also upon the great Spoon, wherewith you scum it, for if the Lees draw itself into a Body like an Oil, the proofs are right, now when the Lee is thus prepared, than a hundred pound of it will contain in the proof, very near seventy pound of Salt-Petre. CHAP. VI How to prepare Lees for the crude and raw Salt-Petre. WHEN the Lee is prepared (as above) Section. 1 put it out of the Kettle, into a very strong Tub, of good Wood, let it stand in it till it cool a little and the dirt settles, than the Salt will fasten itself in great Grains on the Wood, and when the Lees is cool, so that you may hold your finger in it, then draw it off through a Tap, which is to stand a span high from the bottom, and put it into great deep Wooden Troughs, or into Copper Kettles, which must stand in the ground, (the colder they stand the better) till the Salt-Petre grows, and in this the raw Salt-Petre will grow almost two fingers thick, partly white, partly yellow, and partly very black-brown. When the Lee hath stood in the growth two days and two nights, draw off the Lee from the Salt-Petre, and put it the second time over Ashes again with other strong Lee, else it will be too fat and will not grow, but when the Ashes are not good, (so that the Lee cannot grow) then put strong Lee with other Lee, over new good Ashes, and boil it again to grow (as above:) likewise when the strong Lee in the making is very muddy in the Kettle, and the Salt cannot fall because of the muddyness, if this happen, then only take out the Lee to the growth, and let the remaining Lee, purify through the Ashes. Now how the Salt is to be taken out, and how the strong Lee stands growing, this following Sculpture will show. Sculpture XL. Deciphered. 1. The long narrow Tubs wherein to cool the Lees. 2. The Oven wherein the Kettle is placed. 3. The Master that makes and takes out the Petre, and puts it into separating Baskets. 3. The separating Baskets. 4. The Tub out of which the strong Lee runs into the Kettle. 5. The Melters in which the Salt▪ Petre Improves. 6. The four Kettles standing in the Ground wherein the Salt-Petre also improves itself. 7. A strong Tub into which the Salt-Petre is to be cast as it improves. CHAP. VII. How to purify and cleanse the raw Salt-Petre. WHEN the Salt-Petre is thus made, and Section. 1 the rest of the Lees drawn off, lift up Raw Salt-Petre. the Kettles or Trays, and turn them to one end, that the remaining Lee may run clear off; then take a great Iron Spoon such as Bricklayers use, and lift out the Salt-Petre with it, out of the Kettles or Trays, put it into a Tub, with a hole below, that the Lees may run clean off. Section. 2 Some Salt-Petre Boilers, (who sell the raw unpurified Earth-Petre) they pour clean Well-Water upon it, that it may be well washed from the most part of its redness, and become white, what is run off they put again to other strong Lee, and boil it the next boiling. But if you will purify the raw Salt-Petre right and well Section. 3 from its Salt and uncleanness, to become fair and white, do To purify it it thus; When the raw Salt-Petre is a Centner or four, cause the purifying Kettle to be cleansed and dried, pour in it so much Well-Water, that the Salt-Petre may be dissolved in it, then make a fire under it, let the water be boiling hot, and then put the Salt-Petre gently and easily in it, and turn it about with the scumming Spoon, that the Salt-Petre may be the sooner and easier dissolved. But while you are pouring it into the Kettle, let there Section. 4 be but little fire under, that the cleansing may remain warm, and when the Salt Petre is almost all put into the water and melted, and the cleansing begin to boil, then with the scumming-Spoon, put some upon the ground, and when the Salt-Petre hath set great Grains of Salt, then lift it out, which is better for it. Section. 3 To make proofs. When this is done, and the cleansing begins to boil, than it brings up a black scum, take that off, and take a Copper Vessel which holds near 8 Loathes of strong Lees, and make it half full of the cleansing; put it in cold water to cool it suddenly, so the Salt-Petre will begin to shoot (and this is called a Proof made) than you will see whether the cleansing be yet too strong, if it be, there will come a skin over the Proof in the Vessel, and if so, then fill more warm water into the Kettle, and keep it in such a strength, that the cleansing in the Kettle may bubble, then make a Proof out of the Vessel, and when the cleansing shoots in it, and in the midst do remain open (so that it doth not close together) then the Proof is right, but if it grows together, then fill more water, till the Proof remain open, and pour near a pint of Vinegar in the cleansing into the Kettle, which will bring up a black scum, for the cleansing will purify itself of it, and when the scum is thick, take it off, and when the cleansing hath bubled a while longer, pour in it so much good Vinegar as may keep it in continual bubbling, and then take the To purify it again. black off, as at first, this you may do the third time, and pour on Vinegar, till the cleansing be very clean, and do cast up no more black scum; Then take 3 or 4 loathes of burnt-Allum, beaten small, and put it in the cleansed water, stir it about, and of this the Salt-Petre useth to yield fine long slacks, and it hurts not the Salt-Petre, then pour the cleansing in the before▪ mentioned high slender Tub, and cover it, that it be not cold in the Tub; let it stand an hour or two at most, thus the yellow dirt will settle itself in the bottom, then let the cleansing run out while 'tis hot, and pour it into a great wooden Tray, or great Copper Kettle, which for coolness had need stand in the ground, and cover them warm that the Lees may begin to spring from below, else the Salt-Petre will grow first above and fall down, and so will not yield very long slacks, let it stand three or four days until it grows no more, which you may prove thus; set some of the Lees in the Copper-proof Vessels▪ if it grow no more in it, then take away the rest of the Lees, and let it clean go off, and then put the Salt-Petre with the Iron Spoon, clean out of it, into a Vessel with a hole below, that the rest of the Lees may run off, and thus you have purified Salt Petre. The Lees which is drawn off (while it is yet salty) Section. 4 boil it as the other strong Lee (in making of the Salt or Lee) and from this the raw Salt-Petre will grow very well. But some use at the cleansing in the Kettle, Calx viva, by which it becomes as white as Milk, and they let it settle in the Tub, which makes the Salt-Petre very fine, but it settles not so soon or so well in the Tub, and while the cleansing stands thus strong in the Kettle, you must not make too great a fire, for if it boil too high, you can hardly quiet it, or hinder it from running over, whereby comes great loss, therefore it must be kept bubbling with a little flame, and when the Kettle is washed, such water is to be boiled again with the strong Suds or Lees, but the scum which is to be taken off from the cleansing must be put upon the Ashes, where more Lee is to be put over Ashes, that that which is yet in it may come to profit, and when you boil much in the Kettle, then lay upon it a hard grey stone, like the colour of Tartar, under which the Kittle useth to burn, and this is sometimes to be cleansed and separated off, with a flaming fire made under it, to make it fly off, and when the Kettle is empty and clean, than you may boil it again. The Earth and Ashes which have been extracted Section. 5 (whereof cometh the raw weak Lee,) are to be put in into vaults or Houses, and in four years it will be sit to use, only when you use it to make Lees, than you must (many weeks before) dig open such Vaults, that the moistness may go off, and the Sun may shine in, and of this good Lees may be made. Section. 6 But the old Masters do suppose, that if one could How Salt-Petre is generated and spoiled. run off the Petre in the Houses under Tyling, it would be sooner good, which is likely, for, because of too much moistness or daily rain upon it, the Salt-Petre is much spoiled, and will have only a little moistness, of which it is to be generated. Section. 7 To mingle splinters of Wood with it. Also some of the old Masters do use among the Earth in the Lees-Tub, to mingle bits of Fir Wood, a finger long, and these they put among the Earth, with the Lees that hath been made, and set it in the vaults or Houses, and such fatness which is used in the mingling the Salt-Petre ☞ doth also generate and multiply, and they say when it lays in a dry place, it may be used again within a year; likewise they pour upon the light poor Earth in Houses, the old decayed colours of Cloth-makers' or Dyers, or any sharp decayed colours of Waters made with Alum, yet not so often, but that such Earth may have a better beginning to a good effect. Next, they bring also Soot out of the Stoves, Furnaces and Chimneys, and mixed with the Earth, likewise the Ashes of such Lees as is made in Houses, and in the Nosel or Mouths of Ovens, where much Straw is burnt, which Ingredients do much help to a melioration, that it may sooner be used. Section. 8 Know this only by the way, That sometimes Earth is found which gives brown thick Lees, which of itself is too fat to make Salt-Petre of, amongst which you must mingle another Earth more brittle and lean, and with it put some made Lee over it, or else you will bring no Salt-Petre off from it fit to be washed. How the Salt Peter is cleansed, and what Instruments pertain to it, they are almost alike to the XXXIX. and XL. Sculptures next before, and out of the same to be seen. CHAP. VIII. How to cleanse the great Graind and black Salt-Petre Salt. Section. 1 THE black or grey Salt-Petre Salt, which is found (in boiling Salt-petre) below in The uses of it. the Kettle and slender-Tub, this may be good Salt for dressing Victuals, without any danger, only it must first be cleansed and purified thus: Wash well the Kettle, put in clean Well-Water, make under it a fire, and when it begins to boil, take the said Salt, put it gently in, and let it dissolve, stir it continually, and when 'tis all dissolved, then pour the Lees into a Tub, let it settle that the Lees may be clear, then wash the Kettle clean again, put the clear Lees or Suds in it, and boil it till the Salt fall in it, and then lift it out with the great Spoon, put it in a Basket above the Kettle, that the remaining Lees may run again into the Kettle, and lift up such Salt, until no more will fall, then dry it, and so it is prepared: But some before they use it, let the Salt glow out, by which it becomes stronger, and what remains of the Lees in the Kettle, boil it like the other Suds to a Lees, and put it out, and let the Salt-Petre grow out of it, for this Salt coming out of Salt-Petre, cannot be quite without Salt-Petre, but there will be still some among it, which is to be cleansed off thus. Take Notice if the Salt have too much Salt-Petre, or Section. 2 be very black and unclean, the Salt will not become very To make it white. white at once, for when the Lees begins to be strong, then ascends not white, therefore such unclean Salt must be dissolved in the Kettle once more, purified and cleansed, and then it will become very white. Section. 3 To purify the Salt through Ashes. There is another way of cleansing such black and unclean Salt, viz. one may put the dissolved Salt out of the Kettle thus warm, through the Ashes, over which already Lees hath been put, of which the salt Lees, will almost purify and cleanse itself, yet it becomes not all white Salt, but the last remains commonly yellow, therefore it must be cleansed once more; likewise take notice, that when the Salt is to be put over the Ashes, that it must be well watered out, that the red bottom may not be very salty, else it will come in the next strong Lees, and makes it very salt. And thus you have a true large Instruction of the Salt-Peter boiling, how it is to be usually observed; but it is a tedious and not profitable boiling for this reason, because there is in a Centner of Lees but three or four pounds of Salt Petre, therefore the Water remaining must all be boiled off, which takes much time and expenses, and cannot be avoided, but how it may be helped (as I myself have found out and used) I will Demonstrate in the next Chapters. CHAP. IX. How to make the raw Lees richer before the boiling▪ Section. 1 The manner of doing it. AFTER this way many Salt Peter boilers have searched, but the true Method (because they have not been guided by the little Proof) they could not find; but thus it is to be done. Take a Tub full of the Lees (of which a Centner contains four pound of Salt-Petre) pour it upon new Earth, let it stand upon it near 12 hours, that it may run off and as much as remains behind of the Lees, so much Water pour upon the Earth, and let it run through to the other, and thus you will receive so much again, as you had of Lees before; now when this is done, then prove the Lees, through the little Proof, so you will find (because of the other pouring over) it will contain 6 pounds, this 6 pounds of Lees, prove again upon fresh Earth, and let it stand 6 hours, and then run it off, and follow it with so much Water as remains behind upon the Earth; also that the first measure of Lees may come only again and not more, than the Lee will contain nine pounds, this you may once more pour over fresh Earth, and enrich it; but always observe, that the Lees may be neither more or less than it was at the first; and to follow this with Water in this manner, I only mention for the proof sake, that one may be sure of the enriching, for the Lees by this means will contain more Salt-Petre, and yet the Lees will not increase; then to supply the first measure of Lees, pour in some of the weak Lees, so it will be the sooner and more enriched, and of such you may then soon come to a Suds. And though there is much labour and diligence thus Section. 2 to enrich the Lees, yet it comes all again, for one may The profit. make in one Week two or three times more Salt-Petre▪ and it spends no more Wood, only it requires more Vessels to keep the Lees severally for their enriching. I will also show how the Salt-Petre boiling may be Section. 3 ordered to profit, first observe, because there appertains much of Earth to a great Boyl-work, and good Earth is not always to be had, but sometimes, if one cannot prove the Earth, very poor Earth is mingled amongst it, that the expenses are spent upon the poor as the good, and thereby no gain to be expected, therefore I judge it more profitable to make the Boyl-work with three or four Tubs, that one may take the best Earth which is to be had out of old Cities, Houses and Stables, yet not too deep, by which means such Lees as are of 8 pounds content, may easily be enriched (as above) to 18 or 20 pounds, and not done with so much boiling, this they may consider of, especially where Wood is dear. Section. 4 To water out the Earth. When the Lees is thus enriched, there will remain more Salt-Petre in the Earth (for the good Lees cannot take it all out) then upon this Earth pour common water, let it stand some hours and then run it off, so you will receive weak Lees, prove it, and make the enriching thus, as hath been showed, and so you may be continually at your work. Section. 5 To enrich Lees of Alum. Now because the Salt-Petre Lees may be enriched out of poor Earth (much more the Alum Lees out of the same Oar and Earth) and may be boiled to better profit, will by diligent searching, be found how it may be performed. Section. 6 Salts of Oars. After this manner I judge one may make Lees on all roasted Oars, and try what Salt they may yield, for I do believe that the roasted Lead Oars are not without such a salty matter, which I leave to farther Experience; But how a Salt-Petre Halls, Houses or Sheds, are seen to be on the outsides, you will see in the following Sculpture, thus Deciphered. 1. The forepart of the Salt-Petre House, wherein the Lee Tubs do stand. 2. The back part wherein the Kettle and the Oven do stand, wherein the Salt-Petre is to be boiled. 3. The Old Pieces of digged Earth, out of which Salt-Petre is to be taken. 4. The Wood used for boiling it. 5. The Servant that shaves and fits the pieces of Earth, for boiling, 5. 5. 5. Sculpture XLI. It is also to be observed, That the Salt-Petre Sheds must be built very low, as possible, and covered with Straw, whereby the warmth from the Kettle may go over the Tubs, especially in Winter, (if Earth is to be had for boiling) so that the weak Lees may not freeze. CHAP. X. How Flints are to be proved for Vitriol, and Allum-Oar for Alum. Section. 1 FIRST you must observe, that all Flints To make Lees of it. are Coppery or Vitriolish, and some more rich than others, the proof is thus; Roast the Flint very well, cool it, beat it small and make Lees of it, then weigh a Centner of it, and prove it, (as is said of the Salt-Petre Lees) and what remains in the little scale, weigh against the weight, than you may find how rich the Flint is: But that you may be sure it is Vitriol is good, but when the proof doth not so, then make more Lees, and try it in a little pan of Lead, that you may know what kind of species it doth yield. Section. 2 Many think that because we make Vitriol-Lees out of Roast-Oars and Copper-Stone, therefore we may out of Copper and Silver, etc. which is with good profit to be melted out of them, yet 'tis found, that out of the same Flint, and Copper-stone, made into Lees, there hath been made much less Copper than when it had been melted ☞ before the making them into Lees, by reason the Vitriol Lees which is made of it, hath drawn out the most part of the Copper, and somewhat of the Silver, therefore it is not to be trusted to, nor any account to be made of it. Section. 3 But the Allum-Earth or Shiffer, if you prove it for Proof upon Alum. Alum, it matters not that it be roasted, neither can it be done raw with it, as it comes out of the Vein, but it must lay a while upon a heap together, to be weathered and warmed in itself, that it may fall asunder and break out, and then you may make Lees of it, and you will find by the proof of the Alum upon the Tongue, that it draws it together very Vitriolish. Vitriolish Water in the Mines. Further, we may observe, that in the Vitriol-Mines Section. 4 (as at Goslar upon Cuttemburg, and other places) that the Waters which by Art are drawn out of the deepest Mines are for the most part vitriolish, yet some more than others, and if such Water might be directed in wooden Pipes into the Boyling-Work, and boiled for Vitriol, it would yield good profit; yet when this is done, you must take heed that no sweet-Water (which by Arts is brought into the Mines or other Tiling Water,) may come among it, but such Waters (as above) you may prove, and further after your pleasure make profit by them. Also on this wise you may prove all Wells or Springs of Salt (after the beforementioned little proof) and search and know properly how rich they be. And I was willing to mention these Instructions, for Section. 5 salty-Proofs, that those who are now concerned, may know how the better to manage them. Thus much, loving Reader, I have writ of proving all Section. 6 sorts of Oars and Metals, and other necessary things fit to be known, for proving and meltiug them, to the good and profit of all Mine-workers and young Assayers, and for such as are ignorant of these Arts: and this I have done in five Books, most faithfully and diligently, and also given very large Instructions, by writing and Sculpturing the same; and I desire for this time that every one who loves or inclines to these Sciences, will be content with it, and accept of my good Intentions, for these are not designed for Magisterial Artists. Now in these Books I have not undertaken to treat of all Oars singly, upon preparing and melting them in the great Works, because I could not well discharge myself therein, in respect that it would be a greater Task than my present Services can admit of, yet I will reserve it to a farther Opportunity, and I will also respite my Labour to discover how the Gold and Silver upon the Coined Works are to be ordered, upon divers certain Contents, and so made to profit, which would require a particular and more large Volumn, considering that it is a great Work and for many years (with other things pertaining to the Coyn'd-Works) have been as Secrets, and therefore I Section. 7 will also let them be as Secrets for the present. And although Goldsmiths, common Assayers and Merchants, do suppose when they can reckon some dress of the Crucible, they have the perfect Art, yet they want the most needful and best parts; namely, they have not been with the Coiners, neither have they any true understanding or exercise of it, and therefore in these matters nothing could be done with fruit or profit. Section. 8 Now concerning the Generation of Oars and Metals, of which the Philosophers and Naturalists have wrote and disputed very much, I leave all of them to others with their Rules and Opinions of the Mine-Workers, by reason that their thoughts and presumptions, are not only uncertain, but ofttimes wide and agree not together; yet I really believe, That God the Almighty Creator hath reserved these Mysteries to his Almightyness, and that Gold, Silver and all Metals through his Everlasting Word, the Son of God (from whom Heaven and Earth, and all things which are in them have their Creation and Being) are to this day preserved and multiplied, and that the knowledge of them are come to clear light, and published for his Glory and the good of Mankind; for which glorious Gifts, every one ought with pure Zeal to praise and thank God from his Heart, and employ all his diligence and reason, so that what he may have out of the Mine-Works may be used to the praise of God, and to the profit, help and advantage of his Neighbours, whereby God the Almighty will not only bless it, but also richly Multiply the Possessors of it, and cause them to enjoy it to the Salvation of their Souls. Now, may the Lord God, Creator and Preserver of all Creatures, be graciously pleased to open the hidden Treasures of the rich Gold Soap, also of Gold, Silver and all Metallick Veins, for upholding the Posterity of the Poor Sons of Adam, and by blessings and long continuance, preserve them for his beloved Son, our Lord Jesus Christ's sake, and that we may use them with thanks and praise. Amen. FINIS. Fleta Minor, Spagyric LAWS, The Second Part. CONTAINING ESSAYS ON Metallick WORDS: Alphabetically composed, as a DICTIONARY TO Lazarus Erckern. Illustrated with two Sculptures. By Sir John Pettus, of Suffolk, Knight. Scire tuum nihil est▪ Nisi te scire, hoc sciet alter. LONDON, Printed, for the Author, by Thomas Dawks, his Majesty's British Printer, at the West-end of Thames-street. 1683. Kind Reader, YOU are desired to take notice, That all the following words are only transciently used in the Essays, and therefore referred to the Capitals of the Dictionary, and the Capitals of the Dictionary are referred to some parts of the five Books of Erckern. Adam vide Gold. Egypt v. Gold. Egyptians v. Quicksilver. Aethiopia v. Gold. Aes v. Brass. Aetna v. Bitumen. Africa, v. Gold. Alabaster, v. Marble, Plaster. All v. Chemistry. Allays v. Mony. Alum v. Minerals. Almonds v. Blanch. Alpha v. Regulus. Amethyst v. Metals. Antimony v. Metals, Minerals. Antarctic v. Gold, Loadstone. Antidotes v. Dung. Architecture v. Calcine. Armoniac v. Minerals. Aaron's Bells v. Bell. Arsenic v. Mineral. Arctic v. Gold, Loadstone. Ashes v. Gold, Pulveration. Ass' v. Bone. Asia v. Gold. Atlantic v. Gold. Auricalcum v. Wire. Barley corn v. Measures, Money. Barm v. Yeast. Bee's v. Putrefaction, Regulus. Beergood v. Yeast. Beer v. Blink. Black Lead v. Lead. Blood v. Gold. Bloodstone v. Polish. Board's v. Planks. Boar v. Bacon. Borneo flu. v. Gold. Botanist v. Colour. Bread v. Feces. Brimstone v. Minerals. Bullock v Ox. Buxtons' Wells v. Mines. Calcanthum v. Sublimatum. Calaminaris v. Brass, Mineral. Chameleon v. Eggs. Camel v. Armoniac. Capa longa fish v. Conglutinate. Cedar v. Gold. Ceruse v. Lead. Chaldeans v. Quicksilver. Chalck-stone, v. Led, Lime. China earth, v. Earth. Chiromancy v. Measures. Cinders v. Coal. Cinnabar v. Minerals, Quicksilver. Clay v. Loadstone. Cloth v. Filtration. Coaches v. Yellow. Coin v. Mint, Mony. Consonants v. Regulus. Constellations v. Loadstone. Copper v. Metal. Corrosion v. Calcine. Counterfeits v. Mony. Christ v. Gold. Crocus v. Verdigrease. Cubit v. Measures. Cup v. Pipkin. Damp v. Evaporation, Mines. David v. Gold. Dew v. Feces. Diamonds v. Metal, pulveration. Discourses v. Regulus. Devil's arse v. Mines. Dodmans' v. conglutinate. Dogs v. Dung. Dovegang v. Mines. Dram v. Measures. Ducks v. Dung. Dung v. Eggs, Gold. Durdans' v. Petrefaction. Dust v. Pulveration. Earthquake v. Boiling. Ebb v. Loadstone. Eden v. Gold. Eels v. Putrefaction. Eldon hole v▪ Mines. Electrum v. Metals. Elbow v. Measures. Ell v. Measures. Elephant v. Armoniac and Dragons Blood. England v. Loadstone, Waterstones, etc. English Mines, v. Mines. Equinoctial v. Gold. Erckern, Etymology v. Alchemist. Essays v. Assay. Europe v. Gold. Eye v. Needle. Fathom v. Measures. Fermentation v. Yeast. Finger v. Gold. Fish v. Eggs. Flax v. Flux. Flesh v. Gold. Flowing v. Loadstone. Flower v. Fermentation, Yeast. Fly's v. Putrefaction. Fort v. Measures. Foam v. Yeast. Frankincense v. Xiphion. Froth v. Litarge, Yeast. Fuller's earth, v. Earth Fusile, v. Fusion. Gallenist, v. Quick silver Ganges, v. Gold Geese, v. Dung. Gems, v. Colours, Metals Germane Mines, v. Mines God, v. Gold, Regulus Goldsmiths, v. Gold. Gold, v. Metals God's-good, v. Yeast. Gums, v. Yellow Gunpowder v. Boiling, Pulveration. Guts v. Bells Guenea v. Gold Hards v. Flocks Havilah v. Gold Heaven v. Quicksilver Hebrews v. Quicksilver Hell v. Quicksilver Herrings, v. Ashes Hens v. Eggs. Hides v. Bellows Hesperideses, v. Gold Holy Ghost v. Regulus Hony-Comb v. Putrefaction Horse v. Dung. Hungary v. Mines Iclingham v. Earth Idols v. Dung Jesus v. Gold Inch v. Meeasures India v. Gold. Industry v. Alchemist Ink, v. Copperas Iron v. Metals, Oars. Ising-glass fish v. Conglutinate Isop, v. Gold Ivory, v. Black. King v. Regulus. Lapis celestis v. Vitriol. Led v. Metals. Oars. Leather v. Expression. Lees, v. Pulveration. Leimster v. Flocks Lethargy v. Littarg Letters 24 v. Regulus Leven v. Firmentation. Limbus patrum v. Quicksilver. Limbus Infantium v. Quicksilver. Limpet fish v. Conglutinate Linen v. Expression Linsy woolsy v. Timode linseed-oil v. Oils Liquid v. Regulus Litturgy v. Littarge Loadstone v. Gold Lombardy v. Gold Luna v. Quicksilver Magnas v. Loadstone Magnes v. Loadstone Magnus v. Loadstone Magnetism v. Loadstone Mediterranean v. Gold. Mendip v. Mines Menstruum v. Extraction Mice v. Putrefaction Mercury v. Quicksilver Miles v. Measure: Quicksilver Millstones v. Quarry Mines Royal v. Copper. Mine-Counties, and no Mine-Counties v. Mines Miniature v. Colours. Minium v. Quicksilver. Moon v. Quicksilver. Money v. Coin Mortar v. Earth. Moses v. Gold. Music Instruments v. Bells. Mutes v. Regulus. Nails v. Loadstone. Navigation v. Loadstone. Needle v. Loadstone. Nigro Fl. v. Gold. Nilus' v. Gold. Nitre v. Minerals. Norwich v. Boiling. North v. Petrefaction. Oakers v. Arsenic. Earth. Obedience see Regulus. Officers v. Alchemist. Mint. Oky hole see Petrifaction. Onion see Loadstone. Os Oris, Os Ossis see Bone▪ Orpiment see Minerals. Ox see Dragon's blood. Oysters see conglutinate. Palm see Measures. Palmistry see Measures. Paper see Filtration. Paradise see Gold. Peat see Turf. Peacock see Dung. Pencils see Coal. Pint see Measures Pison see Gold. Planks see Planks. Planets see Colours. Plant see Loadstone. Plate see Silver. Pliers see Pincers. Plawing see Boiling. Plymouth see Calcine. Poland see Mines. Policy see Polish. Pools Hole see Putrefaction. Powder see Weight. Powder of Projection see Alchemist, dulcification, Flowers, pulveration. Prayer see Gold. Priest see Gold. Pugil see Measures. Purification see Gold. Put see Polish. Quenching see Steel. Quicksilver see Gold, Metals, Pulveration. Ratsbane see Arsenic. Reason see Ground. Rebeckah see Gold. Red Led see Lead. Religion see Gold. Resurrection see Calcine, Gold, Pulveration, Dust, Ashes, Quicksilver. Riddle see Rattar, Rising see Yeast, Runt see Ox, Sables see Sands. Sand see Earth, Russet. Saphire see Metals. Sandiver see Minerals. Scarlet see Gold. Scurf see Scales. Scruple see Measures. Screen see Rattar. Seeve see Rattar. Sentences see Regulus. Separation see Cement. Shafts see Mines. Sheppy Island see Copper as. Syllables see Regulus. Silver see Metals. Sinoper see Armoniac. Skin see Gold. Smerna-soap see Bacon. Snails see conglutinate, Putrefaction. Sodom see Bitumen. Sods see Turf. Snakes see Egg. Solomon see Gold. Soul see Loadstone. Span see Measures. Speckled see Missy. spital see Phlegm. Spring see Salt. Stanneries see Tin. Sterling money see Money. Steer see Ox. Stibium see Minerals. Still's little see Limbeck. Stones see Petrefaction. Sublimation see Fixation. Sugar see Dulcification Sulphur see Phlegm, Minerals. Tobacco pipe see Coal. Talc see Minerals, Plaster. Teasle tree see Petrefaction. Terrella see Loadstone. Terra Sigillata, Lemnia, Arminia see Earth. Testis v. Test. Thane see Athanor. Thumb see Measures. Thummim see Alchemist. Tide-Well see Boiling. Tin see Metals. Tongues see Pincers. Touchstone see Marble, Needle. Travelling see Money. Tree of Life, of good and ill see Alchemist, Gamahez. Truth see Balance. Variation see Loadstone. Venice see Mines. Venus see Quicksilver. Vermilion see Quicksilver. Virgula Divina see Xanthus. Vitriol see Phlegm. Visuvius see Bitumen. Vitriol see Minerals. Union see Cement. Vowel see Regulus. Vows see Regulus. Urine see Alchemist. Wales see Mines. Water see Gold. Wax see Plaster. Weapon salve see Bacon. Weather see Loadstone. Wells, v. Boiling, Mines, Wheel▪ Wheat see Measures. White lead see Lead. Wisset see Blanch. Withy Tree see Coal. Wool see Flocks. Wood see Gold, Petrefaction. Work see Needle. Words see Regulus. World see Vein. Yard see Measures. Yeast see Fermentation. Zambre see Gold. Zaclar see Gold. THE Reader is desired to amend or connive at the Omissions of the folios of the first 80 pages, and to alter these words, p. 8. l. 24. r. Tentare. p. 16. l. 15. r. Ceneres. p. 20, l. 25. r. or woollen. p. 29. l. 15. r. koinos. p. 41. l. 13. r. Warner. p. 42. l. 11. r. Moving. p. 60. l. 15. r. Lamins. p. 64. l. 31. r. Maritime. p. 74. l. 27. r. Thumb. p. 92. l, 20. deal And r. It. p. 97. l. 4. r. draining. p. 110. l. 7. r. Herbert. p. 120. l. 11. deal un. r. Dressed. p. 121. l. 10. r. Coasts. p. 128. l. 11. r. Emerald l. 21. r. Lazuli: Some other there are by want of points, or vowels or Consonants, or misplacing of Capital Words, wherein I hope the Reader will pardon the Printer, considering my Circumstances. ESSAYS EXPLAINING Metallick WORDS: Alphabetically disposed, as a DICTIONARY or INDEX to the whole. Note, T. signifies the Teutonical or Upper German Language. L. The Latin. A. The Anglican or English: The rest are written at large, being but seldom used. ALL A ALL ALCHEMY. T. Alkumy, L. Alchimia, but by Plautus is writ Orchimia, which may well have relation to our word o'er or Oar. The Lord Verulam tells us, 'Tis an ART of Distilling or Drawing Quintessences out of Metals by Fire, separating the pure from the impure, setting at liberty such Bodies of Metals as are bound and imprisoned, and bringing to perfection such as are unripe, and this is the chief subject of this Book; now in his Lordship's mentioning Fire, in this Definition, it seems only to relate to Culinary Fires: But I apprehend this ART looks higher, even to the use of Celestial Fires; from the Sun and Stars, and their influential Heats, gained by Contractions, Reflections, etc. which are or may be used in this Art, as will be shown. ALCHEMIST, T. Alchumist▪ L. Alchimista (from the Greek Alkamos, or Hebrew Alkum) is one that is used or skilled in the Art of Alchemy or Chemistry, and therefore in A. he is commonly called Alchemist or Chemist, Melter, Prover, Assayer or Extracter of Quintessences; and such an one was our Author. But before we fix our Title or Epithet to the Master of this Science, it is fit to show the Progresses of it; at the first step to it, he is called, a Miner, or he that finds out and digs (or causes to be digged) the Metallick Oar out of such Mines. The second is the Washer, or he that washeth the Oars from their useless Excrements or adherences. The third is the Stamper, that knows how to beat or stamp them by mills or otherwise into such Particles as that they may be fitted for smelting Ovens (which are the great melting Works, but called Smelting for distinction from the lesser.) The fourth, is the Smelter of the great Quantities in those great Ovens or Furnaces. The Fifth, is the Finer that smelts them over again, and separates the metals in the great Works. The sixth is the Refiner, that melts them again so often as he thinks fit, till he hath brought the separated Metals to their several perfections and entireness. The seventh, is the Prover or Assayer, who by Tests, Crucibles, Weights and other Experiments is able to judge of all Oars, either as they come from their Veins, or made into melted, fined or refined Metals; and such an Assayer was our Author in all these seven Gradations, and therefore entitled the far renowned Laxarus Erckern, Berkmeister, or Chief Prover, (which we call, Assayer) of the Mines of the Emperor of Germany, and the depending Principalities of that Empire. In what Emperors time he lived, I cannot learn, but his five Books were printed and published at Antwerp, Anno. 1629. from which many of the younger Chemists of this Age have derived their skill, by Copies surreptitiously gained from my first Translation, about 14 years since, which occasions my printing of it now, being made more perfect. His Name, Lazarus, is in Imitation of the old Romans, Germans and Belgicks, who assumed Names suiting to their temper, or some observable Actions: the word Lazarus signifies in Sacred Writ one that was beloved of our Saviour, also one that was raised from the Earth; and, in the Parable, signifies a good poor man in Abraham's Bosom, and accordingly in the conclusion of his fifth Book, he shows his Zeal for God's Glory, and his true Belief in Jesus Christ, assisting him in his deep Knowledge of Metallick Science, and he might well expect, by his Humility of mind to be lodged in Abraham's Bosom (who we find was well versed in Metals:) and the Rosy Crucius (of whom Majerus and Spagnetus do give a full account, being a sort of Metaphisical Chemists, who do make it a chief Principle of that Science, to be strict in their Devotion towards God, and just towards men, without which they believe they cannot attain to any Perfection in this Science: also Paracelsus (that great Chemist) goes so far as to make the two Trees of Life, and of Good and Evil, and the Vrim and Thummin, (and many other things written by Moses) to be only mystically related to this Science; but to pass by this. His other Name is Erckern (Erskerus being but a mistake in the first Translator, for in the Original it is Erckern) now Erk in T. is Oar, and Kern in T. is granum, or grain; so that to kern is to granulate (which is to reduce Metals into certain proportions of the purest part which they call grains:) also kern signifies to pulverize any thing▪ and so may be applied to Metals, whereby it may intend also that magisterial powder of Projection (of which I shall speak more:) or else it may very well come from the Latin word Cernere, which we English to discern, the Latin often using c for k; and so we do in our Language, so kern or cern, may justly signify to see, know or judge. Now joining all together, I may represent him as an humble minded industrious man, that knows how to judge of all Oars, and how to manage the Products of them, for the Glory of God, and good of mankind. By which we may see how Goodness and Industry do improve the Fortunes and Esteems of such men, and that the exact Knowledge of this Noble Science, and Art of Proving or Assaying Metals, do raise them to be owned, and dignified, even by Emperors, Kings, Princes and States; and their very Names renowned to Posterity, as may be seen in Histories. Now, I have shown the seven Gradations to a Chemist, so I must tell you that he looks on himself in an higher degree and justly defined, according to the Lord Virulam, for he, not only knows all these seven Gradations, but also knows how to Extract Quintessences or several marvellous Works out of all, and if he would stop there (as Erckern doth) it were well for him, but it seems he cannot be content, unless he attains to the high Elixir or Powder of Projection or Philosophers-Stone, which is believed by some of them to have a power of Transmuting or turning all other Metals into Gold; but by woeful Experience of some men's credulity, instead of turning every thing into Gold, they have turned all their Gold into nothing (Verulam.) But our Author (though it may well be supposed, that he knew much more than he writ) goes no farther in his Books, than what is safe and fit to be known and published; i. e. only concerning Fining and Refining of Metals, neither stooping too low to the meaner Gradations, nor ascending too high to the Metaphisical Speculations, but leaves those subjects to other Writers. Now, as for the word Alchemist, it is the same thing with Chemist, but usually taken in an imperfect or ill Sense (like Ben. Johnson's Alchemist) that is, one that can or pretends to counterfeit Metals: so that to sum up the chief Terms; an Assayer judgeth of the purity of Metals, and the Chemist improves this purity to Spirits, Quintessences, Virtues, etc. But the Alchemist, Counterfeits and Adulterates them, by making them appear to be pure, which realy are not pure, but mixed with other sophistications, (Verulam.) Of this latter our Author is not Guilty; so as he stands for a renowned Assay-Master, a good Chemist, and one that understood, but was not a Sophisticating Alchemist, nor a Lapidarian Philosopher, or Metaphisical Projector. See Assaying. Alkali or Alcali, reckoned by Doctor Wilkins amongst Stones, but here and in other parts of the V. Books, called Sal Alkali, which is a Salt made of the Herb Kali or Salicornia; vulgarly called Glasswort: The herb is hot and dry, and therefore such Salts of that Quality are called alcalous, and this Salt is often used by our Author, as having a nature to discoagulate Metals, by opening their Bodies. (l. 1. c. 32. s. 4.) ALIMBECK, See Limbeck. ALLOY, T. Linderen. L. Mitigare. A. to lessen or allay▪ See Money and Coin. ALUM, T. Alaum. L. Alumen, from Lumen, in respect of its transparency and nearness to Crystal, and is accounted among the brighter stones; of this Mineral there are several sorts from several Mines, and Alum works erected in England, and they are also in many parts of Europe, some more acid and sharp in taste than others, by which their goodness is chiefly distinguished: and this Mineral is of great use to Chemists, Dyers and others Artists. l. 2. c. 4. s. 5. AMEL, or to Enamel, T. Eyn-brennen, and is called the metallic Calx or Lime, compounded of two parts, viz. one of Lead and one of Tin, and being well calcined in an Oven of Reverberation makes the Amel, and in the making 'tis so delicately tinged with variety of colours, (the Art being grown to so much perfection in this age) that all sorts of Features, Images, Landscapes, etc. are so lively represented to the eye in a condensed work of the same, that they are as delightful and more durable than those which are done with oil or gums, l. 2. c. 4. s. 1. see Nealing. AMONIACK, see Armoniak. ANTIMONY, T. Speiz and Speiz-glass (which is properly Glass made of Antimony) L. Stibium, and it is also called by some Mineralists Red Lion, Wolf and Proteus (in respect of its various qualities). It is a heavy, bright Oar, like Lead, but more speizy and porous, and less ponderous, and some give it the name of white stone or imperfect Metal (because they say, it is the beginner or producer of Silver or Lead) and the extracts made out of it, are of singular Virtues of, which his late Highness Prince rupert's red drops were chimically made, and given with good success for most Diseases, l. 4. c. 17. AQUA FORTIS, (which for brevity is printed Fort.) T. Scheid-wasser, called by Lat. Chemists Aqua separatoria, and is a composition of Nitre and Vitriol, etc. and this liquor is used for dissolving and separating Gold and Silver, and hath many other excellent properties, as may be collected from the 5 Books. l. 2. c. 16. to c. 34. AQUA regis, is a water made of Aqua fort. and other compositions, and is of a more strong and corrosive nature than aqua for't, and it is observable the aqua for't. is a specific for silver, and this aqua regis for gold, for it will touch only gold and not silver. l. 2. c. 28. Aqua argentea, see Quick silver, and metals. Aqua Vitrioli, see Vitriol, and minerals. Aqua dulcis, see common water. Aqua fontis, see Spring water. ARGOL, T. Weinstein, L. Tartarum, and in English Tartar or the Lees of Wine, which sticks to the sides of wine-Vessels, hard and dry like a crust, and therefore sometimes called Argol-stone from its compacted hardness, and this is of great use in metallic Operations, l. 1. c. 10. s. 17. and other places. l. 1. See Feces. ARITHMETIC, T. Rechenkunst, L. Arithmatica, the Art of Numbering, or Reckoning, according to the T. and this Art of all others is the most assisting to the Metallick Science, in judging of the goodness of Metals, after Fining and Refining them. l. 1. c. 1. ARMENICK▪ See Armoniac. ARMONIAC, T. gives it the Latin Name, Bolus Armeni, and we Bole Armoniac, and I find these words of kin, both in their Orthography and Pronunciation, viz. Amoniack Armenick and Armoniac. The first Pliny tell us, l. 24. is a Gum which he calls Gumma Amoniaci, of a glutinous nature (like other Gums) and so may be used for Metallick Vessels. The second viz. Armenick; I find the word Shall always joined with it, and so called Sal Armenicus, and this Salt was anciently accounted a natural Salt, but that being now unknown to us, we use the Armenicus, which is made of the Urine of Elephants or Camels (as 'tis said) boiled to a Lixivium or Salt, and called Sal Armenius or Armeniacus, and this is of great use for purifying and refining of Metals. To the third Armoniacus the word Bole is added, I suppose for distinction sake: Pliny, c. 35. mentions a Stone, which he calls Lapis Armeni, of which he counts several sorts, but the best of those he saith, are of a blue colour, and calls it verd de Azure (being of great price and esteem with Painters, but the common Armoniac he calls Synoper (and we Synople) from a City of that name, where it was plentiful, and 'tis probable this is the same which we call Bole Armoniac, being of a reddish colour, and this is oft used by our Author, and for distinction the word Gum is put to the first, Salt to the other, and Bolus to this: which I write to prevent Errors in Medicines or Metallick Experiments. l. 2. c. 20. ARSENIC, T. Arsenic, L. Auripigmentum, We, Orpine or Orpiment, and commonly Rats-Bain (being used to kill Rats) of Arsenic there are two sorts, yellow and red, (which some, by mistake, esteem to be red Ochre) Pliny, l. 34. saith, it is of the same substance with Sandarack, and inclines to that Colour, the best of which, saith he, resembleth Gold, and therefore I suppose called yellow orpiment. There is also a white or Crystalline Arsenic, which is compounded of Salt and the yellow Orpiment, so becomes transparent like Crystal, and from thence is made the white Ratsbane, and it may be observed this white, consists of two parts, viz. a crusty or external part, and a Crystalline or internal part, and this makes metal brickle, the other solid, and of the Regulus of this mineral a good metal may be made, l. 1. c. 14. s. 1. See Sulphur. ASHES, T. Ashen, L. Ciner, A. Ashes, and these are made so by the power of Fire, from metals, minerals, stones, bones, earth and wood; which puts me in mind of those trees which plentifully grows in England, called Ashes, T. Esschen or Asschen-Baum, quod optimos cerneres efficiant (Minslaw) but the L. calls it Fraxinus, and of this Ashen-wood I have seen the great effects of it at Yarmouth and Laistoff in Suffolk, for with this wood and no other they dry their Herrings, (which is a profitable commodity to them) and it seems that the Salt and drying Vapours of that Wood, do cure (for so is their term) their Herrings of all malignities: and doubtless that wood is most proper where it is to be used for dissolving metals, and the ashes of it rather than any other for metallic uses (except Bone-ashes) and especially for Salt-Petre which is the Subject of the 5th Book. l. 2. c. 20. s. 5. See Dust, Bone-Ashes, Pulveration, etc. ASSAYER, T. Probirer, L. Probator. A. Assayer or Tryer. To ASSAY, T. Probiren. L. Probare. Which we call also to Assay, Prove or Try Metals, all intending the same thing, though different in Dialect; but there is another Word of the like signification, which is written with an E. as Essayer and to Essay, etc. both are rendered, by Dictionaries to Try, L. Tentare, Probare Now I think, some have committed an Error herein, and aught to have made a more clear distinction, for I take Assaying to have relation only to things of Weight, as Metals, etc. from the word As or Assis, (which signifies a pound Weight, or 12 Ounces, or the whole of any substance which may be divided into parts) and especially applicable to the greatest or smallest Coins that are made of any Metal, which many times were, and still are of Copper or Brass, which the L. call Aes, and thereupon I suppose it is sometimes writ Essaying (without a diphthong) and so confounded these two words in their applications, and to confirm my just distinction of them. We read in the Stat. of H. 6. c. 12. that the King's Officer of the Mint, who, (as the Statute saith) is indifferently appointed between the Master of the Mint and the Merchant (which brings Silver thither to be minted) is called the King's Assayer, and not Essayer, and in the Records Assaisiator not Essaisiator, (See Goldman 's Dict.) And some latin Records render it metallorum prebendorum Praefectus, and the Italians, Assaggiatore, and the Belgic calls Assay, Examen Probitatis monetae, applying the word wholly to Metals, but Essay they define it specimen artis, or Exemplum quaesitae artis. (See Binworts Biglotton.) 'tis true the French make the two words indifferent: yet further to support this distinction in our English Language, the ever to be admired Lord Virulam calls his excellent Observations on Men and things, Essays and not Assays, and so Dr. Don (a Critic in our Language, and in general Learning) calls his acquaint Discourses on some Pieces of Divinity Essays and not Assays, and therefore to prevent the misapplication of those two Words (with submission to those of this present age, who write themselves Essayers and not Assayers of Metals) I take leave in these Discourses to apply the word Assayer and Assaying to Metals, and metallic substances, and the word Essayer and Essaying to Accidences, and other ingenuous Undertake, and not to metallic substances, having such Authorities, as I have cited to countenance me, l. 2: c. 2. ATHANOR, T. Heinzen thurne▪ L. Fornax, which we also call Kiln or Oven, and indeed is only a Furnace of several shapes, so this is called Athanor from its distinct shape from others Furnaces or Ovens being like a Thurn, which in Teut is a Tower; but from whence the word Athanor to which the name of this kind of Furnace is given, I cannot find, unless it be from the Greek word Athanatos which signifies immortal) and so the spirits of the Metals which are drawn from thence into lesser Ovens, and so into Recipients, do thereby perfect Quicksilver which may be said to be of an immortal nature. Or else from the Saxon word Thane, which signifies Noble, as also a Servant: and thence called Athaner or Athanor, because it hath those two properties, as being the most noble of all Furnaces for Metals: and also the most serviceable in the operations of refining Metals, l. 2. c. 7. s. 2. See Ovens. BA B BASILIUS BACON (signifying here the Fat of Hogs or Swine) the Original of which word I cannot trace, with any satisfaction to myself, either from the T. Speck or L. Lardum, nor from a Boar, T. Eber, which is pretty near L. Aper) nor from Sow, T. Saw, L. Sus and Scrofa, nor from Swine, T. Schwene, L. Porcus, but refer you to Skinner's Dictionary. And though this is oft mentioned by Erckern for greasing of Instruments, yet in respect of the Salt in it, I conceive it were better to use the fat of a Boar (especially when any Metal is concerned) because I know it is as effectual in curing of wounds at distance, as the so admired unguentum Armarium, commonly called the Weapon-salve; and since it hath such a kindness to Metals, I know not how it may not be better used than Venetian or Smerna Soap, for improving Gold, Silver, Tin, etc. and so in stead of Gold-soap called Golden Bacon. l. 2. c. 4. l. 4. c. 15. l. 5. c. 10. BALANCE, or a pair of Scales, T. en wagmit Zwyen Schustun: but the L. call it Bilanx, habens duas lances, or two little Vessels to contain the things to be tried, and also statera, because it demonstrates the state of the thing in question, and the tongue of this Balance is in the T. Wigzunglain, L. Lingua, and Examen, because by standing in an equipoisure or not, it doth as it were speak or tell you the difference or certainty of the Weights, in question, and the Latin hath another word for it, viz. Trutina, from the Greek Trutane, which not only signifies a Balance, but a diligent examining, or good advice and judgement, and from this Trutina we borrow the word Truth, and as the natural tongue of men speaks the truth of the Heart, so this artificial tongue speaks the truth of the Balance and Weights, and this Balance is very necessary to the performance of this metallic science. l. 1. c. 35, 36, 37. BEAM, the word is applied to the beam of an House, and the beam in the eye, the beam of a plough, a Weaver's beam, but though we use the same word for many things in English, yet they all differ in other Languages by distinct words: but this is called T. schnalwag, and in Latin the same with Balance. See Ballance. BELL, T. Schelle, i. e. sonitus, that which yields a sound, and it either comes from Belle an adverb signifying that which is pleasing to the ear, or from tuneable Instruments that were used in Tempore Belli, and though by the Italians they are called Campane, upon pretence of their original, from Campania a noble region in Italy, yet we find in Exod. 28. that there were golden Bells upon Aaron's Vest, which all the Versions into Latin call Tintinnabulum auri (of which▪ the Interpreters give little account) and certainly they had little or no sound; but the metal of our bells have no gold in them, but what is casually mixed with other metals, for they are compounded of Copper, Tin and Brass, and a little Silver: sometimes the Artists or maker of these are called Bell-founders T. Glockengiesser from Gloken which we call Clock, by changing G to C) and the art of mixing, making and casting them (in respect of their diversity of sounds) is of as transcending a nature as any one art or science, for the proportions of Ingredients are according to the great skill and Judgement of the Founders adequated to their various uses. Anciently, and still, solemn Prayers are used at the casting them, and formerly they were with great Ceremony baptised, presuming that many spirits did attend them: and I remember an old sexton did affirm, That by the sound of a Passing-Bell, for one dying and dead, he could tell how many hours or days after, some other of his Parish should die: But whether this prognosticating quality be in them, I shall not dispute, but we are certain, that the Harmony of a Consort of them, are very pleasing to musical ears; and 'tis observable, that this Art is only from Metals. l. 1. c. 18. And not only this of Bells, but most of the choice Instruments of Music were and still are either in the whole or in parts composed of Metals; Such as are wholly of Metals, are Trumpets, Sagbots, cimbals (soft and triumphal) Organ Pipes, etc. such as are in part, viz. the strings of the Harp (which we now call the Irish Harp (being strung with wire) in distinction of the Welsh Harp strung with Gutsstrings) also the strings of the Harpsicon, and Poliphant (which I have often heard with great pleasure, but now out of use) also the Tabaret, and the Cittern, though now of small esteem, yet was devised by Amphion, Pliny l. 7. p. 187. and many others, amongst which I must not forget the Monochord or Tuba marina, whose Entrails are curiously composed of Metals, although the string, which stirs up the reverberating Spirits of the Metal, is composed of Guts. Now as Petrus Bongus hath writ a Book de sacris numeris, and Jonston de sacris Arboribus (with Sculptures) I wish some would write De sacris Instrumentis Musicae, with their Sculptures, especially of those wherein metals are employed, for doubtless the subject would afford excellent variety. But besides this musical part of Metals, the word Bell is also applied to a Glass with a round bottom and long neck, which the Chemists call a matrass glass, or long Bell, Sculpture I. BELLOWS, T. Blaszbalgh, and to blow Geblasz. L. Follis & follescere: of these there are three sorts mentioned in Erckern, 1. the Philosophical Bellows, 2 The great Bellows (which requires eight Ox-hides) and 3. the common Bellows, which Smiths also use, and others for common fires, as you often find in the Sculptures, and all these in imitation of the nature of a Cow Beast, which in drawing in and forcing out her breath, is said to Bellow. BLANCH, T. Blank, Weiss and Bluk, all signifying white, or a white Silver or Tin, when it is melted, for the mere Oar of Tin is of a ruddy colour, and white when melted; and this by the Translator of Weckerus, is called Blenck; which word I like, (though I find it not in any Dictionary) for I had a Manor in Suffolk, called by the name of Blenches, and it appeared so in my Ancient Court Rolls, for that the Soil of the Manor, consisted of a white Clay and Chalky temper, and the next Village is Wisset, which consisted also of the like Soil: Blench and Wiess both signifying white, so that Blench and Blanche have the same signification of white, and so the word is used for the whitening, blenching or blanching of Silver; the word is also used to Almonds, viz. when the superficies or dull part is taken from them by boiling Water, they are then called blencht or blanched Almonds. See Bone Ashes. BISMUTH, is a Crude Oar or kind of Silver Marchasite, and of a white, hard and brittle Body, and I conceive is the same which Erckern calls also Wismut, or Wismuth Oar and Spelter, l. 4. c. 10. and sometimes called Tin Glass. See their Alphabets. BITUMEN, is accounted both among Gums and Pixes, and also among Sulphurs, but that which Erckern speaks of, intends Brimstone, which the T. calls Schwebel, L. Sulphur, and this is either Natural, from the Lake called Asphaltis, (where once Sodom and Gomorrah stood, also from the vomiting of the Hill Aetna and Visuvius) or Artificial made by Fire. See Minerals. BLACK, See Colours. BLEND, or Blent, T. Ablinderne, L. Miscere, A. to Mingle, that is, when Metals are blended or mingled in lumps. l. 4. c. 2. etc. And this word is much used in the North parts of England, for mixed or mingled matter, which some call Hots-Potch. BLUE, See Colours. BLINK, T. Blinkin or Blicken, L. Micare and Nictare, A. to Shine, it is commonly used to those that are blear Eyed, or often twinkle with their Eyes: it is also applied to dead and sharp Beer, and to the brouss or loppage of Trees, given to Deer (see Skinner) but in our Author only applied to bright Oars, or melted Metals, l. 1. c, 23. etc. & l. 2. c. 24. viz. blink Gold and blink Silver, that is bright or clear Gold or Silver. BLOOD, T. Blut, L. Sanguis, applied to the Blood of Oxen, etc. and is often mentioned as a good mixture, for Instruments and Cements for Metalick uses. See l. 2. c. 20. and Ox. BOILING, T. Seiden and Kochen. L. Coquens, l. 5. c. 7. s. 1. we have many words for this, tending to the same sense, and yet with some Gradations, as when any liquid matter begins to stir with the heat of the Fire, we call it simporing, it may be from simpo, a Pot wherein the old Roman and Grecian Priests were wont to drink their cheering Liquor, and therefore the word simporing is used for smiling, and when it stirs more, 'tis called seething (which differs little from the T. Seiden) when it stirs to bubble, it is called Boiling, from bulla and bullire; but anciently Boiling was called Plawing, from L. Plaudere, to rejoice, because the fire had the full effect of the heated liquor, and therefore the Psalmist saith, Plaudent Flumina vola, let the Floods clap their Hands: i. e. let them plaw or rejoice in their plawing or boiling waves, but I do not find my sense of the word plawing confirmed in any Dictionary, as I can now peruse; but this I shall affirm for the Sense and Antiquity of the Word, That there is a Marsh in South-Walsham in Norfolk, belonging to the now Duke of that County, which with other Marshes were gained from the Sea, in the time of the old Romans (as 'tis generally said) to which my Grandfather and myself were Tenants for near an 100 years, and in these Marshes there was one parcel called by the name of Plawing-Well Marsh, within 3 miles of Yarmouth, and about a mile from the Sea, and the Marsh is so called, and styled in Writings, from a Well or place in it of about two yards broad, and about 18 Inches deep, only in the middle of it is a little hole, the bottom of which I could not then fathom by any Pole or Instrument that I could get, and from that hole the water constantly bubbles, boils up and plays, which was the word used in the Lease, and in other Records sufficient to justify the Antiquity of the word. Now having spoken what I can of the word, give me leave to speak of the water, which keeps at one scantling, neither swelling higher nor decreasing; but if it decrease at any time, it foretells a dearth) so that the motions of it cannot be attributed to the neighbouring Motions of the Sea (which are regular, lunary or ventilary) nor any other cause that I could find; unless it be from a constant motion of Cattle (grazing in these and the neighbouring marshes▪ which being only thin & grassy cover of the waters, those beasts by quassation and constant compressure of such flexible grounds, may easily cause this Ebolition or plawing) I confess, I am the more content with this reason, because we daily see, that a little Compressure in a large vessel of liquids will make it rise and run over, and we often find in solid Bodies, Compressure will have great effects at distance, as in the year 1648. when the Committeehouse at Norwich was blown up, by the firing of 40 barrels of Powder, it caused by compressure such a motion in the Earth, that at Thorp Market (15 miles from Norwich (near Cromer) Mr. Allen who dwelled there in good repute) told me, that as he was sitting in his Parlour there, he was very sensible of the quaking of the Earth, which upon Information of what had past the day before at Norwich, and comparing the punctual time, he found the shaking was caused by that Gunpowder, and I, being then in the Country, soon after went into the City, where I observed, that all the lower windows of the City-houses were shattered by the Air and Earth, but the upper windows (that had only the more tender motion of the Air to offend them) had little hurt, and this was general, except in Churches whose Windows were all shattered, having no floors to defend them against the motion of Earth and Air. I was pleased with these outward accidental causes, but soon after I saw a Spring on one side of the highest Hills in Darbyshire within the Peak-Forest, and 30 miles from the Sea) that ebbed and flowed four times in the space of an hour, called Tides Well, and for this I will not pretend to give a Reason, being so far from the Sea, or any probable outward cause. BOLUS, see Armoniac. It signifies a certain proportion; from whence we might have the word Boul or Bowl, which is used by Miners to measure out their digged Oars, both for the King, Proprietor or themselves, or for other uses. BONE (Ashes) T. Bein (Ashen) Lat. Os & Ciner. A. Ashes, and from ciners, cinders: so as the Latins have no proper word for it, but Ciner the Cinders, or ashes of Ossium, or bones in the plural. Now the Latins have the like word Os signifying a mouth, distinguished in their Genitive cases, one making Os, ossis, the other Os oris, one signifying spiration, from the Greek, the other duration, and they may well be coupled, for the nourishment which goes into the mouth gives nutriture to the Bones, and is the Original of its duration (of which I have writ more fully in my Fodinae Regales) and our Author gives several Directions what Bones are fittest to be used (to the making of Tests and Crucibles for dissolving Metals) either of Beasts or Fishes, of which you may see his Opinion in several places, l. 1. c. 5, 6, 7, etc. See Ashes, Incineration, Pulverisation. Now Pliny N. H. l. 11. c. 37. tells us that the bones of Asses have a more musical nature in them (being made into Pipes) than any other bones, so that it may be worth the Trial for Bell-Founders, who make their Furnaces and Tests of Bone-Ashes) to try if tests made of bones of those dull Asses, in stead of other bones, can make their Bells of a more active sound. The ordinary Bone-Ashes made of Beasts is a considerable Trade about London, not only for Goldsmiths, etc. but for our Mines in England, for whilst the Leasees of our Society did work the Mines of Consumlock and Talibont in Cardigan shire in Wales (two old Roman Mines, as I have shown else where) every year there were at least 800 Tun sent from hence thither by Sea; by which may be guessed what is, or might be, spent in the other 28 Mine Counties in England and Wales, if our Mines were duly set on work, but they being neglected, we send great quantities to other Nations, for the same use; for which the Merchants pay outward 6 s, 8 d, for every thousand Bones, and we pay for their bringing them into us 1 l. 5 s. for every Barrel of their Ashes, which we might burn and employ for ours. BORAX, T. Borras. L. Borax, and Christocolla, which Pliny calls the Ordure or Dung of Gold, yet Goldsmiths and Silversmiths use it for their chiefest sodering of Gold or Silver, and joining one metal with the other, and indeed bringing all metals to perfection, besides it hath medicinal properties, l. 2. c. 4. s. 2. and in many other places. Pliny reckons it among Minerals, and describes it to be a green Earth, but of four sorts, the best from Copper Mines, the second from Silver, the third from Gold, and the fourth and worst from Lead, he tells us also of an Artificial Borax which he saith comes from a putrified Vein of metals: there is also another kind made by Art of Roch Alum and Bowl Armoniac, and other Ingredients, which is used also by Goldsmiths: But the right Borax hath another quality, for it being mixed with Arsenic, it takes off the poisonous quality of the Arsenic, whereby it may be safely put to metals as a dissolvent. BOTTELLS, T. Krugs. See Instruments and their Cruises, Jugs, Pots, etc. BOTTOM, T. Boden, l. 1. c. 33. L. Fundus. A. Foundation, or the lowermost part of any thing: the word is also used for a bottom of thread, T. Vin-gleven or a clew of thread. L. Glomus, which is only the Foundation on which the thread is wound, and so called the bottom. BRAN, T. Kleyen & Gruesck. L. Aplauda & Furfur, because it makes a double theft, by taking away itself, and also much of the good flower with it: however this Bran is very useful, by its mixtion with such stuff as is used for glazing and strengthening the outward and inward parts of such earthen Pots or Vessels as are made for Metals, by making the matter stick the more close and firm, and is itself destroyed like many innocent men, to make way for others. l. 2. c. 20. s. 6. BRASS, T. Ertz. L. Aes: and it is a great Error that most Writers run into, by promiscuously giving the title Aes for both Brass and Copper, as if they were the same Metals; whereas Aes or Brass is not a proper Metal, but compounded of a Metal, viz. Cuprum or Copper, and Lapis Calaminaris, or Cadmiae, which is a mineral, and from the mixture of these two, Brass is made, as may be seen in Erckern, lib. 3. c. 28. which in T. is called Galmay. Now there is of this Calamin two sorts, Natural, as in the third Book; and Artificial, l. 4. c. 8. s. 7. made of the dregs of Metals, but the natural, he saith, comes from Britain, and indeed we have mountains of it, especially in Gloucestershire, Sommersetshire, and Notinghamshire: but we let the Calaminaris go for Ballast into foreign parts, in very great quantities, before it be wrought, so as the best Brass beyond Sea is made of our stone rather than their own, which deserves a further consideration: and I remember about 30 years since, one Demetrius a German, did set up a Brass-work in Surry, and with the Expense of 6000 pound (as he told me) made it complete and to good profit: but the foreign Merchants joining with some of ours, found ways to bring him into Suits; and meeting with no encouragement, he was at last necessitated to submit the work, to his own ruin, and unspeakable prejudice to the Kingdom, in losing so beneficial an Art, having here both the best Copper and Calamine of any part of Europe. See Stones and Copper. Now whereas Pliny, Cap. 33. speaks of about 18 several Mines of Brass, we must not understand it as a specific Metal: though the word Aes is vulgarly applied to both, but those Mines were either Copper mines, capable of being made Brass; or so many several sorts of Lapis Cadmiae or Calamin, from the composition of all which with Copper, Brass was made more or less both in Quantity and Quality: and this Art of composing it, is said, by him, to be first invented by Cadmus a Grecian, contemporary with Joshua, in whose time the word Brass is first mentioned in the Sacred Story, Exod. 25. 3. And it is observable, That though in the composition of Brass, there is more of the stone than of Copper, and that Copper is a Metal, and that other a Stone, yet it takes a new name of Brass, and not its own, or of the Metal, Copper: and being thus made Brass, it is an Imitator of Gold, both in Colour and in many Virtues, and in such esteem, that the Roman Treasurers were called Tribuni Aerarij, rather than Aurarii: and Camerarius says, that the Egyptians (long before the Romans) had so great Veneration of Brass that they made Images of it, and laid them in the graves of their Kings, to preserve their Bodies from Putrefaction, and to men of lesser quality they nailed their dead bodies with many brass nails. Also Virgil, Horace and Homer are all full of their Encomiums on Brass, and therefore it may well have the honour of a seventh Metal, though compounded of a Mineral. Now as the common Brass is of a Goldish colour, so Pliny, l. 34. c. 11. tells us, of a white brass, (which is no other (as I conceive) than Brass Tind-over, and called Latin, or Auricalcum. See Latin. BRICK, A. Brick. T. Gabachen-stein or (a stone made by Art) L. Later, a side, because 'tis used both to outside and inside of Buildings; as ancient as the egyptians who forced the Israelites to make it: the Makers of it is called, T. Bachen-strein-lin. L. Laterculus. l. 5. c. 7. s. 1. BRICKLE, T. Zee bruch-lech, L. Fragilis, and this we vulgarly call brittle, but doubtless it come from Brick, the nature of which is fragile or more easy to be broken in pieces, and so made into Powder, which both whole and in Powder (as those from Tile) are used by Assayers. l. 1. c. 32. s. 3. l. 2. c. 44. s. 2. etc. BRIMSTONE, see Bitumen, Sulphur. l. 1. c. 16. s. 1. thence Bitumenous, Sulphureous. BRITAIN, See Mines and Mineral Countries. l. 3. c. 28. s. 5. BROOM, T. Bassem, L. Scopa, A. Besom and Broom; but I conceive this word is from the Plant, which we call Broom, (T. Ginster, L. Genista) of a flexible nature, and so used to sweep Rooms. BROWN, T. Braun, L. Fuscus. See Colours. BRUSH, T. Buerst (and yet to brush, they say Ketherns) L. Scopula and verricula, vestes purgare scopulis, Sculpture 7. BUBBLING, Ein Wasser blazon, from T. Blass a Bladder, being but a more durable bubble, L. bulla. l. 2. c. 35. s. 7. BUCK, Bucking, and up- Bucking, and to Buck, used often in the 2, 3, 4 & 5 Books, in the T. is Lawgen, L. Lixivare from Lixivium or Lee, (see Lee of Ashes) but the Italians call it Bucato or Washing, from whence our word Buck, or properly Buc (to distinguish it from the Male of a Do) is called also Buck, which may have its name too from Bucceto, from his frequent mingency, pissing or making Water oftener than Females, and this word Bucking is applied often to those that are Washers of the filth out of Linen or clothes, which the common people use to do with a piece of broad and thick Wood, which they call a Clapper or Bat-staff; but for more Expedition, the Fuller's have invented Mills, with several Stamps for their clothes, which by the force of water do raise and let fall their Stamps, by which the Fullers-Earth with the Water do make our clothes fit for use; but whether the Metallists did teach them that Art, I shall not inquire, only the Metalists which we converse with here, have two ways of Bucking or Washing their Oars, from the dirt or Earth about them; one by a Mill, which they call a Smelting-mill, by which with the force of Water, certain Stamps or Hammers do beat and wash the Oars, and those Workers are called Smelters at the Mill, and after that, there are other lesser Bucking in Mortars and Tubs, to prepare the Metal (more free from Rubbish) for the Melters; See Smelting Melting, and Menstruum. BURNING of Metals, i. e. reducing them to Ashes or Powder for use. l. 2. c. 2. See Ashes, Calcination, Roasting, etc. CA C CA CADMIA, See Calaminaris. CAKES, T. Schiben, or pieces of Metal, melted into the form of Cakes. l. 3. c. 26. By this word Cake, we must not understand such Cakes as in Latin are called Placenta, from placere, to please the palate, by their several pleasant Ingredients; but here it relates only to the form of it, sometimes round and Convex, but mostly Flat, like pieces of Plate, and therefore the Refiners (for distinction) do call Lead, cast into a solid body, Sows and Pigs; Tin, Blocks; and Iron, Barrs; but Silver, Gold and Copper so cast, they call Cakes; and Copper sometimes Rose-Cakes, or Cupri Rosa; and though they be not Edibles (or bear the name of Placenta) yet without Money, which is derived from those metalled Cakes, we could not have such things as are placentious or pleasing to us. To CALCINE, Calcinate, Calcinize and Calcination, T. Calcineren, L. Calcinare, both Languages making it a compound of two Words, Calx for Lime, and Ciner, Ashes, which in a metallic sense, is to reduce Metals, by Fire to a friable or brickle temper, like Lime; therefore Lime is called only in Latin, Calx, and we from the word call our Limestone, Chalk, which being burnt, we call Lime, and this burning we call slacking (according to the Teut.) and before it is burnt, Vnslackt, unburnt, or uncalcined Lime; and being burnt or slacked, called also Calx viva (which is oft mentioned by our Author) and A. Quicklime, or that which hath by Fire, as it were) an additional Life, for metals seem to be dead in their Oars, but by this Calcination revived, to hint to us the advantages of our Resurrection, by the general Conflagration. 'Tis true, there are other ways of Calcination, especially of Metals; viz. by Corrosion, Immersion, Amalgamation, Cementations, Fumigations and Illinations. (See Salmon.) yet none of these can be performed without Fire: but to return to the common Lime, as it is fitted for the use of Architecture, it is mingled with Water and Sand, and then called Mortar, and according as the Lime and Sand are in goodness, so the Structures by it are made more durable, and therefore it is thought, That we had all our Sand for our Mortar (with which our ancient Churches were built) out of Italy; and the Fort of Plymouth (built by his present Majesty) recompensed my Journey thither, the Graff of which is hewn out of Marble, and the Mortar also made of (alcined Marble, and their Sand, which makes that Mortar as compact as the Marble itself, but what kind of Sand or what Proportions, I did not then inquire. Now there are two words in L. which pass under the same Orthography, viz. Calx for Lime, and Calx for the Heel of a man, (or end of a thing) so as I may conceive that our Metallick and Artificial word Calx for Lime, is borrowed of the Natural word Calx for Heel, because the Calcining of Metals, do as it were determine its Life for a better, because those Metals which lay dully in the Earth, before their Calcination are by Calcining and Refining made more active and passable throughout the World. CALAMINARIS, See Brass, and Sculpt. 35. CALIFY, T. Warm, Werme, L. Calefaccre, A. to make warm. CALX, See Calcine. CAPUT MORTIS, (for brevity Mort.) is the matter or sediment of Metals (or of other things used in Chemical Dissolutions) which remain at the bottom of a Furnace or Stillatory, thick and dry, chiefly from Metals and Minerals; viz. when all their Spirituous parts are drawn off, the remainder is called Caput Mort. or Feces. See Feces. CARRAT (signifying a weight) is a French and Italian Word, much used by our Author in his second Book; and it seems to come from the Arabian, Kirat: (see Holioak.) but Cotgrave saith, That Goldsmiths and Minters esteem it at a third part of an Ounce, and among Jewellers and precious Stone-cutters, but the 19 part of an Ounce; so as eight of them are but one Sterling, and a Sterling is the 24 th'. part of an Ounce, and 3 Grains of Assize, or 4 Grains of Diamond weight make a Carrat. Torriano's Addition to Florio, calls it Carrato, signifying, saith he, a weight or degree in Metals, Diamonds, Rubies, etc. and doth not determine it: but Mr. Howel in his ingenious Tetraglotton (sect. 40.) proportions it to the 24 part of an ounce, and Mr. Webster in his History of Metals speaks more clearly, and saith, the Carrat or Charrat is a term given (by the Officers of the Mint, and Wardens of Goldsmiths) to a certain composition of Weights, that are only used for Assaying, and computing the standard of Gold, and are of two Contents, namely, either the 24 part of an ounce, Troy-weight, and is compounded thus; of the pound carrats 2 d. weight, and 12 grains, Troy, make a Carrat grain, and 4 such carrat grains make one carat, which is half an ounce, or 10 d. weight Troy, and 24 of such carats make a pound or 12 ounces Troy, the other way of Computation is of an ounce carat, five Troy grains make one carat grain, and four of such grains make one carat, and 24 such carats make one ounce Troy, and for assaying he recommends the ounce carat, as more easy for Calculation, than the pound carot, which is made more perspicuous by our Author. l. 2. c. 15. See Money, Gold-weights. CASE, T. Gehavesz, or a little house, L. Capsula. A. Case, 'tis of various signification, as, a Grammatical, Legal, Formal, and sometimes put for an ill chance or hard case. See Sculpture 1, 5, 12, 13. CATSILVER, T. Kat-zon Silver, because it hath a grey sparkling colour like a Cats-eye. CEMENT, cementing and Cementation. T. Cementerne. L. Coementum, not from Caedo, to beat (as Minshaw would have it) but Caementum, is quasi mens coeli, i. e. the mind of Heaven, to unite things separated, especially, when they consist of one species, and it may well be observed in the vicissicute of the things in the World, that the whole Labour of Man and Nature, seems to be almost nothing else, but to separate what is united, and to unite things that are separated, and this not only seen in our operations upon Metals, but in the actions of bumane Affairs: yet, to pass them by, this Cementation of Metals is properly a gradual imbodying or uniting of Metals first separated, and this by a gentle fire, as in Lib. 1, 2, and 3 Books, wherein there are several magisterial Directions: and in other Cases 'tis properly called a Conglutination, or glewing together. See Conglutinate. CENTNER, T. Centre & Centner. L. centum. At the Mines it signifies an hundred and ten pounds' weight, but at the Mint, just an hundred pound: Whereby the Miner may get 10 l. towards his charges: See lib. 1 cap. 9 but in lib. 1. cap. 37. and in many parts of the five Books, it is considered only as a small Assay-weight for trying how much a little Part of an hundred weight do hold of Gold, Silver, etc. whereby (as ex ungue Leonis, the whole Proportion of the Lion may be known from its claw: so by the small Assay-weight, the goodness of the whole piece may also be estimated, be it a centner or half a centner, etc. and this shows the skill of an Asay er in the skilful use of Arithmetic. CERUSE. T. Bleywiesse, L. Cerussa. A. White Lead, the best is made of Lead, calcined with the vapours of Vinegar; but the common way is by Urine. CRYSTAL, T. Keistal, L. Christalus and Christalum, there is Natural and Artificial, the Natural is Aqua quae frigore in glaciem concressit; that is, congealed or petrified Ice. Diodorus Sic. and Boetius are of a contrary Opinion, and say, It is the purest Earth, dissolved by Water, and for want of Water, congealed to the Christal-Stone: 'tis found about the Alps and in many parts of Germany, Hungary, France, etc. And Captain Ant. Langston, my good Friend, who had traveled about 300 Miles into the Continent of Virginia, did assure me, that he saw there several Mountains of clear and shining Crystal; he died about a year since, and was a very Credible person whilst he lived. Now the Artificial Crystals, are made by Chemistry, and is a peculiar part of that Science, called Christalization; that is, making things like Crystals: viz. Crystal of Silver, Tin, Antimony, etc. See Petrefaction and Stone. CHEMISTRY, see Alchemy and Alchemist: But I have something more to say to them, for I find that the Chemist hath another Name, and is called Spagirus; and Chemistry, Ars Spagerica; signifying, to fine and refine Metals, and therefore I have thought fit to put the words Spagericae Leges, as the Title to this whole Treatise, instead of Leges Chymicae, this latter being more commonly used than the other: nor do I wave the word Alchemy or Alchemist, because it is sometimes taken in an ill Sense, for in the best and truest Sense, by the addition of ALL (which word in all Languages signifies Omnia) so as by addition of All, we are to understand, That Chemistry doth comprehend All Sciences and Mechanic Arts and Trades, even from the Cobbler's Awl (T. Aal, and Belgic Elsen) to the Astronomers Astrolabe, for nothing can be performed without some Metalick Instrument. CINABAR, T. Zenober, or (l. 1. c. 2. s. 5.) Bergennover, L. Cinnabaris, which in English we call natural Vermilion, for of this Cinnabar, there are two sorts: Natural, which is an hard, red and heavy Stone, found in Mines: or Artificial, which is better coloured (made of calcined Sulphur and Quicksilver, which we now use with Metals) but it is vulgarly called Ruddle or marken Stone, and Sinople or Red Lead; the first also of these two is natural, and the other artificial, but I conceive our Author intends none of these latter, but the former, or one of them: Pliny, N. H. l. 33. hath a large Discourse of this Cinabar, and makes it the same with Minium, of a rich and fresh Scarlet Colour, and saith, there are whole Mines of it in some parts of Spain; and concludes with his Opinion, That it is the Rust of Silver and Lead, but it hath not the less Esteem with the best Painters or Limners, no more than hath Verdigrise, though it be the Rust of Copper: there is great quantity of this Cinabar in the Mines of America, and some few Veins of it, in the English Coppermines. See Gold and Quicksilver. CLAR, so the T. word is writ (l. 1. c. 5. s. 1. and c. 7. s. 1. and c. 21.) the French call it Clair, and A. Clear; Now though this word bears the same sense in all, yet because, by a certain composition, it doth clear the Metals and Instruments to which it is applied (for distinction sake) I think fit, according to the T. to call it Clar, as a substantive, rather than Clear, which for the most part is used as an adjective▪ viz. clear Drink, etc. CLAY, T. Laim and Thon. l. 2. c. 20. s. 1. etc. But the L. calls Clay (which is of a flat and clammy Earth) Argilla and Terra Figulina, because Potters (by whom it is used) do reduce it to certain Figures; in A. it is commonly called Potters-Earth, or Clay for making of Potts, Dishes, etc. and although Erckern applies the word chiefly to Potters-Earth, Clay or Loam, yet there are many other Clays or Earth's which have particular Names, according to their natures and colours; as Fullers-Earth, or Clay of a Russet colour, also Blew, Green and reddish Clay, but that which is for common use is solid and firm, and for the most part of a russet or bluish Hue or colour: and though it be said by Minshaw, That Potter's Clay is called Argilla, from Argos a City in Greece, where Potters (as he saith) did first exercise that Art (which Pliny ascribes to Coraebus an Athenian, one in the Province of Argolis, and the other in Africa, but both in Greece:) so it seems the Art was there, before it was in Egypt in Africa: however, according to the Sacred Story, the Art of making Pots of Clay was ancient, as we may read in Exod. 16. 13. and of Bricks. Exod. 5. 8. and in Job 4. 19 the Houses in his time were called Houses of Clay, and Clay was of such Esteem with Jesus Christ, That he made it an Instrumental cure in the Blind Man. Jo. 9 6. Now to pass these, In Devonshire, and other places, I have seen good cottages made only with clay, without any wood, except little Window-cases, doors and roofs; and in Suffolk and Norfolk the outside of most cottages and outhouses (to great edifices) are of clay daubed on Splenters, and the insides also plastered with clay, and a little Lime, yet are very durable. At Woodford, near London (about 20 years since) I saw a fair House of Brick, built on the top of that hill, and had no lime or other mortar within or without it, but sound clay mixed with sand, which continues strong to this day, as I am informed: and in 1674. (my House in Suffolk (standing on an Hill, upon a clay Soil) I digged about 30 foot in length, and 10 foot deep, under part of it, with intent to make a cellar, designing to pin or support the sides with Brick: But finding the clay to be very firm (being mattocked and not spaded) and never before digged (as might be judged, because under the clay was found good gravel, and beds of flat Oyster-shells) I saved the charge by continuing the clay in stead of the brick, and I hear it doth hold firm to this day, as if it had been done with Brick: and doubtless, according as the clay is in goodness, so Furnaces, Ovens, Tests, Crucibles, etc. will the better endure the heat of Fire and Metals▪ care being taken that they be well dried, after they are made, and before they be exposed to the fire, and then by degrees, and not suddenly burnt. See Brick, Earth, Loadstone. COAGULATE, T. Rensel, L. Coagulatio, See conglutinate. COAL, T. Koll stein, L. Carbo, of these we have Varieties, viz. Wood-coal (of several sorts mentioned by our Author) used chiefly for Metals, Sea Coal (digged out of Coal-Mines, near the Sea at Tinmouth, by Newcastle, and Pit-Coal (in Mines remote from the Sea) near Coventry in Warwickshire, and in Stafford-shire and Shropshire, etc. but these are not useful to Metals: 'tis true, many have attempted to Chark or make Cinders of them to be used for Metals, when Wood is scarce, but I have not yet heard of any certain success therein (though I wish it:) there is another Coal which is artificial, which we call Charcoal, and I conceive the proper Latin word for it is Anthrax, and the burner of it Anthratius, but most Dictionaries do use carbo and carbones for all sorts of Coals, by adding Adjectives, as Carbones Fossiles, etc. but Charcoal being a new Invention (comparative to the other) it is fit to have a newer word than Carbo, and these Charcoals of Wood, are most useful for Metals: Now in making those of Wood, the Art is so much improved, that I have seen an Arrow with its Feathers exactly burnt into a Charcoal, without diminution of the shape or the Feather, only the Feather made black for white, and some of this Wood Charcoal, I have seen at the Iron-Mills in Worcestershire, so uncombustible, that they have come running out of the Furnace, and floated on the top of the Metal, whole and entire, and this (as they told me) was the Charcoal of the Withy-Tree, being a more light and soft Wood than any that grows in those parts: I carried away some of them, and cut them into fine Pencils, and used them for Drawing, on blue Paper (especially being first boiled in Butter) and the white Pencils proper to them, I made of Tobacco-pipe Earth, in Rolls dried by the Sun, and not at the Fire, and sometimes I heightened the lights with Ceruse (composed of Lead, see eruse.) COBOLT, T. Cobolt. Sometimes accounted for the Copper-stone, and reckoned by Dr. Salmon, among the natural Recrements of metals; and I do not find it by any other name, then as it is so described by Erckern. l. 1. c. 2. s. 11. & l. 3. c. 21. etc. COIN, T. Gemuntsz, the Latin hath several Words for it, viz. Moneta, Nummus, Pecunia, etc. and Aurum, Argentum, Cuprum, Aes; and anciently Coriata (when Leather Coin was currant and in esteem) but the proper word for it, (and so Minshaw) is Cusus, thence Cudere to Coin: Now Moneta is a relative Word to Monere, advising to take heed how to use Money, only to honest ends, after it is once Coined: Nummus to Numeratus or Quantity: Pecumia to Pecus or Sheep, which were and still are commutative as Money itself, but it may be properly from the Greek Word Kainos, Comunis, because when it once had its Stamp or Cude upon it, than it was passable, currant and Common, and some would have it from the form of the Coin, consisting of Angles (as much of the French and Spanish Money do) and some say, That from Angular Coins, the Corners or Angles of Structures are called Coins, because with such Money the Architects were paid their Wages. Now, I conceive that I may add my Supposition also, That the Word Coin, may be the abstract of Coynobeline or Cunobeline, one of the Kings of the old Britan's, and who is said to be the first that did Coin Money, at Malden in Essex (Cambden) where it is probable that their Mines (in our Records) since decayed or neglected, did supply him with Metal, for that purpose; however, in our later Ages, the Word Coin is still applied to Metals, form into Currant Money made of Metals. CONDENSE, T. Dick-Maken, A. making Thick. L. Condensatio. CONGEAL, ver Breizon, L. Coagulatio. See Conglutinate. CONGLUTINATE. T. Lime, (from whence we have the word lime, for a Dog and Bitch in copulation) L. conglutinare. A. to glue and join together: now these words cement, coagulate, condense, congeal and conglutinate are often, but improperly, applied to one sense, especially about metals; for cementing is, as I have shown in Cement; coagulation, from coagulo, to curdle, i.e. where metals are joined or curdled together by fire; condensation, when metals are made more hard, or thickened; congelation, when they are by Fire turned into a Crystalline, Glittering and Icy form, from gelare, to turn into Ice; which kind of Crystal is often seen in refining of metals; and Conglutination from Glutinare, when they are joined by a glewish temper, and is more properly applicable to vessels made of Glutinous matter, for the better holding of Metals in the Fire, yet all these Words still signify the making of things thicker or harder, than they were before: Now as to Conglutination, I cannot hear but call to mind what I saw at Exmouth in Devonshire, where upon little Rocks appearing somewhat above the Sands (at a low Water) there were Oysters sticking fast to them (which at an high Water were all covered by the Sea) so as we were forced to beat them off with a Chizel and Hammer, and these they called Rock Oysters, the Shells being almost as firm as the Rock itself; I confess I looked upon it as a wonderful Secret in Nature, That the Oyster could fix itself so firmly, having no outward parts to do it, and this in 12 hours' time; for at the next Low-Water those very Rocks (where at the former Ebb we had left no Oysters on them) they were filled again with other Oysters, and therefore it must be some glutinous matter, which they cast forth upon the Rocks, and so brood upon it to a condensation; and I the rather believe this, because Shell-Snails, which we call Dodmans', have an excellent white Cement, always lying in the little end of the Cone of their Shells, with which they often glue themselves so fast to Walls, that they cannot get loose, but die in their Shells: and so does the Limpet (another Shellfish on the same Coast) cleave itself so hard to the Rocks, that nothing but a Chizel can divide them from the Rocks; now certainly, if that part of the Oystershell which is so glued, were mixed with so much of the Rock, on which it is fixed, there might be made a very binding Glue or Cement, for Metallick Vessels; but there is another sort of Shellfish, upon that Coast also, which I cannot but mention, because I do not find it amongst those that write of Shell-fish, and it is called in that County, the Long-Fish, or Capa Longa, the longest are not above 12 Inches and about an Inch in breadth, opening at each end, and contains in it a white-Worm (for I cannot call it otherwise) which is a very nourishing Food, and being pickled up, are sent as acceptable Presents, to those that make their Gusts their delights; these are caught in this manner: at a Low Water, that is, when the Sands are clear of Water, those Fishes do show themselves above the Sands, about 3 Inches, so as 8 or 9 Inches remain in the sands, and then those who make it their Trade to get them, presently go against the wind very softly (as in catching of Moles) and with an Iron Engine (somewhat like a Spade) strike under them, and so are caught; but if they go with the wind, the Fish presently retires into the Sand, without possibility of being caught for that Tide, and though after their Escapes, I have seen them digged for, yet they vanish beyond the strength or agility of labour to catch them. Now, these having no outward thing discernible to assist them in so quick a Motion, I conceive it must be by some glutinous matter, (such as we see do attend snails in their motion, but the snails cannot contract it again, because it usually lies on some dry substance) but the glutinous matter of these Capa longas, being fixed in their Repositories (much under the superficies of the sand, and so extended by them like a spider's thread) may with much more agility than a spider rise or fall as they please in a moment, there being a liquidity from their Repositories to make their motions of ascension or descension more agile and passable: Now from Creatures of this constitutions, certainly many excellent Cements may be made, as may be judged by the Fish, which Pliny lib. 32. cap. 7. calls Itchthiocalla, and we Ising-glass Fish, which besides other virtues, the skin and other parts of it (as he tells us, and now we know by Experience) do make an excellent Cement (especially if it be mingled with aqua vita) either for earthen Ware or Metals: enduring both fire and water. COLOR, T. Farb. L. Color. A. Colour. (signifying Beauty or Pulchritude) of which there are two sorts: natural and artificial; wherewith the Limners and Painters, in Imitation of the Beauty of Nature, shows us the Beauty of their Art; yet they cannot perform their Works without the help and mixture of other Substances; as Oils, Gums, etc. but their best and most proper Colours are from Metals; Whereof seven are accounted the chief, produced from the seven chief Metals which are influenced from the seven Planets, and these 7 Colours are used in painting, by two sorts of eminent Artists in that Science, viz. those who use them with Gum (called the Art of Miniature or drawing in little) and those which use them with Oil (called Limners or Painters, or drawing in great and little) for I meddle not with those who work with Pastils or in Fresco, or Dyers, or Tincturists, so the first of these in an Alphabetical Order is Black; otherwise White and Black are accounted the Principes Colorum, & Mensura Reliquorum (Alsted.) And all of them produced from Metals and Minerals: the Seven are these; I. BLACK, T. Schwartz (l. 1. p. 6.) from whence we have our word swarth or swarthy, inclining to black) L. Niger. Plutarch calls it colour umbrosus. A. Black, and these Blacks are natural in Stones, Coals, etc. but the best Artificial ones are made by the retortions of Lamps, placed under Plates of Gold, Silver, Copper, Led, Tin or Iron, and are easily distinguished, in their nigerities or blackness; and this shows, that black hath some superiority over white, because when white things, as Ivory, etc. are burnt, they turn to a black: but as to our purpose: it is Observable, That all these Blacks are still heightened and improved for use, by the three eminent Minerals, viz. Vitriol, Alum and Copperas. II. BLUE, T. Blau and Himmel Blau (in English heavenly Blue) the Latins renders it to us mostly by Participles or Adjectives, as Lividus, Adluens, Caeruleus, Cyanaeus, Cumatilis, Coelestis Color; that is, a Colour having those properties or resemblances: the French calls it Bleu and Azure, and we Blew and Azure, we from them, or they from us; which latter is the more likely, because we have more Mines of Copper, from whence it is produced, than they: now besides this Azure Blue, there is Blue Bise, Vltramarine, Smalt, Flory, Inde-Bandias, Litmus, Orchal, Blue Vitriol, Verdigrease, produced from Mines and Minerals. III. BROWN (or Russet) T. Braun, the Latins, which would bring this into the septinary of colours, call it colour nativus and Pulligo (Holioke) otherwise the common name is Fuscus, from the darkness of its colour, being (as it were) an attendent on Black, and of this brown colour (which is the proper colour of Tin and Copper Oar) there is Umber, Spanish-Brown, Terrra d'colonia, Turnsil, Bole Armoniac, and other products of Metals and Minerals, which Painters and other do use for it. IV. GREEN, T. Gruen, L. Veridis Recens, and many other words relating to the diversity of Greene's, but those which are used for Painting (from Metals and Minerals) are Green Bise, Virditer, Verdigrease (which though it be used for Blue) yet being steeped in Vinegar (as I have oft tried) it doth produce a delightful transparent Green: also Copperas, Vitriol and Alum do much improve this colour. V. RED, T. Rot, L. Ruber, Rufus, etc. to supply which for Painting (there is Lake, which is another delicate transparent red purple colour) also red Lead, vermilion, Cinnabar, Minium (of different Names, yet little differing in colour) also Cinople, Rosset, and several other Reds from Metals and Minerals. VI WHITE, T. Weitz and Blanch, L. Albus and Candidus, to represent this, the Painters use Littarge of Silver, Ceruse, white Lead, Spanish White, etc. raised from the Calcination of Metals. VII. YELLOW, T. Gelb, L. Gilvus, Flavus, Fulvus, Luteus, Croceus; to represent this, they use Littarge of Gold (and a liquid matter which counterfeits Gold, such as is used about Coaches, etc.) they have also yellow Orpiment, Sandarach, Masticot, yellow Ochre, etc. Now of these colours, those which are produced from Metals and Minerals (as I have shown) are too piercing for Paintings with Gum, and therefore not lasting, but with Oil they are safe and very durable, even to a thousand years or more, especially in the curious Art of Anealing. Now concerning colours in general, here is the difference between the Botanic Science and the Metallick, because in one the colour of Plants are seen in their admirable varieties, without the use of Art; but the colours of Metals are not seen, but by the help of Art; only it may be supposed, that every Vein of Metal hath some precious Stones to attend it, whereby we may be informed of what colour that Metal is most apt to yield by Art: as Saphires, white and yellow, Diamonds, Rubies, Emeralds, Amathists, etc. which are daily found (especially in hotter Climates:) there are also other colours, mentioned by Erckern, as Grey, Lazure, red Sulphur, Purple, Orange, etc. but whoever will make a more exact review, will find, that the most pleasing, useful and durable Colours, are from the Metals themselves, or their Extracts and Flowers, seen in their Original representatives, viz. Gems and precious Stones. COOPERATE. T. mit eyes ander werk. L. Cooperate, to work together, that is, when Metals do work together before separation, and is also generally applied to any joint action. COPELLS. See Utensils. COPPER, T. Cupser, L. Cuprum (l. 3.) A. Copper, and is accounted the third Metal in esteem next Gold; and, as is pretended comes from the Isle of Cyprus, from whence it had its Name Cuprum; we need not go so far for it, having many Mines of that Metal, both in England and Wales, especially those at Keswick in Cumberland,, which occasioned a great Suit between Queen Elisabeth and the Earl of Northumberland, concerning her Right to them, upon the account of Royal Mines: which Case is reported by Plouden, with the Opinion of the Judges on the Queen's side, whereby the Society for the Mines Royal, have had and still have the care over them, but for want of Fuel and skilful Miners, they are of no use at present: This Metal is of three sorts, the Red or Reddish, is the proper Natural Copper: Yellow Copper, which, for distinction, is properly called Brass, is an Imitator of Gold: the White is when Copper is tinged with Silver, so as it imitates Silver. See Brass. COPPERAS, T. Vitriol, L. Vitriolum, this is a kind of Stone which is cast up very plentifully between Rochester and the Isle of Shepy (which being not far) I went purposely to the Copperas-Works, farmed of Mr. Haward (Lord of the Soil) by one Mr. Johnson a Londoner, who in few years got above 20000 l. by it, as appeared by what he left to his two Daughters, when he died: I went also to other places, but did not find that the Stones are so plentiful and good in any other place of England: it is of a dark Sea-Green, but being melted its colour is heightened, and glitters like to Crystal, and serves for many uses about Metals, and almost in all Trades where colours are concerned; and is one of the chief Ingredients for good Ink, as I found it in an old Abbòt's Book: Vitrioli quarta, mediata fit uncia gummi; Vncia fit Galli, his jungas octo Falerni; (which I take to be Sherry) His bene contritis, comixtis omnibus illis, Facit bonum Atramentum. And therefore this Copperas or one sort of Vitriol (in distinction of the white (called Dans Vitriol, because from Danemark) and the perfect blue Vitriol (called Roman, coming out of Italy) is called Atramentum Sutorium, because Shomakers-black is made with it. See Colours, Black and Vitriol. COPPER- stone, T. Rougher stein (lib. 3.) is no other than solid Oar of Copper, as it is in the mine, and not touched by other Imbracers, or, as it is made at the first smelting into Cakes or stones, and so the word Stone is commonly applied to it by Erckern. See Oars and Stones. CRYSTAL, See Crystal. CROCUS, is the T. and L. for Saffron (lib. 2. and 4.) but in metallics, it is meant a powder made of Iron or Antimony, of a Saffron colour, and when it is made of Iron it is called Crocus Martis, or of Copper, Crocus Veneris, because it is the powder of those Metals of Iron and Copper, which are Dedicated to the Planets Mars and Venus, and sometimes is made of mixed Metals, and then called Crocus Metallorum, and are often mentioned by our Author. CREIZER (l. 2. c. 2.) T. Kreutzer from Kreutx, or a little Cross stamped upon it, and is so small a piece, that it is accounted but the 92 part of an Hungarian Gilder, which is about 30 pence of our Silver: but H. Vaughan in his Book of Coinage, makes six sorts besides the Hungarian. See Weight. CRUCIBLE, T. Tiegel, I find no proper Latin Word for it, but it may go under the word Phiala for a Cruise or a Pot, and this Crucible is a diminutive of Cruise, or Pot less than a Cruise, but of different shapes: and this is used for dissolving of small pieces of Metal for Assaying, as others are for other uses called Cruises. See Pots. CULB, T. Krug, which is a common name for all Cubical Pots, but we call it Culb, from the particular form of it, I suppose, because it inclines to a Cubical shape. See Sculpture. DE D DIEGO DEAD, T. Todt, Todter (from whence we have our word Tclod or Clod) and Gesterbeu, L. Mortuus, Defunctus. See Dissolution. DECLINATION, T. Nidersichbiegn, L. Deorsum se flectere, and is almost the same with Precipitation; for which Gramarians use the Word Declination, Declension, or going from one Case to another, and in the Vulgar sense, a man is said to decline in his Fortune, when he falls from Prosperity to Adversity: but in the Metalick sense, it it to fall from the top to the bottom, by which means the Metal is better than when it was at the top; and 'tis often seen that adversity makes Men better and of more use (as Metals are) by being Cast down; a Phrase often used in this Book. See Precipitation. DEFT, (l. 1. etc.) an English Saxon Word, therefore I retain it; signifying fair, clean, neat (quasi sine defectu) or without defect, on the contrary undeft is unclean, etc. (Skinner.) DELINEATE (l. 2.) or to Describe a thing by certain Lines or Figures. DIAMETER (l. 1.) is a certain strait Line, drawn through the Centre of a Figure, and of both sides bounded in the compass of it, cutting or dividing the Figure into two equal parts. DISHES (l. 1. etc.) T. Schueffels, L. Discus, A. Dishes, and these are of various sorts and shapes, but the most useful about Metals are made of Pewter, Iron or Clay, for I do not here write of Epicurean Dishes, but of Dishes or Bowls that are certain measures in Mines, which are filled with Oar, by the Labour of the Miners, whereof a certain number are paid as a duty to the King, others as a duty to the Church, and the rest to the Proprietors, and according to the number of Dishes delivered, so the Miners are paid; and then they may eat the Fruit of their Labour in other Dishes. See Utensils and Wardens. DISSOLVING (l. 2. etc.) that is, a metal easy to be loosed from such other metals as are fixed or intermixed; and thence Death is called a Dissolution, when the Soul is loosened from its Terrestral part, and becomes a Celestial Metal, and from hence the word Dead is oft used in Erckern. DISTILLATION (l. 2. etc.) is a drawing of a Liquor made thin with heat, into a Receiver, by Alembics, Retorts, etc. and is mentioned by our Author, though of little use to Refiners, who deal with hotter fires and harder substances. DRAGONS- BLOOD, L. Sanguis Draconis (l. 2. c. 13.) our Author useth it for Luting. Dr. Salmon saith, It is the product of a Tree, red like Blood, or the colour of a Dragon, and comes to us from America, and by boiling condensated: but Pliny (l. 36. c. 7.) saith, That the Indians make it of the substance of a Dragon, crushed and squiezed with the weight of an Elephant, falling upon a Dragon, that hath sucked him to Death, whereby the Dragons and Elephants Blood are mingled together; and of this the Indians make a Colour like Cinnabar, so as though they bear one name, they are of different Natures, and which it is that Erckern means, I leave it to others; for the Blood of the Ox, etc. we see in other of his Experiments is used in Luting and Cements: there is also an Herb growing plentifully in England, called Dragon's Blood, which is much used to tinge Colours, and hath a Restringent quality, and so may be used with Clay in Luting. DRAM (l. 1. etc.) T. Quintlein, L. Drachma. See Weight. DREGS, T. Trussen vapfen, L. Faex, from whence we use the Word Feces. DRIVE or Driving, T. Abtreiben, L. Abigere, Depellere. l. 3. c. 25.) signifieth the forcing of metal to cast its dross upwards, as the feces downwards, l. 3. c. 25. & 26. and in many other places used. DROSS. T. Treusen. L. Faex. A. the scum of metals: see dregs, Feces, Scorias, Lees, Slacks, etc. so it seems Dregs is the purge or settlement at the bottom of melted Metals, and Dross the vomiting the crude matter upwards. DRY, T. Abdoerren and Treigen maken, L. Siccare (l. 3. c. 26.) See Ovens. DUCCATES. See Money. DUKE- GOLD. See Money. DULCIFICATION, T. Susz, L. Dulcis, or reducing the ill Tastes or Scents of Metal to sweet and pleasing; and thence the Powders often are called both Sugars and Salts, as they are different by Extraction, and the perfuming of them called Hedichra, and these are dispersed in our Author, and are called Saccharia Auri, or the Sugar of Gold. DUNG, T. Tingen, L. Sturcus, and of these Horse-Dung and Ox-Dung, and some other Dungs are a chief Ingredient to Luting (used by our Author l. 2. c. 20. etc.) and the Dung of Creatures are not only used in this Art, but in almost all other Arts and Sciences; by Chemists called Ignis Sapientum, or the Wise-man's Fire (Howel) and though it be in contempt amongst Ladies (and the less Learned Inquirers into Nature) yet certainly the Heathens had them in such Veneration, that they Sacrificed to most of their Idol Gods, upon the account of Stercorary Virtues in them: and therefore the Translators of our Bible into Latin, instead of Idols calls them Dij Stercorarij (Junius and Trem.) of which I apprehend this reason: viz. that the several uses which they made of Dung, either for Medicine or Manuring their grounds, might be propitious to them: and I have read it from some Traveller of note, That among the Indians it was usual, that when they intended Homage to their Superiors, or welcome to their Friends, they did evacuate their Dung into their Hand, and so daub it on the Face of whom they intended to honour or pleasure, and was ever accepted by them, as the first and best of their Welcoming Ceremonies: for Agricola tells us of Mans-Dung made as sweet as Civit. But to return nearer home, when I remained in London, during the great Plague in 1666. Dr. Glisson (famous in his time) being my old Friend and Acquaintance, persuaded me to take a piece of his constant Antidote, which was only the Dung of one that had died of the Plague, dried, and so kept in a foraminous Box, for the best Antidotical Perfume; but I thank God I escaped without it: and let us but consider of the great Virtue of the Dung of Geese, Ducks, Peacocks, Dogs (generally known and used) it were worth the while to make a Collection of them, from Johnson's Natural History of Quadrupedes, etc. and it may very well complete a large Book of those useful Experiments; especially if a little variety from Pliny be admitted: so I will conclude with this Direction, That Stone-Horse-Dung is of certain and known Virtues in curing scaldings, scorchings or burnings by hot Metals, if quickly applied to the part grieved. DUCCATE, T. Duckat. L. ducalis aureus. A certain Gold Coin which was first coined in Rome, Anno 547. and afterwards it began to be used in other Places, and so called because it had the Image of a Duke (that is, some eminent Leader of an Army, à ducendo) and worth about 6 s. 8 d. English, now 9 s. (Holiock) This Coin was held formerly the best Gold, but now it is much adulterated, so as Goldsmiths are very careful in receiving them. DUST. T. Staub. L. Pulvis. See Powder, Ashes, Pulverising. EA E EA EARTH, T. Erred, L. Terra. A. Earth, from the Saxon: Now, in every Territory there are differences of Earth, so there are accounted sixty eight sorts: but of those which are esteemed the best in England (which other Nations make use of more than ourselves.) some of them are rather lapidious than fragile, as yellow Ochre (of which I have seen a Pit or Quarry in Mr. Whorewood's grounds at Halton in Oxford-shire:) also red Ochre (which some call Marking-stone) in many places, and both of these are improved by artificial Okers: and of Fuller's Earth there is store, and very good, in a Lordship of the Earl of Bedford's, near Oburn-Abby; also in Sir John Warren's ground in Suffolk, and in many other parts of England; (of which the Dutch make good use, though there is a Law to the contrary.) As for Chalk which is burnt into Lime, and White Earth for Dishes, there is very good in a Manor of the Lord Abergaveny's, near Norwich, in Norfolk, and Potters-Clay for Pots, and Marl in most Counties, with which they manure and much improve their Grounds; also earth for making Brick and Tile for Houses, etc. of which there is plenty in most Counties, and commonly they burn to a red Colour: but there is a sort of Brick-Earth in many parts of Suffolk and Norfolk, and in other Counties, which burn white, and are more lasting and durable than the red, and these, other Countries borrows from us; and we borrow from them the Terra Sigillata, Terra Lemnia and Terra Armenia, and many more of great use and Virtue: but that which is common to us all, is Sand, and this is particularly used for those Ovens which are called Sand-Ovens, Sculpture II. and XXIV. for separating Metals: Now these have their several Names and Natures, as Pit-Sand, drift-Sand, Sea-Sand, etc. which may be experimented in Chemical Operations, viz. what kind of Sand is most proper for Metals, and what for Mortar, etc. But before I pass this Discourse, I cannot but speak of the Sands at Icklingham in Suffolk (yet spreading into Norfolk) having their rise from an Hole in that Village, therefore they are called Icklingham-Sands, or rather Mowings Sands, but their Motion is different from all others, for these do not move but by a Western Wind, and then they go East, and lie still and compact in any other Wind, and yet it hath walked from thence above Eight Miles to Brandon and Downham, two Towns East of it, covering the ground at least a foot deep for more than a Mile in breadth; and whilst the ground is so covered it produceth not the least sprig of any green thing: Now Brandon and Downham are two Towns situate on Suffolk-side, by the edge of the river Ouse, which runs from Thetford to Lyn-Regis: and the Inhabitants did make very high Banks to defend their Meadows, and to prevent the stopping up of the River, so that you might see good Meadow-ground on the East-side of the Bank, worth 20 s. an Acre; and on the Westside, sandy ground, the Inheritance not worth two pence an Acre to be sold. But the Inhabitants being not able to defend their River or Meadows any longer, left the Sands to act their pleasure: and then they fairly marched over the River, and are gone about three miles into Norfolk, still keeping the same point of motion. Now, whether this proceeds from any extraordinary attraction of the Sun, or inclination of the Sands to the Seashore, by way of sympathy, being about twenty miles Eastward, I shall leave it to further Consideration: and my reason of writing this was, that in sand Ovens for Metals the different sorts might be tried, some being of a very fresh, and some of a very salt, and others of a very dry Nature. And I cannot but further observe, that the Western parts do as much admire at the Eastern sandy Grounds producing pregnant Crops, as we at their mountainous Crops, both having their Fertility from the artificial and laborious Mixtures of other Earth's, with their stones and sands: see Sculpture XLI. Clay, Sand, etc. EGG, T. Eye. L. Ouum: l. 1. p. 20. this word hath as much difference in our Neighbouring Languages as any I meet with, and therefore I shall set them down; the Greeks call it Ooens: the Saxons, Eghe: the Belgic, Eye; like the Teut, the French, Oeuf: the Italian, Novo: the Spanish, Huevo, etc. In the Egg there are three parts, the white, the yolk and the tredle: the white of an Egg is called in L. Albumen, T. Eyeclar, and by Pliny, Ovi Albus Liquor, and this is called Eye clar, from the bright spots in it, by whose delatation the Coliquamentum, which is made from it, is styled (by that Learned Dr. Harvy,) the Oculus or Eye of the Egg, agreeable to the Germane word Eye; the Yolk is called in T. Totter, L. Vitellus, from Vita; the Treddle is called Chalazae. There is little use in Metallick matters of the Yolk or Chalaze, but our Author often mentions the use of the white of Eggs, as a chief Ingredient for Luting. But upon this occasion of writing of Eggs, I am put in mind of a Chameleon, which was bestowed on me by Mr. Fasset (an Eminent and Honest Chirurgeon) which was sent him out of the East Indies, and with it the very Stalk and Cluster of small Eggs, as they were in the Body, and one Egg in its full proportion, as white as Pullet's Eggs, and as big, considering the proportion: this Egg from the Chameleon was a perfect round shell, whereas Hens are Oval, so as I find this difference, that the Chameleons Eggs are Oval within, and are cast out of the Mouth round, but Hens are round within and are cast out of the Fundament Oval; and the reason may be, that the Chameleons Eggs comes out of its Throat (the extension of which is of one constant Globular form;) and so Snakes and Fish (whose Eggs are round) do send them out of their Mouths, and then take them in again, as they perceive any danger to their Spawn or Eggs; but Hen's Eggs come out of an Orifice, which opens by degrees, which makes the first part of the Egg narrow (for the little end comes ever first) and so the passage extending gently, the pliable Egg increaseth in bigness, and at the exclusion doth narrow it again, but not so much as at the first egress. Now it is to be observed, That when the Egg is unloosened from the Knot or Cluster of the little round Eggs, it soon receives extension into an Oval form, even whilst it remains in the Body, in compliance to its passage through the Fundament; and whilst it is in the Body, it is prepared also with a white Film over the whole Egg, resembling, but is not a shell, because it must endure compressure, and being now ripe to be expulsed, then by a certain spirituous liquid Cementation, or glutinous varnish from its Dung (which passeth out with it) and by the ambient Air (at its coming out) it is crushed in an Instant into a solid shell, which will not endure compression: And this I mention the rather, because I find that the Learned Dr. Harvy attributes the hardness of the shell to the approaching Air, and not to the Cementing Dung, and doth not in the least Discourse of the causes of oval and round forms of Eggs. ELECTUARY, of which there are near an hundred mentioned in the New London Dispensatory, whereof the chief are from Metals or Minerals. ELIXIR is exalted Quintessences, made by infusion and Digestion of Metals, etc. whereof there are also 25 sorts in the aforesaid New London Dispensatory. the chief of them also are from Metals. See Quintessence. ELL, T. Elen & Eblen, L. Vlna, Cubitus, A. Ell. Now it is here to be noted, that the English Ell is as long as two Germane els: and so it is to be applied proportionably to the making of Furnaces, etc. See Finger, Hand, Measure. ENAMEL, See Amel. EQUILIBRIO, See Weights. ESSENCES, (Doct. Salmon.) are the Balsamic parts of Metals, or of any other thing clearly separated from their gross parts, whereof 16 are numbered in his London Dispensatory, and the chief of those from Metals or Minerals▪ See Quintessence & Elixir. ESUSTUM, T. or Copper calcined and then called Calx Veneris. See Products of Metals. EVAPORATION, and to evaporate, T. Dampffein, or to take away the Dampness or exhaling of the humidous parts of Metals, by a gentle fire, or heat. (D. Salmon) L. Evaporare, or to take away vapours. See Fumigation. EXPRESSION, T. Ansz Trucken, L. Expremere, i. e. a straining or drawing forth Metals or Liquids by pressing, and this done either with Linen or Leather. See Filtration, and Quicksilver, the word is also applied to the speaking fluently. EXTERN. T. Avez wendig, L. Externus, or the outward part of Metals, or things. EXTRACTION, T. Ausz Zichen, L. Extractio and extrahere, that is, the drawing the Essence, life or virtue out of any Metal, by a fit Menstruum or Liquor from Oil, Tartar, Calx viva, Vinegar, etc. whereof above 60 are in Dr. Salmon's New London Dispensatory, and have peculiar names, viz. the Extraction from Iron is called Crocus Martis, and so of the rest. FEFFI FECES, T. Trusen, L. Feculae, or certain settle which remain at the bottom of melted Metals, which may be reduced to a profitable Powder; and we also call faeces from facere, or that which is made to flow or float on the top, or sink to the bottom of metals; and the word Dross, seems to come from Ros, or thick dew, which ariseth from Metals, and condensed bodies: also the word slacks T. is Slacken, L. Scorias, which signifieth also Dregs; and these are so called before the Metal itself is by Precipitation cleared from them; and it may be observed, that Argol (the Dregs of Wine) which is faeces of another Nature, for it hath this Property, that as the scum, dregs or faeces of Metals fly to the top or bottom, this betakes itself to the sides of Vessels, as if it scorned to be called either Scum or Dreg. FERMENTATION, T. Saurmachen, L. Ferment or to leaven, raise or improve; but as to Metals, it is used for rarification, ripening or flowering them by addition of Ingredients, as our Bread is ripened by Leaven, and Beer is flowered by Yeast, and in many parts of our Author it is used: See Dregs, Dross, scoria, Yeast, etc. FILE, T. Feile, L. Lima, A. File or Rasp, to file metals to a Powder, and the filings are called Limations, but we use the word File in three other senses, viz. File, from filum Thread; a File of Soldiers; which may also come from filum, because they stand in a direct Line, like an extended piece of Thread. FILTRATION, also from Filum a Thread, because clothes woven of Thread, are used for straining Quicksilver, etc. but that is more properly called Expression (as before) for this Filtration is done two ways, either by brown Paper, or Pendent Lists of Cloth, whereby the liquid Water may drop guttatim, from one Vessel into another. See Expression. FINGER, T. Finger. See Measure. FINING, Refining and Clarifying, T. Saeuberung and Reinguns, L. Purgare, Mundare, and are only the making the Metals more perfect in their Species or Kind's, by often melting them from their Dross or Dregs, l. 1. p. 18. FIRE T. Fewr, L. Ignis, is the chief Operator in the Dissolving of Metals, still showing its power and activity on the sulphurous part of Metals, and makes it fly away or submit. FISH- BONE, T. Fisck bein, L. Os piscis. See Bone-Ashes. FIST. T. Taust. L. Pugnus. See Measures. FIXATION, to Fixed. T. Hesten. L. Figere, is the making of that which is volatile in Metals to be Fixed and endure the fire, and not fly away; and this is done by sublimation, still adding some fixed Metals; as Lead-Glass, Led, &c to the Volatile. FLAME, T. Flame, L. Flamma, or the Oily part of Wood, or combustibles, impregnated by fire, for the more easy passing itself into all the porous parts of Metals. FLEAKY, Flakes, flaky, T. Floken, L. Floccus, Fragmen and Strictura, A. Flaky. See Shivery and Shivers. PHLEGM, T. Rhoden, L. Flegma, Pituita, or the waterish, volatile and unfixt part of Metals, and as in Man it is of a thicker substance than spittle, so in Metals it is of a thinner than the scoria or Dross, and that which ariseth from Sulphur or Vitriol, is commonly acid, sharp and salt. FLINTS, T. Fewerstein, and sometimes in the T. they are called Hornestein, from the colour: L. Silix, there are such store of these in Norfolk that it makes a City in Spain accounted one of the wonders of the World, being encompassed with fire, that is Flints, to be no wonder: but the Metalick Flints are such as accompany the Veins of Metal, and from whence Metal is made; but whether the Norfolk Flints, though full of Ignitous matter, will afford the like, may be tried, by such as do not value the charge of Experiments; and then the great Labour and Expense of digging in Mines might be saved. l. 1. p. 7. etc. See Stones. FLOCKS (of Wool) L. Floccus, the same with Flakes, Flocks of Wool, T. Ein Loken Will (l. 2. c. 20.) and A. called Locks of Wool, by lazily using l for f, for it hath its name from a number of Sheep which bears the Wool, which makes Flocks (being the remnants of the Wool after Combing and Dressing it) for spinning; the like is made of the remnants of Flax after Dressing, called Hards, and both of these are much used for Luting, and it may be a Quaere, whether the Flocks of Lemster Wool, which is the finest in all England, or Norfolk Wool the worst, be the best for use? but I prefer Leimster Flocks, because its Wool is called Leimster Oar, oftener than Leimster Wool, because the feed of the Sheep consists of those Herbs and Plants which have their Virtue from the metalick Oars under them; so as I know, that the Sheep of Leimster, being removed to places where there are not such subterranean Oars, their Wool in one year will be adulterated by their Feed, the word Flocks is also metaphorically used for Societys' of Men, and Beasts or Birds, etc. l. 1. p. 9 etc. FLOWERS. L. Flores. T. Blum, from whence we have our Word Blossom; this word in natural Plants signifies such parts, as are extracted by the Sun into delicate shapes and colours, and as they are the last Works of Nature upon Plants, so that which Chemists calls, Floss Auri (or of any other Metal) is, as it were, the last sublimation or extraction by fire from any Metal; and as the Flowers of Plants have their virtues superior to all the other parts, as leaves, stalks, etc. so the Flowers of Metals, which some also call Powders, are superior to the Gold, Silver, or any Metal in their substantial Bulks, or multifarious ways of Extracts or Magisteries. FLUS, T. Fluez, I retain the Word Flus, because it comes from the L. fluere to flow, as that which is fluid or flowable, and and sometimes (as it is a Composition of the Glass of Lead) it is called Lead-Glass, which being put into dissolvible metal, it gives expedition to their Dissolutions (l. 1. c. 8. c. 26. so l. 2. c. 5. etc.) and from hence may come the Word flushing or flowing of the Blood to the Face, from other parts, etc. FORCEPS. T. Tangs. L. Forceps. A. Tongues. See Utensils. FORGE. T. Einschuide. L. Fabrica. See Utensils. FOREIGN. See Outlandish. FORMS Chemical. See Salt. FRESH, T. Frisch, L. Recens. See Oars. FUMIGATION, from L. Fumus, A. Smoak, T. Rauch, but as to Metals it is used when they send up sharp and stifling Spirits: see Evaporation, but note that Fumigation is applied to dry bodies; Evaporation to liquid, to show the difference between Fumes and Smokes. FUNNEL. See Utensils. FURNACE▪ See Utensils and Ovens. FUSION, T. Geissig; the Word is oft used by our Author, and by Metallists, but more by Distillers; sometimes signifying putting in; from infundere and fundere, and sometimes in metals called fusile or fusible, being so meltable as it may be poured in or out. GA' G GA' GAMAHEZ, is an Arabic Word, signifying the Figures of things (as of Birds, Beasts, Snakes, Trees, etc.) naturally represented in or upon Stones, which usually attend Mines, as other transparent precious STONES do, as I have shown under the words COLOURS and YELLOW; for I intent not here to speak of Talismanical Figures from Constellations, for which I refer you to Gafferel, G. Agricola, etc. But first of the outward Figures of Gamahezies, of which sort I have seen many taken up about Aderly and Pomfret in Yorkshire, and in other parts of England, which do perfectly represent Snakes, as they usually lay rolled up in the Earth, when alive, so as these seem to be Snakes petrified, only their Heads are wanting in all, and they are seldom above two or three Inches Diameter, and of a blackish colour, yet I have heard of, but not seen, some inclining to a Goldish Colour: But it was my chance in the Year 1668. to find (on the side of a Stone-Cawsy, between Burport and Axminster in Dorsetshire) one of the largest Snakestones that ever I heard or read of, being above six Inches Diameter, and of a Freestone colour, and one might judge that there had been an Head on it but broken off, and as a Rarity I bestowed it on Dr. Warner one of his Majesty's Physicians, which was very acceptable to him. Now as to the inward Gamahez, I had some years since a whitish Flint, inclining to a light Blue, which being casually broke in two, upon the inside of the two broken parts, there were the perfect Figures of a Tree, with black Lines and delicate shadows, such as I have seen in Paintings, representing Trees in the midst of Snow, and so seemed the black Figures on the white Stone: I than thought myself well skilled in that Art, so I could not but give my Verdict on Nature's side, beyond any Arboreal Figure that ever I saw done by Art. GALLON, T. Kandel, L. Brocus, and from T. Kandel, the word Can or Vessel (to drink with) is derived; the proportion of which differs in England, as it doth in Germany, being in some parts four, in others two quarts, which is a Gallon. GUARDIAN, T. Gaerdigein, L. Gardianus. See Warden. GUILDERS, a Germane Coin (see Money) also such as use to lay Leaf Gold upon Metal, or otherwise, to make it appear like Gold, are called Guilders, T. Guilder, L. Aurare: see Mony. GLASS, T. Gleizen, L. Vitrum, is by fire produced from all Metals, but that which is of most use for helping to dissolve Metals, is produced from the Dross of Lead or Tin, and so called Speize Glass, and Tin Glass (l. 1. c. 8. and l. 2. c. 23. See Lead.) There is also that which is called Glassgall, Glasscup or Hematithe, a Stone of which Glass is made, and used also for Metals (l. 2. c. 3. and l. 3. c. 5.) GLASSCUP, T. Glass-Kup and Blutstein, L. Homathites, A. Bloodstone (l. 1. c. 34. 59) GLASS- GALL (l. 3. c. 5. 52. See Glass. GO, or to go, the word is commonly used as a motion to the dissolving of Oar or Metal, and signifies much of the same with driving and flowing, being only degrees and terms of Art towards dissolution. GLIMMER, or Glumering, T. Glantz, L. Splendere, A shining Oar, which the Latins call Rutilatio not properly so appliable to bright Oar, but Resplendescentia may do well enough. (lib. 1. cap. 2. 5. 11. & lib. 2. & lib. 3. 7. 4.) See Oars: and sometimes, it is taken for Tallow, lib. 2. cap. 28. GOLD, lib. 2. etc. It was writ so by the old Saxons, and Britain's, and still so by the Danes, but the T. now Goldst and Belgic Gout, and if we observe what little difference there is between Gott, Gut and Gud, used in these two Languages for God; and Gout and Goldst for Gold: We may well think those Ancients did make this Metal their GOD; and that we may not altogether blame them, we may well bring-in the Spanish and Italians, who call this Metal, ORO, signifying to pray, as if it were a Metal, to which their Forefathers did pay their Devotions and Prayers: and all of us seem at this day to be guilty of this Metallick Idolatry: but to prevent that Imputation, the Latins call it Aurum, and We Gold, being of a different Dialect, from almost all the present European Languages, except the old Saxons, as I said, and Danes. Now, as Quicksilver is called Mater, so this is called Pater Metallorum, and therefore there may be some Dispensation for a filial Love to the nobler Part of our Mother Earth, especially if it be without idolatrous and covetous Applications. We have little natural Gold in England from any of our Mines, yet we are not altogether without it, for I am assured from a Cornish Gentleman, that hath a considerable Interest in the Stanneries of Cornwall, That in digging for Tin, they often find little Grains of Gold, not in the Tin-metal, but in the outward sandy circumjacent parts of their mines: and that the biggest he ever saw, was not above the bigness of a small Pea, nor need we much to search for it, or labour artificially to make it: for what we have from other parts in Africa, Asia, and America do sufficiently supply us, especially our late Trade with Guinea in Africa, from whence 'tis brought to us in little Grits or Seeds; yet I was told by an eminent Goldsmith, That he had often bought pieces of above an ounce in Weight, and that was so good, that though it had not an high Colour, yet the Colour was recompensed by the little loss in melting: Whereas the Seeds of other Gold are much adulterated with the filings of Iron, which they draw off by the Loadstone: but when they bring their Artificial Gold, made into Duccates, they are first to use their skill in separating a considerable quantity of Silver from the Gold, which is commonly made by Art, to contract the Gold, whereby it will endure the touch like Gold: but their Scissors soon decide the Controversy, and cheat: so as Art discovers the Artificial Gold from other mixed Metals. Our Author saith, lib, 2. c. 1. That the seed of Gold came out of India by Nilus, wherein he is mistaken (as other former Ancients were) in taking Gehon, in India, to be in Asia; of which Mistake, Sir Walter Rawligh hath convincingly showed their Error (H. M. l. 1. c. 6.) Yet very probably Nilus may afford Variety of Gold, in respect it hath its Heads, from the two great Lakes of Zambre and Zailar (and not Zambre alone, as Dr. Heylen would have it) in the lower Aethiopia, and passeth the upper Aethiopia, or Habasines' Empire) which is full of Gold, and then running above 2000 miles, and so may well bring it into Egypt, and from thence cast it into the Mediterranean Sea, and by that Sea tossed into Asia and Europe: But, as I said, We have a shorter and better way for it to Guinea, in Africa, from the river Nigro, and the Coasts of it, and that we may the better credit a greater Efflux of seeded Gold from thence, than from any other in Africa, 'tis found by late Geographers, that this River doth rake the very Bowels of the Earth for it, for it seems (as they tell us) that it hath its rise from a great Lake, called the Black Lake, within two Degrees or 120 Miles of the Equinoctial (and within four degrees Eastward of the River Nile) and so it runs Northward about 600 Miles) whereof under ground about 60 miles) and then riseth again and falls into the Lake Borneo, from whence it bends it course directly Westward (differing from the course of Nile, which runs directly North) and so after it hath run above and under ground more than 3000 miles (through many Kingdoms and Countries, rich in Gold) it unlades its Treasure into Guinea, by many lesser streams, where the Natives are always dealing for Gold, and itself at last in the Atlantic Sea, over against the Islands called Hesperides; so as we never cross the Equinoctial to go thither; which is less trouble than unto the farthest part of the Mediterranean Sea, where Nile vents itself: or to the Mouth of the two Eminent Rivers of Ganges or Indies in the East-part of Asia (and therefore called the East Indies:) Now where the land of Havilah which Pison encompasseth (mistaken for Ganges) wherein there was Gold, and the Gold was called good; as also where Paradise was, or is, whether beyond our known World, or the Middle Region of the Air, or elevated near the Moon, or as far South as the Line, or as far North as that Line; or whether near Havilah in Africa, or Havilah in Asia; or whether a place called Eden or Paradise was peculiarly created for the Reception of Adam after his Creation; and Christ Jesus after his Resurrection; I shall leave to Sir Walter Raleigh, and others to determine, but we are assured from the sacred Story, that there was Gold near that Place, and that then (in the Innocency of times) the Gold was good; which must be known by Assaying, and doubtless that Knowledge was communicated to Adam, yet we hear no more of Gold in that Holy Writ till 2800, after Adam (though it was accounted the Golden Age) and then, (Gen. 24. 22.) Rebeccah was presented with Gold-earing, and shekels of Gold, so it seems they had the Art of Melting and casting Gold into Assaying and Forms, as may be collected from the several Distinctions in the Sacred History, concerning Beaten Gold, pure fined and refined Gold, and crown Gold; And we are assured that in Moses' time, they had the knowledge of all Metals, as may be read in Numb. 31. 21. where Moses taught the Soldiers how the Spoils of their Heathen Enemies were to be purified, commanding (as from GOD) That all their Gold, Silver, Brass, Copper, Tin and Lead, and every thing that endureth the fire, (in the furnace, according to the Syriack) should be purified by fire, and then to be accounted clean: yet, it is also said in that Text, That it shall be purified by the Water of Separation, by which water certainly is meant Quick silver, because this doth purify, cleanse and devour Metals; and so Dr. Salmon calls it a Volatile Juice or Liquor; for nothing but Fire or that Quick silver or Aqua fortis can separate those Metals. Now of that Text, the Commentators gives but little account, passing it in general, only as a Water of Purification; whereas there were two sorts of Water of Purification: viz. that which is mentioned for purifying Metals, and this other for purifying Men and Women, which in Numb. 29. unto verse 11. is plainly set down, how, in what manner, and with what Ingredients it was composed: viz. that a young Red Heifer, without spot and without blemish, and which was never put into a Yoke, was to be brought to the Priest, and one was to slay her before his Face, and the Priest was to take some of her Blood with his finger, and sprinkle it seven times before the Tabernacle of the Congregation; and then the Heifer with her Skin, Flesh, Blood and her dung, was to be burnt in his sight, and whilst it was burning, he was to cast into the midst of its fire, Cedar-Wood, Hyssop and Scarlet, and after that, both the Priest and he that burned the Heifer, washed their clothes with Water, and bathed their flesh also in Water, and yet they remained unclean until the Even: (by which time, it may be supposed, that all was dried) in the mean time, one that was clean was to gather up the Ashes of the Heifer, and lay them up clean without the Camp, and he also, for this act, was to be accounted unclean until the Even; and these Ashes were kept (as Lees) to put into Water, which was called the Water of separation for the Congregation of the Children of Israel, as also for Strangers so journing with them to be sprinkled with, and thereupon also called the Water of Purification for Sin, ver. 9 so as we see clearly this Water of Purification of Men, was a distinct Water from the water of Purification and Separation of Metals; and the Ingredients of one is communicated to us, but the Holy Spirit thought fit to conceal the other from us; However, this Science of Purifying Metals, did daily improve, which Historians and Philosophers shows us, before David and Solomon's time, which two Kings are plentiful in their expressions of fining and refining Gold and Silver; and these Arts David most Divinely applies to our Souls, which by often refining (like Metals) are brought to Perfection: and this Science did so increase in Nehemiah's time (Chap. 3.) that it grew to a Trade, and the Professors thereof called Goldsmiths, and so GOLD and the Trade for it continues still in the World. But I perceive since Christ said to the Thief, That he should be with him that day in Paradise, there hath been more search after the place of Paradise, than before; not for the Pleasures in that place, but for its Neighbourhood to Havilah, wherein 'tis said, There was Gold which was good: And therefore in this Discourse, having traced the four great Rivers of three parts of the World for it, I may venture the fourth, viz. America, and ask whether Pison be not the Ocean, or one of the four streams or Sea's which encompass Havilah, or a Country abounding with good Gold, for seeing it is not agreed where Paradise is, and what were the four Streams: I hope, I may not give Offence in rendering this great Island or Continent of America, surrounded with a Pisonick Ocean, to be the same, or some such like place as Havilah; and well may we trade thither for gold, where Religion shows us the way; for Divine Herbert, in his Church Militant, tells us, That Religion stands on Tiptoes (and from our Land) Ready to pass to the American Strand. Now if Religion goes thither, we may safely follow it, so as it be in pursuit of Paradise or Havilah; and seeing it is not agreed that they are in Asia, Africa or Europe, though Lombardy in Europe is called The Garden of the WORLD, we may try whether there be any Havilah, or something equivalent to it in America, and leave Paradise to the prognosticated Religion to find it out. Now if we may Credit the Writers upon that great Continent or Island (Nicols) it extends from the Arctic to the Antarctic Circle, and hath its breadth in some parts proportionable; and in this great spot of Earth, there is a greater plenty of Gold and other Metals, than we can find from the other Havilahs; but I shall conclude here, because I shall speak more on this Subject in the manner and way of getting and washing the Seeds of Gold, and other Discourses of Gold. See the Words Metals Mines, Washing. GRADUATION, T. Gradierung, L. Graduatio, from Gradus, A. Degrees; but in its Metallick sense, it is applied to the melioration of Metals, by certain degrees, either to that colour or virtue which is most proper and natural to them: (l. 2. c. 9 & c. 45. etc.) and the Word is also applied to Graduates in the Universities, who by degrees are sensibly Refined by the Liberal Arts and Sciences. GRAINS, T. Koernleine, L. Granum, and both in the notion of Weights, have reference to a grain of Corn, from which Weights have their original. See Weights. GRANULATION, T. Kuernen, from whence I suppose we have our word Cornel or grain of Wheat, Barley, etc. and it comes from the former Latin Word granum: in the Metallick sense, it is considered as a certain proportion of melted Metals, made by Art, into the smallness of such grains, so as they may be the better weighed, and is a peculiar Art in performing them (l. 1. c. 19 etc.) See Weights. GREY, T. Graw, L. Glaucus, Cinereus, etc. See Colours. GREEN, T. Greisen, L. Viridis, but it hath its particular names, according to its Resemblances, viz. grass Green, Herbeus, Leek-green, Prosinus, and so of the rest. See Colours. GROUND; this Word hath many senses in our English, viz. Ground or Earth, Foundation or Principle, or Reason; but here it doth signify such Metals as one doth grind small. T. Malen and Gerienen, L. Molare, that is, being ground, it is a Foundation to other proceedings. HA H HA HAND. See Measures. HEARTHS. See Ovens. HELLER. See Weights. HELM, Helmet. T. Helm, L. Tegumentum, made of Clay or Iron, used in the Metallick Art, for covering of Ovens, etc. as in Sculpture XVII. etc. the Word is also used for an Head-Piece in time of War, and for the chief Rudder that guides a Ship, all signifying something of a Defensative or Preservative Nature. HEMATHITE, which is no other than the Bloodstone, of a dark-red colour, L. Hematites, T. Blutstein. Pliny saith, It is of Kin to a Loadstone, of which there are ten sorts, but that which is called Hematites Fossilis (digged out of Iron Mines) is of a Purple Colour, which we do not find in England, and but some few of the other▪ See Glasscup. HERMETICK- SEAL, that is, to join the Mouth of a Glass, first heat in the fire, and then nipped together by Pincers; so called from Hermes the first Inventor. Pliny. See Cement. HORNY. See Horny Oars. IN I IR INCH. See Measures. INCINERATION and Reverberation, are two sorts of Methods in Calcining Metals. See Calcine and Ashes. INCORPORATE or Incorporation; that is, when Metals are mixed, they are called Incorporated, or their Bodies joined together: and from hence Bodies Politic, or a number of Men joined in a Fraternity, are called Incorporations, because they consist of all sorts of Tempers and Metals. l. 2. c. 1. s. 2. INFUNDING, Infusing and Infusion (lib. 1.) that is, a pouring or putting: in but the Infusion of Metals and of Plants have two ways of proceedures. See Fusions. INGOT, called by that name in the Teutonick and English, and is a little long Vessel wherein Gold is cast, which Vessel is called an Ingot, and the piece of Gold taken out of it hath the same Name. l. 2. c. 47. and Sculp. XXVIII. Fig. 5. INSPERG is oft used in Erkern, from Inspergo, when one Metal hath certain parcels or sprinklings of other Metals, whereby their goodness is seen before proving. l. 4. c. 1. INSPISSATION, is the method of Fixation of Metals. INSTRICK, is a Term of Art, used to signify the first work in separation of Metals, l. 3. c. 22. IRON and Steel: see Metal: T. Eysen, Iron-man, L. Ferrum and Chalybs: l. 2. c. 20. s. 2. See Oars, JUG, T. Krug, Heb. Chug, A. Jug or Pot: so it seems we do retain the Word, which is of little difference from the Hebrew. KE K KE KETTLE, T. Kessel, L. Cacubus. See Utensils. KELL or Kiln, or Kill for metallic Matters, T. Kalck-Ofen, L. Fornax and Calcaria, A. Kill, they are also used by that name, for drying Malt, etc. See Furnaces and Ovens. KEINSTOCKS, I retain the word as very proper, and is fully explained. l. 3. c. 22. See Thornels. LA L LA LADDER. See Utensils. LEACH (l. 3. c. 26.) this word I retain signifying hard work (often mentioned by Erkern) and the Etymology may be, because such hard Work, do occasion Le Ache, on the Ache in the Joints of the Operators. LAMINS. T. Bleck. L. Lamina, A. the Plates of Metals. l. 4. c. 4. LAPIS LAZULI, l. 1. of which Blew Vitriol is made. LAPIS CALAMINARIS, L. Cadmia: see Cadmia, Calaminaris and Stones. LAPIS TUTIJ, a Compound made of Calaminaris, good for sore Eyes. See Calaminaris and Stones. LATIN, T. Latton, Auri Chalcum and Orichalcum, also Coronarius, and is a Compound of Copper and Lapis Calaminaris, and so cast into Forms and not wrought with Hammers, in respect of its friableness or brittleness, that which is also made of thin Plates of Iron and so Tined over, is vulgarly called Latton. See Plates, Iron, Tin. LEAD. T. Bley, L. Plumbus; it is called also (Howel) Aurum Philosophorum, because it doth as it were govern Gold and other Metals in their Precipitations, and from thence we use this word to lead or conduct, because this Metal doth as it were, lead and conduct us to the knowledge of all other Metals (l. 4.) and several other parts: see Metals; and certainly no Metal hath more excellent effects in Chirurgery, than the Artificial Leads made of it, under the names of white and red Lead, and therefore it is put under the highest Planet Saturn, slow in motion and sure in operation, and of this virtual metal we have as good and as great quantities in England and Wales proportionably, as in any parts of Europe; besides the great quantity of Silver contained in it: But before I close this Discourse (because it was omitted in the word Ceruse) I must inform you, that for this common Lead (which is a natural Metal, and plentiful in all our Mine-Countries) there are Mills erected (such as the Society for the Mines Royal have in Wales) where they make white Lead (which is only a product of that Metal, Led, corrupted with Vinegar or Urine, and afterwards being ground in the Mills, and form into a white colour, is called white Lead, and after that Refined, and then hath the name of Ceruse, which yields the best and most perfect white, and at these Mills there is made also red Lead, of the common Metal Led, and is brought to that colour, only by the Art of using Fire to it; and both being thus made, as well the red as the white, are of excellent use, not only for Painters, etc. but to all Surgeons (as I have said:) There is also a mineral Led, which we call Black Lead, something like Antimony, but not so shining or solid, of which sort I know but of one Mine in England, and this yields plenty, both for ourselves and other Nations, and this Mine is in Cumberland, which they open but once in seven years (I suppose the reason is, lest they should dig more than they can vend) this also is used by Painters and Surgeons, etc. with good success, especially being mixed with the products of Metals: and of late, it is curiously form into cases of Deal or Cedar, and so sold as dry Pencils, something more useful than Pen and Ink. There is also a white Mineral in England, called white Chalk, tending to a transparency, but of a Leadish quality, and therefore I place it here, rather than under Earth's or Stones. LEAD- GLASS. See Fluss. LEATHER. See Utensils. LIMBECK, T. Alimbick, L. Alimbicus, quia extrahendo materiam lambit (Minshaw) and also called sublimatorium, quia materiam evehat in sublime, and he saith, it is an Arabian word; but in short, it is a kind of an Oven or Furnace made of Metals, vulgarly called a Still, and used more for distilling Waters than Metals, and is sometimes mentioned by Erckern, but chiefly as an Helmet to the Athanor or great Furnace (l. 2. c. 32. s. 7.) Now of these Stills, I deny not but those which we commonly use, are very fit for their purposes; but I have contrived one (whereof I have made often Trials) which perform the like, with much less fire, and less trouble, because the fire need not to be tended but once in 10 or 12 hours, and the Waters (of several sorts) which I have Distilled in it, are every way as effectual, but the manner and way of Distilling therein, doth every day improve in my Experiments, and when it is fitted to effect all the intents and purposes of the common Stills (with some additions, which they cannot perform) I shall divulge the Invention, without Patent, or any expected Reward, but thanks. See Quicksilver. LIMETS. See Files. LIME- CALX, I have writ something of this, under the word Calcine; but now I shall speak of Lime, or the Calx of Limestone or Chalk-stone, which Calx is used both in Cementing, Luting, and in melting of Metals, with other Ingredients, but the great use of this Lime, is to make Mortar for Buildings, and therefore I shall refer it to the word Mortar: only observe this, That when Limestone or Chalk, whilst it is immediately from the Pit or Quarry (because it is properly a Stone, though of a soft nature) is called unslacked or unburnt Lime, but when it is burnt, called slacked, and so all Metals unburnt or burnt may be also called, unslacked or slacked and the pieces slacks, which word is often used. LINEN. See Utensils. LIQUATION, L. Liquatio, from Aqua & liquidus: A. liquor or moisture: and liquation is a term in this Art of Chemistry for one of the Methods in dissolving Metals, and the word liquifaction of the like sense, and from the same Radix is also applied to Metals when they are melted by the heat of fire, or Sun: See Conglutination. LITTARGE, T. Blegg Leidt or Glet, L. Lithargicus, or the stone of Gold or Silver, from the Greek Lethos; and sometimes called the spume or froth of Gold and Silver, but generally the Excrements, Scorias or Dross of Gold or Silver caused by Lead, and if it be Gold-Litarge, it looks of a Yellow Colour, and though it be dross; yet the Metallists give it this distinct name, because it hath more excellent Virtues than any other Excrement, Recrement or other Dross, and that it may be cleared from other words of almost the same sound; I think it fit to distinguish them here: This word is written Littarge, and by some Lithargy, and that which signifies the public Office of Devotions, LITTURGY; and the sleepy Disease, LETHARGY (with an E:) and I wish that the plenty of our Littarge or Lithargy may raise up our Litturgical Devotions to be delivered in all times of our Wealth, and from the Lethargical or sleepy hours of Death, as well by our Devotions as by the excellent spirits, etc. made of our Littarge peculiar to that Apoplectic Distemper. (See those words.) LIXIVIUM, See Menstruum, Lee or Lees. LIE, called also Ligh or Lees, to distinguish from a lie, or to lie, or to speak untruth, or to lie or lay down to rest.) T. Langen, L Lixivium, from Lix signifying Ashes, or as Minshaw calls it, Humour Cineri mistus, of which see more in Buck and Menstruum. And here I may observe that as in Latin, Lix signifies Ashes so lixa is Water; and those two mixed, makes the lees, with which women wash and buck their clothes for so lixa also signifies. LOAD- STONE or Magnet (lib. 4▪ cap. 21 and 22. s. 4.) T. Magnet-steine; but when it hath relation to Navigation, 'tis called Segel-steine, or sail-stone; but the Latins Magnes and Magnifficus: and A. from the Saxon, Load or Leading stone, or lapis cujus ductu Nautae instituant cursum; and Erckern for this and many other qualities calls it a Jewel, and 'tis pretty to see how the Latins quibble about this word Magnes, for they call a great Man Magnas (on the account of Honour;) and Magnus great, on the account of bulk, etc. and this stone Magnes, being of so great Virtue, that it is scarce comprehensible, and 'tis probable, that the other two words do borrow their titles from it. Pliny tells us, (lib. 7.) That this word Magnes was given from Magnes the Name of a Shepherd who was the first finder of it, and makes five kinds of it (lib. 36. cap. 16.) Cardanus but three kinds, who observes, That Aristotle was altogether ignorant of the maratine use of it, and that Galen and Al. Aphrodosius (two great Inquirers into the secrets of Nature) have not so much as once mentioned the wonderful Nature of this Stone: but now Authors do abound in their discourses upon it, and make all things easy and plain in their Naratives of its Virtues and Operations: only when their Discourses are applied to its Variation by the Needle (touched with it for the use of Navigation) there they disagree very much in their Opinions; and amongst the rest, Boetius tells us, (cap. de Magnete) that there are two magnetic Mountains; and that those magnets which are digged nearest to the Arctic Pole, have most of the Arctic Virtue; and such as are digged nearest to the Antarctic, have most of the Virtue of the Antarctic; which is the cause of their Variations, and many other pretty and plausible notions are writ of them, but I shall only mention some of my own Observations. 1. That this Stone is found in most Iron-mines in England, but are not so effectual in their attractive power as those which we have from foreign Parts, and therefore ours need to be nourished with filings of Iron) for stones have a vegetable life to be preserved) and to be kept from the Juice of Onions and Garlic, and moist places, which do unglutinate, and so destroys or subdues their Virtues: and therefore those Lapidists whose Art it is to fit Lodestones for Navigation (or other uses) will not suffer those Plants to be near them: and I have often tried, That when I have touched my knife with a Loadstone, and thereby empowered it to take up Needles or small Weights (and so it holds its Virtue many days) but the Knife once touched with an Onion doth utterly lose the Virtue which it borrowed; I confess I never tried Onions or other acid things to the Poles of my Loadstone, because I chose rather to believe than hurt the Stone: especially a Lapidist of my Acquaintance affirming the Truth of it, who was so great an Artist that he told me, That with a Magnet of the bigness of my head, he could drive the Soul of it, into as little a compass thereof as a Nutmeg, but before I could see the effects of his Art, I was diverted with other Occasions, and could never find him after. Yet it was my good fortune to be acquainted with a worthy Gentleman Francis smith Esq (of Rushoke in Worcester-shire, since deceased) who was Master of much sound learning and very ingenuous in his Discourses, when he thought fit to expatiate himself; or otherwise reserved: and we happened upon the Discourse which I had with the Lapidist upon which he produced a Loadstone, fixed with its irons for the North and South points, which I had the freedom to weigh in my Gold-Scales, and the Iron pieces and points and Gold (for Ornament which embraced it) weighed just eleven grains, and it attracted a piece of Iron of an ounce weight. Now, there being according to the Venetian account 6912 Grains to a pound, every ounce is 576 grains, which is 52 times 11 grains so that it took up an Iron of above 52 grains more than its own weight (considering its embracers) and by my description of the Lapidist, he believed, it was bought of the same person and looking upon it as avery great Rarity, I took upon me the Confidence to tell him, That it was pity so great a Jewel should lie concealed, and added, that I believed it would be a very acceptable Present to his Majesty: He approved of my Proposal, and accordingly did present it, and it was so accepted, and got a good Office soon after, I cannot say for that, (though it deserved it) but for his own Deserts, and I hope it is still preserved amongst his Majesty's Rarities. Another piece of Curiosity I saw in the Hands of Sir William Persal (since Deceased also) viz. a Terrella or Loadstone, of little more than 6 Inches Diameter, turned into a Globular Form, and all the Imaginary Lines of our Terrestrial Globe, exactly drawn upon it: viz. the Arctic and Antarctic Circles, the two Tropics, the two Colours, the Zodiac and Meridian; and these Lines, and the several Countries, artificially Painted on it, and all of them with their true Distances, from the two Polar Points, and to find the truth of those Points, he took two little pieces of a Needle, each of about half an Inch in length, and those he laid on the Meridian line, and then with Brass Compasses, moved one of them towards the Arctic, which as it was moved, still raised itself at one end higher and higher, keeping the other end fixed to the Terrella; and when it had completed it Journey to the very Arctic Points, it stood upright upon that Point; then he moved the other piece of Needle to the Antarctic Point, which had its Elevations like the other, and when it came to the Point, it fixed itself upon that Point, and stood upright, and then taking the Terrella in my Hand, I could perfectly see that the two pieces of Needles stood so exactly one against the other, as if it had been one entire long Needle put through the Terrella, which made me give credit to those who held, That there is an Astral Influence that darts itself through the Globe of Earth from North to South (and is as the Axletree to the Wheel, and so called the Axis of the World) about which the Globe of the Earth is turned, by an Astral Power, so as what I thought imaginary, by this Demonstration, I found real; and am convinced by this, and other Experiments, That not only the whole Earth is guided by this Astral Influence, (fixed in the Septentrional and Astral Points) but every particular within the circumference of the Terrestrial Globe, hath a Magnetic tendency to the Septentrional Points, naturally fixed in them, as may be Experienced in Plants, Stones and Metals (of which one might write a large Volumn) and it is commonly known, that in Clay, which have not been formerly digged (as I mentioned of that under my House (in Title Day) being digged in pieces of 6 Inches, more or less in length, make them into Rolls, pointed at each end, and hang them with a thread in Equilibrio, and they will turn themselves to the North, to show that there is an obedience in all Vegetables, to the Septentrial Astral conduct, and so it may be evident on every other Vegetable; and though the lesser sorts of them can scarcely be experimented, in respect of their minuteness, yet in Plants of greater bulks, we may see the predominancy of the North Point in their vegetation, which is the reason, why Plants that are removed do not grow, or but very slowly, till they have recovered their first position to the North, by a second compliance to the Northern Magnetic Attraction. And it is not only thus in Vegetables, but in sensitives and Rationals, which I might enlarge: yet before I leave this Discourse, I cannot but say something of the Constellation that attends this Arctic Point, which is called Cynosura, pretended in the stories of Constellations (see Dr. Hood) to be the Daughter of Calisto, and so had the name of Vrsa minor (a Female) yet hath the tail of a Dog, and the end of that tail is called the Polestar, and this polar Point is called also Septentrio, from the seven Stars which hover about it, and those seven Stars called Septentriones: Now the Scythians held the polar Point to be an Iron Nail (which is our Axis) and this they adored as a God, and before the Loadstone was known for Navigation, the 2 stars on the shoulder of this Bear or ursa minor, were Directions to the Spaniards instead of a Compass, Card or Needle: the like is said of the Constellation (called Helyce, Sister to Cinosura) which is in the Southern Point, fixed in ursa major; and the seven chief of this Constellation are called Charles' Wain, and are in the hinder part and tail of this great Bear; but I have said enough of this, especially concerning the Scythians belief, that it was Iron (probably not then knowing the Name of the Loadstone, and therefore called it Iron instead of Loadstone:) but to pass these Metallick Parts of the Terrestrial Globe, and celestial Influences attending them. I cannot but recommend the Experience I have had (in lying in my bed with my Feet to the North and Head to the South) in my rest, sleep and dreams, from other Positions, which I leave to the Consideration of others; and return to the Magnetism of Metals; wherein all Chemists agree, That Gold is the Magnet of Quick silver, Iron of Copper, Copper of Silver, and Tin of Lead; and these Magnetisms are still guided by astral Influences, not only of the Seven Peculiar Planets, to the Seven Metals, but to the Septentrional Axis or North Point, which directs the Influences of the Seven Stars upon the Seven Metals. And now I shall conclude, and refer you to that admirable Experiment which our Author mentions of this Jewel, l. 4. c. 20. (collected from Serapion (an old Philosopher) as also to Cardanus, (a known Author) who tells us what he had experimented, viz. That if a Knife be touched with a Loadstone, it will enter into any part of Man's Body without sense of Pain, not only in thrusting it in, (which is common to all Weapons till the Air entereth the Wound) but also when it is drawn out. Yet I cannot leave this pleasant Subject, till I have imparted my own Experiments, in making this Jewel (for so Erckern deservedly calls it) useful to inform us, as well of the Ebbing and Flowing of the Sea, as of the Alterations of the Wether, and to that End, I framed a Model or Case (as is here represented, but covered with glass) with a pair of little wooden Scales artificially hung by a thread to a thin piece of Wood, placed between the two iron Points of the Loadstone, so as the two Scales may hang true under each point, and at each end of the wooden Beam of those two Scales, I fixed two little pieces of Iron, to answer the two points, whereby the attrative power of the two Iron Points of the Loadstone might operate its attractive power on the two lower pieces of Iron on the Beam, and then in one Scale I put in Quicksilver, and in the other certain little weights proportionable to the weight of the Quick silver; and on the Centre of the top of the frame I placed an Horizontal Dial, with a Compass-Needle in it (such are commonly sold) and on each side of the frame (at equal Distances from the Centre) I placed also upon an extended piece of thin wooden board, two more such Horizontal Dial's with Needles, so as the Gnomon's of all three, might answer each other in a diametrical Line. But having been hindered in perfecting my real Apprehension, of obtaining thereby many pleasing and useful Experiments, I must refer the further account of them, till another time. Sculpture XLII. LOAM, See Clay. LOATH, See Money. LUMP, l. 1. c. 4. Teut. Klumpen. L. Massa, or a piece of any thing composed of hard, and moist, mixed, as Clay; etc. but in a mixture of Metals, 'tis called Bolus, and in mixture of light Earth's, Gleba: and we also call a fish (which is common in our Markets) a Lump, in respect of its form, close, and compacted without a regular shape, and the word may well come from Lumbus or Lumbricus, by changing b into p, which two Letters differs not in their labial utterance, but by the addition of some other Consonant or Vowel: also Lumbus is properly a Storehouse (for refuse Metals or lumps of Metals) and for other Wares. LUTE, Luting, The Teut. calls it Laum, the L. Lutum, and they have a word called Testudo, which signifies not only the outward Case, or belly of a musical Instrument called a Lute, but also Clay, and as Lute for Clay, and as Lute for a musical Instrument, are synonimus, so they are in their operations, for as the Belly of a Lute serves for reverberations of Sounds which makes them musical, so these Lutes or luting serves in a Chemical Notion to reverberate or repercuss the spirits of Metals, to make them harmonious and useful to Chemists, and consequently to others who partake of their Art: and therefore the Chemists have a Past or Day compounded with many Ingredients, whereof the chief is that which they use about the necks of their Retorts, etc. which they call Lutum Sapientiae, showing the Wisdom of the All-Disposer, that, that Earth which preserved the Metal whilst quiet and undisturbed in its Bed or Mine; is now made use of also, to keep its spirits from being useless. MA M MA MAN, See Vir. MARCASITE, T. Marcasit, L. Pyrites, and we Marcasite, Erckern saith, It is rich in Gold, Dr. Salmon, calls it Bismuth, but I find it to be no where else, and makes it to be one of the Recrements of Silver; he agrees with other Lapidists, that there is both a Goldish and a Silverish Marcasite, the one yielding Silver the other Gold, however, they are excellent Fire-stones which we find in our Mines in England, but not so good for Firelocks, as those which are brought from Germany, etc. And our Marcasites do neither afford Gold nor Silver worth the charge. Diascorides saith, That Brass may be made with composition of this stone, but that will not quit cost, because the Marcasite is not so soft as Calaminaris, but it may be tried whither by mixing it with Calaminaris it will not give a nobler Tinge to Brass, and because it is not generally comprehended in Metals, but of an Epicene or doubtful Gender, I shall refer it to Stones. MARBLE, T. Marmel stain. L. Marmor, and A. Marble, which is but a little Variation from the general Name of Marmor, in Greek Marmoras, and we have several sorts of them, which consist of various colours and uses, and of these we have in Devenshire, and other Counties in England, good white and black, brown, bluish, green, serpentine, yellow and grey, faintly intermixed, and though, ours consists of various colours and degrees of hardness, yet they are short of those which are brought us from beyond Sea, or at least we think so; and as for the Porphory or red Marble, we have none of it that ever I saw: And the Alabaster which is a kind of soft white Marble, we have but little good of it, but of the Lapis Lidius or Touchstone, which indeed is a kind of black Marble, by which (being polished) Goldsmiths try their Gold without Touch-needles) and of these we have plenty, especially in Derby shire. (See Touchstone.) but the Occasion of Erckerns mentioning Marble, is because the stone is the hardest of any common stone, and so used by Painters to grind their Colours on, and for reducing Metals into Dust, by Metallists. See Lime, Mortar and Stone. MARK, T. Merch, L. Marca, signifying eight ounces; the Word in English is applied eight several ways: See Dictionarys. MARK CUTTING, that is, cutting of pieces of Metal which are marked out to be divided, so the Art is in dividing of the pieces to be cut, whereby they may bear a just proportion of weight one with another, and this is performed only with a cold Chizel (Dr. revel.) MARLE, T. Marghel, L. Marga. See Earth. MATRAS, We retain the same Name. See Utensils. MEASURE, T. Masz, L. Mensura which are considered either of Longitude, Latitude, Altitude or Profundity: and these are sometimes used distinctly, or jointly, and so reduced to Measures of Application, T. Zuphurgung, and to Measures of Capacity, T. Emphaung, the first of the four (called Longitude, L. Longitudo) is termed also in T. Masz, A. Longth, but the Latin hath variety of Words adequated to the extension of things to be measured, as the Measuring of Lands, Geodesia, etc. 2. Latitude, T. Breit, A. Breadth, broad, and large, L. Largus, and Latitudo: 3. Altitude, L. Altitudo, T. Die hahe. A. Hight. 4. Profundity, T. Lage, L. Log, and Profunditas, A. Depth, deep, and many other names, according to the proportion of natural or artificial Contentures, as Cyathus and Coclearium, etc. about which Dictionaries may be consulted, for I speak only of such as are mentioned by Erckern for metallic uses, of which some are uncertain measures, (viz. a Finger's length and breadth, an hands thickness, and breath, a span, a man's foot, a cubit, etc. and some certain, viz. a yard, an ell, a fathom, etc. and of the mensurae Capacitatis, some are also uncertain, as Crueibles, Tests, Cruises, Jugs, Pots, etc. and some certain, as Pints, Quarts, Galons, etc. of which in order; And first of the Finger, T. also Finger, L. Digitus, which signifies the length and breadth, but we may read in Georgius Agricola (de mensuris & ponderibus, and other Books) that they consist of several Proportions; and in Galen (de usu partium) of several uses: and of this word Digitus, Holiock makes no less than 24 Observations: but that which concerns this Subject, I have in part collected from Cor. Agrippa, that the Thumb, or first finger (Teut. Daum, L. Pollex) was dedicated to Venus and the Moon; and in metallics, lucky to Silver and Copper; the fourth Finger to Mars, and lucky to Iron and Copper, red (and yellow, artificial, that is Brass:) the third called digitus infamis (I know not on what grounds) to Saturn and Jupiter: and lucky to Led, Tin, Silver and Gold: The second finger to the Sun and Saturn, lucky only to Gold: the first or little Finger to Mercury, and lucky to Quick silver, Tin and Silver; and these Notions are the chief Foundations of the Art of Chyromancy or Palmistry, so that by the Fingers and lines in the hands, the temper of men might be the better known for Metallick and Chemical Purposes (but the Poet who ever he was that made this Verse) Miles, mercator, stultus, bene nuptus, amator; applicable to the 5 fingers, had I conceive another prospect, to show that their Fate was at their Finger's ends, and by the Influences of the stars did direct them to their most genuine Employments, whereby the Chiromancer might know to what one was by Nature adapted; and accordingly, by that Artist, was directed to apply himself: but to pass these Curiosities, it is writ by several Authors, that the length and breadth of the fingers, and so of the hand, gave the first Rules to the smaller Measures, the next is the Span, T. Span. L. Spithama, which consists of three parts, viz. the Thumbs, (having three joints) made one; the space between the Thumb and finger, making the other, and one of the fingers (having also three Joints) making the third, so in all seven; and though these seven do differ in proportion (the spaces and joints being unequal) yet from the top of the Thumb to the top of either finger fully extended, was the span, consisting of seven proportions: and 'tis observable, That David calls man's Life a span, which afterwards he explains, by saying the Years of Man are seventy, that is, seven decimals, or seven times ten, which is seven spans, so as the short span is from the Thumb to the end of the fourth or little finger, but if he had a long Life or Span viz. from the Thumbs end to the end of the middle Finger, it occasioned but pain in the extending it (from policy the Thumb to stultitia the Fools Finger) which is the Vanity he speaks of, and as the spaces differ in proportion, so doth our several Ages. The next is a Foot, T. Fusz, L. Pes, and though this natural Foot is an uncertain Measure, yet it retains its name, by a certain new Measure, called a Foot-Rule; and as to the first, I may say, that that Foot hath some Anology with David's Span; for by the Span the length of our Race is adjusted, and by the Foot that Race is to be run. My next consideration is of a Cubit, which is accounted from the Elbow to the end of the middle Finger. T. Cubit. L. Cubitus, and the same word Cubitus also signifies a Couch or Bed, telling us, That before our Race is run, we grow weary, lay down on our Cubit (or Couch) to ease our Limbs, where we lean on our brachial Cubit or Elbow, and commit our Heads to be supported by our Span, or handle of our Cubit, and then we consider of our ability or disabillity, in getting to the End of our measure of application, and the Divine Prize of our Race proposed to us. Next for the mensura capacitatis, it consisted only of the contraction of the palm of the Hand, which was originally thought sufficient to hold so much as might quench the Thirst of Nature. But when by excess we forsook the proportion of our first Constitutions, Frames and Pugils, some having Fingers, Hands and Spans, more than treble to the common length, and also their Feet a Cubit long (as Pliny tells us) and of the Sciopides (which Munster speaks of) that one Foot sheltered their whole Body against the Sun, whereby in process of time, almost all Men and Women became disproportionate to that perfect proportion (which I have mentioned in my Volatiles on Adam, from Paulus Lovatius) it was time to make some certain Measure both of Application and Capacity, lest the large gripple Hand, should take away all from the lesser, and justify it from its large Dimensions, and therefore much to the Honour of the Botanists and Galenists; the Standard of measures was made from the Barley-Corn, which is so Noble a Plant, that it is observed (whether it grows upon a fertile or sterile Soil, yet) it continues one constant proportion of Measure (though it may differ in weight) and of these, three in length or six in breadth do make an Inch, whic hthe T. calls ein dannim breit, or the breadth of the Thumb, but in Latin the word is Vncia, which they apply both to an Inch of Application and to the Ounce of Ponderosity, still making the Grains of Barley or Wheat their Judges, both in measure and weights: now this Vucia or Inch of Application (as Arrius Montanus saith) consists of the breadth of six Barley Corns, thereby making breadth to have a Priority to length) but the later Writers, more properly make three Barley Corns in length, to be the length of an Inch, and twelve Inches of a Foot, and for Measure of Ponderosity, those who are for the Troy Weight, make twenty four full Grains of Wheat, and twenty penny Weights to be an Ounce, and twelve Ounces a Pound, which complyes with the measure of Application (or 12 Inches to the Foot) and this weight is used for Gold and Silver, etc. but others who are for Aver-de-poise weight allow 20 grains of Wheat to make a scruple, three scruples a dram, and 16 drams to an ounce, and 16 ounces to a pound: and these of Ponderosities do also comply with the measure of Capacity; for I compute that a Pound of Troy, viz. 5760 grains of Wheat will fill a certain Vessel which the Latins call Hemina, and the English (and in most Europian Languages a Pint (or Pint) two of which makes a Quart, and four a Pottle, and eight a Gallon, so as the Pound of ponderosity and the Pint of Capacity are both equal, and this agrees also with the Measure of Application, for a foot square (on a cubical account, makes 144 Inches, so that for every one of the 144 Inches, 40 grains of Barley being allowed (as the just proportions of Capacity) it amounts also to 5760. Now as (I have shown) that the Latins do apply the same word Vncia, both to an Inch of Measure, and to an Ounce of Weight (and, it may be, for the Reason which I have given) so they apply the word Vlna to a Yard, el and Fathom in Measures (and so by Dictionaries jumbled together) whereby the genuine proportions of those Measures are confounded; whereas a Yard, in T. girt, and L. Verda, is applicable to any Rod or Stick, that is not appropriated to any certain rule of Dimension; but as Vlna or Yard is fixed to a certainty, it signifies the length of 3 Feet, or 36 Inches; and an Ell, T. Ellen, and A. el, from Elbow (or Ell-bone, because from that bone to the top of the middle Finger, is accounted a Cubit or a Foot and half) so 2 of those Cubits makes a Yard, and 3 Foot and 9 Inches makes our Ell, and a Fathom, which is a Measure used about sinking our Mines (called also Vlna) is two Yards: I might mention many more Measures of Application, used both above and under Ground, for the guiding and working of Mines, as also of other Measures of Capacity, as Furnaces, Ovens, Pots, Pans, etc. used for Metals: but I must not run too far upon this copious Subject; yet because the els length, and other Measures (which I have named) are often mentioned by Erckern, and knowing that one Ell English is two Germane els, and the like of many other Measures; I intent this at first, only as a Caution to Assayers, etc. in making Furnaces or Instruments, according to the Germane or English proportions; which must be left to their Ingenuity to judge, what lengths or bredths are best suiting to their Operations. MEDALS. T. Schraw grochen, L. Sigillum fusile, that is, a piece of cast Gold or Silver, wherein some observable thing is represented, and is given by Princes, as Memorials of Virtue, or notable Accidents, and are accounted rather gratifying Presents than currant Coins, and the word signifies also Counters, or something impressed on them, worthy of our account. MELTER. T. Schmeltzer. L. Fusor, and by our English, Mine-Workers, (as at Consumlock and Tallibant, etc. in Wales) where they still retain the words Smelter and Smelting, which was brought into us 1. Q. Eliz. by one Hosetter a Germane; but in fining the Metals (after they are smelted) for distinction, the work is called melting and remelting, or fining and refining, See Alchemist, Metals, Utensils. MENSTRUUM, which we Translate Flowers, and define them to be Purgatio frigidi & indigesti humoris quem natura quasi noxium ejicit; now the word Menstruum as it relates to the Female Sex, (of which you may read in Pliny, l. 7. c. 15. is pernicious: but our Menstruum relates only to Metals (which are all seven of the Neuter Gender) and the menstrual parts of them, do afford many great virtues and excellent medicines, and is the most sublime part of the scoria of metals, and therefore also called Flowers, from its nature of flowing and showing itself on the top or corners of the Vessels, where it usually resides. MERCURY. See Metals, Minerals and Quicksilver. METALS, T. Metal and Ertz and the Metal-Worker Berck-hawer and Berck-werk from Berg, mons: (wherein they are generally found) and Werk, Opus: and the Latin Metallum and Metallarius, A. Miner; the kinds of Metals are accounted seven viz. Gold, Silver, Copper, Iron, Led, Tin and Quicksilver, which I treat of in their Alphabetical Discourses: But as a Deputy Governor for the Mines Royal in England and Wales, I must acquaint you, That, 1. as for Gold, (we have it not in Sands as in Africa or America) or so intermixed with other Minerals, that it will requite the charge of Separation, and yet upon information of two Mines (one at Pullox-hill in Bedfordshire, and another in little Tawnton in Glocestershire) which, as was pretended, contained a great quantity of Gold in the Oar, we granted two distinct Leases; but they proved not at all successful: 'tis true, that among the Tin-Mines in Cornwall, they find little pieces of Gold, and seldom above the worth of 10 s. But this, as they dig for Metal, not in the Metal. 2. As for Silver, we have none, but intermixed with other Metals, especially in Lead; And in the time of the late Wars, Mr. Bushel set up Mills at the Mines in Cardiganshire, and made out of those Lead-Mines 20 l. of Silver out of every Tun of Lead: and at Shrewsbury, a Mint by his Majesty's Permission was set up, and then coined so much as paid that part of his Army, but it doth not now answer the Expense, or at lest the knowledge of it is kept from us: and I am confident we have several Lead-Mines in England which would yield in every Tun, from 20 l. to 80 l. of clear Silver, and why this is not put in practice, I shall hereafter disclose. 3. Of Copper we have very good and plentiful; See the word Copper; and why those also are not wrought, I shall say more hereafter. 4. Iron is not in our Patent, only Iron-Wire, for the making of which, we have Mills at Tinturn in Monmouthshire; See more in Word Wire. 5. Of Led We have the Government both in England, Wales and part of Ireland (except the Lead-mines at Dovegang, in Derbyshire, and at Mendyp in Somerset-shire; and also all other Mines that do not hold Gold or Silver, because in those two places, and some others, the Lead is looked upon to be so poor that no Silver can be extracted from them, or at least, not proportionable to the charge of fining, etc. of which you may see more in my Book called Fodina Regalis. 6. Of Tin, we have also the Power of Inspecting them in all Mines, (except Cornwall, where they are managed by a peculiar Court, called the Stanneries from Stannum, the L. for Tin, of which you my see more fully in Cambdens Britania, p. 185.) and for other Tin-Mines none do venture on them, because of the great Product of Cornish-Mines. 7. Of Quicksilver we have very little or none in our Mines, so as we are forced to have it from beyond Seas, for which reason, whatever others account of this, as the seventh Metal, we cannot, because it is not our Native Metal, and therefore we may rather choose Antimony, of which we have plenty; or Brass, of which we may make sufficient for ourselves and Neighbours. And there is another Metal which Pliny makes the seventh Metal, by the name of Electrum, containing upon dissolution the fourth part of Gold, and a fifth of Silver; but we have none such, yet such a thing is mentioned in Holy Writ: see Fodinae Regales. And as for Gems, we often find in our English Mines, Saphires, Amethists, etc. but very imperfect, for want of a stronger heat, as in hotter Countries, and about Bristol in the Callamine Hills, there are plenty of such Stones which imitate Diamonds, where I had the luck to find one of a good value, which I caused to be cut and set, and yielded a fine splendour. MINERALS. T. & A. L. Mineralia; these are Metals of a middle nature, between the 7 Metals and Stones; of which sort, Erckern mentions these; Alum, Antimony or Stibium, Armoniac, Arsenic, Brimstone, Sulphur, Calaminaris, Cinabar, Talk, Vitriol, Nitre, Orpiment, Sandover, etc. which I treat of also distinctly, in their Alphabetical Discourses; but of all these we have so great plenty in England and Wales, that we need not have recourse to Foreign parts for them, only in those Countries where the Metals are not, I do not find any of these, or scarce any other Mineral, for it seems they are of a friendly nature not to part. Mines, Ertz-Grub, from Ertz-metallum and Grub fodere: (which Word Grub we still retain in England in the same sense) L. minera, which relates to places in the Earth, where Metals or Minerals are found, and I conceive the word Mine is no other than a translation of Meus, which the Belgicks write Miine, and the T. Mein, and A. Mine, so as doubtless they have all this sense; that, that Metal or Mineral, which I find in the Earth is Mine (Proprio Jure salvo Rege) and this is still a custom at Mendip, and at the Dovegang before mentioned) however altered in other places; but here it only signifies the place or Bed, where the Metal or Mineral is lodged (without relation to the Proprietor) and they who dig for them are called Miners, it may be from Minores, being a People of lesser Quality than those above ground, so that in the Romans time, they were Slaves, or such as for Offences, were (instead of other Punishments condemned to the Mines (Goodwin's Ant.) See Alchemist. Whilst I was writing this, a Friend of mine came to me, and seeing me intent about this Book, asked me why I left some other Subjects about Parliaments, etc. of which I Published but some parts, and others were expected? I told him, that I had not the opportunity of seeing Records, as I formerly had, and so did betake myself to this of Metals, being far more pleasant, in respect it consisted of greater varieties than any one of the Liberal Sciences or Arts, and withal added, That there is a certain Chain in all our Affairs, by which we are invisibly guided, of which the Story of Joseph (sold for a Slave, yet proved a reliever of those who enslaved him) is significant, and though that Story doth not quadrate in all men's Actions, to have the like success; yet in this, to me it doth; for even those Notions which I had of this Subject, which began with some dangerous Attempts (as I shall show) have continued in my mind by accidental Occasions and Employments, till this very time, that by them I now find myself full of content and happiness, in the Divine and Humane Contemplations of them and their circumstances; and now, Sir, said I, give me leave to begin with the first link of this Influential Chain, which is held at both ends, by the Hand of Divine Providence. Whilst I was a small Student of Pembroke Hall in Cambridge, my good Mother (than a Widow) consulted with Sir Tho. Bendish (a near Neighbour, and related to her) how I might spend the Summer Vacations to Improve myself, and thereby keep me from other inconveniences, which usually attend Youth (being then 17 years of Age, and of that University 3 years) Sir Thomas (who was a Practical Master of most Sciences, and insighted into all, and afterward Ambassador to Turkey, whose Transactions there, for 14 or 15 years, deserves a particular History (which in Gratitude I shall endeavour to perform) replied, Madam (said he) if you please to intrust your only Son with me, I will myself accompany him for two Months every year, till we have seen the chief Varieties which England affords, that he may be the better accomplished for Foreign Travels; this favour was kindly accepted, so in three Summers more (before I left the University) he did perform what he promised, and the first Summer, our first Guess led us through Darbishire, which affords more pleasing Objects of Art and Nature, than any County of England; but I shall speak only of such things, as relate to the subject of this Book, and of my entrance into the concern of Metals; the Theory of which, with other Rudiments, my Tutor, Mr. Boswel (Brother to the Boswel that was then Resient at the Hague) had impressed in my thoughts: but as to the inducing Practics, we spied several Wells near the Roads over the Dovegang (which abound with the poorer sort of Led Mines) so we road up to know the uses of them, and we were answered, That they were not called Wells but Shafts like Wells, only Shafts were square, and common Wells round, one made of Wood and Timber, the other usually of Stone or Brick, and whilst we were speaking, a Basket of Lead-Oar was drawn up (as our Buckets are to our Wells) I asked, whether I might be safely let down in the Basket to see their Works? they assured me I might, and so with Sir Thomas' consent (who in respect of his Corpulency thought not fit to lead the way) I was let down (not in the Basket) but by a strong stick, laid cross the Hook of the Rope, I sat on it between my Legs, one hand holding the Rope, the other guiding me from grating on the sides; so soon as I was down (being about 24 Fathom, or 48 Yards) the Labourer that waited for the Basket, was quickly informed of my intents, who presently, at my request (promising Reward) fetch't two Candles lighted, by which I saw, that there was no other passage than what I came down in, and by what I was to go into the Mine, but by that time we had gone half way, I told my Conductor, that I could not keep my Candle light, and at the same instant both Candles went out; Sir said he, I pray stay here, and I will go fetch more Candles, for it is nothing but a damp; at which words, my Spirits were much discomposed, yet I had so much left as to crawl back to the Shaft, and sucked in as much Air as relieved me; my Conductor soon returned with more attendants to light me, but I was very unwilling to return again, but gave them liberally something to drink, which the more obliged them to persuade me to see their Works, assuring me, That those Damps were not killing, but they had taken care (by keeping open the passage of their Waters) that no such Accidents should happen while I was there, and that they had good Aqua Vitae, Rosa Solis, and good Ale to cheer me; with that, I went to the Mine, where their constant Lamps and Candles, which they lighted for my sake, did make the glitterings of the Oar very pleasant to me, by which I also see their method of Digging, and was well treated with their promised Drinks, besides good Beef and Bread, so as their liberality increased mine, and then I was attended to the Shaft, and so drawn up as I went down, and in my gentle passage, I thought of Virgil's Distich, Eglog. 3. Dic quibus in Terris, & eris mihi magnus Apollo, Tres Patiat Caeli spatium non amplius ulnas. But I was not Edified by it, and so I came safe up, and gave a pleasing account to Sir T. Bendish. From thence we went to Eldon Hole, (being on the top of the highest Hill, in the Peak-Forest, which we computed to be above an 150 yards long, and more than an 100 broad, the bottom (as 'twas told us) not to be fathomed; and by prying, I had certainly fallen into it (for the ground is slippery) if I had not been caught hold of. But Sir Thomas espying some work men making of Walls, (for there and in other stony Countries, they make their Enclosures of loose stones (or slates) in stead of which in Suffolk, Norfolk, etc. they make Ditches, and plant them with Quicksets, on the sides of the banks, but in Devonshire, etc. they use high Mounds of Earth and flag, and plant them on the very top of the Mounds, and both are beneficial Fences by their Products, (whereas those walls affords none) but he resolving to try some experiment did ride to them, and by our generous Promises, persuaded three of them, with their Pick-axes and Tools, to mount behind us, to the Hole; where first, they digged a pretty large stone, which we tumbled in, and the noise of its motion pleased us: then they digged a second stone, as much as six of us could well roll in (for the mouth of the hole was declining) and presently laid our ears to the ground, and we could tell eight score distinctly, before the noise of its motion ceased, and then to our apprehensions, it seemed to plunge itself into water; and so we tried a third stone, of more than the former Magnitude, with the like Observations, which pleased the Labourers (with the Addition of our Gratuity.) From thence we went to Buxton's Wells, bathed ourselves that night, and the next morning (of which I shall speak more in the word Waters.) we went to the Devil's Arse of Peak, (saving your Reverence, as the learned Mr. Cambden expresseth his Civilities) where we saw a large hole, in the bottom of a steep hill, on the top of which stood an ancient decayed Castle (of which you may read more in his Britania) We had Candles, and saw as much as we could, till we were hindered by running Streams. Now of these two Holes, there are many fabulous stories; but some years after, upon viewing other Mines, and their Shafts and Audits to them, I apprehended that this Eldon-hole was an ancient Shaft (made in the Roman's time) to a Mine, and that the Devil's arse was the Mouth of an Audit to that Mine, and I am the rather of that Opinion, because I conceive, That the Level of the Water (which stopped our further passage into that Audit, Arse or Fundament of the Mine) is level with the Water at the bottom of Eldon-Hole, and the word Arse may be applied upon two accounts, first that upon a Mistake of the word Arse, for the Latin word Ars or Art, where the Romans, when they brought out their Oars of Lead, and probably made Silver of it, and did thereby show their Ars Metallica, which the British not being latinized called Ars, and as an Art which they did not understand, they (as the Vulgar do yet) attribute it to the Devil, and so called the Devil's Arse or Ars diabolica; (as we see in the Weapon Salue or Sympathy Powder, the knowledge of which two great Secrets were attributed to the Devil, as we may see by Godelmanus, and other Books, till they were convinced of their Error: or it might come from Arce the Ablative of Arx, Latin for a Castle, and probably this Castle was originally built to protect the Treasure which came out of the Hole under it, or to keep the Miners in awe (there being the like Castle at the Roman Mines on the Darren Hills in Wales) and possibly the Governor of it being severe in his Duty, the Vulgar (as they are apt to do in any regular Government) might call him, and it, Diaboli Arx, and since opprobriously the Devil's Arse, but I have said enough as an Apology for the Word, and for my Opinions therein. I conceive they are not so fabulous as those which are told in the Country about these two Holes. Here my Friend interrupted me, and asked how Eldon Hole, (from the usual proportion of a Shaft) came to be so large as I described it; I answered, That Gutta cavat lapidem; and if one drop by often cadency will make a hole in a stone, it is easy to be credited, That the fall of Clouds of Waters, (from the time that this was a Shaft, being about 2000 years) might well widen it, from Virgil's dimension of 3 ulna's, yards or els square, (for I conceive he meant the Shaft of a Mine) to this great Dimention, at which he smiled: and so I went on; Sir, said I, the next two Summers, we made a further Insight to several mines & Caves with no little danger (which I refer to other Discourses) and also their several ways in their operations at those Mines. Some few years after, the Wars came on, where my Speculations were improved by the information I had at Oxford, that the Royal Mines in Wales were very helpful to his late Majesty during those Civil Wars (as I have shown.) And, after the Wars viz. 1650. telling these Stories to Mr. W. B. he told me, He had a share in the Society for the Mines Royal, and desired to transfer it to me, in trust, which I accepted, and did execute it, for near 10 years after; and then resigned it, but the Societys' finding my Diligence, and Insight into that Affair, were pleased to bestow two quarter parts on me to continue me, and as a Testimony of my Gratitude, in Anno 1670, I writ a Book of their Privileges and Rules, which I called Fodinae Regales, and dedicated it to them, with a promise to proceed in the publishing of Erckern, which now I have done, and some other pieces which I hope to do. And thus, Sir, said I to my Friend, I have given you an Account of several Links of this Chain, which guided me into this Labyrinth of Metals: But to get out of it, that which I aim at, is to write a little more of their Products, and to offer some Expedient how the Mines may be made more profitable to his Majesty, and to other Proprietors, with some Advantages to the Societies, which, God willing, I shall perform in due time, and then we parted, he wishing me good Success to my Endeavours. And so I went on, where I left, namely to Acquaint the Reader, that Erckern doth tell us of several Mines in Germany, p. 28. especially in Austria, p. 285. Bohemia, Belgia, Flanders, p. 170. Hungary, p. 103. and Saxony, p. 77. he also mentions the particular Cities and Villages to which they belong, and where they are refined viz. at brussels, p. 170. Cracow, p. 208. Cuttenburgh, p. 142. Friburgh, p. 6. Galmay, p. 285. Goslar, p. 78. Hessen, p. 285. Holland p. 170. Joakims-Valley, p. 34, Islenburgh, p. 285. Caufingen, p. 285. Knien, p. 100, (where he saith the Mines contain good Duke-Gold) Lick-beter, Manhrens, p. 4. Meichsen, p. 4. Mis●ia, p. 6. Norimberg, p. 86. Saxen, p. 4. Schwath Slackenward, p, 83. Shesron, p. 4. Sorath, Suevia, p. 285. and Suabem— Tyrol, p. 285. Villach, and Waldenburg, and many other places which he and Geographers do mention (See Heylen) and therefore I think fit also to mention the Counties of England & Wales wherein Royal Mines have been discovered to us, viz. in Bedforshire, Cheshire, Cornwall, Cumberland, Darbyshire, Devonshire, Dorsetshire, Durham, Essex, Glocestershire, Hereford-shire, Kent, Lancashire, Monmothshire, Notinghamshire, Northumberland, Rutland-shire, Shropshire, Somersetshire, Staffordshire, Sussex, Warwickshire, Westmoreland, Worcestershire, Yorkshire, and in all the twelve Counties of Wales, so as of the 52 Counties there are 38 of them Metallick Counties, but in many of the rest, viz. Berkshire, Buckinghamshire, Cambridgshire, Hampshire, Hartfordshire, Huntingtonshire, Leicestershire, Lincolnshire, Middlesex, Norfolk, Northamptonshire, Oxfordshire, Suffolk, Surry, Wiltshire there are good Minerals, but in some of them neither Metal, Mineral or good Quarries, and yet they are recompensed some other ways. Now, though Germany abounds in Metals and Minerals, yet Erckern acknowledgeth that they have a better sort of Copper and Lead from the Mines in Poland (as it seems p. 268.) and a better sort of Gold from Hungary, p. 108. India and Aethiopia, p. 101. and a better sort of Lapis Calaminaris, (and other good Oars of Metal) from England (which Erckern calls Britain, p. 286, and a better sort of Soap, to contemper Metals, from Venice, than their own, so though we have as good Mines in England, yet we are forced (for want of a constant use of them, and thereby improve our Knowledge) to borrow the Products of their Mines, and indeed our chief Knowledge how to work them (as I find by our Records) and they may well have greater Experience than ourselves, because Erckern tells us, That the Mine at Goslar, formerly under the D. of Saxony, but now under the D. of Brunswick, hath been in constant working for above 700 years, to his time: and Heylen tells us, That the D. of Saxony's Mines, (the Territories not so big as England) yields to him above 130000 l. yearly; now why ours are not made so beneficial to us: I attribute it either to Reasons of State, or want of Knowing the several Arts which belong to the Working of them. MINT, T. Muntz, vel locum ubi monetam cuditur, L. Monetarium, Officina monetaria, Taberna monetaria, Officina Cusoria, A. it signifies with us, (as Cowel renders it) the place where the the King's Coin is form, be it Gold or Silver, which is at this present, and long hath been, in the Tower of London, though it appear by divers Stories, and other Antiquities, that in ancient time the Mint was at Calais, Ann. 21 R. 2. cap. 6. and An. 9 H. 5. stat. 5. cap. 5. the Officers belonging to the Mint, have not been always alike: at this present they seem to be these; the Warden, who is chief of the rest, and is by his Office to receive the Gold or Silver of the Goldsmiths, and to pay them for it, and oversee all the rest belonging to this Function (his Fee is an hundred pounds per Annum:) the Master-Worker, who receiveth the Gold or Silver from the Warden, causeth it to be melted, and delivers it to the Monyers, and taketh it from them again, when it is made (his Allowance is not any set Fee, but according to the pound weight:) the third is the Controller, who is to see that the Money be made to the just Assize, to oversee the Officers and Control them, if the Money be not as it ought to be (his Fee is one hundred Marks per Annum:) them the Master of the Assay, who weigheth the Gold or Silver, and seeth whether it be according to Standard (his Yearly Fee is also one hundred Marks:) then the Auditor to take the Accounts, and make them up (Auditor-like:) next the Surveyor of the melting; who is to see the Gold or Silver cast out, and not to be altered after it is delivered to the Melter, which is after the Assay-Master hath made trial of it; then the Clerk of the Irons, who seeth that the Irons be clean and fit to work with; next the Graver, who Engraveth the Stamps for the Moneys; then the Smiters of Irons, who (after they be Engraven) smiteth them upon the Money; next the Melters that melt the Bullion (that is, Gold or Silver in the Mass or Billot) before it come to the Assaying or Coining; then the Blanchers, that do aneal, boil and cleanse the Money (reducing it to its natural colour, viz. to yellow if Gold, and to white if Silver:) next the Porter that keepeth the Gate of the Mint; then the Provost of the Mint, who is to provide for all the Monyers, and to oversee them: lastly, the Monyers, who are some to sheer or clip the Money, some to forge it, some to beat it abroad, some to round it, and others to stamp or coin it (their Wages is not by the Day or Year, but uncertain, according to the weight of the Money Coined by them:) Other Officers have been in former times, now useless, because Mills are used for that purpose, and the Art of Mintage and Assaying of Metals is much improved, by his Majesty's great skill and insight into that Affair. See Coin, etc. Now it seems by Cowel, That Mints were erected in most parts of England, but he mentions no particulars, except Cumberland, Northumberland and London, (see his Title Moniers) yet under the word Mint, he citys the 21. of R. 2. c. 16. and 9 of H. 5. c. 5. in which two Kings Reigns, the Mint was removed to Calais, being then under the English Jurisdiction; and I do not find it, either before or since, removed from the Tower of London, except in the late Usurpation, and then his Majesty caused one to be Erected at Shrewsbury, to Coin the Silver which was brought thither from the Mines in Wales (of which I have spoken before.) MISPICKLE. T. Miszpickle; I know no other word for it, being mentioned as a kind of Oar, distinct from others (l. 1. c. 2. s. 11. and l. 3. c. 1. s. 6.) but it may be derived from the next word Missy. See Oars. MISSY. T. Missy. A. & L. Misy. which G. Agricola from Pliny, calls Atramentum sutorium, or Shoemakers Black; but Pliny makes it a kind of Vitriol, and is confessed to be a mineral, and the Oar sparkling like Gold; so as I conceive Mispikle is an Oar of the same nature, only spotted; which the T. calls spickled, A. speckled: so it is a kind of Missy-Oar speckled. MONEY. T. Muntz. L. Moneta, Pecunia, etc. see Coin, Metals, Measures and Weights; and this Money is proportioned from 20 Grains of Barley Corns, which make a scruple (according to Physicians terms) or a Penny according to metallic terms; and 20 pennyes make an Ounce, and 12 Ounces (either of Gold or Silver) makes a pound (according to the Trojan computation, and thence called Troy Weight:) as for Haver du-poise weight, or Haver weight, it hath 16 Ounces to the Pound, and Metals and Gems are not concerned with it: however, the Barleycorn bears the sway in both; so the poor products of the superficies of the Earth, seems to give Laws to all our subterranean Treasures, both before, and when it is made passable, and communicable or current Money; whereby I conjecture, that the word sterling Money, may not improperly be derived from Sterilis, or natural unfructified Ground (which is proper for Barley) whereas fertile, dunged, or artificial Grounds, makes it more ponderous, and its Grains not of so true a standard for sterling Money, as those of a more Natural Earth. Now to all Silver or Gold Money, there is an Alloy; that is, a taking away part of the fine Metal, and adding the like part of the base; that is of Copper, etc. and this is done upon two accounts: first, that the base Metal may make the finer to be more apt for Coinage: the other is, that the Sovereign of that Government where it is so allayed, may by the deduction or allay, be paid the full charge for the Coinage or Minting of it: Now the less allay that is put to the Coined Gold or Silver, doth render the Government the more Honourable, and the Sovereignty of a greater Esteem, than in other parts, where they have greater allay (Vaughan.) It is good for a Traveller to be skilful in the different allays, whereby, as a Friend of mine told me, That he carried out an 100 l. with him, and with his art of Exchanges▪ in Countries where allays differed, he bore his Charges of Travel, and brought his stock home again; however, this Money thus allayed, is called Coin, when the Sovereign Stamp is upon it (which is a Legal Stamp) and every Sovereignty useth a different Stamp, as here in England, and in the Empire, France, Spain, etc. proper to its Sovereignty; and every piece of money so stamped, hath almost a different allay: yet all Princes do agree in severe, yet just, Penalties, for Counterfeiting allays or stamps, and make it, as in England, High Treason. vid. Coke. 2. In. p. 575. MONYERS. see Money, lately called Bankers. MORTAR. T. Gips. L. Gibsum, made of Water, Calx viva, Lime and Sand, and used in all sorts of Structures, to cement Bricks or Stones. See Calx and Sand. MORTER. T. Morsel, Morsner. L. Mortarium, which Minshaw says, is morte earum rerum quae in illo teruntur, and though we write one with an A. the other with an E. for distinction, yet the Beaters for that, and Pestles for this, makes Minshaws description serve for both of them. See Sand and Pestle and Sculp. II. and IX. MOULD. T. Model. L. Modulus. A. Frames, etc. See Utensils. MULLET, T. Mallen & schleifer, L. Molarius, marmorius, a little flat piece of marble stone on which Painters grind their Colours, and Metallists their Metal to dust, from molare to distinguish it from the Mullet fish. MUNK, T. Munich, which I conceive, comes from the L. Munitus (and not from Monicha) as an Instrument that guards and strengthens the Operation of Metals, by covering it from the Air, and therefore though A. write it monk, it were more proper to be writ munt, as an abreviation of munitus. NE N NE NEALING or Anealing, T. Abgeadnet. I find it not in our Dictionary, but in Cotgrave it is Nelleure, and signifies a vernishing and enameling: the difference is in the Arts; that enameling is upon solid Bodies, as Gold, Silver, etc. but anealing is usually applied to the coloring of Glass, such as we had in former times, and still have in Church Windows, in excellent Varieties, and sometimes 'tis used for ting or coloring of Stones, where it is done by fire, but here the word is applicable only to such Coppels, etc. which are covered and strengthened with Clar, for resisting the fire, and the manner of anealing them, is always done by a gradual, and not a violent heat. l. 1. c. 10. s. 1. See Amel and Clar. NEEDLE, And it is applied to several things, and hath thereupon several Names in several Languages, but in Latin it is called Acus from its Acuity or sharp point, (and is sometimes applied to ingenuous satiric Wits;) the French call it Aquila quasi Anquilla (as Minshaw) because it is proportioned like an Eel fish, but the Germane here calls it Nadelen from Naeden or Naen, sure, i. e. to sow or stitch together, and this word Nadelin is the nearest to our word Needle. Which word being used in the New Testament, to show the difficulty of a Rich man to enter into the Kingdom of Heaven: It stands such men in hand that deal in Metals (in order to make themselves rich) to see how far they are concerned in the impossibility mentioned in the Text, now St. John makes no mention of a Needle, but St. Matth. ca 19 ver. 24. saith, It is easier for a Camel to go through the eye of a Needle, (per foramen acûs transire, Sept.) than for a rich man (that is he that abounds in Money, made of metals) to enter into the Kingdom of God; and so St. Mark, cap. 10. v. 24. and in St. Luke 18. 25. but the Latin is foramen acûs, the Needle's eye, which, my Author (whom, I cannot readily call to mind, or else I should own him) saith, there was a little Postern Gate in the Wall of Jerusalem, which was called foramen acûs, or the Needle's eye, through which a Camel could not pass without Kneeling (which saith Pliny Camels are taught to do) so as by going on their Knees, a Camel might pass through that Gate, which otherwise it could not do; and so the Story alludes to a rich and humble man, who by Humility may easily enter into the Kingdom of Heaven, but not a proud rich man, that will not stoop, but puts more confidence in his money or metals, than in an humble or devout mind, which is employed by the bending of the Knees of the Camel. Now, this word Needle is once only used in the New Testament, by those three Evangelists, and no more, but it is used oftener in the Old Testament to other purposes, and is always joned with the word▪ work, as Needlework. But in the Translations of the Oriental Languages, the Translators differ, for Dr. Walton in his Polyglot renders Needlework, Opus recamantis, Opus Polymatrii, Opus Varietoris, Opus picturarum, Opus Imaginum, so as there is nothing of a Needle, but from the Chaldee, and there he translates it opus acu pictum, and from the Arabic which he renders Phrigianum, and Junius and Trimelius (published before that Poliglot) in every place of the Old Testament, where the word Needlework is used (as in the 26, 27, 28, 36, 38, and 39 Chapters of Exodus, and in the 5th of the Judges, and in the 45 Psalm. ver. 14. for it is used in no other places) do follow the Chaldee and Arabic, in the words Opus and Artificium, but not in acu pictum, yet the two most eminent Poets of their time in England and Scotland concurred in the uniting of those words, for Sandys writes thus, Psal. 45. 14. She shall unto the King be brought, In Robes with Phrygean Needle wrought. And Buchanan Dives opum, dives Pictai vestes & auri. (where note he useth Pictai for pictae, as Virgil, Lucullus, and other Latin Authors do oft change the Diphthong ae for ai) so that Sands hath the Needlework in the word wrought, and that he calls Phrygian (from Phrigia, where it is supposed that Art was first taught) answering the Translation of the Arabic: and Buchanan, Pictae answering the Translation from the Chaldee; and these Needle-Works are there also called faeminalia torta, because the Art is mostly used by Women, and therefore Acus for a Needle is properly declined in the feminine gender. Now, the shape of the Needle was taught us by Nature, for there is a fish which I have often seen on the Coast of Suffolk, which commonly comes there with the Mackerel, and differs only by having a snout of about 12 Inches in length, being a firm bone in the shape of a Needle. Now, whether this be one of the Needle fishes mentioned by Pliny, l. 32. and called Acicula (and one of the 176 sorts of Fishes which he there enumerates, or the Acus Aristotelis, or the Acus Opiani, mentioned by Jonston, lib. de Piscibus, I cannot say; but Cooper, from Pliny (yet I find it not in Pliny) describes it just like the Suffolk Fish; Acus, saith he, is a Fish long, small, and smooth, on the back coloured as it were with green and blue, his Beak long and sharp, and makes this of the masculine Gender, and we call it the Needle fish. Acus also sometimes signifys an order in Battle, and so called Acus belli, when they are at point of Fight, Acus also signifys the spiral parts of Wheat, Oates, Barley, etc. being like so many Needles, and not chaff, as most Dictionaries have it: And there is an herb called Acus pastoris, or Acus moschata being full of Prickles like Needles, but vulgarly 'tis called Venus' Comb or Charnel, the chief Virtue of which is to provoke Lust, and so may be called Acus libidinis. There are many other Instruments of this name, Needle, which are used by Carpenters to cripple, grapple, or join houses together, and Thatchers Needles to thatch withal, etc. But the chief Application of this word Needle is in Navigation, and there called Acus Navigatoria, or the Mariner's Needle, or Compass, in respect that he compasseth the Seas, by the Virtue which it borrows from the Loadstone; (of which I have spoken at large) and is of such a transcendent Nature, that which way soever the ship moves, still the head of the Needle fixeth itself to the North, and the other point to the South, and this admirable Instrument hath no other title in our Language than Needle: I hope that none that shall read this long Discourse of Needles will think it needless: but it was from Erckern's Touch-needles which he calls Streith Nadelen, and Agricola, de re Metallica, calls them sometimes Gold, or Silver or Copper Needles, by the touch of which the worth of each Metal may be known, and they differ in the making, forming and shaping of them, as may be seen in Sculpture 8. & 18: and in G. Agricola, p. 199. which shows them in an acular or Needle▪ form. Now, there being great trouble and nicety in making of them either way (for indeed it is one of the most curious pieces about the Metallick Chemistry) therefore the Chemists, Goldsmiths or Tryers of Gold and Silver (to save trouble) do make use of a Touchstone, being a kind of soft Marble, of which you may read more in Stones. I read but of one sort of Needles more, which Cambden speaks of, in his Britania, p. 700. viz. of a Vault under the Church of Rippon where there was a little hole, called St. Wilfred's Needle, through which a virtuous Woman might pass with ease, but if she were otherwise disposed, she did not pass, but stayed below to be tried of what Metal she was made. NILE, or the River Nilus. See Gold, Metal, Mine. NITRE, a light, ruddy, yet white substance, full of holes like a Sponge, and resembling common Salt almost in colour; but quicker of Taste, and is mistaken by some for Salt-Petre; there is also a Nitre which comes out of afric, of a purple Colour, but that which is now commonly sold to us for Nitre, is Salt Petre refined and candied, and used sometime in stead of Borax. NOSEL, See Utensils. NUMBER, See Arithmetic. NUT, See Measures. OA O OA OARS. T. Irks. A. and Saxons, Oar. Danes, Altar and Aaure, the L. Metallum Crudum (Skinner) for I find no single word for it, unless it be Fodina, which may be applied to other digged things; but in our Patents for the Mines Royal, is writ Ewer, which signifies a place where Water is, for Water always attends Metals, and from thence the Ewres, which was formerly made of Silver, to pour Water into Basins, is called Ewer; and from thence comes Sewer, or one that takes care for drawing of Water, where any Land or place hath more than is necessary, but generally in our Language, we call that which is digged from the Bed of any Metal, Oar; as if one should say O admirablilia Rerum Metallorum, for most of our Monosyllables are but abstracts of many words compacted into one, as may be seen in Sir Edward Coke's Instit. and other Learned Etymologers; also we usually call those Oars wherewith Watermen Row their Boats, alluding to the pains and labour which is used with the Arms in both Professions, by Digging and Rowing; there is also Leimster-Oar, of which I have spoke, under the word Flocks: but of the Metallick Oars, there are as many sorts of them, as there are Metals: yet I find but four Latin Words, and those compounded; viz. Balluca, for Gold Oar: Pomphilix, for Copper or Brass Oar: Stricturae, for Iron Oar: and Plumbago, for Led Oar (Holliack) and therefore Erckern sometimes calls the Products of Metals, from the Mines Erks and Oars, and sometimes Stones, Goldt-stein, for Gold Erk or Oar: Silver-stein, for Silver Erk or Oar: Kupfer-stein for Copper Erk or Oar: Bley-stein for Led Erk or Oar: Zein-stein for Tin Erk or Oar: Speiz-stein, for Quicksilver Erk or Oar: Ein-stein, for Iron Erk or Oar: Slack-stein, for Steel Erk or Oar: But I conceive, that when he useth the word ERK, it signifies the OAR joined with the Excrement, and when STEIN, it signifies the entire Metal, separate from the first crude and heavy Matter: Now the Names that he gives for distinction of OARS are these (as they are variously dispersed in his V. Books) viz. Blent Oar, Catsilver Oar, Cobolt Oar, Copper and Coppery Oar, Crude Oar, Fleaky or Flaky Oar, Float Oar, Fresh Oars, Glassy Oars, Glittering, Glistering and Glimmering Oars, Gold and Goldish Oars; also white, red, brown, Goldish Oars; Grey Flints, called Iron-man-Oars and gross Oars; horny, hard, harsh Oars, Lazure Oars, Leadish or Led Oars; mild and muddy Oars, Slate-stone Oars, Silver, silvery, spady, sparkling, spelter, spizy and sulphury Oars; also Talk, Tinny Oars, Washed and Wolferan Oars; and many others, which are dispersed in several parts of his V. Books: and some of them discoursed of here also, in their Alphabetical order; especially where we retain the same Apellations for the like Oars, to which the Reader is referred. ORANGE. Orpiment. See Colours. OVEN. T. Offen. L. Furnax, and the same words are used for Furnaces; but Kilns, which are a kind of Ovens, are called T. Calk and L. Calcaria and Furnax: of the several sorts of these, you may see in the Sculptures, in their proper pages: viz. the Athanor in page 2: 123. 161. 172. 177. 185. 207. a Wind Furnace, p. 2. 56. 200. an open Furnace, p. 2. an Assay-Oven, used by the ancient Refiners, p. 13. an Assay-Oven, used by the Norimbergers, p. 13. an Assay-Oven made of Tiles, p. 13. 235. an Assay-Oven made of Potters-Loam. p. 13. 235. an Assay-Oven made of Armour Plates; p. 13. 153. a Granulating Kiln, p. 56. an Oven to burn Silver, p. 80. a Roasting Oven, p. 112. the By or Side Ovens, p. 123. 161. 172. 177. 185. Oven for Retorts, p. 177. a melting Oven for Copper Oars, p. 248. and others. Now for your assistance in the more fully knowing of these Furnaces, you may read Dr. Salmon's 5th Book of the New London Dispensatory; which I have formerly cited, where from p. 821. to p. 828. he makes 17 several Furnaces for several uses, and each of them may also be varied, according to the Ingenuity of the Artist. OUNCE. See Weights. OUTLANDISH. T. Eintrembbling-Auszleanger, L. Extranens, Aliegena, Exoticus, which A. terms Strangers, Aliens or Foreigners; all intending those who are not of the same Country, and those the Jews called Heathens, and the Greeks (according to Plautus) Barbarians. See Metallick Countries. OX T. Oches, Rind and Rund. L. Bos and Teriones, quafis terra terat (Minshaw) we call a gelt Bull, a Steir or Runt; but the Germans call a Bull ungelt, a Steer; and the At▪ have also a Distinct name, Taurus: and A. properly a Bull: so the Ox hath three names, viz. Ox, Steer and Bullock, and these are of the greatest size, and it is called Bullock, or more properly Bullack, because it lacks something which it should have: the lesser sort are called Runts (according to the Teutonick word) viz. Welsh or Scotch Runts, these and the females of this kind have several other names, as Beefs, Cows, Neat, etc. in which the metallic Art hath little to do, but with their Blood, Bones, Dung and Tallow, which are employed for several uses about Metals▪ and their meat for the sustenance of the Artists. See Blood, Bones, Dung, Tallow. OIL, T. Oele, L. Oleum, and Linseed oil, T. Lein-samen, L. Linarus: Which is no other with us than the seed of Flax, which in other Languages is Line or Linen: but for the Oil of Linseed it is well known to all that do paint with oil, that it hath this Quality, that though it be liquid like other oils, yet is of a more drying nature than any other Oil, and therefore the more fit for Metallick Luting, etc. lib. 2. cap. 27. sect. 53. PA P PA PAGAMENT. I retain the word, because I find that in Florio's Italian Dictionary, Pagamento signifies any kind of Payment, l. 1. c. 1. s. 1. which signify any broken pieces of Coined Money, which before made good Payments, and this word we abreviate from Pagamento. PALE- COLOR. T. Bleich, L. Palidus, and A. Bleak, Bleek or pale. See Colours, l. 2. c. 43. s. 1. and we have a word Pale, which the T. call Pkall, L. Palus, used for pieces of wood to pale in or impale a piece of Ground, or enclose it with Wood, as with a Garment (from pallium an outward Garment, which being decayed of its native colour, there usually grows moss on it, of a pale colour. PAPER, T. Pappyr, L. Papirus (l. 2. c. 23. s. 3. of which Pliny saith, That all civility of this life, and the memorial and mortality also of Men after Death (by which he shows that he was not of the Sadduces opinion) consisteth in Paper, which saith he, was made of a Plant, having the name of Papirus, and he citys Varro to tell us, That the first Invention thereof was in the time of Alexander the great when he conquered Egypt, and built Alexandria, where it was first made; and till than their Memorials ever were writ on stone, lead or Brass, etc. and, as I take it, Josephus tells us, that upon enoch's Pillar of stone, (which remained to Moses' time) were writ those things which were done before the Flood. Also the Ten Commands were writ upon Stone: but for more easy Portage, and transmitting the minds of men one to another, Paper was invented (as Pliny saith) in Egypt from the Bark of a Plant, lib. 13. c. 11. and 12. where you may read the several names it had, the first and best sort called Augusta, the next Livia; etc. and many more sorts of it, and tells you also the manner of making it; and that, what they did not use of that Plant for Paper, was employed for making little Boats, and the outward Rind, for many uses, especially for Ropes, which makes me think, that the Withy tree which grows plentifully in Worstershire (of which I have spoke in the word Coal) is of the same nature, for this Plant Papirus (as Funcius saith) was about ten Cubits high, and so is the Withy, and that Papirus grew about Nilus, and other waterish places, so doth Withey, and that they made ropes of it, and so they do of Withy: so that I conceive, the inward Bark may make the like Paper, which may be tried for experimentsake only; for our Paper (made of Rags by Water-Mills, called Paper Mills, of which I have seen many in England) is much better and more useful with less charge) however, the Knowledge of such ancient things are not to be lost, and whatever Pliny saith of the Antiquity of it, the Chinists pretend to the use of Paper long before Alexander, as a Friend of mine (Cap. J. Hall) told me who had been thrice at China, and the last time brought me a fair Book, all written in their Language long before that Emperor, and that the leaves were only made of the Bark of a Tree, but of that he could give no certain Account. To PIERCE, or Pierce, T. Booren, L. Forare (lib. 1. c. 34.) and we after the T. to Boar, probably alluding to the Boar, who, in rooting up the Earth with his Snout, doth as it were bore it, for the Lat. calls a Boar, Aper, because he doth aperire humum, and so by boring it doth open a passage into Metals or other things. PEEBLES. See Stones. PELICAN. T. L. A. and all from Pellecanus (Sculpture 29. f. 4.) the Greek word signifies perforare, or to pierce through; in allusion to the Bird called a Pelican, which hath a bended Bill, by which, (as 'tis said) when her young ones are poisoned with eating Serpents, she picks an hole in her Breast, and gives her Blood to them, which cures them; and so this Instrument, doth as it were suck the blood or spirits out of several Ingredients (for so Blood is composed in Bodies) of which the Aqua fortis and Aqua regis are made, and by those waters both Gold and Silver are cured of their poisonous natures. PENDULA, See Sculpture XI, these are of two sorts, one hanging constantly in a perpendicular line, the other is in a constant motion▪ and of a late Invention for Clocks and Watches, and made of Iron or Steel. PETREFACTION or Petrification, T. Stein-Drehen, L. Petrificatio, which is nothing else than a making that to be, which before was not, a Stone; and this effected by Art or Nature, those which are done by Art are the Counterfeits of Gems, as Rubies, Saphires, Emeralds, etc. and Counterfeit of Gross Stones, as Marble and other common Stones: but I speak of such as are done by Nature, and those of what I have seen, which I conceive are only performed by a peculiar Water ordained for that purpose, as at Poolls-Hole in Darbyshire, where are great grey Stones, like our Freestones, made by the cadency of Water, and some of those stones also cemented by Water, so as there are two or three large Arches of those stones cemented by Water, and where they were not perfectly joined; by the light of Candles, I could see through one Arch to the uppermost, and so they lay promiscuously in the Vault, as big as a little Church: the lesser Stones are in the nature of Icicles, but not bright, and so increased in hardness, length and dimension, according as the Water descends on them, so as at the points are drops of Water still condensing into Stone. The next which I saw, was at Oky-Hole, near Mindip-Hills in Sommersetshire, where the nature of that constant dropping, petrefyed itself into a Crystalline Form, and so seemed (by the light of Candles, of which I had store) as so many Crystal Icicles. After this, I had occasion to Visit Sir Robert Coke, at his House called Durdans, in Surry, now belonging to the Honourable Earl of Berkly, where I found an Artificial Groto, made of Flint Stones, and looking up to the top, I perceived many little pendent Stones like Icicles, hanging on the Arch▪ Flints, and calling Pools and Okey Holes to mind, I broke off some of them, and found them to be congealed Stones, and as the others were of a Freestone and Crystalline temper, these were Flinty drops of Water hanging at the ends, like the other almost congealed stones. These Observations I made of Lapidinous Waters, condensing themselves from the matter through which they pass. The next are of the like Waters penetrating other Substances, so petrefying them: and one of them is near Knasborrough Castle in Yorkshire, where there is a Well which turns pieces of Wood and Leaves into Stone, and other things of a complying nature: But I had a Honeycomb presented to me from thence, which was made perfect Stone by that Well, which I the more wonder at, because things of cerasious tempers, are usually Resistables to Water. The other is that at Deepham in Norfolk, there is a Tree 13 yards about near the root, and at least 80 Foot high, which bears a flower very pleasing to the Ey, and Smell. Sir Tho. Brown Doctor of Physic, eminent for universal knowledge, called it while he lived, a Teasle Tree, and said, That he never saw but one of them, about the further part of Germany, and that many had tried to graft or inoculate part of it, but without success. Now at the bottom of this Tree there is a Spring of the like nature, with that in Yorkshire for Petrefaction; now, I wish, that a Graft might be carried from thence into Yorkshire, and planted near that petrefying Well, by which it might be seen whether the Tree gave any such Virtue to the Spring, or the Spring to the Tree: from which, and other Inquiries I have still been diverted by public Employments. The last which I shall mention, is of Earth which hath a petrifying quality, and this I was only informed of by Mr. Castle, a known person both for Integrity and Estate, in one of whose Manors, near Cambridge there is an Earth, where as he told me, He had taken up several pieces of Wood which were turned into perfect stone, and this is confirmed, in Cambden's Brit. p. 401. of a Ladder turned to stone, which, he saith, was taken out of the Earth at Asply Gowish (I suppose in the same Manor) which was kept in the Cistertian Monastery, near Asply, as a great Rarity, and I have both read and heard of the like Earth in other places: But it is an Error to attribute this to the Earth, whenas it is only a lapidinous Water, which is in the Earth, and infuseth itself into such porous bodies, and so makes it become stone, and that which confirms me herein, is, That near this, there is a Quarry of stone▪ or Earth and water turned to stone, but it is of that nature, as Mr. Castle informed me, That if it be digged by the Rule of the Compass, and marked N. for North, and S. for South, etc. and laid in any structure as it was digged from the Quarry, it proves a very durable stone, but if laid otherwise, it moulters to sand; which is of late years not only observed, in digging and placing other Stones (though more consolidated) but also in removing Plants, derived from Water and Earth. Now I observe in the whole matter, That this Water that thus petrefies itself or other substances, is adapted with a lapidinous Nature, not only to condensate itself but such other substances as may imbibe that quality: so that it is not properly called, cold (as is commonly said) that turns water into Icicles, but a volatile lapidinous water, that flies about, which as cold or coldness doth improve to petrefaction, so Heat or other warmths do hinder from condensation, and this petrefying water is of a salt and frigid nature, as we may see, that if Snow and Salt be put into a silver, tin or pewter Pot, and set on a Board, wherein fresh water is to be poured, and then move the liquor about in the Pot with a Stick, and in less than half an hour the water under the Pot will be congealed to an Ice, and so will glue or freeze the Pot and Board together, of which you may read more in Berkley's Argenis. So I shall refer the further Discourse of Petrefying to the word Waters. PEWTER, T. Speauter, but the Pewterer or maker of it is called Kanngiesser, L. Plumbus Cinereus (Holliock) and Argentanus (Minsh.) but the Italians call it Stagnaro, from Stannum, Tin, for it is properly an Art derived from the Stanniries or Tin Mines; because the best Pewter is where all or the greatest part is Tin, yet they put with it sometimes Silvery Led, but for want of that, a little poor Lead, or the Ashes or Dross of Lead, but when it is much adulterated with Lead, it is quickly discerned by the weightiness of it: but the T. calls a Pewter Dish, Dish Zienen schueshel, which is a Dish made of Tin. l. 2. c. 20. s. 2. PEBBLES, T. Keisel-steine, from Kisel a Flint, L. Calculus à Calcando, because it may be kicked up and down; and as they are little of themselves, so they are of little use about Metals, otherwise then as they are beaten and mixed with Metallick Flints, l. 1. c. 4. s. 2. PICTURES, T. Bilden-Geinaild-a-maklen, L. Pictura and Imago; the Makers of these are called Picture-Drawers, Limners and Painters, and these are of several sorts, but the chief Composition of their Colours are from Metals; especially the Effigies on Coins, which may be numbered amongst Picturas solidas, and this admirable Art of Picturing is borrowed from Nature; so that in this Age the Art is come so near to the Original, that nothing but want of Life, seems to distinguish them. l. 2. c. 48. s. 2. See Sculptures. PINCERS, T. Zangs, from thence we have our word Tangs or Tongues, that is, to hold fast; L. Forceps and Volsella, these are of several sorts and sizes, according to the uses; for common Fires they are called Tongues, for small Works, Plyers and Nippers; but in Metallick Work, Pincers or Tongues: see utensils, and Sculpt. 11. etc. PIPKIN, T. ein Topfein, from whence our word to tope or to drink, and the Potter's Clay, of which these Pots are made, is called Toepff, L. Ollula, a little Pot, and these are used about Metals. See Utensils. PITCH, T. Pech (according to Minshaw) but Erckern, Bech, L. Pix, and so most of other Languages, writ with P. and this Pitch is a Black Gum, which comes from a Tree of that Name, but are of the sort of Pines (whereof we have none in England) but have the Gum plentifully from other parts; the white Pine yieldeth a white Gum, the Pitch or black Pine, a black Gum; we have several uses of this Word; viz. the pitch of an Hill; to pitch a Bar; to pitch Tents; and a pitched Battle: and all are but Allusions to the glutinous nature of this Gum, used in Luting of Metallick Vessels: l. 4. c. 12. s. 2. PLANCHES: see Blanches, both of them signifying white pieces of Silvery Tin-Plates, and sometimes for Wedges of Gold or Silver, or other Metals, and from thence the word Planks are used, for flat or plain pieces of sawn Wood, thicker than Board's: l. 1. c. 1. s. 1. See Blanches. PLATES of Metal, T. Ein Blat ven Metal, also Blech, L. Lamina, l. 4. c. 4. s. 4. or pieces of Metal made flat and smooth, and these are of Iron, Tin, Brass, Copper, and such as are of Silver or Gold (wrought in various shapes) as Cups, Dishes, etc. are still called PLATES. PLASTER, T. Gips and Tinchwerk, L. Gipsum and Emphlastrum, this is a composition of Quicklime, made of common Lime-stones, but the best is of Alabaster, and this is used without any mixture of Sand, and is an excellent Fence against Water; but Pliny tells of a natural Plaster in Cyprus; but we have none such, and therefore do use Alabaster or Talk, both of which he mentions (l. 36. c. 24.) wherewith in those days they made Fret Works and Images; but of later years they are grown to a great Perfection, by a Past of that Plaster, to mould and fit it to any part of Man or Woman, and so take the perfect proportion of that part, be it of Face or Hand, and when that is dried, they put a like past into the Mould, so as by joining of the part so moulded, the whole Body of a Man or other Creature may be represented, in a pure white shape; which may be coloured as they please: These are graceful Figures (and may be seen at many Stone-Cutters, but very subject to break) yet much less than those of Wax, which Art is also come to great Perfection. See Utensils. POLISH. T. Polieren and Polirs. L. Polire. l. 1. c. 34. s. 6. and this is done by rubbing Metal with Puttee (made of calcined Tin, or withother Stones (as the Hemathite, etc. see Bloodstone) or other smooth and hard Metals, as Steel, Iron, etc. to make it render its natural or artificial colour more beautiful; and it may have a just relation to Policy, by which Art, even Governments of Kingdoms, States or Cities are made smooth and pleasing to the Judgements of Men. See Hemathite. POTTERS- work, and Pots, T. Toepffer, Zeug or Werck, L. Figulus, and Operator Figuli, (l. 1. l. 2. l. 4.) that is a maker of Pots; which the Jews well knew when they wrought in that ART under Pharaoh, but whether they were metallic Pots, as Crucibles, Tests, etc. it is not said: and he that is a good Assayer as Erckern was, will see them made himself, and not trust to the Potter. See Day, Pots, Cruises, Jugs and Utensils. PRECIPITAION, T. Nider Schlag, (l. 1. c. 33. s. 3.) L. Precipitatio, or to beat or to make that Nider, or Nethermost, which was uppermost, and I do use the words often to cast down, for so L. precipitatio signifies: Now how Metals are thus cast down or precipitated, is seen in several parts of the four first Books: but the general way of Metals is first to dissolve them in Aqua fort. or Aqua Regis, or Spirit of Nitre, or Vitriol, and then they may be precipitated with Sea water and Alcalious Lixiviums. PROCESS, (l. 2. c. 45) is no other than the proceeding in the Metallick Art, as it is in the proceeding of the Civil Law, till Judgement, etc. PROOF, proving, l. 1. l. 5. Vid. Assaying, of little difference, for Proving is but an Assaying PULVERATION, and Pulverising (l. 1. c. 8. s. 4) signifies the beating of any Oar, Metals or other things to dust, (sometimes called T. Slaut. L. Pulvis) or to ashes. (T. Aschen. L. Cinis,) or to Powder, (T. Pulvir, L. Pulvis:) and these three are made by natural or artificial Fires or Heats (for contunding or beating things to dust, ashes or powder, is but an artificial motion of Heat (for no motion is without heat:) and these dusts, ashes or powders are but the last Works of Nature upon all Bodies, for the next work is a metaphysical reducing the Ashes of all Bodies to a Purity; and as we see here the dust of Metals and other things by Calcination, Incineration or pulveration, what admirable products are from them; so we may thereby be convinced that the Omnipotent Chemist of all Creatures will show his Divine ART, in improving the Dust and Ashes of our Bodies into a greater Purity than what we in this World (or terrestrial Mine) can enjoy: for here we are subject to all impure Mixtures till a super-celestial fire shall purify us, and who knows but that the Spheres of the seven Planets are the Gradations of those seven Fires which David speaks of, with which we must be seven times refined, before we can be admitted into St. Paul's third Heaven or the Heaven of Heavens: and I cannot hear but call to mind the Rhapsody of Dr. Donne (Servant vol. 2.) speaking of the Resurrection of our Dust; saith thus, Where be all the splinters of your Bones which a shot hath shivered & scattered in the Air? (or, of those Bones which the Metallick fires have consumed to ashes?) where be all the Atoms of the Flesh which a Corrosive hath eaten? or a Consumption hath breathed, and exhaled away from our Arms or other Limbs? in what wrinkle, in what furrow, in what bowel of the Earth, lie all the grains of the ashes of a Body burned a thousand years since? in what Corner, in what Ventricle of the Sea, lies all the Jelley of a Body drowned in the general Flood? what Coherence, what sympathy, what dependence maintains any relation, any correspondence between the Arm that was lost in Europe, and that Leg which was lost in Africa or Asia (score of years between)? One Humour of our Bodies produceth Worms, and those Worms suck and exhaust all other humours, and then all dies, and all dries and moulders into dust, and that dust is blown into the River, and that pudled water tumbled into the Sea, and that ebbs and flows with infinite Revolutions, and still, yea still God doth know in what Cabinet every seed pearl lies; in what part of the World every grain and particle of every man's dust doth lie. Now we are to believe, that this scattered Dust over all the Elements shall (in the twinkling of an eye) have a glorious Resurrection, far more glorious than what is producible by Metallick Art, which serves here but as an Illustration of what may be expected hereafter; but to return to our Chemical Dust, Ashes and Powder, the dust of Diamonds is most remarkable, because nothing can master, cut, or polish a Diamond, but by its own dust; and it is a delicate Art, especially their Mills, by which with the dust of it they make so many curious Angles, as that they are all reflectionary glitterings, and sparkling Lights to each other. Then for Ashes, the several Lixiviums or Lees which are made of the several sorts of them, they are of great use in Chemistry, especially those that are made for Salt-petre, without which scarce any Metallick Operation can have good effects. And for Powder, the most eminent is, that which is made for Guns, viz. (of Salt-petre, Charcoal and Brimstone, and some other ingredients to heighten their tempers,) and when it is perfected for the use, it doth as it were revenge its own Contusions, by shattering the pieces of others almost into Atoms, and therefore called T. Buechsen-pulver, L. Pulvis tormentarius, as if it had been invented by the Friar, to torment others before their time. Now seeing I am writing of Gunpowder, I have long since considered of the vast quantity that is spent in Salutes, etc. and it was my chance to meet with an Ingredient of a cheap rate, with which, supposing a pound of powder to be used, I took a 4th. part of it, and three parts of my Ingredient, (which was not of the charge of a 4th. part of Powder,) and with that mixture did make a Report rather greater than less than the whole pound of powder would have done; but this compounded powder is more for noise than execution, which is the chief use of Salutes, or for Triumphs, whereby half 3 parts of 4, in the charge of common Gunpowder may be saved. And seeing I have told you of a powder of Salutation, give me leave to tell you, That I have found out a powder of preservation, such as without Salt shall keep Meat in its Blood and Gravy, untainted or unputrified for more than a year: of which some little experiment I have made, but not sufficient to satisfy myself. There is yet another Powder which I am to speak of, viz. a Powder of Dulcification, which is a peculiar Art, but for that I shall conclude with Herbet, that Divine Poet, as an admonition for the good use it, When Hair smells sweet through Pride or Lust, The Powder hath forgot the Dust. PURIFICATION, purifying, T. Rein, Reinigen, Saeuberung, L. Mundatio, Purgatio, Purificare, Clarificare, Defaecare, to separate Metals from dross, either by washing, by clarifying, filtering, digestion, or distilling; and this is done by water only, or by fire only, and sometimes by both jointly: See Cleansing, Purging, Clarifying. PUTREFACTION, T. Verrottung & Verfalung, L. Putrifactio. A. Rottenness, Corruption, Putrefaction, etc. as Bees from a Lion's Carcase (Judg. 14. 8.) Snakes from the Corruption of Horsehair, Maggots and Flies from corrupt Flesh, Eels from corrupted Dews: and in all Histories of Nilus it is said, That the Mud thereof breeds (besides other larger Creatures) an infinite number of Mice, in which Experiment, we need go no further than the Island of Foulness, in Dengy hundred, in Essex; where, as my Author Mr. Bernard (a very credible Gentleman) affirmed to me, and it is confirmed by Chiswell in his Britania Baconica, that about the end of every year, in his ground there, a prodigious number of Mice, were bred from the Soil of his Grounds, so as he had often seen some of them not fully shaped, and these Mice about August, did devour all the roots of the grass, whereby the grass being withered, the whole ground seemed like a bed of chaff, wherein the Mice delighted themselves; but whilst they were in their sports, about the end of every September there came a sort of little Owls (in great numbers, but much less than those which are bred in England,) and so being filled and fattened they flew away again, and what with the chaff and carrion of the Mice, and dung of the Owls, the next Spring the grounds produced again plenty of Grass, which fattened him yearly many good Oxen: Now this putrefaction is not only seen by producing such Infects, but in Metals, for the Rusts of them are but rots or putrefactions, as when Ceruse is produced of Lead made rotten with Urine or Vinegar; and Verdigrise produced from Copper made rotten by fumes of Wine, and many such like putrefactions. See Pulveration, etc. QUEEN Q QUEEN QUARRY, T. Steinegruben (which word Grub is used in English to search for Stone, etc.) L. Lapidicinia, Latonia, Latumia, Lithomia, and Fodina; and for a Quarry of Millstones, Cotaria. It is not agreed from whence this word is derived, but the French comes nearest to the matter, viz. Querir, from the Latin Quaerere to seek (or pro qua re quaerit; and so an Hawk is said to have her Quarry, when she hath got what she flew at; however it is called also fodina, which is the title to a Mine, and indeed the Mines for Metals, Minerals and Stones, are so near of kin that they may all be called properly Fodinae, See Mines, Minerals, Stones, Waters. QUENCH (or to Quench) T. Ermorden, that is, to put to Death, also Andeschen, L▪ extinguere, which (in Metals) is, when the heat of them are taken away by cold water, so quenching thirst is the allaying of heat in the body by some cooling liquids: and it may also come from the Quince Apple, which hath the quality to allay flames, thirstiness, etc. coming from hot causes. QUICKSILVER, T. Quecksilver, L. Argentum vivum, Argentum liquidum, & fufile, & Hidrargirum▪ or Argenteum aqueum, and this by Chemists is devoted to the Planet Mercury, and so by them also called Mercury, for its Agility; and therefore the Heathens (who worshipped it as a God, yet) put an humane shape on it, with Wings to his Feet. But our Metallick Mercury or Quicksilver is of two Sorts, viz. Adulterated, and Natural; as for the Adulterated, it is easily discovered, by putting some of it into a Spoon, and so over fire let it evaporate, and if it leaves a black, or duskishness, 'tis false, but, if white or yellow, 'tis good. As for the Natural (as I said in the word Metal) we have very little or none in our Mines, so that we do fetch it from our Neighbours out of Hungary, Spain or America, etc. Many have written largely of the Nature of it, and therefore I shall only tell you, It is seldom found in the Earth with any of the beforenamed Metals, but delights itself in the Cinnabar, Vermilion, or Minium Stone (of a Metallick nature, (much used by Painters and Dyers) and there naturally is enclosed; and Mr. nicols (in his description of America) tells us, That in the Vermilion Mines at Palcas, it yields to the King of Spain every year 8 or 9000 Quintals (which is so many 125 l. weight of Quicksilver) and that of later years they refine more Metals by Quicksilver than by Fire, in which operation it hath this peculiar virtue, that it separates and consumes all of them but Gold and Silver, and though it will not lie in one Bed with them in the Earth, yet when they are made Play fellows, or fellow-Labourers (for the use of man,) it doth most naturally sympathise with Gold, and divides and separates it from all other Metals, with which it is at any time intermixed: circling it about without any other intermixture but itself; but it doth not so intimately and perfectly unite itself with Silver, for it doth not pierce it, but consumes the courser Metals from it, if there be any mixture; and though it be the heaviest of all Metals, yet if any Fire offer to meddle with it, it evaporates itself into the lightest substance▪ smoke, to some colder Region, (as its refuge or shelter,) where it again embodies itself, and becomes as perfect as at first, by assuming again its natural colour, white; and 'tis observable, That though it lies in a Bed of pure Vermilion, (which gives a glorious red colour to all things wherever 'tis used;) and though it is used, and in a manner incorporated with Metals and other things of various colours and natures, yet this noble active creature still retains its whiteness, purity and efficacy. For though by the strength of Art (as Paracelsus tells us,) it is sometimes forced to assume a yellow colour, (to show its affection to Gold) and sometimes to a pure red (to show its native kindness to Cinnabar, yet these are rather assumed and assimulated colours (in respect to other ingredients and compositions with it,) than any real change of its own whiteness, and so for its Medicinal uses, it is sometimes called Mercurius dulcis, Mercurius vitae, Mercurius sublimatus, and Mercurius praecipitatus, yet in all these dispositions of it, it still reverts to itself, (especially by the assistance of Fire, to make it Volatile) that it may be the better fixed in its original purity. Now these observations cannot but raise my Thoughts, to make them applicable to the great Mystery of Resurrection; wherein I consider, That as the galenists are, or may be confirmed in the verity of it, by St. Paul's Argument to the Corinthians, 1 Cor. 15. 35, etc. So the Chemists may be also confirmed in the fame by their Chemical practice, for they see that Mercury doth by heat so evaporate, that nothing of it is discernible to the eye; yet that evaporation being stopped in its career, by the top of the Limbeck, it there fixeth again in its form, colour, and indeed in all its qualities, properties, and perfections. Now it is an undoubted Principle, both with the galenists (who follow St. Paul,) and the Chemists (followers of Moses,) That all Terrestrial Body's confist of Salt, Sulphur and Mercury, (which last is the chief) so as our bumane bodies being of a more Mercurial temper than other bodies, may experimentally, and therefore rationally believe, That all the Atoms of our bodies being incited to it, by an internal heat, do like Mercury ascend to some other limiting Sphere or Orb, and there stays, till GOD (the World's great Chemist) thinks fit to dispose of them at the general Resurrection, or particular (as he thinks fit.) Now, where this Sphere or Orb is (which some call Heaven and Paradise, others Limbus Patrum, and Limbus Infantium; and others have another place, called Hell, and Limbus inferiorum, (as it were Antipodial to the other:) I shall venture to give my guess, and possibly with as little satisfaction to the World, as others have done in theirs: and that which guides me to mine, is this consideration, That the name for Quicksilver is Mercury, and that that Name Mercury is also fixed to the Planet of that Name (next above the Moon, whereby I apprehend that the Chaldeans and Egyptians (who are said to be the first Authors of the Astrological Characters of the 7 Planets) did make both the Planet Mercury, and the Metal Mercury to bear one and the same figure, thus [〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉] well knowing more of the sympathies and concurring operations of the Celestial and Terrestrial Mercuries than is yet communicated to us; but the Hebrews (before them) made seven of their Letters to signify the seven Planets and seven Metals, and thereby the figure of Mercury (before it was altered by the Egyptians, was in this form [〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉] and sometimes thus [〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉] And the Jewish Rabbins did hold, that those two Letters did contain great Mysteries, (not yet also unfolded to us,) and therefore I hope it is no offence to conceive, That the Sphere of Mercury is the Paradise or Receptacle of all the Mercurial spirituous Forms; of which our bodies do consist, and when they are evaporated from hence they (by an invisible ascension) are received and remain in that Paradise or repository, so that the Globe of earth being 21600 Germane Miles in circumference (accounting 6400 foot to a Germane mile) and the Diameter 7200 Miles, and the Planet Mercury in the lower part of its Sphere (next the Moon, being 10255773 Germane Miles, and the upper part of that Sphere next to Venus, being 22855511 Germane miles, than the space of the Sphere of Mercury (considered Diametrically) between the lower part of the Sphere of Venus, and the upper part of the Sphere of Luna is 11599738 Germane miles, which great space may easily contain all the Mercurial forms which can possibly arise from the content in the small circumference of the Terrestrial Globe, and allow also sufficient room for the body of that Planet, (being as 'tis said, but 442 miles in Diameter,) so that it hath a space of 62999698 Germane miles above, and as much under its own Globe, in which it may move and actuate. And, as the Planet Mercury is employed in its own Circular Motion, within its Sphere to order and put every Mercurial Matter that ascends to it from the terrestrial Globe into peculiar Repositories; so the Moon may be admitted also in her Sphere to give the first rarification, and purification, to the ascending Spirituous forms to make them the more fit in their Passages to Mercury's Reception of them, and retain the refuse within her own Sphere, which consists of a space also (viz. between the Spear of Mercury, and the outward Circle of the Terrestrial Globe) of 10234173 Germane miles, for the Planets themselves, viz. of Mercury and the Moon (as I have shown of Mercury) do take up but a little Room to roll about in each of their proper spaces or Spheres, and though Kepler, and others of late do not agree in their Computation about the dimensions of these two (and the other Spheres) yet these which I have set down (being generally so computed) may well serve as ●n instance, that so great spaces were made for some such uses as I have expressed: so that by the active Operations of the Bodies of these two Planets (Luna being but as a Servant or vebicular to Mercury) the Mercurius Dulcis and Mercurius Vitae of all humane Bodies may be sublimated into that celestial Paradise, and the Caput mortuum or Mercurius praecipitatus thrown down into a Limbus, either in the space of the Moon (at present) or to the Abyss of the space of the Earth, when it shall (by the last conflagration) be evaporated or annihilated into a kind of Vacuity for that purpose. But having spoken something more of my Conjecture in my Volatiles on Adam and Eve (under the Discourse of Resurrection) I must refer you to it; and shall only add this following Sculpture for Demonstration. Sculpture XLIII. RAMIRES R RAMIRES RATTER, l. 2. c. 2. T. Raeder, I find no Latin word of kin to the sense of what Erckern intends by it, viz. a riddle, screen, or sieve, that is an Instrument to separate the clean from the unclean Oars, before they come to the fire, and so may be called magnum Cribrum, or a great sieve; yet it may come from Rotatilis, that is, moving swiftly like a Wheel, or Rota, showing the proportion of Metals, or of any thing else; Riddle, which in the T. is Ratzall; that is, that the Question being what part of the Oar is clean, and what unclean, this instrument doth unriddle it by separation: and for the word screen, it is doubtless from secernere, to divide, and sieve from segregare or severe, to know truly the quality of the thing by separation; There are other Words to the same effect, as seirce, boulter, not worth the trouble of examining their Original, but by Ratter is to be understood the great seive, and the other the lesser . See Sieves. RAW▪ (l. 2. c. 3. s. 4.) T. Rohe and Rode, also ungesotten and ungekockt. L. Crudus and Atrox, A. Raw, which is some old British word, signifying not concocted, and so applied to Metals before they are brought to the fire to be boiled or roasted. See Roasted. REEDS, l. 5. c. 4. s. 3. T. Rohz. L. Canna and Arundo. See Utensils. RECIPIENT or Receiver, l. 2. c. 20. s. 6. T. Emphahen, L. Recipere, signifying Glasses, Pots, or Vessels which are made to run or hold Metals made liquid, or what is drawn from them by fire, or otherwise. REFINING signifies no more than when Metals are melted and fined; yet to make them better, they do refine them, that is, melt them again and again, till they be clearly cleansed, purified and purged from the unclean metal or matter, cleaving to the more pure. REGISTER, T. L. A. Register, and it signifies with us a Memorial or Record, so the Word is applied to the Records in several Courts of the Common and Civil Law; and these are very ancient (as appears by Sir Thomas Smith, de republica) but in the Metallick Art it is used for Pluggs or Stopples to be put in or taken out of little holes made in Furnaces or Ovens (called wind holes and air-holes,) whereby the fire may be better governed, by giving heats or cools to the Metals, according to the discretion of the Chemist. REGULUS, l. 2. c. 35. etc. L. A. Regulus (which signifies a small King,) but Erckern in all places (where he hath occasion to mention it,) doth make use only of the word Koenig (or King, and not Regulus,) from konnon, signifying knowledge, power and ability to Govern; and the Old Saxons called him konning and cunning, which we translate subtle, (yet not as the vulgar interpret it crafty,) but one that is Learned, and judicially polite in his Government; now though Metals, (by some) are put among inanimates; yet others believe that they have a vegetable Soul, which is improved to an higher Soul by Obedience to its king; for it is agreed by Chemists, That this king doth give such a soul and temper to Metals▪ that thereby they prove beneficial to the World, and gain an esteem to themselves, both for their Origination to Wealth and to medicines, colours, sounds, etc. and all these they obtain by obedience to their king: and this puts me in mind of our Alphabetical Letters (which I think is included in the Talismanical science) whereof God himself saith, That he is the Alpha and Supreme King of them, (as of all mankind, and other creatures:) so that if we consider them in their virtual effects, than such men as are Learned in them, and do pay their obedience by Devout Vows and Promises to him, may be called Vowels; such as act and do his Will at Land, may be called Consonants, such as admire him for the Wonders they see at Sea, may be called Liquids; and those that sit still in their passive Obedience (not grumbling or mutining) may be called Mutes, and these are the Grammatical methods of Letters and men's Obedience; now from the consonants, liquids and mutes, with the conjunction of Vowels (like Magistrates) they are form into Words; and therein also God the Son will be owned as the chief of Words; and when they come to a Talismanical Operation, they may be ascribed to the Holy Ghost: In short, though the Letters seem to have no visible virtue in them, yet this is evident, that by submitting themselves (or men like Godfathers doing it for them) to that order which the great Alpha hath thought fit, mysteriously to direct, they are form into syllabical words, sentences and discourses, whereby God, Angels, and Men seem to have a mutual correspondency; but when there is no obedience to that order, there is nothing but misconstructions, nonsense and irregularities, pernicious to themselves and others; And it is not only thus in Metals and Letters, which (though accounted inanimate, as I said, yet are or will be forced to be obedient and regulated by a King: but in sensitives, the Bees have a King, and by their obedience to him, they enjoy the fruits of their Labours, and take pleasure in returning each to its own Cell, or House, which is guarded with Waxen walls, and filled with Honey sufficient for its own food, and an overplus to supply others, and this proceeds from the happy product of Obedience, whilst the stubborn, refractory, or lazy Drones are thrown out of their Hives, Houses, and Homes, which they might otherwise have enjoyed, if they had not been disobedient; I might instance more, but it is enough for me that I have shown the advantages which Metals have by their Obedience to their King or Regulus. RETORTS, See Utensils. ROASTING of Oars or Metals, l. 1. c. 10. T. Groesten Roesten, A. Rost a Roar usta, or the burning away the Dew or moisture of Metals. RUBRIFIED, l. 2. c. 44. s. 2. T. Fast rotten, L. Rubrificatus, and I suppose the Red Sea is called Mare Rubrum, from some red Mineral under it. RUSSET cloth, T. Vnbercite, L. Pannus fusci coloris, A. Russet cloth, which is Brown or between a white and black colour; it may come from Rusticus, because Countrymen seldom use died or undressed cloth, but only the natural colour of Sheep's Wool, when it is neither black nor white, but as a mixed colour; however this is recommended by Erckern for retaining of the Gritts or Sands of Gold, so as they may not suddenly be washed away with other Rubbish. SA S SA SALT, l. 1. l. 2. l. 3. l. 4. and l. 5. T. Saltz, L. Sal, which may come from salus, Health, according to the Verse, Non sapit esca probe, quae datur absque sale: for indeed it gives not only to Humane bodies, but to Metals a vivacity and sanitude; Minshaw deduceth it from salire, because it sparkles and leaps in the fire: Now of Salts there are several sorts, (as may be read in Pliny, lib. 31. cap. 7. to the 11. and in other places and Authors) but most Chemists do agree, that there are seven several sorts, which are influenced from the seven Planets, to attend the seven Metals; and these Erckern accordingly makes use of, viz. Sal alkali (or sandiver, or Salt of Glass,) Sal Armoniaci, Sal Nitri, Sal Vitrioli, Sal Petre, (and common Salt,) Sal Tartar (or Argol, of which I have spoken,) and also Shall Gem, (which is the seventh Metallick Salt,) and is produced from a Rocky Crystalline stone, and of these he speaks▪ and of no more, it being a subject of great extent, for I conceive there may be as many sorts of Salts, extracted, as there are Terrestrial Creatures, for all things do consist of Salt, Sulphur and Mercury (as I have said) but that which I aimed at, was to give an account of our natural salts, from Springs in Cheshire and Worcestershire, and from the Lands on the South sides of Devonshire and Cornwall, which are full of Salts; for with those Sands, so mixed, they manure their Lands to a great profit, and of which most other Coasts of England are wanting, and have only the Sea-water to make their Common-Salt, but I cannot enlarge my observations upon any more words, because the Printer calls for what I did write of a Metallick Dictionary, after I first proposed the Printing of Erckern, but intending within the compass of a year to publish Georgius Agricola, de re Metallica (being fully translated,) in English, and also to add a Dictionary to it, I shall reserve my remaining Essays (if what I have done hitherto, be approved) till then, and so I proceed in the Dictionary. SANDS, l. 1. 6, 29, etc. T. and A. Sand, and so the Belgic, but the Italian, the Spanish and Latin call it Arena, and the French, Sables, (which in Heraldry signifies black,) also it is the name of the Fur of a little Beast, called sabellus, and mustulus, sarmaticus, of a sandy colour. However sand is of various uses in metallics (as sand-Ovens, etc.) and consist of great varieties in England, which may admit of curious speculations See Earth, Gold, Mortar, Ovens, Petrification, Stones, Water. SANDIVER, l. 2. c. 5. s. 1. etc. is the same with sal Alkali, which Pliny, (l. 31. c. 7.) calls the Tragasean salt, and is the same with sal Vitri, or salt of Glass. SCALES, are of a Balance for weighing Metals, whereof you will find two sorts in Erckern, viz. Proof scales, l. 1. c. 34. s. 12. and inset scales, l. 1. c. 35. s. 2. T. Tung, schuell, L. Lanx, also for scales which come from Metals, T. schuepen, being the same word which they use for the scales of Fish, signifying the scurf or flaky matter taken off from Metals, sometimes by filing, but chiefly by fires, l. 2. c. 26. s. 2. and c. 36. s. 2. See Fleaky and Flaky, Shivery, etc. SKIM or scum, l. 2. c. 47. s. 2. and l. 5. T. schaum, L. spuma, A. froth; but in Metals it is, when they first rise into a drossy matter, yet not so thick as dross till it is more condensed; but in other things it hath only the name of Froth, fit to be skimmed or skummed off: See Dross. Scorias, Yeast. SCORIAS, l. 2. c. 35. s. 2, etc. T. Trufer, L. scoria, A. drossy. See Dross, Skim. SEARCE, to searce, T. salter, L. cribrare, A. to searce, serce or sarce (Skinner,) which is to express the operation of a seeve. See Seeve. SEEVE, T. sib and sieb, L. cribrum, A. seive, seeve, or sive (Skinner.) See Ratter. SEPARATION, T. Absouderen (from souderin, to solder or to join, and so absouderens, to disjoin,) L. separatio, A. separation, and in the infinitive of separo, it is separare, or segregare, from whence the T. call a separating Oven, a sagar Offen, l. 3. c. 15. and so sagar work, which is a distinguishing or dividing mixed Metals from each other, or other matters, adherent to the Metals. See Quicksilver. SHIVERY, or to shiver, l. 1. c. 34. s. 3. T. schivern or schiffern, L. disrumpere, when Metal is loose, and easy to break into pieces; and sometimes light Oar is called shiffer Oar. SILVER, T. silber, from the Greek silbo, (Minshaw,) A silver; now as to the enlarging the Etymology of this word, used by the T. and Old Saxons, and so continued here; I must refer it to another time: only I observe that the French and Italian do comply to the Latin word Argentum; but the Spaniard calls it Plata, probably from the chief City and Province of that name, in America; or from the great River Plata, which runs 2000 miles through the American Mines, before it unloads its Wealth to the Spanish Navy (termed his Plate-Fleet) which supplies himself and his Neighbours with its Treasures of Silver, Gold, etc. I might also add many things about the fining and refining of their Silver, before it comes unto that Fleet, but I refer that to Erckern's four first Books, and N. N's Survey of America: for I know not the Author, but I find it ingeniously writ. See Metals, Mines, etc. SLACK, Slackstones, and Slicks, T. Schlack and Schlick, (often mentioned by Erckern, l. 1, 2, 3 and 4) L. Laxus, and all signifying the loose parts of Oars, or the Oars made into Metals, yet still do remain slack and shivery in some part, and sometimes is taken for Dross, and that Dross calcined goes for Calx, or slacked Metal: See Calx, Calcine, Lime, Dross, Flakes. SMELTING, l. 4. c. 14. l. 4. c. 1. etc. See Assaying. SOAP, T. Seiffe. L. Sapo and Smegma; Pliny, l. 28. c. 12. gives an account of its Virtues, and how it is made, but I question whether that be the Venetian soap, mentioned by Erkern, l. 2. c. 47. s. 2, etc. or the Tin-sope, l. 4. c. 13. or the Gold soap, l. 5. c. 10. s. 8. of which I shall discourse at another time. SPAN. T. Spann. L. Spithma. See Measures. SPAR. l. 3. c. 27. s. 6. T. Sparstein, a white stony Matter, that usually embraceth the Oars of Lead and Silver, called, L. Fluor; the word is also applied to long pieces of Timber which serve for the Roofs of Houses, called sparrs. SPARKLE, vulgarly spartling Oars, T. Fuencklen-erkz, L. scintillare. SPELTER, T. is the name of a course Oar containing little silver, l. 1. c. 2. s. 11, and 15. of which there is a better sort of Oar called Bismuth or Wismet, viz. when it runs bright and well in the fire. See Wismet. SPIZE, or T. Speizy-Erks, or gross thick Oars, reckoned among course or unclean Oars, and in Erckern (l. 1. c. 2. sect. 11.) fully described cap. 16. for the melting of which, particular Ovens are made, See Ovens. SPONGE, l. 2. c. 4. s. 1. T. Schwam, L. Spongia, but how it is produced from, and used for metals, deserves a longer Discourse. STEEL, l. 4. c. 20. and 27. T. Stahel, & Stahel stain, L. Chalybs, now this and all other sorts of Iron, are by Pliny (l. 34. c. 14.) comprehended under the word stricturae, and he farther saith, That the goodness of Steel ariseth from the goodness of the Iron-Mine, from whence it comes, with the assistance of Waters, and various Quenching of it in Waters or Oils, to which he adds▪ That 'tis wonderful that Man's Blood should have such Virtue in it as to be revenged on the Iron-blade that shed it, for being once embrued therein, it is given ever after to rust, and canker. See Iron. STONE. T. Steine. L. Lapis and Petra, which hath hanc Petram in the Accusative Case, for making such work in the World, by its affinity to hunc Petrum: But not meddling with those Disputes, I might very well have enlarged myself upon this Subject of Stones, especially of those which English Quarries do produce, but I must also defer it. SUBLIMATION, l. 1. c. 28. L. Sublimatio, which is a separation of thin and fine Bodies from their gross and impure parts by means of a gradual Heat, whereby there is a white powder called Sublimate made of Calcanthum, Quicksilver, Vitriol and Sal Armoniac, which is used as a strong Corrosive upon Metals, etc. See Calcination & Quicksilver, SUDS, See Lees, Lixivium. SULLAIN, Stubborn, that is, Oars or Metals that are not easily melted by fire, as the soft flowing Metals or oars are. SULPHUR, T. Schweffel, L. Sulphur, and lapis arden's; of which there are various sorts, both natural and artificial, and many delightful Observations may be made on them: See Brimstone & Bitumen. SUN, T. Sonnen, L. Sol, from which Celestial Heat and also from the Terrestrial Fires, many excellent things are produced in Metals; viz. in making Aurum Potabile, as also a most sovereign Water from the rays of the Sun, by reflection on Gold, which I may hereafter communicate. TA T TI TALC, l. 1. c. 4. s. 2. T. A. Talc, L. Talcum, (by Pliny, l. 36. c. 22. called Lapis specularis, of which he gives a large Account. It is a foreign stone (for I do not hear of it in English Mines) of a glassy transparent Nature; resisting both heat and cold; the red is mentioned by Erckern, but the white more common. TALLOW, l. 1. c. 17. s. 3. T. Vnschlet, L. Sevum or sebum, A. Suet or Tallow, much used about Metals. TARTAR, See Argol, Dregs, Feces. TEST, T. Schirbin, L. Proludium (Holiock) but I had rather take it to be an abreviation of Testis, as a Witness of the goodness of Metals, by trying and proving them in little vessels, prepared by Assayers for that purpose: See Crucibles and Utensils. THORNELS, T. Deerleins, fully explained by Erckern what they are, L. 3. c. 22. s. 3. In short, it is a term of Art, for that which remains of the roasted Oar, unmelted: See Keinstocks. TILE, l. 2. c. 41. s. 1. See Brick, Earth, etc. TIMODE, l. 2. c. 2. s. 8. T. a name for Cloth made of Flax, or Hemp or Wool; and so in A. called Linsy-woolsy; which is used sometimes for strainers of Metals. TIN, l. 3. c. 12. s. 6. T. Zin. L. Stannum, from whence we have the word stanaries; by which Court the Tin-Mines in Cornwall are governed: now this English Tin is esteemed to be the best in all other parts of the World; the Spaniards and Italians calls it stagno de cornoij valla: the French de Corno Vall en Angliterre. See Zwitter. TIN- plates, are properly Iron plates covered with Leaves of Tin, and because of the outward Colour, called Tin-Plates. TIN- soap, T. Zinseife. See Sope. TONGUES, See Utensils. TOUCH- needles See Needles. TOUCH- stones See Stones. TOWER, Trayes, Trevet. See Utensels. TREMBLE, l. 2. c. 48. T. Beben, and Zuttem, L. Tremere: see Boiling, Seething, Quivering, etc. All expressing a different motion in Metals, whilst Melting. TROY- weight, See Measures and Weights. TUB, l. 1. c. 11. s. 5. T. Fas, L. Vas, A. Vessel or Tub: and are of various Forms used about Metals. See Utensils. TUNNEL, l. 2. c. 16. s. 5. etc. T. Ein Tunnen, L. Tinella. A. do account it the same with Tunnel or Funnel, and yet the T. L. and A. have different words, viz. T. tas, Trehter, and L. Vas and Infundibulum▪ A. Tunnel and Funnel. See Utensils. TURF, l. 4. c. 9 s 1. T. Hin Grasz-buch, L. Caespes, A. Sods, Turf, Peat, which will admit further Discourses, viz. which of the three is best for melting Metals, when other Fuel is scarce: See Utensils. TUTTEE. l. 2. c. 39 s. 2. T. Tutian, L. Tutium, Pomphilix and spodium (which Pliny doth distinguish) but in A. they all go under the Name of Tuttee; which is nothing else but the the volatile part of Brass, when, in burning it sticks to the upper part of the Furnace, and the common sort of it is only Calamine stone calcined, of great use for Medicines. See Calaminaris. VA V VI VAPOUR, T. Duust, and Dampff, A. Vapour, which ariseth sometimes from heat, and sometimes from cold causes. See Evaporate; Quicksilver and Sublime. VARNISH, l. 2. c. 29. s. 4. T. Furnaess, L. Vernix; a compounded liquid substance made with Oils and Gums, to make Metals or Metallick Utensils look slick, and resemble Glass, in which the Indians do excel. VEIN, l. 2. c. 12. s. 1. T. Gengen, L. Vena, A. Vein, which Minshaw (I suppose for sound-sake) writes vain, so making our veins but the efflux of vanities, but those who thought the Terrestrial World to be a great Animal, and that the ebbing and flowing of Seas are but the systole and diastole of its breath, might well believe that Metals and Minerals were the Veins of its body; but of the nature of Metallick Veins, G. Agricola gives the most exact account. VENETIAN Glass, l. 2. c. 16. s. 5. T. Venidischem-glassz. L. Vitrum Venetianum, from the City Venice, where Erckern speaks that the best Glasses for Metallick use are made, and probably so in his time; but now that Art in Venice is thought to be equalled in England: See Glass. VERDIGREASE, l. 2. c. 27. s. 1. T. Gruen-span, A. Spanish green, L. Aerugo, or the Rust of Copper, by hanging plates of it over the fumes of Wine, from whence a Crocus will arise, which we call Verdigrease; See Brass, Copper, and in Colours, Blue, Green. VIAL or Glass Bottle, l. 2. c. 30. s. 1. T. Roelblein▪ Fiale, and Angster, according to the proportions, L. Phiala and Ampulla, A. Vial, to distinguish it from the Musical Instrument called Viol. VINEGAR, l. 1. c. 33. s. 1. T. Essig▪ L. Acetum, A. Vinegar, now the various ways of making and using it, in Metallick experiments, may deserve a large Discourse, as being one of the great secrets of Nature. VITRIOL, l. 2. c. 33, etc. T. Schuster-schwaeitz, L. Vitriolum and Calcanthum (which latter makes a black colour.) Now of Vitriol there are many natural sorts; but the three chief are 1▪ of a Saphire colour, (which comes from Hungary and Cyprus:) 2. of an Emeral or green colour (from Swethland and Goslar,) often mentioned by Erckern; 3. a white (from Denmark, etc.) there is also an Artificial Vitriol, made from Copper or Iron, or both, which is called Roman Vitriol, or Lapis Coelestis, from its transcendent virtues, of which (besides what Sir Kenelm Digby writes; I could add many from my own experiments, but must refer them also to my intended Essays on Agricola; See Brass, Copper, and in Colours, Black. ULTRAMARINE, which the Italians call Azuro ultramarino, and is a Gem found in Mines, sometimes called Lapis Luzuli (often mentioned by Erckern, l. 1. c. 2. s. 11, etc.) and is of a pure blue, and of which (either considered as a Gem, Oar or Stone) the Italians do make a precious Blue for Painters, sold beyond the price of Gold. VOLATILE, l. 1. c. 10. s. 9 T. Flutch-tigon, L. Volatilis (which signifies a Bird, Holiock) according to Paracelsus it is used for any light matter, either ascending from Metals, or other light substances. See Quicksilver. UPBUCKING, l. 4. c. 14. signifies some extraordinary washings of Metals, and so the word upboyling, is more than ordinary boiling. URINE, l. 2. c. 8. s. 2, etc. T, Dertlarne and Bruntz, L. Vrina, from Vro, because it is of a scalding and burning nature, of great use about Metals, it is distilled and extracted, by a natural heat and internal Furnace in all Creatures, by which natural extraction, we learn the method of all salous productions. See Salt, etc. UTENSILS, T. Brauchers, L. Vtensillia, A. Instruments, useful tools, or household necessaries; but I must refer those which are mentioned by Erckern, to the Contents of the Sculptures, placed immediately before his first Book,) where you will find most of them recited, and referred to their pages, as also in the second part to their Capitals; only there is an omission of the T: and L. words for them, which will be rendered in Agricola. WA W WA WARDENS, l. 1. c. 1. T. Gwardeins, L. Guardianus, A. Guardian and Warden; I intended an addition herein; to show that the Original of this word, as to an Official duty, was first given to the Warden of Mines, and that all other Offices which bear the Title of Wardens, were derivatives from thence, viz. of the Mines, Mint, Stanneries, Church, Ports, Fleet, Colleges and Companies, which I shall hereafter enlarge and place according to their Antiquities. WARM, T. Warm and waerm, L. calidus, A. warm, that is to bring Metals into a moderate warmth or heat. WARTZ, l. 1. c. 35. T. Wartz, A. the Pin of the Beam; and these are little pieces of Iron (like Excrescencies) filled out of the Centre of the Balance on each side of it, which are fitted for the two little holes of the Fork, whereby the Balance is made capable to move, and from hence our English word Warts; for excrescencies on the hands, or other parts, is used. WASHING, l. 3. c. 2, etc. T. washein, L. Lavare, A. Lavations, and Washings; Now you may have a full account of the manner of washing Metals in N. N. before recited. WASTE, T. Vermuesten, L. Vastare, A. to waste, consume or lessen the bulk of Metals. WATER, T. Wasser, L. Aqua, ex qua omnia (as Scaliger and other more ancient Philosophers define it.) See Erckern in many parts; and this subject of Waters might afford many pleasing Discourses of ours in England, and of such also as are of great natural uses in Metallick Operations besides Artificial, yielding curious varieties, especially from some Waters in those Countries which do not consist of Mines, where the waters only by heat of the Sun, without their fire, do yield a perfect sediment of Gold Sands. WAVER, T. Schwenneken, L. vagilare, A. to wag to and fro: See Trembling. WAX, T. Wachz, L. Cera, A. Wax. See Cement and Glutination. WETHER, l. 1. c. 34. s. 8. T. Wetter, L. Aether, this hath great operation in Metals, for as the Wether, so Metals are hard or more ductile, etc. WEIGHT, l. 1. c. 36, etc. on which subject I did intend to enlarge; See Measures, and Agricola de mensuris. WELL, T. Brun, L. Puteus, A. Wells, for Springs of Water, and called Shafts for Metallick Wells; See Mines. WHEEL for waters, l. 4. c. 8. T. Wasser-Radst, L. Haustrum, used for the raising of Waters out of Springs or Wells, with which the Miners wash and purge the Oars from the earth or rubbish, and then the Miners may say well, the Oars are well washed with Well-water, but of the description of the several sorts of Wheels you will see more in Agricola WHETSTONE, l. 1. c 34. s. 9 T. Wetzsteine, L. Cos, which is used to Metallick Instruments, and to rub Metals. WHITE, T. Wize and blank, L. Albus. See in Colours, White▪ WINE, T. weine, L. Vinum, of various sorts and uses in Erckern. See Pliny. WINE- stone, See Argol, Tartar. WOOD, T. Wald and Haltz. L. Lignum, A. Wood, of several sorts for Metals, See Charcoal Coals. WOOL, T. Wolt, L. Lana, used about Metals. WRINKLE, T. Runtzel, L. Ruga, that is, Metal not polite▪ but shrivelled, distorted, and full of contracted parts, unusual to its natural smoothness, as in hands, faces, etc. WYRE, T. Kufforn dratt, or Copper drawn, L. Aurum netum, i. e. Gold Wire, or Gold drawn or spun out of Gold; and Filum Auricalcum, or a kind of Thread drawn from Copper. A. Wyre, but I find no Monosyllable for it in any other Language. XA X XE XANTHUS, a precious stone, which Pliny l. 37. calls also Henui, of great virtue to give success in men's Employments, and consequently to Metallick Works, Erckern doth not mention this, but speaks of Hazelnuts, from which Plant, the Virgula Divina (or Divine Rod) is made, by which Mines of Gold and Silver are discovered; and one of these I have out of Germany, but I cannot yet promise any effects by it: See Georgius Agricola, and my Notes on him. XEROCOLLYRIUM, which is an unguent made of Copper, or Copper and Lapis Calaminaris mixed, to apply to such Eyes as are prejudiced by Metallick Operations, and this is helped also by Tuttee, washed in water, then made into powder, and so into an Ointment, which is commonly called Vnguentum Tutium or Oil of Tuttee. XIPHION or Phasgenion, Pliny l. 25. the root of which Plant stamped and mixed with Wine and Frankincense of equal Proportions, takes off all excrescent Scales from Bones, and may have the like effect upon the scales of Metals. YA Y YE YARD, See Measures. YELLOW, T. Galb and Geilb. See in Colours, Yellow. YEAST, T. Yeast, (but Erckern calls it Hafin, l. 2. c. 1. s. 3.) A. Yeast, also Barm, God's▪ good, Rising, Beergood, Foam, Froth: the Latins calls it Spuma: and the froth, flores Cervisiae, or the Flower of Ale or Beer, and Cervisiae they derive from Ceres, the Goddess of Corn, who first taught the sowing of Wheat and Barley, and of Drinks from thence: so that in Norfolk where it is called Gods-good it may well be alluded to the spirit of that Goddess' Good which she infused into it, as a firmentation: but more properly to be attributed to God himself, for communicating so great a Secret for the Benefit of Mankind: for without Fermentation scarce any useful thing is perfectly attained unto, and that Motion doth operate not only in the terrestrial Orb, both by Sea and Land, but on the Elements and celestial Orbs. See Litarge. ZU Z ZU ZUITTER, l. 4. c. 11, 12, and 13. explained to be Tin well beaten, and 'tis not only thus with Metals which must be beaten, (that the Advantages may redound to themselves in a more refined temper, and make them useful to the World) but we see that Corn must be thrashed, and ground for food: Grapes and other fruits contused to make Liquors more acceptable, and man himself must undergo Oppressions to make him happy, which I here mention as my Conclusion, in Imitation of Erckern his Zeal for God's Glory, wherewith he concludes the last page of his five Books; for according to the Maxim of the Rosy Crucians (and best Chemists) Excellentissima dona absque Pietate vana: which may be rendered thus, By true Piety the bravest Sciences are accomplished. FINIS.